diff options
| author | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-01-22 18:06:40 -0800 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | nfenwick <nfenwick@pglaf.org> | 2025-01-22 18:06:40 -0800 |
| commit | abdc8bebbfbc5d20bf6a9bb9229eddcd0f8e23f8 (patch) | |
| tree | 46bac7056dacc85623d6f25c3a5a3f9a044a2108 | |
| parent | f283a97e877ea03cb29df931b0f5c80296b69704 (diff) | |
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 4 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/66171-0.txt | 8164 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/66171-0.zip | bin | 114904 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/66171-h.zip | bin | 1715523 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/66171-h/66171-h.htm | 10681 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/66171-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 248855 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/66171-h/images/i_ad01.jpg | bin | 141888 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/66171-h/images/i_ad02.jpg | bin | 149544 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/66171-h/images/i_ad03.jpg | bin | 154304 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/66171-h/images/i_ad04.jpg | bin | 142423 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/66171-h/images/i_fp010.jpg | bin | 187882 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/66171-h/images/i_fp160.jpg | bin | 182297 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/66171-h/images/i_fp180.jpg | bin | 186442 -> 0 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/66171-h/images/i_frontis.jpg | bin | 196389 -> 0 bytes |
16 files changed, 17 insertions, 18845 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..d7b82bc --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,4 @@ +*.txt text eol=lf +*.htm text eol=lf +*.html text eol=lf +*.md text eol=lf diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..19eb204 --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #66171 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/66171) diff --git a/old/66171-0.txt b/old/66171-0.txt deleted file mode 100644 index 93edfe5..0000000 --- a/old/66171-0.txt +++ /dev/null @@ -1,8164 +0,0 @@ -The Project Gutenberg eBook of Oliver Bright's Search, by Edward -Stratemeyer - -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and -most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms -of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online at -www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the United States, you -will have to check the laws of the country where you are located before -using this eBook. - -Title: Oliver Bright's Search - or, The Mystery of a Mine - -Author: Edward Stratemeyer - -Release Date: August 29, 2021 [eBook #66171] - -Language: English - -Character set encoding: UTF-8 - -Produced by: Donald Cummings and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team - at https://www.pgdp.net - -*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK OLIVER BRIGHT'S SEARCH *** - - - - - EDWARD STRATEMEYER’S BOOKS - - -Old Glory Series - -_Six Volumes. Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25._ - - UNDER DEWEY AT MANILA. - A YOUNG VOLUNTEER IN CUBA. - FIGHTING IN CUBAN WATERS. - UNDER OTIS IN THE PHILIPPINES. - THE CAMPAIGN OF THE JUNGLE. - UNDER MacARTHUR IN LUZON. - - -Stratemeyer Popular Series - -_Ten Volumes. Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $0.75._ - - THE LAST CRUISE OF THE SPITFIRE. - REUBEN STONE’S DISCOVERY. - TRUE TO HIMSELF. - RICHARD DARE’S VENTURE. - OLIVER BRIGHT’S SEARCH. - TO ALASKA FOR GOLD. - THE YOUNG AUCTIONEER. - BOUND TO BE AN ELECTRICIAN. - SHORTHAND TOM, THE REPORTER. - FIGHTING FOR HIS OWN. - - -Soldiers of Fortune Series - -_Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25._ - - ON TO PEKIN. - AT THE FALL OF PORT ARTHUR. - UNDER THE MIKADO’S FLAG. - WITH TOGO FOR JAPAN. - - -American Boys’ Biographical Series - -_Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25._ - - AMERICAN BOYS’ LIFE OF WILLIAM McKINLEY. - AMERICAN BOYS’ LIFE OF THEODORE ROOSEVELT. - - -Colonial Series - -_Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25._ - - WITH WASHINGTON IN THE WEST. - MARCHING ON NIAGARA. - AT THE FALL OF MONTREAL. - THE FORT IN THE WILDERNESS. - ON THE TRAIL OF PONTIAC. - TRAIL AND TRADING POST. - - -Pan-American Series - -_Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25._ - - LOST ON THE ORINOCO. - THE YOUNG VOLCANO EXPLORERS. - YOUNG EXPLORERS OF THE ISTHMUS. - YOUNG EXPLORERS OF THE AMAZON. - - -Dave Porter Series - -_Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25._ - - DAVE PORTER AT OAK HALL. - DAVE PORTER IN THE SOUTH SEAS. - - - TWO YOUNG LUMBERMEN. _Price $1.25._ - BETWEEN BOER AND BRITON. _Price $1.25._ - JOE, THE SURVEYOR. _Price $1.00._ - LARRY, THE WANDERER. _Price $1.00._ - - - - -[Illustration: BEFORE THE OTHER COULD INTERFERE, OLIVER WAS ON THE RAIL -AND OVER THE SIDE.] - - - - - OLIVER BRIGHT’S SEARCH - OR - _The Mystery of a Mine_ - - - BY - EDWARD STRATEMEYER - - AUTHOR OF “UNDER DEWEY AT MANILA,” “A YOUNG VOLUNTEER IN CUBA,” - “FIGHTING IN CUBAN WATERS,” “RICHARD DARE’S VENTURE,” - “TO ALASKA FOR GOLD,” ETC., ETC. - - - _ILLUSTRATED_ - - - BOSTON: - LOTHROP, LEE & SHEPARD CO. - - - - - COPYRIGHT, 1895, - BY THE MERRIAM COMPANY. - - - COPYRIGHT, 1899, BY LEE AND SHEPARD. - - _All Rights Reserved._ - - - OLIVER BRIGHT’S SEARCH. - - - Norwood Press - J. S. Cushing & Co.――Berwick & Smith - Norwood Mass. U.S.A. - - - - - PREFACE TO THE REVISED EDITION. - - -“OLIVER BRIGHT’S SEARCH,” the second volume of the “Bound to Succeed” -Series, relates the adventures of a manly American youth who goes West -to locate a mine in which his invalid father owns a large interest. -Oliver is just out of school, and has but little experience in -travelling, yet he does not hesitate to take the trip to California, by -way of the Isthmus of Panama, and thence into the interior on horseback. - -Oliver is, in every respect, an up-to-date boy; one who will stand -no nonsense when dealing with those who would defraud his father out -of his lawful property; yet the boy’s moral principles are of a high -order, and he is not unmerciful when the object of his long search has -been gained. - -It was hoped, when the book was first issued, that the story would -stand well beside “Richard Dare’s Venture,” which had preceded it. It -has been even more successful than the other volume named, and once -more the author must thank the readers and critics who have taken such -an interest in what he has written. - -In conclusion, the author would say a word in regard to the scenes -in the mining districts of California. These were drawn very largely -from the narratives of a close and dear relative who spent much time -out there, going as an Argonaut of ’49, and to whom the vicinity of -Sutter’s Mill and the Mokelumne River became as an open book, not only -then but later on. To write down these descriptions was, therefore, not -only a work of interest, but of love. - - EDWARD STRATEMEYER. - - NEWARK, N.J., - April 1, 1899. - - - - - CONTENTS. - - - CHAPTER PAGE - I. AN UNEXPECTED DISCLOSURE 5 - II. THE STORY OF THE AURORA MINE 12 - III. MR. BRIGHT’S RESOLVE 19 - IV. AN ACCIDENT 25 - V. LEAVING HOME 32 - VI. AT THE STEAMSHIP OFFICE 39 - VII. A CONVERSATION OF IMPORTANCE 45 - VIII. A NIGHT IN NEW YORK 52 - IX. ON THE STEAMER 58 - X. THE STORM OFF CAPE HATTERAS 65 - XI. MR. WHYLAND 73 - XII. ARRIVAL AT ASPINWALL 79 - XIII. MR. WHYLAND’S STORY 86 - XIV. IN THE WILDS OF THE ISTHMUS 94 - XV. AN ADVENTURE ON THE ISTHMUS 101 - XVI. A CHANGE OF PLAN 108 - XVII. A STARTLING CRY 114 - XVIII. OLIVER’S HEROISM 120 - XIX. GUS HAS AN ADVENTURE 127 - XX. A FLYING GLANCE 134 - XXI. AN UNSUCCESSFUL PURSUIT 141 - XXII. FELIX COTTLE 148 - XXIII. OFF FOR THE MINES 155 - XXIV. IN THE MOUNTAINS 162 - XXV. A STORM IN THE MOUNTAINS 169 - XXVI. THE AURORA MINE AT LAST 175 - XXVII. AN INTERESTING CONVERSATION 182 - XXVIII. COLONEL MENDIX IS ASTONISHED 188 - XXIX. IN THE AURORA MINE 195 - XXX. A PERILOUS SITUATION 202 - XXXI. SEEKING DELIVERANCE 208 - XXXII. A VALUABLE FIND 213 - XXXIII. BROUGHT TO BOOK 221 - XXXIV. CONCLUSION 238 - - - - - LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS. - - - FACING - PAGE - - Before the other could interfere, Oliver was on - the rail and over the side _Frontispiece_ - - Yes, Oliver, alas! I am ruined 10 - - The next instant his body disappeared over the edge! 160 - - There is the Cortez mine, and just below it is the - Aurora. 180 - - - - - OLIVER BRIGHT’S SEARCH. - - - - - CHAPTER I. - - AN UNEXPECTED DISCLOSURE. - - -“If you please, Master Oliver, your father wishes to see you at once,” -said Donald, the man of all work, as he entered the summer-house where -Oliver Bright sat poring over a volume of travels. - -“What does he want of me?” asked the youth, as he reluctantly closed -the book. - -“He didn’t say; but he wants you to come at once.” - -“Very well, Donald; where is he?” - -“In the library.” - -Oliver rose to his feet somewhat slowly. He was in no humor just then -to face his respected sire. A few words will explain why. - -Oliver was afraid he was in for a lecture, and perhaps worse. He -was not a boy of bad disposition, but for once the combination of -circumstances had led him into serious difficulty. - -Oliver was a student at the Rockvale Academy, also catcher for the -local baseball nine. Two days before, on the very afternoon that the -nine was to play an important game with the club from Elmport, Oliver -had been kept in by Dr. Tangus for a supposed fault of which he was -not guilty. This had angered Oliver, and as his particular chum, Gus -Gregory, was kept in at the same time, the two planned to “get square,” -as they termed it. - -Their plan of action was simple and harmless enough, but it bore -grievous results. Gus proposed to take the doctor’s pet calf from her -pasture and lead her into the schoolroom, and Oliver agreed that if -this was done he would make the old cow follow. - -At dead of night the two boys started to carry out their plan. But -both the calf and the cow made such a noise that the doctor’s whole -household was aroused, and the two boys had to run for it. - -In making their escape Gus Gregory had stumbled over a hothouse bed, -smashing a dozen panes of glass or more, thus provoking a shot from the -doctor’s hired man, who imagined burglars were around. - -When Oliver reached home he found he had quite a severe cut upon his -left hand, obtained in his effort to help Gus out of the hotbed frame. - -In the morning the wound, despite the fact that he had bathed it -in arnica, appeared as bad as ever. But Oliver did not dare to ask -permission to remain at home, and so set out for the academy in -anything but a cheerful mood. - -Gus Gregory met him at the gate with a long-drawn face; and small -wonder. - -Dr. Tangus had found them out. Gus had dropped his note-book in the -hotbed and the gardener had picked it up. In a terrible rage, the -doctor soon after called at the Gregory home, and forced a full -confession from Gus. Mr. Gregory had promised to pay his full share of -the damage done, and to bring his son to account, and the doctor left -saying he would call on Oliver’s father later. - -When Oliver entered the academy he was at once called aside by the -doctor. But little was said; Dr. Tangus merely stating what he had -discovered, and declaring his intention to settle the matter outside of -the school. - -This had happened Friday morning. It was now Saturday, and Oliver -firmly believed that the hour of retribution had come. He took all the -time possible to walk up the gravel path and through the broad hall, -and hesitated several seconds before turning the handle of the library -door. - -When he entered the room he found his father seated at the desk, his -forehead resting on his hand. Mr. Bright was a man well past the middle -age of life, and somewhat broken down in health. - -He was tall and slender, with brown hair and eyes. His manner as a -general rule was gentle, and as Oliver gazed at his parent, his heart -smote him for the trouble he had brought about. - -“You sent for me, father,” he said, as he stopped by the door. - -Mr. Bright started up from the revery into which he had fallen. - -“Yes, Oliver,” he replied. “Come in and sit down. I want to have a talk -with you.” - -The boy did as requested, taking a chair that stood in the bay-window -at the farther end of the room. He could not help but look at his -father closely. Surely he did not appear to be much provoked over what -had occurred. - -“Come closer, Oliver; here, take this chair by my side,” went on Mr. -Bright. “I do not wish any one to overhear what I have to say.” - -The boy took the seat indicated. Then for the first time he noticed how -careworn his father appeared. There were numerous wrinkles upon Mr. -Bright’s brow and his eyes were sunken and troubled. - -“You are nearly seventeen years old, I believe,” began Mr. Bright after -a moment of silence. - -“I’ll be seventeen next May,” replied the boy, relieved at being asked -such an ordinary question. - -“And your term at the academy closes next month, I believe?” - -“Yes, sir; three weeks from yesterday.” - -“And when you have finished your course there have you thought of what -was to be done next?” - -“Why I thought I was to go to college,” said Oliver, somewhat -astonished at the question. “Of course you didn’t say I was to go; but -all the others were going, and――” - -“It was my full intention to have you go, Oliver. But circumstances -will make a change necessary. I hate to disappoint you, but I am afraid -it cannot be helped.” And Mr. Bright turned away his face. - -Oliver’s heart grew cold in an instant. Give up going to college! Give -it up after having anticipated it so long, after having talked it over -so many times with the other boys! Surely his father intended to punish -him too severely altogether. - -“Oh, don’t say that, father!” he cried. “I will try to do better in the -future! I did not mean to do so wrong! I――I did not stop to think.” - -Mr. Bright straightened up and looked at his son curiously. - -“What are you talking about, Oliver?” he asked. “I am not finding fault -with the way you have conducted yourself at the academy. In fact, I -must congratulate you on the general excellence of the reports Dr. -Tangus sends in. By the last I see that you stood next to the highest -in the class, and that counts for much where there are so many bright -boys. I have no doubt that the doctor is proud of you.” - -Oliver was completely mystified by this speech. It was evident that -his father knew nothing concerning what had taken place. The boy gave -an inward groan as he thought of what a change there would be when -exposure came. - -“Then Dr. Tangus has not been here?” he asked. - -“No. What put that in your head?” - -“I thought he had come to report me.” - -“No; I have not seen the doctor in a month, though I expect him to call -soon.” Oliver started. “I have had no reasons to find fault with you -for the way in which you conduct yourself. The trouble in this case -comes from an entirely different quarter.” - -Mr. Bright paused. Oliver noted that there was a slight quiver in his -father’s voice. Surely something quite out of the ordinary was wrong. - -“You are the only one who is left to me, Oliver,” Mr. Bright continued. -“It was always my intention to give you the best education that money -can buy, for I know the value of such, and then give you a first-class -start in whatever professional pursuit you might choose to enter. But -now, my poor boy”―― - -Mr. Bright broke off short. - -“What is the matter, father?” cried Oliver. “Why cannot you do as you -intended? I thought sure I would go to college and then, after -perhaps a year or so of traveling, I would settle down and become a -lawyer――that is, if you thought I was smart enough.” - -“That programme would have suited me exactly, Oliver. Your Uncle -William was a lawyer, and you take after him a good deal. But now it -cannot be thought of.” - -“Why?” - -“Ah, it is a bitter story, my boy, and I do not see how I can tell it -to you. I was very blind and foolish, trusting those that were not -worthy of my confidence, and now both of us must suffer for it.” - -“I don’t understand.” - -“And perhaps you never will, quite. I was never of a speculative -nature; but this was apparently so easy, and so sure to turn out -profitably, that I entered into it without due consideration.” - -“It is money-matters, then, father, that makes you say that I must -change my plans; must give up thinking of going to college, and all -that?” faltered Oliver. - -“Yes, Oliver, alas! yes.” Mr. Bright heaved a deep sigh. “I am ruined; -I am not worth a dollar in the world!” he added. - -[Illustration: “YES, OLIVER, ALAS! I AM RUINED.”] - - - - - CHAPTER II. - - THE STORY OF THE AURORA MINE. - - -Oliver Bright was greatly astonished by his father’s disclosure. There -had been nothing said or done heretofore to indicate that Mr. Arthur -Bright was on the brink of financial disaster. The two had lived in -exceedingly comfortable, if not elegant, style, and the boy was granted -every reasonable desire. - -“You are ruined?” he repeated, with eyes wide open at the announcement. - -“Yes, Oliver, completely ruined. This very roof that shelters us is no -longer my own.” - -“And is there no hope?” - -Mr. Bright shook his head. - -“I have hoped, until now; all hope is useless――that is”――and the man -paused. - -“What, father? What is the chance?” asked the boy eagerly. - -“It is hardly worth considering, Oliver, it is so small. We had better -face the truth, bitter as it is.” - -Oliver drew a long breath. To endure poverty is no pleasant thing, -especially when one has once been rich. The boy was so completely -taken aback that for a moment he did not say a word. - -“I should have spoken of this before and prepared you for its coming,” -went on Mr. Bright; “but day after day I trusted that matters would -take a better turn and all would be right. I am to blame there.” - -“Never mind; you did what you thought was right,” responded Oliver as -bravely as he could. “But I wish I had known; I would not have laid -so many plans for the future. I might have got ready to go to work -instead.” - -“I have not yet decided what I shall do when we leave this home. I have -been out of active business so long that I suppose it will come hard to -resume it again. Perhaps I will go back to the book business, that is, -if I can find a suitable opening.” - -Oliver looked at his father in dismay. For a man in Mr. Bright’s state -of health to go back to active life after a retirement of eight years -would be hard indeed. - -“I wish I knew something of the book business; I’d sail right in and -work for both of us,” he declared with considerable vim. “But I don’t -know the first thing about business of any kind,” he added with a sigh. - -“You are bright by nature as well as by name, Oliver,” said his father -with a faint smile. “I think you will stand a fair chance of making -your way.” - -“I hope so. Any way, I intend to try. But, father, won’t you tell me -something of your affairs?” - -“Yes, Oliver; I intend to tell you as much as you can understand. It -may prove a useful lesson to you.” Mr. Bright ran his hand over his -forehead as if to collect his thoughts. “About a year after I sold out -my interest in the Franklin Book Company and settled here, I became -acquainted with Colonel Mendix. Do you remember him?” - -“Oh, yes. He was a dark, Spanish gentleman, with a heavy black beard.” - -“You are right, saving that he was far from being a gentleman, though -I did not know that at the time. This Mendix was introduced to me by -James Barr, an intimate friend of mine, who was a surveyor and who had -become interested in several mining schemes.” - -“I remember him also.” - -“This Mendix visited me several times, and finally unfolded to me a -simple plan for making a fortune on the outlay of a comparatively small -sum of money. As you say, he was of Spanish descent, his people coming -from some place in South America. He had also a number of relatives -among the early settlers in California, who, you know, settled there -before the gold fever broke out.” - -“Yes, I have heard of those Spanish settlements.” - -“Colonel Mendix said that among these relatives were two old men who -had in their possession a paper containing the full directions for -reaching and locating a very valuable mine somewhere up among the -mountains. These two men were too old to work the mine themselves, and -they were willing to sell out their secret and rights for ten thousand -dollars, to be paid when the mine was located and found to be as they -represented.” - -“What was the mine supposed to be worth?” asked Oliver with interest. - -“Colonel Mendix placed its value at not less than seventy-five thousand -dollars, and said it might be worth several hundred thousand.” - -“It’s a wonder he didn’t buy the mine himself, without saying anything -about it.” - -“He said he had not the cash, and he did not wish to apply to any of -his Spanish friends for fear they would make inquiries and buy the -mine for themselves. Mendix was a very plausible talker, and before -I was aware of what I was doing, I had agreed to advance the money, -stipulating, however, that James Barr should be the one to locate the -mine and determine its value. I had known Barr so long that I felt sure -I could trust him. - -“Well, the contract was drawn up and signed. By it Mendix was to have -a quarter interest in the Aurora Mine, as we had christened it, and -James Barr was to have an eighth. The remainder was to be mine. I was -to advance the purchasing money as well as the cash to open up the -place, either to work it ourselves or place it on the market. Do you -follow, Oliver?” - -“Easily enough; it’s as plain as day.” - -“As soon as this was done, Mendix and Barr set out for California. Two -months later I received word that they had obtained the directions and -were about setting out for the mine, which was located somewhere back -of a place called Sutter’s Mill. - -“Four months passed. Then came a long letter from Mendix and a note -from Barr. The mine had been found even better than represented, and -they wished to close the bargain at once, and asked me to forward a -draft for five thousand dollars additional, which they intended to -use in purchasing the machinery of an abandoned mine some ten miles -distant, and have it transported to the Aurora. The outlook seemed so -favorable that I complied without hesitation. - -“Another letter came a month later from Mendix, saying the mine had -been opened, but that another five thousand dollars would be needed to -put in additional machinery for draining the water and crushing the -rock. This I also paid, although in order to do it I was compelled to -take a mortgage on this place for three thousand.” - -“Didn’t you have other money?” - -“Only in stocks, and those I did not care to sell as they were then low -and I thought they would rise. I found that Dr. Tangus had money to -loan, and so I went to him.” - -“Dr. Tangus!” cried Oliver, thinking of what was to come. - -“Yes. He let me have the money and took a mortgage on this place. The -money fell due last week, and yesterday I received a note from the -doctor asking for payment.” - -Oliver gave a groan. Was it possible his own doings had hurried Dr. -Tangus’s actions? - -“And you cannot pay him?” - -“No. But I am ahead of my story. Time went on and I heard no more from -the mine. I wrote to Mendix and to Barr, but received no reply. Then -came a draft for four thousand dollars to pay for some more machinery -Mendix had ordered. I paid the claim, but immediately sent word not -to contract any more debts, as I would not pay them, and demanding an -accounting. - -“None came, and I sent an agent to San Francisco to find out how -matters stood. At the end of two months I received word from this man, -Bentwell, and also from Mendix, that the mine had become flooded with -water, that it could not be drained, and that in making surveys of the -place James Barr had been drowned. - -“This news was so disheartening I knew not what to do. I was out -twenty-four thousand dollars, and had not a thing to show for it. I was -on the point of starting for California myself when a friend of Mendix -appeared on the scene. - -“This man had been out to the mine, and knew all about it. He said the -Aurora was utterly worthless, that Mendix had at last found it so, and -that the man had left in disgust for South America. Private creditors -had levied upon such machinery as was above ground, and that I might as -well give up all hope of ever receiving a dollar out of the thing. - -“This news all but prostrated me; for in the meanwhile stocks here in -the East were declining rapidly. I kept up as long as I could, but now -it is no use to do so longer. As I said before, every dollar is gone.” - -Mr. Bright turned away to hide his emotion. The story had been a hard -one to tell. Oliver knew not what to say. - -At this juncture there was a knock at the door, and Mrs. Hanson, the -housekeeper, appeared. - -“Dr. Tangus is here to see you,” she said to Mr. Bright. - - - - - CHAPTER III. - - MR. BRIGHT’S RESOLVE. - - -The announcement that Dr. Tangus had come to see his father filled -Oliver Bright with dismay. Considering the story he would have to tell, -the doctor’s arrival at any time would have been unpleasant for the -boy, but under existing circumstances it was a thing to be dreaded. -What would his father think when the whole miserable story came to -light? - -And yet, if it must be told, he wished that his father should first -hear it from his own lips. He knew the doctor could turn the case so -that it might look very black indeed. - -Therefore, before Mr. Bright had time to tell the housekeeper to show -the schoolmaster in, the boy leaned over and whispered,―― - -“I would like to speak a few words with you before the doctor comes in.” - -His father nodded, thinking that his son wished to continue the -conversation that had just been interrupted. - -“Take the doctor in the parlor, Mrs. Hanson,” he said. “Say I will see -him in a moment.” - -Mrs. Hanson at once disappeared. When the two were left alone Mr. -Bright looked at Oliver inquiringly. - -“There is nothing more to tell,” he said; “Dr. Tangus’s visit caps the -climax. He, no doubt, has called for his money; and unless I get an -extension of time in which to pay up, the matter will be put into the -sheriff’s hands, and the place will be sold.” - -“It is too bad,” returned the boy. “But there is something else I wish -to speak about.” He colored up painfully. “I did not think so much of -it at the time――that is, I did not think it was so wicked a deed to -do. When I came in I thought Dr. Tangus had been here and told you all -about it.” - -“About what?” - -In a few words, and with a very troubled look upon his face, Oliver -told his tale. Mr. Bright listened in silence. - -“I know now just how bad and senseless a thing it was to do,” said the -boy, at the conclusion. - -“I trust you do,” replied his father. “Pranks of that kind to my mind -show only a lack of wit. You ought to be above such things, Oliver.” -Mr. Bright heaved a sigh. “I am afraid this will tend to make the -doctor stiff in his demands. I thought the tone of yesterday’s letter -was rather severe.” - -“I am afraid so too.” Oliver bit his lip in vexation. “I wish he had -punished me in school instead. It isn’t fair to make you suffer for -what I have done!” he cried. - -“When we do wrong we are not always sure who will suffer for it. But -we will say no more about it. What I have revealed will be punishment -enough for you. Now I must go; it will not do to keep the doctor -waiting any longer.” - -Mr. Bright rose and left the library. Oliver remained where he sat, his -chin resting in the palm of his hand. - -What a change had taken place since he had entered that room only a -short hour before! He had thought himself a well-to-do boy, with every -prospect of a brilliant future; now he knew he was as poor as the -humblest lad in Rockvale. Instead of going to college and taking things -easy for a year or so thereafter, he must roll up his sleeves and go to -work. What had brought this great change about? - -Carefully he reviewed all the facts which his father had related. Not -an incident was forgotten. He wished he had the letters from California -to read over; they might contain some particulars his father had -forgotten to mention. - -“I would like to see that Aurora mine, and satisfy myself that -everything is as this Colonel Mendix claimed,” he thought. “He was a -thorough sharper in my opinion; and if I was father I would not take -his word for the matter.” - -His thoughts were interrupted by the entrance of Mr. Bright, accompanied -by Dr. Tangus, a stout and highly important looking individual. - -Oliver rose and greeted the visitor, offering him a chair at the same -time, his face flushing the while. Dr. Tangus looked at him sharply. - -“Well, young man, your father tells me you have told him of your -mischief-making,” began the schoolmaster. - -“Yes, doctor; and I am quite sorry for what I have done.” - -“Humph! boys generally are after they are found out,” sniffed the -learned gentleman. “However, now that you have told your father, I -intend to leave the case in his hands. You are generally a pretty good -boy, and I am sorry you have broken your record.” - -Oliver did not reply, and the doctor turned to Mr. Bright. - -“Then you will grant me an extension of time?” asked the latter -anxiously. - -“I will give you two months, Mr. Bright,” was the somewhat slow -response; “but more than that I cannot do. If at the end of that time -you cannot pay I will foreclose.” - -“Very well, we will so understand it,” said Oliver’s father; “and I -thank you for the accommodation,” he added politely. “Here are the -papers.” - -The document in the matter was duly drawn up and signed. Then Dr. -Tangus took his leave. - -“I trust you are able to meet the claim when due,” said he on departing. - -“I shall try my best,” responded Mr. Bright. - -When the door was closed he sank down in his chair. - -“We have two months’ grace, Oliver. If I cannot pay at the end of that -time, out we go.” - -“Two months is quite a while,” replied the boy as bravely as he could. -“A good deal may happen in that time. Any way, it will give us both a -chance to look around for situations. But tell me, isn’t this place -worth more than the mortgage he holds?” - -“Yes; but it wouldn’t bring it at a forced sale. I am quite sure we -will be left without anything but our personal effects. Of course they -amount to considerable; but oh, how I hate to part with any of them!” - -“I hope it won’t become necessary, father. But will you let me see -those letters that Colonel Mendix wrote you? I have an idea he didn’t -tell you the truth about that mine.” - -Mr. Bright started. - -“The same thought has occurred to me,” he said. “I often wished I had -gone to the place and seen for myself.” - -“Why didn’t you?” - -“I was ill, and too much interested in bonds here. The bonds that I -carried were of the par value of one hundred thousand dollars, four -times what the mine cost. I gave my attention to the larger deal. -Besides, there was another reason; I did not know exactly where the -mine was located nor how to reach it.” - -“You did not?” - -“No. Mendix had all the papers; and he kept them, or destroyed them, I -do not know which.” - -“Then for all you know the mine may be valuable and in running order -to-day,” went on Oliver excitedly. - -“I doubt it, Oliver; and yet”―― - -“If Mendix was a rascal, his saying that the mine was flooded might -only be a ruse to get you to abandon your claim to it.” - -“That is so. To tell the truth, more than once, since I lost my other -property, I have thought of going out and making an examination.” - -“Then why don’t you go? It will do no harm, and may save you from ruin.” - -Mr. Bright started up. - -“I will go, Oliver,” he cried. - - - - - CHAPTER IV. - - AN ACCIDENT. - - -His sudden resolve seemed to liven up Mr. Bright considerably. He -rubbed his hands and strode up and down the room. - -“Yes; I will go,” he repeated. “As you say, it can do no harm, and may -save us from ruin.” - -“May I go too?” asked Oliver eagerly. - -Mr. Bright thought in silence for a moment. - -“I would like to have you with me,” he said; “but I think you had -better remain behind. One of us ought to stay here, and, besides, the -expense of the journey will be considerable.” - -“I am sorry,” said the boy; “I would like to go first-rate.” - -“Come, we will go over what letters and papers I have together. Perhaps -you will see something in them that I have overlooked,” said Mr. Bright. - -Opening one of the locked drawers of the desk, Mr. Bright brought forth -the various communications he had received from Colonel Mendix and -James Barr. Both father and son read them over carefully. - -“It is my impression that this Mendix did not wish you to visit -the Aurora mine,” said Oliver. “If you will notice, throughout the -letters he speaks of the hard road to travel to get there, and the -unhealthiness of the climate, and all that. He knew you were not -strong, and he hoped that would deter you from venturing.” - -“Perhaps you are right, Oliver. I did not think of that before.” - -“Are you sure this Mendix has gone to South America?” - -“I was; but your questions fill me with doubt. I begin to think that -perhaps I have been blind all this time. I think――my! my! What is the -matter with Jerry?” - -Oliver’s gaze followed that of his father out of the window. There, on -the smooth lawn, a spirited horse was acting in an exceedingly strange -manner, throwing his head viciously from side to side. - -“Donald has been whipping him again,” said Oliver. “He ought to know -better.” - -Mr. Bright did not reply. Springing from his chair, he hurried from the -library, his son following. - -In his day Mr. Bright had been quite a horseman, and Oliver, too, liked -to ride. Both hated to see an animal abused, and both were excited over -the present sight. - -“Whoa! Jerry! whoa!” cried Mr. Bright, running up to the horse. - -He caught the animal by the halter, which had been broken off rather -short, and attempted to soothe him. But Jerry’s blood was up, and -before Mr. Bright was aware he was thrown in the air and came down -heavily against the grape arbor. - -“Oh!” He gave a deep groan of pain. “Catch him, Oliver; but be careful -about it.” - -The boy was already advancing. He caught the halter, and then vaulted -upon Jerry’s back. - -For a moment there was a fierce struggle, but Oliver kept his seat, and -feeling himself mastered, the horse subsided. Then the boy jumped to -the ground and turned him over to the man of all work. - -“Take him back to the stable, Donald,” he said; “and mind you, he is to -be whipped no more.” - -“I only struck him once”――began the man. - -“That was once too often. Jerry is too nervous to be handled in that -manner.” - -Oliver saw the horse led away, and then turned his attention to his -father. To his surprise Mr. Bright had fainted. - -Running to the well, the boy procured some cold water, which he -sprinkled in his father’s face. It had the effect of reviving him -almost immediately. - -“Are you hurt?” asked Oliver in deep anxiety. - -“I――I am afraid I am. My chest hurts, and I cannot use my right leg.” - -“I’ll call Dr. Kitchell,” replied Oliver. - -Fortunately the physician lived directly across the road. He was at -home, and in less than three minutes the boy had him over. - -“Humph! two ribs broken, and also the right leg!” said Dr. Kitchell. -“Rather a serious accident. Come, we will carry him into the house.” - -Donald was called, and the three succeeded in carrying the unfortunate -man into the house and placing him on the lounge in the sitting-room. - -Then the man of all work was dispatched to the drug-store, and the -doctor went to work to set the broken limb and fix up the fractured -ribs. Oliver assisted all he could, the tears standing in his eyes -meanwhile. - -“Never mind,” said Dr. Kitchell, noticing his grief. “It will be all -right. All your father wants is quietness for a couple of months. There -is small danger.” - -Oliver felt relieved at this statement. And yet he could not help but -think of the trip to California. His father would have to abandon that -now, and he would hardly be well before they would be obliged to leave -the house and seek a home elsewhere. - -Towards evening Mr. Bright felt somewhat easier, and he and Oliver had -quite a talk. He demurred strongly at being compelled to rest quietly -for eight weeks or longer, and spoke of the plans that must now be -cast aside. - -“Why not let me go?” said Oliver suddenly. “I am sure I can get along -all right.” - -“No, Oliver; it would be asking too much of you.” - -“No, it would not. Can you get along without me?” - -“I suppose I might; Mrs. Hanson is a capital nurse. But it is too big -an undertaking for a boy.” - -“You forget, father, that I am nearly seventeen years old.” - -“No, I do not; nor do I forget that you are smart for your age. But -still I would hate to send you on a journey that might prove full of -danger. If their accounts be true, the road is a perilous one, and the -mining districts are full of rough characters.” - -“After I left San Francisco I could go well armed. I don’t think it -would be so dangerous. A good class of settlers are pouring into the -place, and they would surely not molest me. You must remember that -things are not as they were at the close of the war.” - -“What you say is true, Oliver; but I would hate to send you into -the midst of danger, however slight. If you were only going to San -Francisco it would be different. But to go away up in the mountains, -and utterly alone”―― - -Mr. Bright did not finish, a violent twitch of pain stopping him short. -Seeing that his father could not stand conversing, Oliver withdrew. - -He ascended to his own room, and, taking a chair by the window, sat -down to think. For fully half an hour he did not move. Then he went -below and made his way to the kitchen, where Mrs. Hanson was preparing -some broth for the sick man. - -“Mrs. Hanson,” he said, calling her aside, “father was planning to go -on a journey, and now that he can’t go, I’ve been thinking of going for -him without letting him know――that is, for several days. Do you think -you could get along without me while I am gone?” - -“Why, bless you, Oliver, yes! I’ve been a nurse these ten years before -I was a housekeeper. It will be no trouble whatever.” - -“And you will not let him know that I have gone――that is, for a few -days? It might only worry him.” - -“If you wish it.” - -“Then it’s settled.” - -“When will you go?” - -“Monday morning early.” - -“Very well; I won’t say a word. It’s business, I suppose?” - -“Yes; father’s business; something that must be attended to.” - -All that evening Oliver was busy with his preparations. There was a -big valise to pack, and numerous other things to do. At ten o’clock, -when the others had retired, he stole down to the library, and seating -himself at the table, took complete copies of all the letters and -papers relating to the Aurora mine and Colonel Mendix’s peculiar method -of transacting business. - -“Now I am ready to start,” he said to himself, as he arose. “When I -arrive in New York I will either sell or pawn my gold watch and my -diamond pin, and then――ho, for the Aurora mine!” - - - - - CHAPTER V. - - LEAVING HOME. - - -On the following morning Oliver found his father somewhat recovered -from the rude shock he had received. Of course the man was unable to -move from the couch upon which he rested, but he was able to sit up and -converse without, apparently, more than an occasional dull pain. - -Mr. Bright was, however, much worried over the disarrangement of his -plans, sighing out continually his disappointment at not being able to -leave on a tour of discovery. To all this Oliver made no reply, saving -to urge his parent not to worry, as all would yet turn out right. - -During the day, the boy managed, by skillful questioning, to gain all -the additional information that was to be had. In the afternoon he -attended Sunday-school, the last time, he thought, for many weeks and -perhaps months to come. - -In the class with Oliver was Gus Gregory, his chum, a short and -exceedingly stout youth, with a freckled but not unpleasant face. At -the close of the service he and Oliver left together. - -“Well, how did you make out over our fun at the doctor’s?” was Gus’s -first question. - -Oliver told him. - -“My, but you got off easier than I did!” exclaimed the stout youth. -“Didn’t pop give it to me though! I haven’t been able to sit down with -any kind of comfort since.” - -Oliver did not reply. He was silent for a moment, and then laid his -hand on his chum’s shoulder. - -“Say, Gus,” he said, “will you keep a secret if I tell it to you?” - -“Why, of course, Olly,” was the prompt reply. “Did I ever let out -anything I shouldn’t?” - -“Well, then, I’m going away.” - -“Going away? Where?” - -“To California.” - -“Phew! you don’t mean it!” - -“Yes, I do. I’m going to start to-morrow morning first thing. I thought -I’d tell you and say good-by.” - -“Does your father know?” - -“No. Only Mrs. Hanson, and now you.” - -“What are you going for? just to run away? I thought you said your -father didn’t touch you for the trouble we got into.” - -“Neither did he. I’m going on business. Come, let us sit under that -tree, and I’ll tell you all about it.” - -And seated under a stately elm that grew by the roadside, Oliver -related all there was in his mind. - -Gus Gregory was deeply interested. - -“I hope you’ll succeed,” he said. “My, how I wish I was going along! -Nothing would suit me better.” - -“And nothing would suit me better than to have you,” replied Oliver; -“but that can’t be thought of.” - -“Which way are you going?” - -“By the way of Panama.” - -“It will cost quite a bit.” - -“Something less than a hundred dollars.” - -“That is quite a sum, but not so much as I thought. Have you got your -ticket yet?” - -“No; I intend to get that in New York to-morrow. The steamer sails for -Aspinwall on Wednesday.” - -The two boys talked the matter over for some time. Gus was intensely -interested. - -“Well, I hope you’ll meet with success,” he said on parting. “I think -it is a big undertaking for a boy, but I wish it was I instead of you.” - -The remainder of the Sunday passed quickly. In the evening Oliver spent -another pleasant hour with his father. - -When the time came for parting, the boy could hardly keep back the -tears. Who knew how long it would be before he should see his father -again? He was almost tempted to tell all, but the fear of being told to -give up the project kept back the words. - -Oliver slept but little that night, and he was up at early dawn. Making -a hasty toilet, he took up his valise and stole down-stairs. Mrs. -Hanson had anticipated him, and a warm breakfast stood ready to which -he did but scant justice. - -Half an hour later he was off, the housekeeper wishing him Godspeed. -The railroad station was half a mile distant; but it took the boy -scarcely any time to cover that distance, so fearful was he of being -discovered and told to return. - -Rockvale was a town of considerable size, situated some forty miles -from the metropolis. There were over a dozen trains daily to Jersey -City, the first at half-past six in the morning. This was the one -Oliver had calculated on taking, and buying a ticket, he waited a few -moments, and then, as the train came rolling in, got aboard. - -There was a sudden jerk, and the train started and rolled out away from -the station. Oliver Bright was off on his strange quest at last. - -He felt queer as he settled back in his seat which he occupied alone. -What would the outcome of his trip be? Would he succeed or fail? - -The run to Jersey City was an uneventful one. Oliver had taken it a -great number of times, so it was no novelty, and he occupied the time -in studying a guide-book he had purchased at the news-stand. When they -arrived at the ferry he followed the stream of people on to the boat, -and off again at the other side. - -“New York!” he thought to himself as he passed up Liberty Street. -“Now to sell or pawn the watch and the pin, and then I will go to the -steamship ticket-office and engage a berth.” - -Before leaving home, the boy had cut from the metropolitan paper Mr. -Bright was in the habit of taking the names and addresses of several -pawnbrokers, and toward one of these Oliver now bent his steps. - -He much preferred pawning the articles to selling them, as both the -watch and the diamond scarf-pin were gifts from his father, and he -wanted the chance to recover them. - -Entering the establishment, he drew out the gold watch, and passing it -over to the clerk, asked how much would be allowed upon it. - -“Your own?” was the first question. - -“Yes, sir; a birthday gift.” - -The clerk sent the watch to the back part of the store for examination. - -“Fifty dollars,” he said upon his return. - -“Fifty dollars!” exclaimed Oliver, in some dismay. “I thought I could -get more! The watch cost over a hundred.” - -“That is all we can allow.” - -“I cannot let it go for that;” and Oliver slipped the timepiece in his -pocket. - -The clerk paid another visit to the office. - -“We will make that sixty dollars,” he said, coming back. “You will not -get more anywhere.” - -“I shall try,” replied Oliver. - -Another establishment was close at hand. But here the proprietor would -not go above fifty dollars; so Oliver went back to the first place. - -“I guess I’ll take that sixty dollars,” he said. - -“Told you you couldn’t get any more,” returned the clerk coolly, as he -made out the ticket and handed over the money. - -“And now how much will you allow me for this pin?” asked Oliver, as he -drew it from his wallet. “It is a pure diamond.” - -“Is this also a gift?” - -“Yes, sir.” - -The clerk took it back to the private office. When he returned he told -Oliver to go back, as the proprietor would like to see him. - -Oliver did so, and found himself face to face with a thin, sharp nosed -individual. - -“Where did you get that pin?” was the man’s question. - -“My father gave it to me on Christmas, two years ago.” - -“Rather a fine Christmas gift.” - -“It was, sir.” - -“What is your name and address, please?” And the man prepared to write -it down. - -Oliver told him. - -“And you are sure your father gave you this pin for Christmas?” - -“Certainly I am,” replied the boy, flushing. “I hope you don’t think -I――” - -“I have nothing to say, excepting that a gold watch and a diamond pin -were stolen from a boarding-house in Twenty-fourth Street last evening.” - -“And you think――” began Oliver, his heart rising in his throat. - -“Never mind what I think, young man. Of course you may be innocent. -But we must always be on our guard. I have sent my clerk around to -the police precinct close by. You will please remain here until he -returns.” - - - - - CHAPTER VI. - - AT THE STEAMSHIP OFFICE. - - -Oliver was astonished and dismayed by the pawnbroker’s statement. What -if the police should think he was the thief? It would cause him no end -of trouble, and might prove the means of compelling him to return home. - -“I don’t see what reasons you have for supposing the things are not -mine,” he began. - -“I do not say they are not,” was the reply. “In fact, I must say you -look thoroughly honest. But, as I said before, we must be careful. We -cannot afford to take in things that have been stolen and then give -them up to the police.” - -Oliver sank down in a chair. He had but a short ten minutes to wait, -but the time seemed an eternity. - -He was glad to see the clerk return alone. - -“It’s all right,” were his words. “The goods taken were recovered an -hour ago.” - -How relieved Oliver felt! He sprang to his feet. - -“Please give me the pin,” he said. - -The man handed it over. - -“I am sorry I suspected you,” he said. “But business is business.” - -“I suppose it is.” - -“I thought you wanted to pawn that pin?” - -“So I do; but I shall take it elsewhere now.” - -And without waiting to be questioned further, Oliver hurried from the -place. - -About a block down the street he came to a similar establishment――indeed, -the neighborhood was full of them. The proprietor took the pin and -examined it closely. - -“What did you give for this pin?” he asked cautiously. - -“I did not buy it. My father gave it to me.” - -“How much do you want on it?” - -Oliver hesitated. He knew he had better place the figure high. - -“Seventy-five dollars.” - -“The pin did not cost that.” - -“It cost more than that.” - -“I will let you have forty dollars on it.” - -“I must have at least sixty.” - -Finally a compromise was effected, and Oliver received his ticket and -fifty dollars. - -“That makes one hundred and ten dollars for the two,” he said to -himself when on the street once more; “and that, added to what I have -saved up from my spending money, gives me a capital of one hundred -and eighty-five dollars. By hook or by crook that amount must see me -through.” - -From the pawnbroker’s Oliver made his way to lower Broadway, where the -steamship office was located. It was a busy place, and the boy was -compelled to wait for his turn. - -While he stood in line he meditated on what he would have to pay for a -ticket. If there was any such thing as going second or third class he -intended to do so. In his present straitened circumstances every dollar -counted. - -Suddenly a young man behind him touched him on the elbow and said,―― - -“Say, do you know if they take back tickets here?” - -“What do you mean?” asked Oliver. - -“I mean tickets to California. I have a ticket for Wednesday’s steamer -and I can’t go because my uncle has just died, and I must take charge -of part of his business.” - -“I don’t know,” said Oliver. “I am just here to buy a ticket for -myself,” he continued. - -“Is that so? Then let me sell you mine. I paid eighty dollars for it, -and I’ll let you have it for sixty; that is, if they won’t take it -back.” - -“Is that the cheapest passage?” - -“It is on the regular lines.” - -“Then I’ll take it, if they won’t take it back.” - -At the desk it was found that the ticket could be exchanged for a later -boat, but could not be canceled. As the young man did not know whether, -under the present condition of things, he would go to California or -not, he decided to sell the ticket to Oliver; and the transfer was made -on the spot. - -Oliver was told that the boat would leave at ten o’clock Wednesday -morning from the pier on the North River. He made a note of the time -and the number of the pier, and then quitted the place. - -As he did so, he ran plump into a man who was hurrying up the steps. - -“I beg your pardon!” he exclaimed. “I did not mean”―― - -And then he stopped short. And small wonder. The man he had encountered -was Colonel Mendix! - -In all his life Oliver was never more astonished. He knew not what to -say or do. - -Colonel Mendix, having seen him but once, and that many years previous, -did not recognize the boy. He stepped back, then passed Oliver, and -entered the steamship office. - -“Has the Rosabel sailed yet?” Oliver heard him ask. - -“Yes, sir; half an hour ago.” - -“Ha, too bad! And the next steamer?” - -“Sails Wednesday.” - -“Was there a passenger on the Rosabel named Whyland――Thomas Whyland?” -continued the colonel anxiously. - -The clerk looked over the register. - -“No, sir.” - -“You are sure?” - -“His name is not here. If he was aboard he must have sailed on some one -else’s ticket.” - -“Ah, I see. Thank you.” - -Colonel Mendix turned and left the building. Almost mechanically Oliver -followed him. - -He knew not what to make of the unexpected meeting. Had Mendix just -returned from South America or had he never been to that country? - -“I must find out,” thought the boy. “Perhaps if I discover his business -here I may be able to find out something about the Aurora mine also. I -wish I had caught the name of the man he asked for.” - -He had the day before him, and also Tuesday, and he resolved to make -good use of the time. Who knew but what he might be able to gain a deal -of information before starting for the West? - -Colonel Mendix walked rapidly up Broadway until he reached Trinity -Church. Then he crossed over and hurried down Wall Street. Oliver was -close behind and saw him enter an office not far away. - -Walking past the place, he read the sign,―― - - EZRA DODGE & CO., - California Mining Stocks, - -over the door. He would have liked to follow Colonel Mendix inside, -but could find no pretext for so doing until he noticed a slip on the -window which read,―― - - FREE CIRCULARS INSIDE. - -Entering the place, he saw that the colonel had taken a seat within -the office railing and was in earnest conversation with an elderly -gentleman, presumably Mr. Dodge. - -Oliver stepped up to a clerk in charge. - -“Will you kindly give me a circular of stocks?” he asked. - -“Certainly,” was the reply. “Think of investing?” - -“I wish to see what you have.” - -“Offer you some fine inducements,” said the clerk, handing over a -folded paper. - -Oliver opened the circular, and pretended to look it over. - -“Now, Dodge, about this Aurora mine,” he heard Colonel Mendix say, and -immediately he was all attention. - - - - - CHAPTER VII. - - A CONVERSATION OF IMPORTANCE. - - -Oliver Bright was sure that he was going to hear something of -importance, and he determined that not a word of the conversation -between Colonel Mendix and Ezra Dodge should escape him. With his eyes -fixed upon the circular in his hand, he kept his ears wide open for -whatever might be said. - -“Yes, about the Aurora mine,” rejoined Ezra Dodge. “I want to know if -you have a clear title to it?” - -“Why, of course――that is, I and another have.” - -“Then that’s all right. I wanted to know what I was loaning money on.” - -“Didn’t I give enough other security?” asked the colonel, with a slight -sneer in his tones. - -“Certainly. If you hadn’t I wouldn’t have loaned you a dollar. Why, -I don’t even know where your mine is located, excepting that it is -somewhere on the Mokelumne River.” - -“Well, whether you know it or not, the mine is there, and that is -enough for me.” - -“Does it pay?” - -“Perhaps it does.” - -“Are you working it?” - -“Perhaps I am.” - -“Oh, pshaw! if you don’t want to say anything about it, tell me so,” -cried Ezra Dodge, in evident disgust. - -“Well, I don’t. What I want to know is, where can that machinery be -bought?” - -“Right in San Francisco.” - -“You are sure?” - -“Positive. If you don’t care to believe me, buy it in New York and have -it shipped out.” - -“Come, Dodge, don’t get mad. If I want to keep the location of my mine -to myself, it ought to be all right. I intend”―― - -Oliver did not hear any more of the conversation. The clerk in the -establishment approached him, and talked stocks so persistently that -the boy was glad to escape from the office. - -He had, however, overheard several important facts. The mine was -located on the Mokelumne River; Mendix did not care to speak of its -value, but was evidently investing considerable money in buying -machinery, which would tend to show that the claim was worth a good -deal. - -“How fortunate that I met the man!” thought Oliver. “I wouldn’t have -missed this chance for a hundred dollars! And to tell father that he -was in South America while he has been in California all the while! On -the Mokelumne River. That ought not to be so hard to locate.” - -Oliver did not stop to consider that the spot mentioned was many miles -in extent, and in a very wild and mountainous region. His mind was -filled only with the desire to reach the place, and view with his own -eyes his father’s property. - -Walking to the opposite side of the street, he stood in the shadow of a -doorway and waited for Colonel Mendix to appear. Five minutes passed, -and then the man came from Ezra Dodge’s office, walked up Wall Street, -and turned down into Broad. - -Oliver followed him as best he could, but suddenly Mendix turned -another corner, and before the boy could reach the spot the man had -disappeared. - -In vain Oliver hunted up and down and in the several side streets; -Colonel Mendix was nowhere to be seen, and after half an hour’s search -Oliver gave up the task. - -It was now half-past twelve, and walking about had made Oliver hungry. -He moved along until he came to a restaurant, and entering, ordered -dinner. - -While at the table he was astonished at the bustle and confusion around -him. It was true he had been to the metropolis many times, but on every -succeeding occasion the city seemed to be more busy, more full of life. - -Having eaten his meal, and settled the amount of the check at the desk, -Oliver sauntered out upon the street once more. He had a day and a half -before him, and hardly knew what to do. He walked up Nassau Street to -Park Row, and then turning, drifted with the tide of humanity down -Broadway. The knowledge that he was carrying so much cash about worried -him, but each time he felt for it he found that his money was still -safe in the inside pocket of his vest. - -At length Oliver reached the Battery, and sat down on one of the -benches that line the promenades. His long walk in the afternoon sun -had tired him, and his head was beginning to ache. - -The sights around him interested him not a little. Directly opposite to -him was a poor women with a sick baby, the little thing fairly gasping -for breath. To his right sat a shabby workman, or he might have been -a tramp, half asleep, and beside him a tall, gaunt, almost starved -looking boy, certainly not much older than himself. - -Upon another bench three emigrant Germans were holding an animated -conversation in their own tongue, though Oliver occasionally heard the -names Chicago and Milwaukee mentioned. - -The sick baby interested the boy most of all. His heart ached to see -the little one in such misery, and when he saw the mother wipe the -tears from her eyes, he hastily rose and walked over to her. - -“You seem in distress,” he said kindly. “Can I do anything for you?” - -She looked up into his honest, open face. - -“My baby is so sick!” she cried. “I would not care if it was myself――but -baby”――and she broke down completely. - -“You ought to go to a doctor,” he went on. - -“Alas! I have no money!” she replied. “I spent the last fifty cents I -had yesterday.” - -Oliver’s hand went down into his pocket on the instant. He could ill -spare the money, but he would have done anything rather than refuse the -woman assistance. - -“Here is a dollar for you,” he said, holding out that amount. “I wish I -could make it more; but that will help you some.” - -For an instant the woman stared at him. Then she snatched the silver -coin from his hand. - -“Oh, thank you, thank you!” she cried; “I did not expect it. You are -too kind.” - -“I would advise you to get medicine for the baby at once.” - -“I will, sir; I know something that I think will just cure my poor -Ellie. Oh, thank you, sir, and God bless you!” - -And with tears of joy streaming down her face the woman hurried away. - -A warm feeling surged through Oliver’s heart as he slowly followed, the -feeling that always comes when one has done a noble action. - -“Poor woman, poor baby,” he murmured to himself. “I hope she gets the -medicine and that it cures her Ellie. What a dear baby it was!” - -He had hardly gone a dozen steps before he felt a hand upon his -shoulder. It was the gaunt-looking boy. - -“Will you please help me a little?” he asked pleadingly. “I have been -out of work for three weeks and can’t get anything to do anywhere.” - -“You are telling the truth?” asked Oliver sharply, to make sure that he -was not being deceived. - -“Yes, sir. I worked in Haddan’s piano action factory that burnt down.” - -“And you cannot get work anywhere?” - -“No, sir. Oh, you don’t know how hard I have tried! Every morning I -answer the advertisements in the papers, but there are always a hundred -men for one place.” - -By the way the boy spoke Oliver knew that he told the truth. He -hesitated for a moment, and then handed out another dollar. - -“There,” he said. “I cannot afford that very well, but I hate to see -any one in want. I hope by the time that is gone you will find work. -Are you alone in the world?” - -“Yes, sir.” - -“Then, if you cannot get work here, I advise you to strike out for some -other place.” - -“Thank you; I won’t stay in New York much longer.” - -Oliver did not reply, and the two separated. - -“Cannot find work anywhere,” mused the boy; “it must be hard indeed. -What will father and I do if the Aurora mine scheme proves a failure? I -would be nearly as badly off as that poor chap. God grant it does not -come to that!” - - - - - CHAPTER VIII. - - A NIGHT IN NEW YORK. - - -From the Battery, Oliver made his way back to Wall Street. He was in -hopes of seeing Colonel Mendix again, and for this reason passed and -repassed Ezra Dodge’s office several times. - -But his watching was fruitless, and finally by five o’clock he gave up. -By this time the financial center was almost deserted, and he saw Ezra -Dodge’s clerk close the office up for the day, and walk away. - -Instantly he decided to follow and accost the young man, and this he -did before he had formed any clear plan of action. - -“Excuse me,” he said; “but I think I saw you down in Mr. Dodge’s -office.” - -“You did,” replied the clerk wonderingly. - -“Wasn’t Colonel Mendix there?” - -“Yes, he was; this morning.” - -“Can you tell me where he is stopping?” - -“At the Gilliford House.” - -“The Gilliford House?” - -“Yes. It is on Broadway near Sixth Avenue. Did you want to see him?” - -“I did. Do you suppose he is there now?” - -“I don’t know. He intends to start for California soon.” - -“So I understand. He has a mine there, I believe.” - -“Yes.” The clerk hesitated. “I don’t know much about Colonel Mendix,” -he continued. - -“Does he live here?” - -“Oh, no; he comes from Sacramento City.” - -“Thank you. And you think he is up at the Gilliford House?” - -“He is if he hasn’t left for the West yet.” - -“Did he speak of leaving so soon?” - -“I heard him tell Mr. Dodge he might take the train for St. Louis -to-day.” - -The clerk nodded and then boarded a Broadway car. Oliver stood on the -pavement in wonder. - -“Might take the train for St. Louis to-day!” he murmured; “and I -thought all the while that he intended to stay in New York for some -time at least! If he has gone he will have a full day’s start of me, to -say nothing of the difference in the trip overland and the one by the -way of the isthmus. I wish I was going by train instead.” - -After a moment’s reflection, he resolved to go at once to the Gilliford -House and see if the colonel had yet departed. If he had, then there -was nothing to do but wait for the steamer on Wednesday. - -On the corner was a policeman, and the officer quickly directed the -boy to the proper elevated road by which he could reach the hotel -mentioned. Oliver climbed the steps, procured his ticket, dropped it -into the box, and a moment later was aboard the train. - -Though he had been to New York a number of times, the ride in the air -as it were was somewhat of a novelty to him. He sat in one of the -little cross seats in the middle of the car, and thoroughly enjoyed the -panorama that swept by――a panorama that was so close to him that he -could note every detail. - -At length Thirty-third Street was reached. Here Oliver left the train, -went down the long stairs, and inquired his way to the Gilliford House. - -It was not a long distance off, and in five minutes more he had entered -the office. - -“Is Colonel Mendix stopping here?” he asked of the clerk at the desk. - -The young man looked at the register. - -“Yes, sir. Wish to see him?” - -Oliver hesitated for a moment. - -“Yes, sir.” - -“I will send up your card.” - -“I――I―― He would not know me,” stammered Oliver. “Cannot you say that a -young man wishes to see him?” - -“Certainly. Just wait a moment. I’ll send right up.” - -Oliver took a seat and waited. The bell-boy was gone probably five -minutes. - -“Colonel Mendix is out,” were the clerk’s words upon his return. - -“Have you any idea when he will be back?” asked Oliver, somewhat -disappointed, and yet relieved to think he would not have to face the -man just then, when he was hardly prepared. - -“No, sir.” - -Oliver stood for a moment in thought. He would have to remain in New -York over that night and the next. Why not stay where he was? - -“Can I engage a room here for to-morrow night and to-night?” he asked. - -“Certainly. What kind of a room do you desire?” - -“Not too high priced.” - -“European or American plan?” was the clerk’s question, meaning thereby, -as many of my readers know, if he wished it without or including meals. - -“European.” - -“From one to three dollars.” - -“I will take the dollar room, sir.” - -“Very well. Pay in advance.” - -“I will pay for to-night. If I stay to-morrow I will pay that in the -morning.” - -Oliver paid the money. He did not wish to arrange for meals at the -hotel, for he did not know where he would be during the following day. - -“John, show this gentleman to room 234.” - -“And if Colonel Mendix comes in, will you let me know?” - -“I will if I see him.” - -Taking Oliver’s valise, the porter led the way to the elevator, -and they were raised to the fifth floor. Number 234 proved to be a -cozy room at the rear of the hall. It was well furnished, with all -conveniences, even to the pens and ink that stood on a side table. - -Throwing off his coat, vest, and hat, the boy took a good wash in the -marble bowl and combed his hair. This refreshed him and made his head -feel better. Then locking up the room so that his baggage would be -safe, he went below to a neighboring restaurant, and procured a light -supper. - -The sight of the pens and ink in his room made him think of writing a -letter to his father, and he spent the best part of the evening doing -so. He told of all that had happened, and begged his father not to be -angry at his having taken the matter in hand. - -The letter finished, Oliver went out and posted it. Upon returning he -asked about Colonel Mendix, and was told the gentleman had not yet -come back. - -At ten o’clock Oliver retired. He was quite worn out, but the -strangeness of his situation caused him to sleep but little. At seven -o’clock he was dressed and at the desk. - -“Colonel Mendix has sent word that his baggage be taken to the depot,” -said the clerk. “He took the train last night for the West.” - - - - - CHAPTER IX. - - ON THE STEAMER. - - -Oliver Bright was so taken aback by the announcement that Colonel -Mendix had left New York that he hardly knew what to do. Since the day -before he had calculated upon having a talk with the Spanish gentleman, -and hoped to gain some important knowledge without revealing his own -identity. - -But now that chance was lost. The colonel had gone, and it was not -likely that the two would meet this side of San Francisco. - -“Took the train last night?” he repeated slowly. - -“Yes, sir,” replied the clerk. “Did you wish to see him very much?” - -“I did indeed. What time did the train start?” - -“At nine fifteen.” - -“Thank you.” - -Oliver left the desk, and walked slowly from the hotel. He was in -no humor for eating his breakfast, and strolled up Broadway for a -considerable distance, and up and down a number of the side streets. - -“He will reach the West long before I do,” he reflected. “Perhaps -before I get to San Francisco he will be at the mines. Still, he may -stop over to buy that machinery he spoke of. Heigh-ho! it’s a chance -lost anyway.” - -Oliver was not naturally of a desponding disposition, and in an hour -his spirits had brightened, and he was once more himself. He walked -into a modest looking restaurant and procured a light breakfast, and -then, in lieu of something more important to do, started out to see the -sights. - -The morning passed quickly enough. At noon Oliver found himself far -over by the East River. He walked down the Bowery until he came to the -Brooklyn Bridge, and taking a walk over this magnificent structure, -procured his dinner in Brooklyn. By the time it was finished, and he -had recrossed the bridge, it was nearly three o’clock. - -“I’ll wait until six, and then see if there are any letters for me,” -he said to himself, as he passed the post-office building. “Father may -write to me at once, or get some one to write for him.” - -For a long time Oliver stood on Park Row, watching the newsboys folding -their papers and disposing of them. One little mite of a chap, who was -certainly not over five years of age, interested him greatly. - -The boy was so small he could hardly carry his bundle of papers, and -yet he seemed to drive a brisk trade, often selling a paper where some -one larger than he had met with a rebuff. Crimpsey, he heard some -of the other boys call him; and finally Oliver patronized him to the -extent of buying an afternoon paper for a cent. - -“How’s trade?” he said, as he waited for his change. - -“Nuthin’ extra,” was the little chap’s reply. “There ain’t no extra -news in ter day.” And away he went shouting, “Extra! Last ’dition!” - -“I shouldn’t want to be a newsboy,” thought Oliver; “yet I would rather -do that than starve.” - -Walking over to the little park in front of the City Hall, he sat down -on one of the benches and read the paper he had bought. There was but -little in it to interest him, and he had soon finished. Then he threw -down the sheet. In an instant a man sitting near snatched it up. - -“Through?” he asked. - -“Yes,” replied Oliver. - -“Thanks;” and immediately the man was deeply absorbed in the journal. - -“Evidently he is too poor to buy a paper, and yet he is hungry for -something to read,” thought Oliver, and he hit it exactly. - -The boy found the time hanging heavily upon his hands after this. He -detested spending a day in idleness, yet it could not be helped. He -walked over to the North River, and then up West Street, and finally -returned up Vesey Street to the post-office. - -Here he hunted up the right window, and asked if there were any letters. - -For reply one was handed out. - -How eagerly Oliver took it up! It bore the Rockvale postmark. It was -from home! - -Stepping over to one of the windows, he tore the epistle open. It was -from his father, and ran as follows:―― - - MY DEAR OLIVER,――As you supposed, I was greatly astonished to - find that you had left home to go to California to hunt up the - Aurora mine. I was inclined to think that it was a foolhardy - undertaking; but upon reflection I will only say, now you have - started, take care of yourself, and don’t run into unnecessary - danger. - - I have not time to write all I desire, as I am afraid you will - not receive the letter if I do not put it in the morning mail. - - You say you have enough money for the present. When you reach - San Francisco there will be a letter with a money order or - express order for you. - - I can understand what a surprise it was to meet Colonel Mendix. - Have you seen him again? Be sure and keep out of trouble. I - have no doubt but that he was deceiving me all the time, and - cannot forgive myself for having trusted him as I did. - - I suppose you did not return home Tuesday because you thought I - might detain you. Well, Oliver, perhaps I might have done so, - but as it is, you may go, and God be with you. - - I am feeling as well as can be expected. Dr. Kitchell says I - must keep quiet and all will be well. It is hard to do so, but - I will try to be content. - - Let me hear from you as often as possible, and do not hesitate - to return at any time, no matter whether you accomplish - anything or not. Although if you fail it will be a bitter blow, - we will manage somehow to get along. - - Now I must close. With all my love I remain, your father, - - ARTHUR BRIGHT. - -Oliver had quite some trouble in deciphering the letter, which had been -written in great haste. It is needless to say its contents pleased him -greatly. A heavy load was lifted from his heart, for he had dreaded the -thought of being recalled, and giving up the quest. - -“I must not fail,” he murmured to himself, as he put the letter in his -pocket. “Father expects me to succeed, even if he doesn’t say so. I am -sure if I do not he will never get over the blow.” - -There was some truth in this, though not as much as Oliver was inclined -to believe. Yet the boy walked from the post-office with a firmer -determination to follow his purpose to its end and recognize no such -word as fail. - -He spent the evening in writing a long reply to his father, and also -in sending several letters to intimate friends, including one to Gus -Gregory, which was destined never to reach his chum for reasons that -will soon appear. - -Oliver slept more comfortably that night than he had the first. He was -up, however, at seven o’clock; and after getting breakfast and settling -his bill made his way down to the steamer which was to afford him -passage to Aspinwall. - -Here he found all bustle and confusion. Passengers and the last of the -cargo, as well as the mails, were arriving all at the same time. He -sought out his stateroom and stowed away his valise, and then went on -deck to view the scene. - -He wondered who his room-mate was to be; but though he asked several he -was unable to find out, and no one appeared. - -“Maybe I will have the room all to myself,” he thought; “that will be -much nicer.” - -But the stream of people that were coming aboard seemed to indicate -otherwise. What a motley crowd it was! Americans, Spaniards, Englishmen, -several Chinamen, and half a dozen blacks. - -Surely time would not hang heavily among such people. Oliver was -already interested in the manners and speeches to be seen and heard -around him. - -At length the time for sailing came; and lashed fast to an energetic -little steam-tug, the steamer swung off from the pier and moved slowly -down the stream. - -There was a crowd left behind that waved a parting adieu, cheers and -tears well mixed. On board some were laughing, some crying. - -Oliver felt mighty sober. There was no one to see him off; yet he was -leaving home and friends behind. When would he see all again? - -Before long a tear stole down his cheek. He brushed it away hastily and -took a deep breath. How he wished they were well on their way, and this -parting was over! And yet he strained his eyes until the pier could be -seen no longer, and eagerly watched the shore with its varied shipping. - -“No use in talking, there is nothing like home,” he murmured to -himself; “if it wasn’t for what I hope to accomplish, you wouldn’t -catch me leaving it.” - -Suddenly a snatch of song reached his ears,―― - - “The dearest spot on earth to me is home, sweet home.” - -“Paine spoke the truth when he wrote that,” said Oliver to a man -standing near. - -“You’re right, Oliver,” added a voice from behind, and turning, the boy -was dumfounded to see Gus Gregory standing close at hand. - - - - - CHAPTER X. - - THE STORM OFF CAPE HATTERAS. - - -For the moment Oliver could not believe his eyesight. He stared at his -chum without saying a word. - -“Yes, it is I,” said Gus Gregory finally. “Do you think it is my ghost?” - -“Gus!” gasped Oliver. “Where in the world did you come from?” - -“Where did you suppose? From Rockvale.” - -“And what――what are you doing here?” - -“I’m bound for California; going to accompany you.” - -“You are! Why――why”――Oliver could not finish the question. - -“Don’t try to ask too many questions at once, and perhaps I’ll answer -some of them,” laughed the stout boy. “In the first place, I left -Rockvale yesterday morning about eleven o’clock. I came at once to New -York, and after getting a good bath, so as not to look quite like a -tramp, I bought a ticket for this steamer, and here I am.” - -“Yes, but do your folks know of all this?” - -“Well, I guess not! I wouldn’t be here but for the awful time I had -with pop.” - -And Gus Gregory shook his head over the remembrance of the occurrence. - -“Then you ran away?” - -“I suppose you would call it that. But I didn’t run; I couldn’t. I -walked, and mighty slow at that!” - -“But what made you come away at all?” - -“It was all on account of that scrape we got into over at Dr. Tangus’s. -On Monday night pop called me into the library, and said he had got -a bill of damages from the old man. What do you suppose it was? -Forty-five dollars!” - -“Forty-five dollars! Phew!” ejaculated Oliver. “That was the whole -damage done, I suppose.” - -“No; that was only my share. I can tell you father was mad, and he -sailed right into me. He had been suffering from a toothache all day, -and his temper was none of the best. I can tell you I caught it!” - -Gus Gregory drew a deep breath and shifted his shoulders uneasily. - -“First it was words and then it came to blows,” he resumed. “At last I -said I wished I was a thousand miles from home, and my father took me -up and said I could go and never come back; and here I am.” - -“But he didn’t mean that, Gus.” - -“Never mind, he said it, and I took him up. So that night I packed -my grip,――had quite a job, I was in such a tremendous hurry,――and -found out all about the steamer and so forth. I left home right after -breakfast. - -“Just as I passed out of the garden, father saw me, and called out to -know where I was going. I told him a thousand miles away, as he had -wished. He said I was a fool, and ordered me back. When I didn’t mind, -he came running after me. I started up the road, with my eye on him -over my shoulder. I didn’t notice a puddle in the way, and the first -thing went a-sousing into it. Maybe I wasn’t a sight to behold! I had -on my best clothes too!” - -Oliver laughed heartily. He could well imagine the scene. - -“But you got away?” he asked with deep interest. - -“Of course; if I hadn’t I wouldn’t be here. When I reached the station -the train had just come in. I jumped aboard, and in a moment we were -off. But what a mess I was in! I was mud from head to foot, and my face -resembled that of the worst tramp you ever saw! I tried to clean myself -as best I could, but nevertheless every one stared at me, and I had the -whole seat to myself the entire way.” - -“I can see the mud yet,” said Oliver. - -“Humph! that isn’t a hundredth part of it. As soon as I reached the -city I hunted up a bath, and told the proprietor I had met with an -accident, and he fixed me up. But I can tell you, Olly, I don’t want -any more such tumbles!” - -“And where did you get your money to pay for the trip?” asked Oliver. - -“Didn’t I have a hundred dollars that Uncle Dick left me before he -started for Australia? I had that and twenty-five dollars besides. I -thought you would take this steamer, and as soon as I saw your name on -the register, I engaged a berth too.” - -“And what do you intend to do when you reach San Francisco?” - -“I don’t know yet. But see here, Olly, you don’t act a bit as if you -cared to have me with you,” added Gus in injured tones. - -“I do care a good deal. But I’m sorry you ran away. What will your -father and mother think of it?” - -“I sent them a long letter just before we sailed, so they won’t worry.” - -“But they will worry, Gus.” - -“Well, to tell the truth, I am sorry on mother’s account. To be real -candid, if I had stopped to think perhaps I wouldn’t have come at all. -But now I am here, and that is all there is to it.” - -Oliver shook his head. He knew well enough that once Gus had made up -his mind there was no use to argue with him. - -“Let us go below,” continued the stout boy; “I have a surprise for you.” - -“What is it?” - -“Never mind; come along.” - -So Oliver followed him down the broad steps and along the passageway, -and Gus entered a stateroom. - -“My stateroom!” cried Oliver. “How did you know it?” - -“By the register. It is mine also. We are to be room-mates. Aren’t you -glad?” - -Glad? Indeed Oliver was. The feeling of loneliness, so acute but a -quarter of an hour before, was all gone now. - -While they were below, Gus told much of what had passed in Rockvale -after Oliver’s departure. To be sure the boy had been gone but two -days, yet that was long enough for all the other boys to wonder what -had become of him. - -Gus’s haste in leaving was amply proven by the contents of his valise, -all tumbled in one mess. There were two extra shoes, but they were not -mates, and most of the clothing he had brought was just such as he did -not desire. - -“Humph! the next time I run away I’d better take a week to do it in!” -he grumbled. “Did you ever see such a collection? Looks as if I came -out of a junk-shop.” - -“Never mind; I’ll lend you what I have,” said Oliver. “But my advice is -to return home the first landing we make.” - -“Not much! I’m bound West ho!” - -In a little while the two boys went on deck again. They were now -drawing towards Sandy Hook, and the heavy swells made Gus turn a sickly -green. - -“I suppose it’s about dinner time,” said Oliver; “I feel mighty hungry.” - -“I don’t want anything to eat,” replied the stout boy, drawing his -mouth tightly together. - -“You don’t!” - -“No; not a mouthful.” - -“Why?” - -“Never mind; I don’t, that’s all.” - -Oliver gave him a searching glance. - -“Gus Gregory, you’re seasick!” he cried. - -“Not a bit of it; I’m only a bit dizzy,” was the hopeful reply. - -But he had hardly spoken the words before Gus swallowed a lump in his -throat and then rushed for the side. Oliver, who felt perfectly well, -could not help but laugh. - -He went to dinner alone. The table was more than three-quarters -deserted――nearly every one was under the weather. When he came from the -dining-saloon he found his chum in the stateroom flat on the floor. - -“What! as bad as this?” he asked kindly. - -“Don’t say a word!” moaned Gus. “I’ll never travel on the water again, -never! I wish the steamer was at the bottom of the sea, and myself with -it.” - -He continued to roll and moan for the rest of the day. Oliver tried to -help him in various ways, but it was of no avail. There is nothing to -do but to let seasickness run its course. - -The boys never forgot that first night on shipboard. Several times -Oliver’s head began to swim from the motion, which towards morning grew -worse. He slept but little, and was one of the first on deck. - -“We are getting into the neighborhood of Cape Hatteras,” said a -gentleman standing near. “It is always rough here, but more than -usually so now.” - -“Why?” asked Oliver. - -“Because there is a storm coming up.” - -“A storm?” - -“Yes; and a heavy one. Look over there at that black mass of clouds. -There will be lively times on board to-day.” - -The gentleman spoke the truth. In less than a quarter of an hour the -sky was heavily overcast, and a heavy rainstorm burst over their heads. -Somewhat fearful, Oliver hurried below. - -He had often heard of the fearful storms experienced off Cape Hatteras, -and wondered if that which was approaching would do the steamship any -serious damage. - - - - - CHAPTER XI. - - MR. WHYLAND. - - -“My stars! what’s the matter with the ship?” asked Gus, as Oliver -entered the stateroom. - -“We are going to have a storm,” was the reply; “it’s raining already.” - -“Then maybe we will go to the bottom,” groaned Gus. “Or else we’ll turn -clear over, see if we don’t.” - -He had been feeling just a trifle better, but now he was worse. From -looking green he was deadly white, and he shook from head to foot. - -“I wish I could do something for you,” said Oliver kindly, for at least -the fiftieth time. “But I don’t know of a thing that will help you.” - -“It’s a punishment for running away, I suppose. I’ll never be well -until we reach land again.” - -“Oh, nonsense! You’ll feel all right as soon as this storm clears off.” - -Gus made no reply. Oliver remained in the stateroom for a while, and -then ventured above to take another observation. - -As he stepped on deck a violent gust of wind blew a man’s hat directly -toward him. He made a dive for the tile and captured it. - -“Hello, there! got it?” sang out a voice, and an instant later the -gentleman who had told Oliver that a storm was coming rushed up. - -“Yes, sir; here you are.” - -“Thanks. My, but this is rough, and no mistake!” The gentleman jammed -the hat tightly over his head. “Just look at those waves over there!” -And he pointed over to the starboard where the water appeared to be -mountainous in its height. - -“I trust we will get through in safety,” said Oliver with a shudder. “I -have no desire to go to the bottom of the sea.” - -“Nor I,” laughed the gentleman. “Traveling alone?” he went on curiously. - -“I have a schoolmate with me――that is, we met on board.” - -“That very stout young man?” - -“Yes, sir.” - -“Ah, yes, I see. Rather young to be traveling alone. I am glad to meet -you. My name is Thomas Whyland. I suppose we shall be thrown together -quite some during the voyage.” - -“Are you going to San Francisco?” - -“Yes.” - -“Then I’m glad to have met you,” said Oliver with a smile. “I do not -know a soul but my chum. My name is Oliver Bright.” - -The two shook hands. Mr. Whyland appeared to be a pleasant gentleman, -and Oliver thought they would be friends. He did not dream how well -acquainted they were destined to become. - -“Where is your chum now?” asked Mr. Whyland. - -“In the stateroom, sick.” - -As Oliver spoke a tremendous wave broke over the deck, wetting both him -and Mr. Whyland. A moment later one of the deck-hands came forward with -word that all the passengers had been ordered below. - -“That means us too,” said Mr. Whyland. “Come, let us adjourn to the -cabin.” - -It was with difficulty that they descended the companionway. When -half-way down Oliver slipped, and had it not been for his friend would -have rolled to the bottom. - -In the cabin they found a motley crowd assembled――mostly passengers who -were too frightened to retire to their staterooms. Amongst them was the -head steward and two other officers, trying all they could to quiet the -fears that were expressed. - -“Nothing unusual, sir,” said the steward to Oliver; “I’ve passed -through a dozen of ’em.” - -“Excuse me; one is enough,” laughed the boy; “and you may depend upon -it I will never forget the experience.” - -He and Mr. Whyland took a seat well forward, and began to talk over the -prospects. Presently Oliver felt a hand on his arm, and turning, saw -Gus standing beside him. - -“Hello! what brought you out?” he exclaimed. - -“I didn’t want to drown alone,” replied the stout boy. “We’re all going -to the bottom, do you know it?” - -“The officers of the boat say not,” returned Oliver. “They say it is -quite an ordinary storm.” - -“I call it a most extraordinary, howling, rambunctious cyclone,” said -Gus. “I’m expecting the ship to turn clear over any moment.” - -Oliver introduced his companion to Mr. Whyland, and their mutual -sympathy soon placed them on the plane of friendship. But Gus was too -sick to remain long, and before a great while retired again to the -stateroom, whither he was presently followed by Oliver. - -“What do you think of Mr. Whyland?” asked the latter. - -“Very nice man,” returned Gus. “I’d like him still better if he would -only order this storm to stop. Creation! it seems to me I’d give all -I’m worth to be on land once more!” - -“Then you don’t think you would care to be a sailor, to sail the briny -deep?” asked Oliver with a smile. - -“Sailor!” Gus uttered the word in deep disgust. - -“Yes. It’s a splendid life――at least so the novelists say.” - -“Humph! I guess those novelists never saw the blue and black water, or -they wouldn’t put down any such nonsense! No, sir! this is my first and -last trip on the flowing sea. As Paddy said, ‘The next time I ship I’ll -travel be land!’” - -“Which means that when you return home you’ll do so overland.” - -“If I’m ever allowed to return home, which I very much doubt, if this -confounded storm keeps up.” - -“Oh, it isn’t so bad, Gus.” Oliver mused for a moment, while Gus turned -on the berth with a groan. “I wonder if Mr. Whyland is acquainted in -San Francisco.” - -“Why?” - -“If he is, he may be able to give me considerable information about the -place.” - -“It isn’t likely that he ever heard of this Colonel Mendix.” - -“Oh, I suppose not; but he will know about the mining exchange and all -that, and that is what I must learn about. They must know something of -Mendix. He couldn’t keep that mine a secret so long out there.” - -“Suppose you can’t find out a single thing in San Francisco, what then?” - -“It will be a disappointment, but I shall not give up. I will make a -hunt up the river upon which it is said to be situated. Sooner or later -I am bound to stumble upon a clew.” - -“I admire your grit, Olly. You deserve success.” - -“And I’ll obtain it, mark my word, Gus.” - -During the afternoon, instead of abating, the storm grew wilder. The -sky became even blacker than before, and all the lanterns were lit. The -wind shrieked through the rigging and across the deck, and everything -that was loose and light was carried over the rail. - -Seated on the edge of the lower berth the two boys talked in a low -tone. Sleep was out of the question, and, as Gus expressed it, somehow -speech made them more courageous. - -“We must be near Cape Hatteras,” said Oliver. “If we――” - -He did not finish the sentence, for at that instant a terrible shock -was felt that sent both boys sprawling to the other side of the -stateroom. There was a crashing and a tearing, and they heard piercing -cries of alarm. What did it mean? - - - - - CHAPTER XII. - - ARRIVAL AT ASPINWALL. - - -Both boys were frightened at the terrific shock they experienced while -in the stateroom. Gus had the wind completely knocked out of him, and -Oliver was little better off. - -“What can it mean?” cried Oliver as he scrambled to his feet. - -“Guess we’ve smashed on the rocks!” groaned the stout youth. “Told you -we’d go to the bottom.” - -“If we have, I’m not going to stay below any longer. Come, let us go on -deck.” - -Oliver helped Gus to regain his feet, and trembling with excitement as -well as fear, they made their way to the cabin. Here nearly all the -passengers were assembled, most of them in a high state of excitement. - -Among the crowd was Mr. Whyland, who quickly joined the boys. - -“What is it? What have we struck?” asked Oliver anxiously. - -“I do not know. It was a fearful blow.” - -“Are we going to the bottom?” - -“Hardly. These steamers are very strongly built. I’ll go on deck and -find out.” - -But at the companionway he was stopped. - -“No one allowed on deck,” said the man in charge of the stairs. “There -is no danger, sir.” - -“What did we strike?” - -“Struck a small freight schooner, and carried away her bow.” - -“Did she sink?” - -“Oh, no. But we are steaming near her so as to be on the safe side.” - -This news was heard by every one who stood around, and its effect was -to quiet the fearful ones. Many wondered if the schooner was seriously -damaged, and if she would be able to continue her voyage. - -It is safe to say that there was little or no sleep that night for -those on board the steamer. Towards morning the storm cleared off, and -the sun rose bright as ever. - -“Well, I never!” declared Gus. “The scene has changed as quickly as it -does in a panorama!” - -Now that the dreadful rolling had ceased, he felt better, and Oliver -was glad to see him indulge in a fair-sized breakfast. - -The meal finished, they went on deck. The freight schooner that had -been struck was nowhere to be seen. Inquiries brought the information -that she had not been seriously damaged and had gone on her way. - -The two boys found the day rather monotonous. Look where they might, -nothing could be seen but sky and water, the one nearly as blue as the -other. - -“Blue all around makes one feel blue,” remarked Gus. “But I’m thankful -I’m over that awful seasickness. If it had kept up much longer I -believe I would have died.” - -“No one ever dies of seasickness,” said Mr. Whyland, who had come up. -“Your health will be better after this dose.” - -“Well, it ought to be,” laughed Gus. “I’ve suffered enough. I ought to -have some reward.” - -“But we do not always get what we deserve in this world,” responded -the gentleman, and for a moment a light shadow swept across his brow. -“Sometimes both evil and good pass us by.” - -At dinner Oliver did full justice to what was passed to him. Gus felt -decidedly strange, and it was some time before he could get into the -peculiar way of eating that was prevalent. Everything that he had, -seemed to be inclined to slide into his lap. - -“We can’t stand on much ceremony,” he said. “I think this chicken leg -is better in my stomach than on the floor, so here goes.” And he took -the extremity of the fowl between his fingers and ate it that way. - -That day and the next passed slowly. Gus was of the opinion they would -stop at some place before reaching Aspinwall, but in this he was -mistaken. They passed close to the coast of Florida, so close in fact -that the sandy shore with the tall and waving trees and bushes could be -distinctly seen. On the following day they took the course between Cuba -and Yucatan, passing not far from the latter on account of the tide. -They were now in the Caribbean Sea, with the Bay of Honduras behind -them. - -“Looks very much like any other bay or gulf, I suppose,” observed Gus, -as he and Oliver stood by the rail watching some sea-gulls as they -winged their way around the ship. - -“I guess water looks very much the same in all parts of the earth,” was -Oliver’s reply. - -“Mostly,” put in Mr. Whyland, who had overheard the last words; -“although there are some places where it is quite different. Lake Como -in Switzerland is as blue as indigo; the waters of some South American -rivers are intensely green; and then there are the Red and Black -Seas――so called from their general appearance.” - -“I should like to see them all,” returned Oliver. “Some day, if I am -able, I intend to become a great traveler.” - -“It is very pleasant,” said the gentleman. “But it takes a lot of -money, I can assure you.” - -Early on the day following, land somewhere on the isthmus was seen; and -late in the afternoon they steamed into the harbor at Aspinwall, and -dropped anchor. The boys were eager to go ashore, but were told that no -passengers would be allowed to land until the following morning. - -“Well, so much of the journey is done,” said Oliver. “How I wish this -was San Francisco Bay!” - -“I don’t know as I do,” returned Gus. “Now that I’ve got over that -nasty seasickness, I rather enjoy the trip.” - -“I would too, if I didn’t have anything on my mind.” - -“Well, you ought not to let that interfere. Worry won’t do any good.” - -In the fast approaching darkness but little could be seen. The boys -were sure Aspinwall was a poorly illuminated town, so few lights could -be distinguished. They went below and made all necessary preparations -for leaving the steamer. - -The evening passed quickly. At ten o’clock the boys turned in so as to -be on hand bright and early. - -And on hand they were. At ten o’clock both stepped out on the dock and -walked slowly up the narrow and dirty street. - -“Humph! not much of a city,” said Gus. “See the funny houses all on -stilts!” - -“I suppose they build them that way to keep from getting flooded out -when it rains,” laughed Oliver; “or else the sea may occasionally drive -in too far.” - -“I would not care to see myself living here. My, how muddy it is! I -guess they haven’t much of a street-cleaning department.” - -From one of the officers of the ship the boys learned that, in order to -make connections with the steamer at Panama, they would have to take -the train for that port on the following morning. - -“That will give us a whole day in this place,” said Oliver. “Come, let -us start out on a voyage of discovery.” - -Gus was nothing loath, and they set out. They passed down the main -street, where they discovered several fine-looking hotels,――quite in -contrast with their shabby surroundings,――and then turned down another -road close beside the water. - -Most all of the people they met were either Spaniards, Frenchmen, or -natives. But few Americans were to be seen, and this made both boys -feel more strange than did all the other surroundings. - -“We are in a different country, and no mistake,” said Oliver. “See what -queer ways the folks have! It makes me feel like a cat in a strange -garret!” - -Presently they drifted into quite a crowd that lined a wharf where a -large boat was discharging fruit. Anxious to see what was going on, -they pressed their way to the front until a tall Spaniard with a long -whip rushed out, and jabbering at all the strangers, drove them off. - -“Not a very sociable fellow,” grunted Gus. “By crickety! I thought he -was going to fetch me one across the legs!” - -It was now getting toward noon, and both boys were hungry. Oliver was -for going back to the steamer for dinner, but Gus persuaded him to -enter one of the strange eating-houses kept by a native. - -“I want to see what kind of stuff they furnish,” he explained. - -“All right. Only you must order,” replied Oliver. - -So Gus ordered dinner as best he could. While they were waiting for it -to be brought both boys felt in their pockets for money to pay for it. -Neither had so much as a cent! - - - - - CHAPTER XIII. - - MR. WHYLAND’S STORY. - - -“Have you any money?” gasped Gus. - -“No,” returned Oliver; and he added, “I have been robbed! I had nearly -two dollars in change when I left the steamer.” - -“Then I am luckier than you, for I remember now that I left my purse in -my valise. What are we to do?” - -“I don’t know,” returned Oliver blankly. “I’ll bet I was robbed down in -that crowd at the wharf.” - -“Most likely.” - -“It’s a good thing I didn’t have more with me. I suppose I’ll never see -that money again.” - -“You’re right. To get it back would probably be more bother than it is -worth. Still, I would tell the captain when we get back.” - -“I certainly shall. In the meanwhile how are we to pay for our meal -here?” - -“I suppose we had better not eat it. Let us tell the waiter what has -happened.” - -In a moment more the Frenchman who had taken their order appeared, his -tray piled high with dishes. Gus told their story, and motioned as if -to go away. Evidently the man did not understand the stout youth, for -his face grew dark. - -“You have ordered the meal; you must pay for it,” he said in French. - -Of course Gus did not understand him, and only shook his head. This -made the man angry, and he called the proprietor, and the two talked to -both boys in a high pitch of voice. Oliver turned his pockets inside -out and Gus did the same, but even this had no effect save to make the -proprietor of the place grow pale with passion. - -“It’s no use,” cried Oliver. “They think we are only trying to fool -them, that we never intended to take dinner here. What in the world -shall we do?” - -“I don’t know.” Gus gave a gasp. “I wonder if they will dare to have us -arrested?” - -“Arrested? Oh, I trust not!” Oliver looked about him in deep perplexity; -“but I cannot imagine what is best to do.” - -At that instant the boy’s gaze was turned towards the door, and he was -overjoyed to see Mr. Whyland enter. Breaking from the group, he ran up -to him. - -“Oh, Mr. Whyland, how glad I am that you came in!” he exclaimed. “My -friend and I have got into an awful muss.” - -“Is that so? What is the trouble?” - -As briefly as he could Oliver related the misfortune that had overtaken -himself and Gus. Mr. Whyland listened attentively. - -“It is too bad you have had your money stolen,” he said. “There is no -use in trying to recover it. It would certainly take more time and -trouble than it is worth. You must be more careful in the future.” - -“I intend to be. But what shall I do here? The proprietor insists that -I want to cheat him or else am fooling him.” - -“I will pay the bill. I suppose travelers often impose upon him and he -has grown suspicious. I will speak to him in French.” - -Mr. Whyland was as good as his word. The restaurant keeper listened -closely, and then began to bow and smile, and sent the waiter off for -more stuff. - -“I have told him that I will settle the bill and that I will have -dinner with you,” explained Mr. Whyland. “He says only last week a -party of three Americans came in and fooled him, and he thought you -belonged to the same crowd.” - -“They ought to have been ashamed of themselves,” sniffed Gus. “Might -have got us into a terrible mess.” - -“Yes; Americans away from home ought to be more circumspect in their -actions. A few of them can give the entire nation a bad name.” - -The things that Mr. Whyland had ordered were not long in coming, and -then the three sat down. It was a somewhat different meal from what -they had been accustomed to at home, yet not enough so to make it -noticeable. - -“These people are very quick to remember how Americans like things -served,” said Mr. Whyland. “That is why you do not notice any great -difference from a Broadway restaurant.” - -The meal finished, their friend settled the bill as he had agreed. -Oliver and Gus thanked him, and the former promised to pay back their -share as soon as the steamer was reached. - -“There is no need to trouble yourself. It was but fifty cents――twenty-five -apiece,” said Mr. Whyland. “What were you young men doing? taking a look -around?” - -“Yes,” replied Oliver; “but there doesn’t seem to be much to see.” - -“You are right; Aspinwall is not a very attractive city――that is, -by comparison with what we have left. It is almost too unhealthy to -thrive.” - -On the way back to the steamer the three became even better acquainted -than before. The gentleman asked where the two boys were bound, and -stepped back in astonishment when Oliver, in a burst of confidence, -told him that, while Gus was off merely for a trip, he himself was in -quest of a hidden mine in California. - -“Surely, surely you are joking!” gasped Mr. Whyland. - -“No, sir; I am telling the truth,” affirmed Oliver. “I would not tell -you at all, but you have been so kind to me.” - -“And may I ask where this mine is situated――in what direction?” - -“It is somewhere on the Mokelumne River.” - -“And is it called the Aurora Mine?” continued Mr. Whyland with intense -interest. - -“It is!” cried Oliver. “But how did you know the name?” - -“I am looking for the same mine myself.” - -“You!” - -“Exactly. Do you know the owner of the claim?” - -“My father owns the claim,” replied Oliver decidedly. - -“But Colonel Mendix”―― - -“Do you know that man?” asked Oliver quickly. - -“Quite well, although I have not seen him for two years. He sold me -a quarter interest in the mine for ten thousand dollars, and then he -disappeared.” - -“My father gave him a quarter interest to open up the mine for him. -That must be the interest he sold you. You say you have not seen -Colonel Mendix for two years; I saw him in New York the day before we -sailed.” - -“Is it possible?” - -“I tried to meet him to have a talk with him; but before I could do so -he took the train for the West.” - -Mr. Whyland was astonished over what Oliver had to say. He asked the -boy to tell his story, and as Oliver could see no harm in so doing, he -complied. - -“From what you say we are undoubtedly on the same errand,” remarked -Mr. Whyland when he had finished. “You are searching for your father’s -share, and I am searching for the share given to Colonel Mendix, which -that individual transferred to me. It is most fortunate that we met. If -you have no objection we will work together.” - -“I shall be happy to do so, Mr. Whyland. You are a man, and a man can, -as a rule, do more than a boy.” - -“But I take you to be a remarkably bright boy,” laughed the gentleman. -“I am sure we will get along famously together. I have not much to -tell, excepting that I met Colonel Mendix in Boston, where he was -introduced to me by James Barr, the surveyor you have mentioned. By Mr. -Barr’s advice I invested in the mine. I waited for a long time to hear -from the two, but never did. Other business claimed my attention. But -now I am free to hunt the matter up, and I intend to do so. The amount -at stake is not a large one to me; but still I wish to learn positively -whether I have been swindled or not.” - -“The amount is a good deal to my father,” said Oliver. “He has lost all -of his other property, and this is his last hope.” - -“Then I trust that for his sake as well as for my own the mine proves -of value.” - -“You’ve got to find it first,” put in Gus. “Remember the old saying -about counting chickens before they are hatched.” - -“I would say, don’t count the eggs before they are found,” laughed Mr. -Whyland. “But we will trust for the best.” - -The three talked over the situation for a long time. Oliver was glad -that he had run across Mr. Whyland. It would undoubtedly lighten his -task to a great degree. The gentleman was experienced and rich, and -that would count for a good deal in what was to come. - -The remainder of the day passed quickly. In the evening they went -aboard of the steamer for the last time. All slept soundly, and were up -at a seasonable hour. - -“What an odd little railroad!” remarked Gus, as they boarded the train -in the morning. “Only a single track.” - -“It is only about forty-eight miles long,” said Mr. Whyland, “but it -cost an enormous sum of money to build.” - -Soon there was a tremendous jerk, and they were off on the trip across -the isthmus. Oliver looked out of the window at the marshy ground, and -the rank pools of stagnant water. - -Suddenly they came to a sharp stop. What was up now? - - - - - CHAPTER XIV. - - IN THE WILDS OF THE ISTHMUS. - - -Oliver calculated that they had been traveling not more than an hour -when the sudden stoppage occurred. The shock was so great it threw him -up against the seat in front of him, and awoke Gus from a comfortable -nap. - -“What’s the matter?” exclaimed the stout youth in alarm. - -“I don’t know,” was Oliver’s reply. “Something wrong ahead, I suppose.” - -“Perhaps part of the roadbed has sunk,” suggested Mr. Whyland, who sat -on the other side of the aisle. “I understand such a thing frequently -occurs here.” - -They all sat quiet for ten minutes. By this time one and another of the -passengers began to get out, and finally the three joined them, and -walked up to where the engine stood, blowing off steam. - -Mr. Whyland’s surmise proved correct. Not fifty feet distant the rails -of the road were submerged in a murky pool of foul-smelling water. The -length of the depression was about one hundred feet, and its greatest -depth a foot and a half. - -Already a gang of native laborers were at work repairing the damage. -There were a dozen or more of them, but they worked so slowly that -hardly any progress was made. - -“Seems to me if I was overseer here I would hurry those men up,” -remarked Gus, after they had watched the proceedings for some time. - -“They cannot hurry much,” said Mr. Whyland. “The climate is against -them. I doubt if you could stand the work more than an hour. Come, let -us get away from that pool. It is a regular hotbed of fever.” - -“I wonder how long this will delay us?” said Oliver, as they walked -back to the car. - -“Suppose we ask the conductor?” said Gus. - -After some little trouble they found the man, who was surrounded by a -crowd of passengers, all eager to know what would be the result of the -delay. - -“We will go through as soon as possible,” he replied. “The men will -work hard, and I think in two hours, or three at the most, we will be -able to move.” - -“Three hours!” exclaimed Oliver. “That is quite a time.” - -“Let us spend it in exploring the vicinity,” suggested Gus. - -Oliver was agreeable. Mr. Whyland did not care to go, but sat down to -read a magazine, and the two boys started off alone. - -“We won’t go far,” said Oliver. “I suppose they will blow the whistle -before they start, so that we can get back.” - -In five minutes the boys were in a veritable forest. On every side -could be seen tall palms, interspersed with cocoa, sycamore, and other -tropical trees. Beneath their feet grew a rank vegetation, and wherever -there was a bit of water, gorgeous lilies sprang up, the like of which -they had never before beheld. - -And the birds and monkeys overhead! Never had they seen such a sight, -and it seemed they would never get done wondering over it. Every tree -was full, and the air resounded with sweet song and senseless chatter. - -“Those monkeys beat any menagerie show I ever saw!” declared Gus, as -they stood watching two old fellows, who had evidently got into a -dispute over the ownership of a particular cocoanut. - -“My, just hear them call each other names! See, now the black has got -it! But the red won’t let him keep it. See, he has it now, and is going -to break it open. There! the black has it again, and he――well, by -crickety!” - -As Gus uttered the last word he dodged, and just in time. The monkey -who held the nut had discovered that he was being watched, and without -ceremony had hurled the nut at the stout youth’s head. - -“Thank you for the nut,” said Gus, picking it up and bowing in mock -politeness, “but next time please don’t present it so forcibly.” - -Going to a tree, he endeavored to break the shell of the cocoanut by -hammering the article against the trunk. As he did so, two more nuts -landed beside him. - -“Hello! what does this mean?” he exclaimed. “Did I knock those down?” - -“No, you didn’t; they threw them,” replied Oliver. “We had better get -out of here before we have our heads cracked open. Look out!” and he -dodged just as a perfect volley came raining down. - -One of the nuts just grazed Gus’s ear, causing him to cry out with -pain. He dropped the nut he held and ran across the clearing, followed -by Oliver. - -“By crickety! but that was a narrow escape!” he cried when they were -once more safe. “If one of those nuts had hit us, it would have ended -our existence right then and there.” - -“It will teach us a lesson to mind our own business,” returned Oliver. -“I suppose that monkey thought we had no right to spy into his affairs.” - -“I would like to own a monkey,” observed Gus; “that is, one that is -peaceful. I always thought them so cute.” - -“They are cute, but not always in the way you imagine. Come, I suppose -we ought to be getting back.” - -“Oh, there is lots of time! Why, we haven’t been gone half an hour yet. -Just wait; I want to pick some of those splendid flowers growing near -that pond.” - -“I wouldn’t, Gus; for all you know they may be poisonous.” - -“Do you think they are? They are awfully pretty.” - -“I don’t know; but they might be, and you had better be on the safe -side.” - -“I’ll get just one of each. Here, let me have your knife.” Gus took -Oliver’s knife and cut off the flowers he wished. “Phew, what a nasty -smell!” he cried in disgust. “That’s the worst of it, with so many -pretty flowers. The smell――oh, my! how they burn! My hand is on fire!” - -He threw the flowers away from him and danced around in pain, shaking -his hands in the air. - -“Oh, I hope you have not been poisoned!” cried Oliver. “Go wash your -hands in the pool.” - -“You won’t catch me fooling around any flowers again; that is, strange -ones,” said Gus, as he did as directed. “My, what a nasty place this -is! No wonder the railroads have to offer a man a small fortune to -work for them. I wouldn’t――Oh, Oliver, look! what is that?” And -straightening up, the stout youth pointed to the opposite side of the -bit of water. “It looked like the head of a turtle or something,” he -went on. “I wonder if there are any turtles here?” - -“I don’t see why there shouldn’t be. Still it might have been something -else. Let us go.” - -“Wait till I have a shy at it with this gourd.” Gus poised the gourd in -his hand and let drive. “There! I reckon I hit him. Oh, my stars!” - -Gus tumbled back in great haste, and Oliver did the same. The supposed -turtle’s head had suddenly lifted, and there was revealed a hissing -snake, fully eight feet long. - -“A snake!” cried both. - -For an instant the reptile seemed to stand nearly upright, its eyes -glittering, and its slimy body quivering with anger. Then with a final -hiss it darted headfirst into the pool and disappeared. - -“Huh! that gives me a chill!” cried Gus. “I wonder where he has gone?” - -“Perhaps he is coming after us,” replied Oliver. “Let us get out of -here as fast as we can.” - -“I don’t think he will make his appearance again, but still we had -better go. There may be more.” - -“There are!” cried Oliver. “See there!” He pointed almost under their -feet and pulled Gus away. “That is the same or his mate. Let us run -for it.” - -There was no necessity for the last words, for both were running as -fast as the nature of the ground would permit. The snake followed for a -short distance, and then was lost to view. - -But the boys kept right on, and it was not until both found themselves -in a perfect labyrinth of undergrowth that they slackened their pace -and finally came to a stop. - -“Thank Heaven we have got away from him,” exclaimed Gus, puffing to -catch his breath. “Huh! I can almost feel him coiling around my body!” - -“So can I,” returned Oliver. “Of all things to meet I think a snake is -the worst. I would just as lief encounter a tiger or a lion.” - -“Let us get back at once,” said Gus; “I won’t feel safe until I am in -the car, and when I am you won’t catch me leaving the train again until -we arrive at Panama.” - -“Just my sentiments,” rejoined Oliver. “Let us――” - -He stopped short. “Where are we?” - -Both suddenly gazed around them in alarm. Which way should they turn? -Neither knew. They were lost in the forest! - - - - - CHAPTER XV. - - AN ADVENTURE ON THE ISTHMUS. - - -Lost in the forest! Oliver and Gus looked at each other with blanched -faces. Here indeed was a sorry situation. What was to be done? - -On every side could be seen nothing but the dense undergrowth and tall -trees. They might be only a hundred feet from the railroad, or they -might be a mile away. - -“We were very foolish not to note the path,” said Oliver. “Have you any -idea which way we ought to turn?” - -“I have not, excepting that we might trace the way back to that pool,” -answered Gus. “And I don’t want to do that if I can help it,” he added -with a shudder. “I’d rather tramp five miles than face those snakes -again.” - -“So would I. But we must try some way. Here, let us see if we cannot -get our bearings by the sun. Now, I think this is the right direction,” -went on Oliver, after a careful survey of the light overhead. - -“And I think it is this way,” affirmed Gus, pointing out a course -directly at right angles with the other. “Come, let us try that opening -beyond.” - -Gus insisted that he was right, and somewhat against his will, Oliver -followed his chum. They crossed the clearing, and then plunged into -another mass of bushes and vines, the stout lad leading. - -“Hold up!” he shouted suddenly. “Don’t come any farther, or you’ll get -into a regular bog-hole!” And he turned and hastily scrambled back to -where Oliver stood. - -“It’s lucky I stopped where I did,” he went on; “if we hadn’t we would -have got into a pool worse than the other one was. My! what a beastly -place this is!” - -More dismayed than ever, they made their way back to the clearing. -Something must be done, but what? - -“If we don’t get back soon, the train will leave without us,” said -Oliver. “Come, let us try the direction I thought was right.” And off -they started as fast as they could. - -It was miserable walking, and before they had proceeded a hundred steps -both had their feet wet, and unfortunate Gus had his coat torn in a -dozen places. - -“It’s positively the worst place I ever got into!” he groaned. “If we -don’t get out soon I won’t have a patch of clothing left.” - -On and on they went, until Oliver called a halt. - -“No use to go farther. If this was the right road we would have crossed -the track long ago. We are going wrong, and that is all there is to it.” - -“But what shall we do?” demanded Gus, more dismayed than ever. “We -can’t stand still here.” - -Oliver leaned against a tree. Truly their position was far from -enviable. Suppose they should be left, what would they do when night -came on? - -“I don’t know,” he replied in a low voice. “If we could only――hark! -what is that?” - -Both listened intently. From a distance came the unmistakable sound of -a steam-whistle. - -“It’s the locomotive!” cried Gus. “They are getting ready to start!” - -“Hurry up,” cried Oliver. “Come, this way.” - -And he sprang off through the bushes at the top of his speed. It was a -rough journey, but what was that compared to the agonizing thought that -they might be left behind? - -Fortunately the steam-whistle continued sounding, and it proved a good -guide; for in ten minutes more they reached the railroad track, and -just beyond stood the train, all ready to start. - -“Thank fortune!” cried Oliver, and he waved his hand to the conductor -to wait for them. - -In another moment they were safe on board and in their seats, and then -the train with a final warning moved off. - -“Where have you two been?” asked Mr. Whyland, gazing in astonishment -at their torn clothing and wet feet; “I was very much afraid you might -miss the train.” - -“You weren’t half as much scared about it as we were,” responded Gus -ruefully. - -Oliver told their story. Mr. Whyland smiled, but shook his head. - -“Both of you want to be more careful,” he said. “Those flowers may have -been poisonous, and also the snakes. It is well enough to go out on a -tour of inspection, but one must be mighty cautious.” - -“I’ll not leave the car until we reach Panama,” affirmed Gus, and he -was as good as his word. - -The train moved along slowly, as if feeling its way. Gus said he could -very well walk about as fast; but when Oliver suggested that he get out -and try it, the stout youth begged to be excused. - -On the way they passed a number of villages, none of them very large, -and many of them merely a collection of bamboo huts, with a big pole -in the center, and covered over for the most part with palm leaves. -The natives appeared to be quite respectable, but not over fond of -work. Here and there a group could be seen moving slowly about, and -singing to themselves; or they were to be found in a corner dozing, or -contentedly smoking their tobacco. - -“It’s a lazy life,” said Oliver, “but I suppose the climate has -something to do with it.” - -“It has everything to do with it,” replied Mr. Whyland. “Still, the -people here are more industrious than they used to be before the -railroad was built.” - -Once the train came to a standstill. It was a sort of a station, and on -the platform stood a number of the natives of the place――tall, and not -bad-looking fellows. - -One of them held an immense quantity of small wares by a string over -his shoulder, and was trying to dispose of them. He approached the -window at which Oliver and Gus were sitting, and could hardly be made -to take “no” for an answer. - -“I don’t want any,” said Gus, for at least the tenth time. - -“_Si caballeros_,” the native insisted. “Yes, gentlemen, only feety -centa.” - -To get rid of the fellow they at last closed the window, and then the -man went off in apparent anger. - -“They have an idea down here that all Americans are rich, and free -to spend their money,” said Mr. Whyland. “The same idea prevails in -Europe, and American tourists are generally made to pay a little more -for what they purchase than other folks.” - -“I wouldn’t mind having some of the things he had to sell, but I have -no money to spare,” remarked Oliver. - -“Just my case,” put in Gus. “And it makes me mad enough to have to say -no, without having some one insist the other way.” - -The remainder of the journey took but a short while. Soon the train -rolled past a number of ancient and squalid-looking houses, and Mr. -Whyland announced that they had reached the outskirts of Panama. - -But around the odd-looking station things were not so bad. To be sure -all was new and strange to the boys, and they kept their eyes wide open -for all such sights. - -“They often have most outrageous bull-fights here,” said Mr. Whyland as -they alighted. - -“I should like to see one,” rejoined Gus. “Not that I would enjoy the -sport, but it would be so strange.” - -“I would not care to go,” put in Oliver. “I think it is too cruel!” - -“It is the height of cruelty,” responded Mr. Whyland. “I went once. It -was held on a Sunday, and a friend insisted that I should accompany -him. When the poor beasts were brought out, and a number of things done -to enrage them, I was disgusted; and when the fight began I grew sick, -not only at heart, but physically as well. What sport there is in the -thing I cannot see.” - -“Nor can any one else who has any heart,” said Oliver decidedly; “it is -nothing short of barbarism.” - -“I wonder when our steamer leaves?” observed Gus, as they walked out -upon the street. - -“To-morrow morning at ten o’clock. At least, that is what the conductor -said,” replied Oliver. - -“Suppose we go to the office and make sure,” said Mr. Whyland. “We do -not wish to take any chances. They often make changes here.” - -So off for the office of the steamship company they started. It was not -a great distance, and it took them but a few minutes. - -As they neared the spot, they met a number of their fellow-passengers -returning with fallen looks. - -“Something is wrong,” said Oliver. “I just heard that man in brown say -it was a shame to be kept waiting so long. Something has happened.” - -They were not long in finding out what that something was. In entering -the harbor, the steamship had got one of her wheels caught in some -wreckage and badly damaged. She must be laid up for repairs, and -passengers would have to wait for the next steamer. - -“And how long will that be?” asked Oliver ruefully. - -“Ten days,” was the reply. - - - - - CHAPTER XVI. - - A CHANGE OF PLAN. - - -It was dismaying news. Ten days to wait in Panama! To the boys, -especially to Oliver, it seemed an eternity. - -“Might as well settle down here,” grumbled Gus. “What in the world are -we to do, caged up in this dreary place for a week and a half?” - -“The company will have to board us,” remarked Mr. Whyland, who was -disposed to make the best of the matter. “As far as that goes it will -be their loss, not ours.” - -“But I do not wish to lose the time. I suppose Colonel Mendix is -already in San Francisco, or maybe even on his way to the mine,” said -Oliver. - -“That is true. But what can we do?” - -“I wonder if there are no other ships that carry passengers?” asked -Oliver. “In a place like this there ought to be.” - -“Yes, but we’ve got our tickets,” put in Gus. “I can’t afford to lose -the amount I paid on mine.” - -“We won’t lose that,” replied Mr. Whyland. “The company will have to -take them back for what they are worth if they cannot carry us at the -stipulated time. But is there any other steamer?” - -“I suppose we can find out by going down to the different offices,” -said Oliver. “Suppose we do that before they close for the day?” - -“A good plan,” rejoined Mr. Whyland. “I do not care to remain here any -more than you do.” - -Stopping an Englishman whom they met, they secured directions to the -various shipping-offices, and then started for the nearest at once. - -“The Neolia sails in four days,” was the reply received here; “but the -passenger list is full. No more can be taken.” - -“I don’t care much,” remarked Gus when they were once more outside. -“Four days to wait are nearly as bad as ten. Maybe we will find -something that goes to-morrow.” - -“Small chance of that, I think,” said Mr. Whyland. “Still, let us try.” - -In five minutes they were at another office. Here they were told that -no vessel would sail within several days, and nearly every one was full. - -“I thought it would be so,” said Mr. Whyland when they stood outside -once more. “Perhaps the steamship company has bought up the places.” - -At that moment a man with a nautical bearing stepped up and tapped -Oliver on the shoulder. - -“Excuse me,” said he; “but didn’t I see you in the steamship office -inquiring about passage to San Francisco?” - -“You did,” replied Oliver. “What of it?” - -“Maybe I can accommodate ye, seeing as how the Polly Eliza is going to -sail first thing to-morrow morning,” responded the stranger. “My name -is Morris, Niles Morris, and I’m part owner and captain of the Polly -Eliza, as trim a little coast steamer as there is in these parts. If -you want to ship with me, now is your chance, one or all of ye.” - -Oliver looked at the man. He was short and stout, with a ruddy face, -and his voice had a hearty ring. - -“We do want passage,” said Oliver. “What do you say?” the last to Mr. -Whyland. - -“We would like to see your vessel,” replied that gentleman. “Is she -lying anywhere near?” - -“Just down at the end of the bay. Come right along with me and I’ll -show ye. You’ll find her with first-class accommodations, even if she -is small.” - -Captain Morris led the way along the street, down a long wharf, and -into a small rowboat. In five minutes they reached a spot where a -neat-looking steamer was lying. They were taken aboard, and found what -her captain had said was true. All was as new as a pin, and it pleased -the boys as well as Mr. Whyland. - -“And you sail to-morrow morning?” said the latter. - -“Aye, sir; we’ll be outside by ten o’clock.” - -“And what will you take the three of us for?” - -“Were you going by the steamer?” - -“Yes.” - -“Then I’ll do it for just what the steamer has to allow you for your -tickets――or, in other words, I’ll take your tickets for the trip.” - -“That is certainly very fair. Are you sure you can dispose of the -tickets?” - -“Oh, a captain always can. An ordinary passenger might have trouble, -but we never do. Just give me your tickets, and I’ll give you passes on -my vessel for the trip.” - -“Well, I guess”――began Mr. Whyland. - -“How long will it take you to reach San Francisco?” put in Oliver. - -“About twenty days, if we have favorable weather.” - -“I mean at the most.” - -“Not over twenty-six days.” - -The two boys and Mr. Whyland held a brief consultation. At the -conclusion they informed Captain Morris that they had decided to accept -his offer, and the transfer of tickets was made on the spot. - -“Mr. Willett, the purser, will show you to your staterooms,” said -Captain Morris after their business was concluded. “There are two -nice ones close together that you will occupy, and he will make it -comfortable for ye.” - -Mr. Willett was called, and he at once led the way below. They found -everything as Captain Morris had described it, and in less than an hour -they felt quite at home. - -“This is a lucky thing for us in more ways than one,” said Mr. Whyland -to Oliver. “If Colonel Mendix has discovered that we are on his track -this new move will throw him off. He will think we are here in Panama -waiting for the steamer while we will be half-way to San Francisco.” - -“That is true,” returned Oliver, “and I am glad of it, although I guess -he hasn’t the slightest idea that I am after him.” - -“I wish I could say the same. But I have a feeling that that is not so -in my case. He is an awfully sharp fellow.” - -“Let us trust he has overreached himself,” said Oliver hopefully. - -They took their evening meal at a small restaurant in the town, and -later on strolled along the all but deserted battlements of the -coast, and one or two of the ancient looking streets, and around a -tumbled-down convent. - -“Panama is almost a city of the past,” remarked Mr. Whyland. “Its -former glory seems to be gone for good.” - -At nine o’clock a boat came to the wharf to take them and Captain -Morris and the first mate on board. It was a fine moonlight evening; -but as soon as they reached the deck of the Polly Eliza they went -below, so heavy was the night dew. - -Oliver, with Gus as a room-mate, slept soundly that night. When he -awoke the peculiar noise overhead told him that the ship was getting -underway. He sprang up and aroused his companion. - -“Don’t want to get up. Let me sleep,” mumbled Gus. - -“You’ve got to,” was all Oliver replied; and he gave Gus a poke that -started the stout youth at once. - -“Wonder you wouldn’t wake a fellow in the middle of the night,” -grumbled Gus, as he began slowly to dress. - -“Middle of the night? It’s seven o’clock, at least.” - -“Well, what of it? You say it as if it meant ten.” - -“Oh, come, Gus, hurry up. We want to see the steamer leave Panama――at -least I do.” - -In five minutes more Oliver was on deck, and the stout lad slowly -followed him. They found that Mr. Whyland was ahead of them. - -“We are off,” said that gentleman. “We shall not set foot on ground -again until we land in San Francisco.” - - - - - CHAPTER XVII. - - A STARTLING CRY. - - -“Won’t we stop at any points in Mexico?” asked Oliver. - -“I think not. Captain Morris is anxious to make the voyage as quickly -as possible, for he thinks he can get a good return cargo.” - -“If we had the time to spare I wouldn’t like anything better than to -stop at La Libertad, Champerico, and the rest of the towns,” continued -Oliver; “I love to see strange places.” - -“I think most every one does,” returned Mr. Whyland. “I have traveled -for many years, and I never tire of it. There is always something -unexpected turning up.” - -“I like to keep moving,” put in Gus; “I hate to stay too long in one -place. Now, take a town like Panama, for instance; a day or two is -sufficient to see all there is to be seen.” - -“You are quite mistaken there,” replied Mr. Whyland. “There are many -ancient convents and historic ruins there, which, if studied up, would -prove interesting for several weeks; that is, if you didn’t have -anything else on your mind.” - -The Polly Eliza was steaming down the bay rapidly. In a couple of hours -she had passed the point. The day was a delightful one, and the three -spent the entire forenoon on deck. - -“This used to be a very odd kind of a voyage during the first years -of the gold fever,” said Mr. Whyland. “There were very few steamers, -and the sailing-vessels took from sixty to ninety days to reach San -Francisco.” - -“Didn’t some people come by sailing-vessels all the way around Cape -Horn?” asked Gus. - -“Yes; almost all the first people that did not go overland came that -way. It was a tedious journey. The second vessel that made the trip -took nine months.” - -“Nine months!” exclaimed Oliver. “Why, that is three-quarters of a -year.” - -“When they reached the Golden Gate nearly half of the passengers were -sick with scurvy, and many of them were buried up to their necks in the -ground to cure them.” - -“I wouldn’t want to take any such trip as that,” put in Gus. “I would -get so sick of seeing nothing but water and sky I wouldn’t know what to -do.” - -“It is no easy matter to double the Horn, as it is called,” continued -Mr. Whyland. “It took that vessel nearly seven weeks to do it. Every -time she was nearly around, the fierce trade winds from the Pacific -would drive her back.” - -“I’m glad I didn’t have to go that way,” said Gus with a grimace. - -“So you see this voyage is really nothing,” laughed Mr. Whyland. - -During the afternoon it began to grow foggy, and then the two boys went -below and put their stateroom in order. - -This task was hardly completed before Gus began to feel queer and drew -down the corners of his mouth. - -“What’s the matter?” asked Oliver, although he suspected the cause. - -“I――I――am afraid I――I――” stammered the stout youth. - -“Seasick?” - -“Yes.” - -“Better rest in the bunk for a while.” - -“I guess I will.” - -In half an hour poor Gus was as bad as ever. Oliver did all for his -chum that he could think of, and even went to the purser for advice. - -“Can’t do a thing,” replied Mr. Willett. “Perhaps he may not be so bad -as he was on the trip around Cape Hatteras.” - -“I trust not,” returned Oliver. “I haven’t been seasick myself, but I -imagine it’s something awful.” - -“It is,” responded the purser. “Get it real bad and you won’t care -whether you live or not. I have followed the sea for twelve years, but -once in a while my stomach goes back on me even yet.” - -“Why, I thought sailors never got sick!” - -“That’s a big mistake. You may be a sailor all your life and get it -just as bad as if it were your first voyage. You can thank your stars -that you are not one of the seasick kind.” - -“Yes; I am lucky that way.” - -Poor Gus lay in the cabin all that afternoon and all night. In the -morning he felt better, however, and though rather weak, managed to eat -a little breakfast. - -“Now I hope I’m over it for good,” he said. “If I am not I’ll just jump -overboard, that’s what I’ll do.” - -“And make food for the sharks,” laughed Mr. Whyland. “Just look out -there at the ferocious fellows moving around. That one would just make -about three mouthfuls of you.” - -As he spoke he pointed over the side to where an ugly shovel-nose shark -was swimming leisurely along. - -“Ough!” shuddered Gus, drawing back. “I didn’t see him.” - -“I suppose he would think you were a good fat morsel,” laughed Oliver. - -There was a general smile, and then Mr. Whyland pointed directly to the -westward. - -“That is the Island of Quibo, and far back of it you can see the coast -line of Central America. We are getting along, true enough.” - -That day and the next flew by rapidly. There were many things on board -the small coast steamer that were new to the two boys, and as the -purser had taken a decided liking to them they gained much information -by “nosing around,” as Gus put it. - -One evening they found themselves far out of sight of land. All hands -enjoyed a beautiful sunset, and it was nearly eight o’clock when the -little party went below. - -“Getting more used to it?” asked Mr. Whyland, as they separated for the -night after a quiet game of dominoes in the cabin. - -“Somewhat,” replied Oliver. - -“I’m not,” said Gus. “I wish something real exciting would happen. -Something that would stir up a fellow’s blood.” - -“Are you anxious to be shipwrecked?” laughed Mr. Whyland. - -“No, not that exactly; but I hate to have things so tame.” - -“Well, maybe something will happen,” was the quiet reply. - -Little did Mr. Whyland realize how quickly his thought would become a -fact. Had he done so it is not likely that he would have gone to his -cabin with such a tranquil heart. - -When they reached their stateroom the two boys sat for a long time -discussing matters in general, the principal question being what should -each do when the steamer reached San Francisco. - -“You had better telegraph to your father, Gus. He will be very anxious -concerning your whereabouts.” - -“I’ll do that, Oliver,” was the stout youth’s reply. “I begin to see -that running away wasn’t such a brilliant thing to do after all.” - -“Now you’ve hit the nail right on the head,” replied Oliver; and he -said no more. - -Half an hour later both boys were in their berths and sleeping soundly. -How long they remained in this state neither could tell exactly. - -Suddenly Oliver awoke with a start. He jumped out on the floor -wondering what had aroused him. Gus, too, was wide awake. - -“Somebody hammered on the door,” cried the stout youth. “Maybe――” - -He did not finish, for at that instant a wild cry came from the deck -overhead. - -“Fire! Fire! Fire!” - -Both stared at each other with blanched faces. - - - - - CHAPTER XVIII. - - OLIVER’S HEROISM. - - -It would be useless to deny the fact that Oliver and Gus were -thoroughly startled when they heard the cry of fire that came from the -deck of the Polly Eliza. - -They could easily realize the danger of their situation. Out of sight -of land, and in the darkness of night, which way should they turn? What -could they do? - -“Let us hurry on deck,” cried Oliver. “There is not a moment to spare.” - -There was no need to hurry Gus, for that youth was already struggling -to get into his clothing. By the time Oliver was ready, Gus was also -dressed. As they rushed out and into the cabin, they met Mr. Whyland. -He was deadly pale. - -“I was just going to call you,” he said. “I was afraid you had not -heard the cries.” - -“What is the matter?” asked Oliver. “Where is the fire?” - -“In the forward hold. It started in some loose waste that ought never -to have been allowed there.” - -“Is it dangerous?” faltered Gus. - -“I hope not; but we cannot tell. It is a hard fire to get at.” - -By this time the three were on deck. All was confusion. The pump -attached to the engine had been brought into play, and the sailors were -pouring the water into the hold as well as they were able. - -“Don’t be alarmed,” said Captain Morris, as calmly as he could. “It may -be all over in an hour. It is a small fire.” - -“But a nasty one, I take it,” put in the purser, who stood near. - -“Why don’t the men go below and try to locate the flames?” asked -Oliver, as he noted that no one went below decks. - -“Sailors have too much horror of fire,” responded Mr. Whyland; “and -Captain Morris’s place is here on deck.” - -“They might do a good deal more good by going below,” put in Gus. - -Meanwhile the fire began to spread towards the stern. All the sailors -began to shake their heads, and several said it would be better to -spend the time in getting ready to leave the steamer. - -“Leave the ship!” exclaimed Captain Morris. “Leave the Polly Eliza! -Not much! If I wasn’t so old and asthmatic I’d go down into the hold -myself.” - -Oliver stood for a moment in meditation. - -“Let me go down,” he said suddenly. “If somebody don’t go the ship may -burn up and we’ll all go to the bottom. If I can’t do any good I’ll -come up at once.” - -And without waiting for a reply, Oliver hurried towards the partly -closed hatchway. - -There was a small step-ladder at hand, and getting the sailors to help -him put this down, Oliver took a deep breath and quickly descended into -the hold. - -“There’s bravery for you!” exclaimed Captain Morris. “I should think -this would make some of you feel mighty cheap,” he added to the men. - -It was indeed a bold thing to do. The hold was one mass of thick, -stifling smoke, and breathing down there was next to impossible. - -As soon as Oliver reached the bottom he dropped on his hands and knees. -Dragging the nozzle of the hose behind him, he crawled rapidly to the -spot where the flames arose. - -A minute later and he was right beside the fire. He saw that it was -confined to some loose waste, as Mr. Whyland had said, and also to half -a dozen bales of cloth stored close at hand. - -By the time Oliver had made this discovery his eyes were all but -blinded, and his head swam as it never had before. - -“I’ll fix this pipe fast so the water will pour right on the fire,” he -thought; “then there will be no use in staying.” - -After some little difficulty this was done. The effects of the water -pouring directly on the flames told at once. But the smoke became -thicker than ever, and Oliver hurried to the hatchway. - -As soon as he appeared in the opening he was hauled out. He was so weak -he could not stand. He sank in a heap on a seat. - -“I left the hose pouring water right on the fire,” he gasped. “If -somebody will go down you can have the fire out in ten minutes.” - -“I will go,” said Mr. Willett. “I will not be outdone by a boy, even -though he be as noble as this lad.” And he disappeared down the -hatchway. - -Anxiously those on deck waited for him to reappear. At the end of five -minutes he did so. - -“It is about out,” he reported. “The hose has soaked everything, and -there is no more danger. The smoke that is coming up doesn’t amount to -anything.” - -“Thank God it is so!” exclaimed Mr. Whyland; and everybody near echoed -the sentiment. - -“Our safety is due to this young man,” said Captain Morris, grasping -Oliver by the shoulder. “You deserve a medal for your bravery.” - -At this Oliver was compelled to blush. But he blushed even more when a -cheer, led by Gus, was taken up by all hands. - -“I didn’t do so much,” he said. - -“You did enough,” rejoined Mr. Whyland. “What more could be wanted than -that?” - -“I shall never forget the service,” put in the captain heartily; “I -don’t know what I would have done had the Polly Eliza been burned. She -has been my home for so many years.” - -A little later a number of the sailors went below, and under directions -from the purser, made a thorough search of the hold. It was thought -every spark of fire had been extinguished; but to make doubly sure two -of the men were told to remain on guard for the balance of the night -and all the next day. - -“Then I suppose we might as well go to bed again,” said Gus who, now -that the excitement was over, began to feel sleepy. - -“Yes; there is no further danger,” returned Captain Morris. “To-morrow -I will hold a strict investigation as to the cause of the fire. If I -find any of the men are to blame, they shall pay the penalty, I can -tell you.” - -Mr. Whyland went below, and Oliver followed Gus to their stateroom. -Both undressed and turned in, but it was nearly daylight before either -of them dropped asleep. - -Oliver was the first to awaken. He turned to his friend and found the -stout youth tossing and mumbling uneasily to himself. - -“Fire! Save me! save me!” mumbled Gus. - -Oliver gave him a vigorous shaking, and the stout youth sat up and -rubbed his eyes. - -“Where――where?” he stammered. “Thank goodness it was only a dream! I -thought I was down in the hole, burning up.” - -“Well, you were wishing for an adventure and you got one,” laughed -Oliver. “Want any more of them?” - -“Not just for the present,” replied Gus with a shiver. “Suppose you and -the rest hadn’t put out the fire, what then?” - -“It would have been bad enough, and no mistake,” replied Oliver. - -At the breakfast-table Captain Morris again thanked Oliver for what he -had done. He said he had found out that the fire had been caused by -friction amongst the cargo, and that no one in particular was to blame. - -During the day, the sailors busied themselves in throwing out all the -burned matter and in rearranging the cargo, so that a repetition of the -affair might not occur. - -Oliver and Gus watched the operation for a while, and then turned -their attention to the sea where countless sharks loomed up in all -directions. - -“The water here is generally full of them,” said Mr. Whyland. “I have -spent a day or two fishing for them.” - -“Fishing for them?” repeated Oliver in surprise. - -“Yes.” - -“I thought you had to spear them.” - -“Oh, no; you can catch them with a hook and line provided both be -strong enough.” - -“I’d like to try the sport,” said Gus. - -“We will do so to-morrow if Captain Morris will lend us a hook and -line. He is too busy to be bothered now.” - -The answer did not quite suit Gus. Having heard of shark fishing, he -was anxious to try it at once. A little later he procured a large hook -and a stout line from the purser, and some meat from the cook, and -began to fish on his own account. - -At this time Oliver was in deep conversation with Mr. Whyland. They -were speaking of the Aurora mine, and did not notice what Gus was doing. - -Suddenly came a sharp cry for help. Gus had caught a shark and was -unable to hold the ugly monster. The two made a dash for the rail; but -before they could reach the boy’s side the line tightened, and with a -wild cry Gus slid overboard. - - - - - CHAPTER XIX. - - GUS HAS AN ADVENTURE. - - -The accident that had happened to the stout youth was easily explained. -In order to make sure that the line should not slip through his hands, -Gus had very foolishly tied it about his wrist; and when it became -evident that he could not haul in the shark, he found that neither -could he loosen the line, which was now pulled into a hard knot. - -He then braced himself against the rail and raised the cry for help -heard by the others. But the strain on his arm was terrible, and when -the shark gave an extra heavy tug, Gus went overboard in a twinkling. - -The tension on the rope carried him fully fifteen feet from the -steamer. He struck the water with a loud splash, and then disappeared -beneath the surface. - -“Man overboard!” cried Oliver. “Good heavens! what shall we do?” - -“Man the boat!” sang out Captain Morris, who saw at a glance what had -taken place. “Quick, boys! Sharks are thick here!” - -These last words carried terror to Oliver’s heart. They could bear but -one meaning, and that was that poor Gus was in danger of being devoured. - -“What can we do?” he asked, appealing to Mr. Whyland. - -“Not much. They are getting the boat out as fast as they can. Your -friend was very foolish to tie that line fast to his wrist.” - -“See! see! the shark is making for him!” cried Oliver in a strained -voice. “What can we do? Oh, Mr. Whyland!” - -“We can do nothing. Heaven grant they reach the poor boy in time. -But――but――I fear not!” And the gentleman turned away to hide his -emotion. - -Oliver glanced around. It was terrible to be so helpless. He and Gus -were the closest of friends. He could never let his chum perish without -trying to save him. He ought to do something――he would do something! - -He looked along the deck, and his gaze fell upon a short but stout -knife that the sailors had used in cutting away some of the half-burned -bales of cloth. He picked up the knife, and taking it between his -teeth, stripped off his coat. - -“What are you going to do?” asked Mr. Whyland, hurrying towards him. - -“See if I cannot help him,” was Oliver’s determined reply. - -“But the peril――” - -“I would never forgive myself if Gus perished and I did not do a thing -to save him.” - -And before the other could interfere, Oliver was on the rail and over -the side. - -“The bravery of one boy in a thousand,” murmured Mr. Whyland to -himself. “I would give half I possess to have such a son!” - -Oliver had made a careful calculation before he left the rail, and when -he rose to the surface of the water he was not over two yards away from -Gus. He struck out at once, and in an instant was beside his friend. - -“Oliver! Save me!” - -“Is the rope fast to your wrist?” - -“Yes.” - -“Let me cut it.” - -Gus held up his arm, and the next moment the cord was severed. - -“Now strike out for the steamer,” said Oliver. “The shark is after you!” - -And side by side they struck out. - -But the shark was already close at hand. Try their best, they could not -get away from him. Gus gave a piercing shriek. - -“He is after my foot!” - -“Dive!” called out Oliver; and he set the example. - -Gus followed. When they rose again, the shark was but a few feet away. -They could see him getting ready to turn over, preparatory to opening -his jaws for a snap at either one or the other. - -The monster turned toward Gus. The stout youth gave another cry of -terror. - -“Help! Help!” - -Then Oliver thought of the knife still in his hand. Grasping the handle -of the weapon firmly, he swam up, and buried the blade deeply in the -shark’s head. - -There was a wild slashing of the monster’s tail, and the water was dyed -crimson. A moment later the boat appeared, and Gus was hauled in. - -Then the shark turned his attention to Oliver. But the boy struck out -firmly with the knife, once, twice, three times; and then the shark -turned over and floated off――dead. - -“The bravest deed I ever saw!” cried Mr. Willett, as they helped Oliver -into the boat. “After this don’t dare to tell me the age of heroes is -gone by.” - -“Can we get that shark?” panted Oliver. “I――I would like to keep some -part of the fellow as a remembrance of this event.” - -“We’ll haul him on board,” said Mr. Willett. And later on this was done. - -When they turned their attention to Gus they found that he had -fainted. It took fully a quarter of an hour’s work to restore him to -consciousness, and even then he was so weak from the terror of what had -occurred that he had to lie down for the remainder of the day. - -Now that it was all over, Oliver, too, felt rather shaky in the legs. -However, he watched the men get the shark aboard, and then spent some -time in examining the monster. - -“As large a shovel-nose as I have ever seen,” said Captain Morris. -“It’s a wonder that he didn’t make mince-meat of both of you.” - -The boy selected some of the teeth, and after they were broken out of -the jaw-bone, the carcass was sent to the galley to be tried out. - -“I guess we won’t want to go shark fishing after this,” said Mr. -Whyland. - -“No,” rejoined Oliver with a shiver; “I don’t even want to see another -of the ugly things!” - -“They are awfully dangerous creatures,” went on Mr. Whyland. “Many a -one-legged sailor has had the missing limb taken off by just such a -fellow as this.” - -“And many a sailor has had his head taken off instead of his leg,” put -in Captain Morris. “I wouldn’t do what you did for a thousand dollars!” - -“Neither would I again,” replied Oliver; “but I think too much of Gus -to let him become food for sharks.” - -After this they separated, and Oliver went down to the stateroom. No -sooner did he enter than Gus threw his arms about his chum’s neck. - -“Oh, Olly! how can I thank you?” he cried. “You saved my life!” And the -tears streamed down his cheeks. - -“Don’t try to do it, Gus. I know you would have done as much for me if -it was necessary.” - -“I don’t know. You are awfully brave. I’ll never forget it as long as I -live!” - -“I guess you’ve had enough adventures on this trip,” said Oliver. He -found his own eyes growing moist, and he thought best to turn the -matter into a laugh. - -“Yes, indeed! I sha’n’t attempt another thing while I am on board.” - -On the following day the steamer sighted Mazatlan. The course of the -Polly Eliza was now directly across the bay of Lower California. - -“We shall soon be in sight of Cape St. Lucas,” said Captain Morris; -“and unless something happens we’ll soon reach the Golden Gate.” - -Fortunately the weather remained fine, and the little party was thus -enabled to spend the days on deck. Much about the little coast steamer -pleased the boys, and Captain Morris and the others made every effort -to have the time pass pleasantly. - -“It won’t be long afore we part,” he said to Oliver. “I trust we may -meet again some day; but if we don’t you can make up your mind that -I’ll never forget what you did towards saving the Polly Eliza from -destruction.” - -“Will you remain long in San Francisco?” asked Oliver. - -“Only long enough to get my cargo. But if I can be of service to you -I’ll stay a week,” added the captain quickly. - -“I only wanted to know where the mining boards and stock companies are -located.” - -“Most of them are on Montgomery and Pine Streets. You’ll find them in -the directory.” - -“Then that’s all I want to know for the present.” - -The time seemed to drag now, so impatient were the boys to set foot on -shore. Mr. Whyland could not help but smile at both of them, though he -himself was also very eager to have the voyage over. - -But all journeys must come to an end, and one fine morning the Polly -Eliza dropped anchor just outside of one of the many wharves. - -Then the boat took them and Mr. Whyland ashore. They were not long in -scrambling up the dock. - -“San Francisco at last!” cried Oliver. - - - - - CHAPTER XX. - - A FLYING GLANCE. - - -“Yes, San Francisco at last,” repeated Gus and Mr. Whyland; and the -latter added, “Now, the question is, what is it best to do first?” - -“I guess we’ll find out quick enough,” said Oliver. “Let us take a -look about the city and see if we can find out if Colonel Mendix has -arrived.” - -“Of course he has arrived; that is, unless he stopped on the way.” - -“That is just what I mean. He may have stopped in Chicago or St. Louis -for that machinery he wished to purchase.” - -“I don’t think it would be a bad plan to look over the registers at the -various hotels.” - -“That’s a good idea,” replied Oliver. “We can do that this morning.” - -“I know what I am going to do,” said Gus. “I’m going to the post-office -and see if my father has written to me.” - -“Let’s all go,” burst out Oliver. “I am as anxious to hear from home as -any one.” - -“And so am I,” laughed Mr. Whyland. - -They had landed near the foot of Brannan Street, and now walked up to -Kearney Street. A policeman directed them to the post-office, and it -did not take the party long to reach the place. - -There were letters for all three. How eagerly Oliver cut open the -envelope and read that which had been penned by his father! This was -what he wrote:―― - - “I trust that when you receive this you will have had a - safe journey. I suppose you found the trip a tedious one, - not because it is devoid of interest, but because you were - undoubtedly anxious to reach its end and begin the active part - of your quest. - - “I received your letter containing the particulars of what - occurred in New York. I believe you are able to go ahead - without my advice, and all I have to say is, be careful; for I - am now sure that Colonel Mendix is a thoroughly bad man, and - may get desperate if brought to bay. - - “I inclose you an express money-order for one hundred dollars. - Use it as you think best. I know you will not do so recklessly. - - “I suppose that Gregory boy is with you. If he is, see that he - does not get into trouble. His parents are much worried about - him. - - “I am getting well rapidly, and expect to be about before long. - In the meanwhile I trust you will keep me posted on what you - are doing, as I am getting more anxious every day. Write as - soon as you receive this.” - -Such was the gist of the affectionate father’s epistle. But there was -much besides,――kind, loving words that need not be repeated here, but -which, nevertheless, went straight to Oliver’s heart. - -“I’ll write him a letter at once,” he thought; and buying stamps -and paper, did so, stating that a long letter would follow almost -immediately. - -Gus Gregory’s face lengthened considerably when he read the letter his -father had written to him. It was kind, but firm, and told how much all -at home had suffered on account of his unexpected departure. When Gus -read how his mother had wept over his foolish act, his own eyes grew -dim, and he half wished himself back at Rockvale. - -But the latter end of the letter was more cheerful. Mr. Gregory had -intended, during the summer following, to let his son take a trip to -Europe before settling down to college work. Now, instead, he wrote -that Gus might spend the present time in California, and give up the -trip across the ocean. - -He also inclosed a money-order for fifty dollars, and said that more -might follow when he heard what his son was doing. He also hoped that -Gus was with Oliver and that they would stay together, for he knew that -Oliver was a manly fellow and one to be trusted. - -Oliver blushed when Gus showed him this part of the letter. - -“Oh, nonsense,” he exclaimed; “you are big enough to take care of -yourself.” - -“No, I am not, as that adventure with the shark proves,” replied the -stout youth. “Just wait till I write to them about that.” - -“I suppose you will make it as sensational as you can, and put me in as -a regular dime-novel hero,” laughed Oliver; and he blushed more than -ever. - -Mr. Whyland’s letter was from his business partners, and told him that -everything in the East was running smoothly. This news brought great -relief to him, and he said that now he would be able to bend all his -energies to hunting down Colonel Mendix and the Aurora mine swindle. - -“I think we had better attend to our money-orders first,” suggested -Oliver. - -This was agreed to, and they started out at once. Being strangers, they -had some difficulty in getting the orders cashed; but finally this was -accomplished, and the two boys emerged upon the streets richer than -before. - -“Now that father has written that I can stay in California for a while, -I intend to unite my fortunes with you,” said Gus; “that is, if you -will allow me to do so.” - -“I am perfectly willing, if you wish it,” replied Oliver; “but I do not -know about Mr. Whyland.” - -“I shall be pleased to have Mr. Gregory along if he wishes to come,” -said that gentleman. “But you must remember we may have some pretty -rough experiences before we accomplish what we have set out to do,” he -added seriously. - -“I am willing to put up with whatever comes, sir.” - -“The West is not the East in more ways than one,” continued Mr. -Whyland. “Many things are mighty rough here, especially when you get up -in the mountains.” - -From the express-office they started for the nearest hotel, where they -looked carefully over the register; but looked in vain. - -“Failure number one,” said Oliver. “I suppose we may have a number of -them before we are lucky enough to strike the right house.” - -“It would be funny if we ran across this Mendix the first thing,” said -Gus. “My, wouldn’t he be surprised!” - -“He doesn’t know me, I believe,” said Oliver. - -“And that is where you have an advantage,” put in Mr. Whyland. “Perhaps -you can get into his good graces, and learn much before you make -yourself known.” - -“That is certainly an idea,” returned Oliver. - -From the first hotel they went to a number of others, but nowhere could -a trace of the colonel be found. - -“I have half an idea he uses a false name while here,” suggested -Oliver. “A man like him would not hesitate at anything.” - -“It may be so. If it is, there is no use in searching further. Suppose -we go around to some of the mining stock brokers or to the exchange? We -may find out about him there. We will certainly discover something of -the Aurora mine.” - -This was agreed to, and the remainder of the forenoon was spent down in -Pine and Montgomery Streets. They entered a great number of offices, -but no one had heard of the Aurora mine, nor did any one know such a -person as Colonel Mendix. - -“This completely baffles me,” said Mr. Whyland at last. “I was sure the -mine would be known here. How can he work it if it is not known? Such a -place must give employment to scores of men. It is a great mystery.” - -“We _must_ find out about it,” replied Oliver with determination. “I -sha’n’t give up in this fashion. If I can’t find him by his name I’ll -see if there isn’t some one who knows him from his appearance.” - -“Good! I like such grit!” cried Mr. Whyland. “If your determination has -anything to do with it we shall certainly win.” - -They were out on the street once more. Oliver had the address of a -large hotel on Market Street, and this place he said he would visit and -examine the register. - -“It won’t take a great deal of time,” he said “and I don’t want a -single chance to slip of bringing him to justice.” - -“That’s right,” put in Gus. “Do the work thoroughly while you are about -it.” - -Suddenly Mr. Whyland gave a cry and pointed to a cable-car that was -just then passing. - -“See, it is Mendix himself!” he exclaimed, indicating a man on the rear -platform. - -Oliver looked, and saw that he was right. - - - - - CHAPTER XXI. - - AN UNSUCCESSFUL PURSUIT. - - -Oliver Bright, as may be imagined, was astonished when Mr. Whyland -discovered the very man they were looking for, standing calmly on the -rear end of a passing cable-car. - -For an instant he doubted the evidence of his own eyesight, but a -second look told him that in truth it was the colonel. - -For a moment he stood still. Then he started forward to stop the car. - -But those in charge did not see him and the cable-car went bounding on -its way with Oliver after it. - -Mr. Whyland and Gus started to run also, but soon gave up the chase. - -“I am getting too old for that sort of thing,” gasped the former, as he -leaned against a building, all out of breath. - -“And I get winded too easily,” groaned the stout youth. “Oliver must -catch the fellow alone.” - -“I hope he will succeed. We may not get another such chance.” And then -they both started on a walk in the direction in which the car had gone. - -Meanwhile the car kept moving at a rapid rate, with the boy nearly a -block behind it. Sometimes Oliver would get nearer, but then he would -lose time at some crossing and the distance would be increased. - -Finally, at the end of eight or ten blocks, he managed to come up to -the car, and as it stopped, he sprang on board. - -He gave a hasty look around. Colonel Mendix had disappeared. - -Oliver was deeply chagrined. Was it possible that he had made a mistake -in the car? - -“It looks like the same car,” he thought; “but then they all look -alike.” - -Presently the conductor came to him, and Oliver asked him if a Spanish -gentleman had been aboard. - -“What kind of a looking man?” - -Oliver described Colonel Mendix as best he could. - -“Yes, he was on; got off two or three blocks back; maybe four,” was the -conductor’s reply. - -“Thank you,” replied Oliver; and he hopped off the car and started to -retrace his steps. - -“Too bad he couldn’t have remained on the car a minute longer,” he -muttered to himself. “I suppose he has disappeared into some building -or down some side street by this time. I’ll go back and take a look -around.” - -He had proceeded about three blocks when he came face to face with the -others. - -“What luck?” cried Mr. Whyland. - -Oliver told him. - -“Too bad, after such a splendid chance.” - -“I’d keep a sharp lookout for him along here,” put in Gus; “he can’t be -far off.” - -“I have a plan,” returned Oliver. “Let us separate, and each watch -several squares. By doing that we can cover nearly all the ground -necessary.” - -“A good idea,” cried Mr. Whyland. “We will carry it out at once.” - -“And where shall we meet again?” asked Gus. - -“In front of this large building,” said Oliver, “at one o’clock.” - -They immediately separated, and each proceeded to watch in his own way. -Oliver peered into every store and office, and down every street, but -without success. At the end of the time appointed he went back to the -designated meeting-place. - -Mr. Whyland was already there. - -Neither had had any luck. - -In five minutes Gus arrived. - -“I thought I saw him,” he said. “I tried to follow, but at the end of -the block I found I was mistaken.” - -“So we are now no further ahead than we ever were,” remarked Oliver, -somewhat bitterly. - -“Never mind; we won’t despair,” replied Mr. Whyland. “Remember, we have -not been a whole day at the hunt.” - -“I’m not despairing; but the sooner we find this man the better.” - -All three were now, not only tired out, but tremendously hungry. Mr. -Whyland led the way to a neighboring restaurant, and here they indulged -in a substantial dinner. - -“Now, what next?” asked Gus. - -“I’m going around to that hotel, and then the mining board again,” said -Oliver. “I shall look for him by appearance, not by name now.” - -In this quest Oliver decided to go alone. If the three were together -they might excite suspicion. - -“Then I’ll go back to the hotel where we left our baggage,” said Mr. -Whyland. - -“And I’ll go and send a telegram to my father,” put in Gus. “I suppose -he’ll be awfully anxious about me until he hears that I am safe.” - -This was agreed to, and in a moment more Oliver was on his way to -Montgomery Street. - -“You say the man you are looking for is a tall, dark Spaniard?” -inquired one of the gentleman to whom he applied. - -“Yes, sir. I thought his name was Mendix.” And Oliver described the -colonel as fully as was possible. - -“I think you mean Colonel Guerotaz,” said the man in charge of the -office. “He is interested in several mining schemes, I believe, all up -the Mokelumne River.” - -“And where can I find this Colonel Guerotaz?” asked the boy with deep -interest. - -“I do not know. He was in here several times during the earlier part of -the week. I believe he is getting ready to go up the country just as -soon as he can get some machinery shipped.” - -This last statement made Oliver feel certain that the two colonels were -the same person. Colonel Mendix had asked Ezra Dodge where he could -purchase the machinery he wanted, and that person had informed him he -could get it in San Francisco. - -“And you do not know anything of the Aurora mine?” went on Oliver. - -“I do not. There was an Aurora mine somewhere up the Sacramento River, -and another elsewhere; but both of them were abandoned years ago.” - -Oliver’s heart sank for a moment. - -“You do not know where the Aurora mine was situated?” he faltered. - -“I don’t remember exactly. But I am quite sure it was not up the -Mokelumne.” - -“Then neither of them can be the one I am looking for,” returned the -boy, with something of a sigh of relief. - -“Are you interested in the mine?” asked the man kindly. - -“My father is. Do you know the names of the mines that this Colonel -Guerotaz is interested in?” - -“The Excelsior is the principal one, I believe. Then there is the -Cortez; but I do not know much about that, nor does any one else.” - -“And they are both up the Mokelumne River?” - -“Yes; you’ll find them on the mining-map.” - -“Thank you, sir.” - -Oliver quitted the office in deep thought. Of one thing he was -certain,――Colonel Mendix and Colonel Guerotaz were one and the same -person. Now, could it be possible that the Cortez and the Aurora were -one and the same mine? - -“It seems to me,” he thought, “about the only way he could commit such -a piece of villainy would be to change the name of the mine. If he -didn’t do that any one could easily visit the place and find out its -value. I begin to understand how poor, trusting father was duped.” - -While Oliver had been in the office on Montgomery Street he had not -noticed a tall, lank fellow lounging about the door. This man had been -deeply interested in the boy’s inquiries, and when Oliver left the -place the man was not slow to follow. - -At the corner he stepped up and tapped Oliver on the shoulder. - -“Excuse me,” he said in a low voice; “but I would like to have a few -words with you on the quiet.” - -Oliver surveyed the man from head to foot. - -“What is it you want?” he asked rather shortly, for he had never seen -the fellow before. - -“Didn’t I hear you say something about the Aurora mine?” asked the man. - -“You did,” replied Oliver with sudden interest. “What of it?” - -“I know all about that mine,” was the slow reply. - -“You do?” cried the boy. “Who are you?” - -“My name is Felix Cottle. I used to be a mining boss. I worked for -Colonel Guerotaz for two years. Then we had a terrible row, and he -kicked me out; but I know a good many of his secrets.” - -“Then, perhaps you are just the man I want to see,” replied Oliver. - -“And you are just the party I want to meet,” said Felix Cottle. “By -your manner, I take it you have it in for this Spaniard, and I would do -’most anything to get square with him. What do you want to know, and -what is it worth to you?” - - - - - CHAPTER XXII. - - FELIX COTTLE. - - -Oliver looked the stranger over well before replying. Perhaps this chap -might be a tool of Colonel Mendix, in which case the less he had to do -with the fellow the better. - -“And you worked for Colonel Men――Guerotaz two years?” he asked slowly. - -“Yes.” - -“At what mine?” - -The man closed one eye and winked knowingly. - -“At the very mine you are looking for,” he replied. - -“The Aurora?” - -“That’s it, partner.” - -“Then you know its exact location?” - -“Of course.” - -“What is the mine called?” - -The man hesitated and rubbed his chin. - -“I’ll tell you what it is, stranger,” he replied slowly; “since I came -from the mines I’ve had mighty tough luck in ’Frisco, and I’m rather -hard up. Make it worth a little to me, and I’ll give you all the -information you wish.” - -“You mean you wish pay for telling what you know of the place?” - -“Well, not that exactly, only a little something to help me along. I’ve -been out of a job for over two months.” - -Oliver thought for a moment. - -“Suppose you come along with me,” he said. “I have a friend staying at -a hotel close by. He must hear what you have to say as well as I. I -will pay you for your trouble.” - -“This is a square deal?” - -“Yes. If you have any real information I will pay whatever it is worth.” - -“All right, I’ll go.” - -Oliver at once led the way to the hotel at which they had left their -traps. He found Mr. Whyland in the reading-room, looking over a copy of -the _Call_. - -He quickly acquainted the gentleman with what had taken place. Mr. -Whyland was deeply interested. - -“I guess you are right about the two colonels being the same person,” -he said. “Let us interview this stranger at once. I am willing to pay -him if he really knows anything of value.” - -Accordingly, Felix Cottle was at once brought in. He wore a rough suit -and big boots, and looked quite out of place in the well-furnished -apartment. - -“I am more at home in the mountains than here,” he remarked, as he took -a chair beside them. “I was brought up on the streets of Little Rock -when a boy; but I would rather travel a lonely trail any day than walk -the pavements of a city.” - -“You know the mining district well, I suppose?” said Mr. Whyland. - -“There ain’t much of it that I don’t know,” replied Cottle. “Before -I started to work for Guerotaz I spent twelve years and ten thousand -dollars prospecting, here, there, and everywhere.” - -“Did you have any luck?” asked Oliver. - -He was interested in the man, and besides wanted a chance to study the -stranger. - -“I had some luck the first years,――located the Alice and sold her for -fifteen thousand dollars,――but towards the last I lost every dollar I -had, and then I went to work for the colonel.” - -“And you know all about his affairs?” asked Mr. Whyland. - -The man ran his hand through his matted hair. - -“I don’t know you, and I don’t want to get into any trouble,” he said. -“I told the young man I knew some things he wanted to know.” - -“Well, you will get into no trouble with us, I can assure you,” replied -Mr. Whyland. “If you know the location of the Aurora mine and will tell -us, I will pay you well.” - -“I can take you straight to the Aurora inside of a week,” replied -Cottle in a low voice. - -“Is it a valuable mine?” - -“It was some time ago.” - -“Then that is the mine you worked in?” said Oliver. - -The man bit his lip. - -“I didn’t say so,” he said. - -“But you meant it,” put in Mr. Whyland. “Are not the Cortez and the -Aurora one and the same mine?” - -Felix Cottle started. - -“You want to know everything without paying a cent!” he cried. “I guess -I had better get out.” - -“No, don’t go,” exclaimed Mr. Whyland, catching him by the arm. “I will -pay you well. We want to get to the Aurora mine. You say you know the -road――” - -“Yes; I’ll take you there as straight as straight can be. There ain’t a -better guide in the town of ’Frisco, if I do say it myself.” - -“I suppose we’ll need a guide――” began Oliver. - -“If you don’t think so, just start out without one,” laughed Felix -Cottle in his peculiar voice. “I’ll bet you couldn’t find the mine even -if you had full directions.” - -“Why?” - -“Because of its peculiar situation. Many a man has been fooled on it.” - -“And you say you can take us there in a week?” asked Mr. Whyland. - -“I can, on horseback or muleback.” - -“And prove to us beyond a doubt that it is really the Aurora?” - -“Yes; and that it is run by Colonel Men――” - -Cottle stopped short. Oliver took him up. - -“Colonel Mendix.” He finished. - -“Yes; if you must know. But, gents, I expect you to do the square thing -to a fellow that is down on his luck.” - -“We will do the square thing,” said Mr. Whyland. “Take us to the Aurora -mine and I will pay all expenses and give you one hundred dollars for -your trouble.” - -“Is that square?” asked Cottle, leaning forward. - -“It is. If you want any references as to my reliability――” - -“Don’t want them, partner; the look on your face is enough. I’ll take -you up. A week from the day you leave ’Frisco you shall stand in the -Aurora mine. I may be a little queer, but you can depend on Felix -Cottle every time.” - -Oliver had to like the man in spite of his odd manner. Mr. Whyland was -also impressed favorably. - -After this a long conversation ensued. Cottle said that the Cortez mine -was nothing but a “fake” mine, leading underground to the real mine -of value, which was the Aurora. For several years Colonel Mendix had -reported the latter mine abandoned, which was not the case. - -“And the Aurora is really valuable?” asked Oliver. - -He spoke calmly enough, but oh, what excitement was in his breast! How -much was at stake for his father and himself! - -“I think it is,” said Cottle. “Of course the Cortez is worth something, -but the best paying rock and dirt come from the Aurora.” - -It was decided to leave San Francisco that very evening. They were to -go direct to Sacramento City, and from there fit themselves out for a -five days’ journey over and around the mountains. - -When Gus came in, he was surprised to see the stranger. He was at once -introduced, and was soon on good terms with the newly hired guide. - -Cottle remained with them for the balance of the afternoon. When -questioned as to Colonel Mendix, he said he thought the colonel would -soon be on the way to the mines. - -“And we will be directly behind,” he added. “Perhaps we may even catch -up to him.” - -“I do not wish to do that,” said Oliver. “It is time enough to meet him -when we are at the mine.” - -The party of three spent the night at the hotel. Oliver had a long talk -with Mr. Whyland, promising to share whatever expense was incurred. The -gentleman agreed to do this, but said the hundred dollars that had been -promised to Cottle must come from his own purse. - - - - - CHAPTER XXIII. - - OFF FOR THE MINES. - - -“What grand scenery this is!” - -It was Oliver who uttered the exclamation. He rode beside Mr. Whyland, -while Gus Gregory was directly behind. Cottle, the guide, was but a -short distance ahead. - -For six hours the little party had been journeying directly for the -mountains far back of Sacramento City. The road for the present was a -well-defined one, but Cottle said that before sundown it would become -little better than a wagon-track. - -“It will be as nice a road as any one wants to travel in a few years, I -take it,” he added; “but I remember the time when there wasn’t even a -respectable wagon-track. Times change rapidly out here.” - -“One would hardly think that a handful of years ago this was little -more than a wilderness,” said Mr. Whyland; “yet such is a fact. The -earlier gold-hunters were indeed pioneers.” - -“I wish I had been one of them,” put in Gus. “What excitement it must -have been, expecting that every day would bring fortune!” - -“It was exciting; but many a man would have done better to have -remained at home.” - -“You’re right there,” said Cottle. “I knew men that got reckless in -the fever and never amounted to shucks after they came away. I’ve had -my fill of it; and if I had my life to lead over again I think I would -steer clear of prospecting.” - -The three were now on good terms with the guide. They found him a -rather peculiar individual, but thoroughly honest and obliging. He -spent most of the day in describing the country through which they were -passing, and Oliver never tired of listening to his words. - -Yet the boy’s mind was busy with other things. In what condition would -they find the Aurora mine? and what would Colonel Mendix say when they -appeared so unexpectedly upon the scene? - -He could well imagine the Spaniard’s surprise. No doubt the man would -do all in his power to ward off their advances. He might even deny all -their rights to the mine. A man who had acted as the colonel had would -not hesitate at anything. - -Towards sundown they made camp in a little grove of trees to one side -of the road. To Oliver and Gus the proceedings were novel, for in all -their lives they had never passed a night in the open. - -The mules were tethered a short distance away, a fire was started, a -pot of water was set boiling for the purpose of making coffee, and from -out of the various packs the boys and Mr. Whyland took such articles as -they wished for the evening meal. - -“To-morrow we will be getting more into a game country,” said Cottle, -as they sat down to eat, “and then maybe I’ll show you one or two good -things to shoot. Can any of you handle a rifle?” - -“I can shoot some,” replied Gus. - -“I have often gone gunning in the woods back of Rockvale,” replied -Oliver; “but I never tried my hand at any big game.” - -“We had better leave the big game alone,” laughed Cottle. “As I -understand it we are not on a hunting tour, and it would take too much -time.” - -“You are right,” said Mr. Whyland with a smile; “we are after game of a -different sort.” - -There was a general laugh, and then Gus observed,―― - -“But I would like to have a shy at a bear or something.” - -“Better leave bears alone,” put in Cottle with a shudder. “I went after -one once and it nearly cost me my life.” - -By the time the meal was finished the sun had set, and then it grew -dark rapidly; while the dew became so heavy that Oliver wrapped a -blanket about him to keep out the cold, and they all gathered together -under a big tree. - -Cottle arranged a temporary tent by throwing a double blanket over one -of the lower boughs of the tree. He said this would be ample shelter -so long as it did not rain. Then some dry boughs were strewn upon the -ground, and he invited all hands to turn in as soon as it pleased them -to do so. - -It may well be imagined that Oliver slept but little that night. The -novelty of the situation, as well as the strange sounds around him, -kept him awake until far into the small hours of the morning. He was -the first up, and by the time Cottle and the others had their eyes -open, he had the fire started and the water in place. - -“I’m as stiff as a starched collar,” groaned Gus as he arose; “if it’s -all the same, I’ll sleep in a bed to-night.” - -“You won’t see a bed for several weeks I’m afraid,” laughed Mr. -Whyland; “that is, unless you want to turn back.” - -“Turn back? Not much! I think this is a jolly good lark!” And that was -the end of Gus’s grumbling. - -They were soon on their way. As Cottle had said, the road now became -little more than a wagon-track, crossed and recrossed in many places. - -“It is lucky Cottle is along,” said Mr. Whyland to Oliver, as they -dropped a bit behind. “We could never find the right track by -ourselves. To me half a dozen appear to be the right ones.” - -“That is so,” returned the boy. “It isn’t like a city with a signboard -at every corner. One could get completely lost without half trying.” - -“We must keep close together. I will warn your friend too. Should one -or the other stray away, much time might be lost in coming together -again.” - -The path was now up the side of quite a steep mountain. It was full -of huge bowlders from around which the rain had long since washed all -the sand and gravel. To one side grew small trees and thick bushes, -while on the other was a steep incline, leading far below to a raging -mountain torrent. - -“Rather a dangerous place,” observed the boy as he gazed down into the -rushing waters; “if this mule should take a false step”―― - -“But they never do, as far as I ever heard,” said Mr. Whyland. “They -know the danger quite as well as the rider.” - -Instead of getting better the road grew worse, until Cottle stopped and -allowed those in the rear to catch up. - -“This path has been partly washed away since I was over it before,” he -said. “You want to be careful. If it gets much worse, we will have to -turn back and take another road that is better, but nearly twice as -long.” - -“We will follow you,” said Mr. Whyland. “We trust ourselves entirely in -your hands.” - -After this they kept close together. The mules no longer stepped -forward with ease. Each head was down, and every foothold was tested -before the step was taken. - -Narrower and narrower grew the path until it was scarcely two feet -wide. Here the decline on the one side became little better than a -precipice. - -At last Cottle came to a halt. - -“It is no use,” said he; “we will have to take the other path around -this mountain. Last week’s storm has ruined this road for good. Can you -turn around or back to that small turnout?” he asked of Oliver, who was -in the rear. - -“I’ll try,” replied the boy. “I guess I had better get off and lead -Dobbins.” - -“Be careful,” Mr. Whyland warned him. - -“Yes, be careful,” said Cottle; “that mule ain’t the kindest critter in -the world.” - -Throwing the reins on the animal’s neck, Oliver essayed to slide to the -ground. As he did so, Dobbins shied nervously to one side. - -“Look out there!” yelled Cottle. “Catch him quick!” - -“Yes, yes! Catch him!” echoed Mr. Whyland, while Gus sat still, too -terrorized to speak. - -Oliver tried to catch the beast as bidden, but again Dobbins shied. - -The movement threw the boy to the very edge of the path. He tried -to save himself, but it was useless; and the next instant his body -disappeared over the edge! - -[Illustration: THE NEXT INSTANT HIS BODY DISAPPEARED OVER THE EDGE!] - - - - - CHAPTER XXIV. - - IN THE MOUNTAINS. - - -Without an instant’s warning, Oliver Bright found himself in a -situation that thrilled him with horror. As he went over the edge of -the narrow path he did his best to save himself, but, as has been told, -it was useless; the grass he clutched came out by the roots, and then -he found himself going down and down, he knew not where. - -He turned over and over as he rolled, and uttered several wild -cries――cries that fairly pierced the heart of Gus, Mr. Whyland, and -Cottle the guide, who could do nothing to save him. - -The descent was fully sixty or seventy feet. Just before reaching the -whirling torrent below, Oliver’s body struck a projecting rock, and -this encounter, rude as it was, undoubtedly saved his life. - -This can be easily seen, when it is told that to have fallen into the -river would have been instant death. The current would have dashed him -directly on the rocks, and that would have ended all. - -But when Oliver’s body struck the rock that projected from the decline, -the blow caused it to bound several feet out of its course, and in -doing this he was hurled directly into the branches of a short and -stout fir-tree. - -By this time consciousness had forsaken him, and his body hung among -the branches, a limp, inanimate mass. - -“My heavens! the boy will be killed!” cried Mr. Whyland, who was the -first to recover from the awfulness of the situation. - -“It’s a bad tumble,” replied Cottle, shaking his head. - -As for Gus he could not say a word. Suppose Oliver was killed? The very -thought sent shiver after shiver through his frame. - -“We must hurry down to him somehow,” went on Mr. Whyland; “how can it -be done?” - -“I think there is a path a little way ahead,” replied the guide. “Come, -we will dismount and see.” - -His directions were instantly followed. Sure enough, a little distance -farther there was a break where a tiny watercourse led to the river -below. - -It did not take them long to reach the bottom of the ravine, and once -down there they hurried back with all possible speed. - -“He must have come down somewhere about here,” said Cottle, as he came -to a halt; “but I don’t see anything of him.” - -“Oh, I hope he hasn’t been carried down the river!” cried Gus; and he -added in a low tone, “Poor Olly! if he is dead, oh, what will I do? It -will break his father’s heart!” - -“I don’t see――” began Mr. Whyland, and then, happening to glance up, he -ejaculated, “here he is up in the tree!” - -In a moment more Cottle had climbed the tree and had the body on the -ground. He loosened Oliver’s collar, and applied his ear to the boy’s -heart. - -“Is he――is he alive?” faltered Gus. - -“Oh, yes; but he has had a severe shaking up. Bring some water from the -river.” - -Gus hurried off to do so. When he returned Oliver was just stirring. -Mr. Whyland put some of the water on his face and hair. - -Presently Oliver opened his eyes and sat up. - -“Where am I?” he asked faintly. “What――what――oh, I remember now! I -didn’t go into the river, did I?” - -“No, thank God, you did not,” replied Mr. Whyland. “It was a most -miraculous escape!” - -“How do you feel?” asked Gus. “I hope there are no bones broken.” - -“I feel sore all over. Give me some of the water.” - -Cottle gave him a drink, and carefully noted its effect. - -“Did it hurt when it went down?” he asked. - -“No.” - -“Then that’s all right. If you were injured internally you couldn’t -drink without having a pain. Better take it easy for a little while -though.” - -“I’ll have to,” replied Oliver with a suppressed groan; “I’m too sore -to move much. Where is my mule?” - -“Up on the path with the others. I’ll turn them back to the other -trail. All hands take it easy for an hour or so till I get back.” - -In a moment more Cottle was gone. Gus and Mr. Whyland sat down beside -Oliver, one on either side. - -“I’m so glad, Olly,” cried the stout youth. “When I saw you go over -my heart jumped right into my mouth, just as if I was going myself. -Crickety! but it was a nasty fall and no mistake!” - -In half an hour Oliver arose slowly to his feet. As he had said, he -ached in every joint, and his head, too, felt queer, but otherwise he -was all right. - -“But I never want another such tumble,” he declared. “I shall never -forget it if I live to be a hundred years old!” - -At the specified time Cottle came back. He had succeeded in turning the -mules, and had found a much better path a little to the northward. - -“Then we might as well go on,” said Oliver; “there is no use in wasting -time here.” - -“Do you feel able to go on?” asked Gus. - -“I think so. We can try it any way.” - -Mr. Whyland could not help but smile at the boy’s determination. - -“You have lots of backbone!” he declared. “Well, since you say so, we -will go on; but if you find it hurts you, don’t hesitate to speak.” And -up to the path above they went, and then back to where Cottle had left -the mules. - -Walking pained Oliver considerably, and he was glad enough when he -could sink once more into his easy saddle. Then the guide went to the -front, and the onward journey was resumed. - -By two o’clock in the afternoon they had passed around the northern -base of the mountain, and were entering a long and narrow valley. -Before them loomed a long, low range of hills, and Cottle said that -the Aurora mine was located just beyond, and about forty miles to the -north-east. - -The scenery upon all sides was magnificent, and had Oliver’s mind been -free from anxiety, and his body without pain, he would have enjoyed it -to the fullest extent. Even as it was, he sometimes reined up his mule -to drink in the prospect. - -“Beats the East all to bits!” he said to Gus as they rode side by side. - -“You are right. I would rather take a trip about here than go to Europe -ten times over.” - -“And yet you will find thousands of people who prefer the latter trip,” -put in Mr. Whyland. “Some have gone to Europe half a dozen times and -never come West once.” - -“I guess they go because it’s the style,” suggested Cottle. “But as for -me, Uncle Sam’s domain is good enough every time.” - -The riding was now much easier and all hands urged the mules to a -better gait. - -“If we can, we will make Billy Ford’s cabin before we halt,” said the -guide. - -“And who is Billy Ford?” asked Oliver. - -“An old timer who keeps a sort of cross-roads store and tavern,” -laughed Cottle. - -“A store! ’Way out here!” cried Gus. “Who in creation can he have for -customers?” - -“Miners come to him for forty miles around. Billy has been here since -prospecting first began. We won’t buy much from him because he is so -terribly high in prices; but you had better patronize him a little, -just to keep him in good humor.” - -On and on they went, until, just as the sun was setting over the -mountain they had just passed, Cottle pointed to a cabin far ahead. - -“There is Billy’s,” he said. - -In a quarter of an hour they had reached the spot. It was where the -road crossed a small mountain stream. Ford’s cabin proved to be a rude -structure of logs plastered over with mud. A sign hung outside, stating -that provisions and drinks were to be had on reasonable terms. - -As they rode up, the proprietor came out, gun in hand. As soon as he -saw Cottle, however, he lowered the weapon. - -“Hello, Felix! Who you got thar?” he asked. - -“A party bound for the mines, Billy,” was the guide’s reply; and he -jumped down and held out his hand. - -“So? All right.” The two shook hands. “Going to squat here over night?” - -“Reckon to, unless you say no.” - -“That’s all right. Come in, gents,” and Ford turned to the others. -“Suppose Cottle’s told you all about my ranch?” - -“He told us something,” said Oliver as he dismounted. - -The party were soon on the ground, and Cottle turned to take care of -the horses. As he did so, Ford walked up to him. - -“Say, Felix, it’s a wonder you didn’t strike this place last night,” he -said with a laugh. “There might have been some fun if you had. Your old -boss, Colonel Guerotaz, stopped here.” - - - - - CHAPTER XXV. - - A STORM IN THE MOUNTAINS. - - -Oliver Bright was as much surprised as Cottle to hear Ford’s words. -Colonel Mendix had stopped at the place only the night before! They -were indeed close upon his heels. - -Without replying, the guide turned an inquiring look towards the boy. -Oliver at once spoke up. - -“You say Colonel Guerotaz was here last night?” - -“Yes,” replied Ford. “Know the man?” - -“I know of him. Was he alone?” - -“No, no; had two new hands with him.” - -“Did they have any baggage? I mean heavy stuff?” - -“Not as I know of. Are you off to see him?” went on the keeper of the -store curiously. - -“We are,” replied Oliver. “What time did the colonel leave?” - -“At sunrise this morning. Oh, he’s a spry fellow, I can tell you.” - -Oliver said no more, but walked back to Mr. Whyland and Gus. - -“Colonel Mendix is just a full day’s journey ahead of us,” he said. “I -wonder if it is likely that we catch up with him before we reach the -mine.” - -“I don’t believe that would be advisable,” was Mr. Whyland’s reply. - -“Nor I,” responded Gus. “I don’t want to face the man until we reach -the mine.” - -“We will tell Cottle of this. He can easily keep a lookout ahead.” - -As soon as the mules were cared for, the little party entered the -store. It was a place scarcely twenty feet square, lit up in the -daytime by three dirty windows and at night by a couple of smoky lamps. - -The air was redolent of the aroma of various groceries, mixed with the -smell of tobacco and liquor. Oliver remained about five minutes, and -then went out and sat down on the little porch to catch his breath. - -Behind the store there was one room, used by Ford as a dwelling. In -this apartment all hands were invited to spend the night with the -proprietor; but all, with the exception of Cottle, declined with -thanks, Oliver saying that now they were in the mountains, they would -prefer to sleep in the open. - -“I couldn’t sleep in that place if I was paid for it,” he told Gus, -when the three were alone. - -“Nor I,” replied the stout youth. “Crickety! the smell was strong -enough to walk! I don’t see how Ford stands it.” - -“It is a matter of habit,” laughed Mr. Whyland. “Just as the families -of a wild tribe all live in one wretched hut. With so much pure air -around, one would think they would want just that and nothing else, but -the opposite is the fact.” - -However, not wishing to offend Ford, they had him furnish them with -supper and breakfast, and before leaving, Mr. Whyland purchased from -him a pound bag of tobacco for a dollar, which he afterwards presented -to Cottle for use in his stump of a pipe. - -Half an hour after sunrise on the following morning they bade the -storekeeper good-by and were off. Each one was in the best of spirits, -though Oliver was still sore from his frightful tumble. - -The little stretch of plain before them was soon crossed. At its -termination they came to a narrow defile, between a small mountain on -one side, and some rugged rocks and bushes on the other. - -“Were it not for these natural roadways the journey from one place to -another would be next to impossible,” said Mr. Whyland as they rode -along. - -“I believe you,” said Oliver. “However would we be able to climb this -mountain, small as it is? No mule could ascend such a steep place.” - -“Don’t be too sure about that,” put in Cottle; “it is wonderful what a -mule can do when put to it. But such an undertaking breaks them all up.” - -At noon they found themselves still in the pass. Gus stated that he was -growing tremendously hungry, but Cottle said they had better wait for -dinner. - -“We want to get out of this pass as soon as possible,” he added; “in a -couple of hours it won’t be a safe place to be in.” - -“Why, what do you mean?” exclaimed Oliver. - -“I see some bad looking clouds over there,” replied the guide, -pointing with his finger. “We are going to have a storm some time this -afternoon.” - -“A storm!” cried Gus. - -“Yes; and I won’t be surprised if it is a heavy one.” - -“Then why not seek shelter somewhere here?” went on Gus. “I am sure we -can keep dryer here than out in the open.” - -“Not much!” responded the guide. “If that storm is heavy this place -will be a mighty dangerous one. Come, we must hurry along.” - -“And why dangerous?” asked Oliver as they urged the mules forward. - -“On account of the rocks that roll down the mountain, and the wind. At -times it is something fearful. We must lose no time. I was in a storm -down in the Gedney Pass one day in September two years ago, and I will -never forget it. Hark!” - -As Cottle concluded, a low rumble far to the north-west was heard, a -rumble that seemed to rise and fall like the billows of the ocean. - -“It’s coming!” cried the guide. “Forward as fast as you can!” - -His directions were followed instantly. The mules seemed to understand -the situation and did their best. - -On and on they went, the sky above them each instant getting blacker -and the roll of thunder coming nearer. Then a puff of heavy wind swept -past them. - -“It is coming!” shouted the guide. “Hurry up, all of you.” And away he -went faster than ever. - -Oliver and Gus were close behind. Mr. Whyland brought up the rear. -Another rush of wind followed, and then it seemed to grow black as -night. - -“We are going to catch it and no mistake!” exclaimed Oliver. “I wish we -were out in the open once more.” - -“Half a mile farther will fetch it,” cried Cottle. - -He could say no more, for at that instant a flash of lightning fairly -blinded them. Then came a deafening roar of thunder that lasted fully -five minutes, followed by a perfect deluge of rain. - -Oliver pulled his hat far down over his head and eyes, and buttoned -his coat up tightly. But it was no use; in one minute he was soaked to -the skin. - -“Don’t stop!” called out Cottle during a brief lull. “We must get out -of here if we wish to save our lives!” - -Nobody replied; but every one understood the importance of his words. - -Oliver’s mule was now getting winded, and the boy had great trouble -in making him keep up the pace. He patted the animal and spoke -encouragingly to him, but all to no purpose. In a moment more they had -dropped behind. - -“What is the trouble?” asked Mr. Whyland, slacking his pace. - -“The mule won’t go. He is winded, I guess.” - -“He must go. Keep him at it.” - -Another clap of thunder followed. The mule pranced about wildly. All -the others had gone ahead, and Oliver was left alone to deal with the -animal. - -“Whoa!” he called out. “Whoa, Dobbins!” - -But Dobbins would not stop his prancing. Another clap of thunder, and a -mass of rocks came crashing down close to the spot where the mule stood. - -In a twinkling his hind feet rose in the air, and his rider was -unseated and thrown to the ground. Then Dobbins tore away, leaving -Oliver to his fate. - - - - - CHAPTER XXVI. - - THE AURORA MINE AT LAST. - - -Oliver now found himself in an exceedingly perilous position. The rain -came down in such a torrent that he could not see five yards ahead, and -what had become of his mule he did not know. - -He picked himself up from the spot where he had been thrown, and -crouched for a moment under an overhanging rock. As he did so, a -blinding flash of lightning swept by, and on the instant a tall tree -that stood not over two hundred feet away was split from the top to the -bottom, and was wrapped in a blaze of fire! - -The sight nearly made Oliver faint. The air was charged with a peculiar -odor,――probably sulphur,――and the boy gasped for breath. - -“Struck by lightning!” he muttered. “Thank Heaven I was not nearer!” It -took him several moments to recover sufficiently to proceed on his way. -Then he stumbled on and on, falling half a dozen times. And all the -while the rain came down in sheets, until he thought a perfect deluge -had overtaken him. - -“I wonder where the others are?” he muttered. “No use to call; my voice -couldn’t be heard a dozen steps away in this wind.” - -Ten minutes passed. He had progressed probably the eighth of a mile. -The stones of the road cut into his soaked boots, and made his feet -pain as they never had before. He was all out of breath, and sat down -under an overhanging rock. - -“If this is life in the mountains I want none of it,” was his thought. -“If a rock should roll down upon me I would be crushed into a jelly.” - -He wished earnestly that he was once more with the others. What if he -should miss them by the way? The thought made him shiver. - -“I wouldn’t be alone out here for a million dollars!” he cried aloud, -and his voice sounded strange to himself. “I must hurry and catch up by -some means.” - -As he concluded, a peculiar noise ahead made him start. What was it? -Some wild animal? - -He sincerely hoped not. His weapons were all upon the mule’s back, and -if attacked he would be next to defenseless. - -The sound came from a bend above. For several seconds Oliver hesitated -about proceeding. - -And yet it had to be done. He must go ahead; there was no other way. - -While hesitating, the sound was repeated. But this time it was louder -and more capable of interpretation. In spite of himself the boy gave a -low laugh. - -“Dobbins!” he cried. And in a moment more he was around the bend. - -True enough, there stood the mule, shivering and braying all to himself. - -It did not take Oliver long to climb upon the animal’s back, and once -there he urged the beast on as before. Dobbins had had a short rest, -and struck out well. - -“Now to find the others. They cannot be so very far away. Get up, -Dobbins, you rascal!” - -In a few moments more the narrow pass came to an end and Oliver found -himself upon an open plain. He tried to peer through the darkness and -rain. - -To the southward he thought he could discern three figures moving -about. Were they his party? - -“I ought to be sure before I move away,” he told himself. “Suppose I -fire a shot and see?” - -No sooner had the thought entered his mind than he decided to act upon -it. The sound of the report had hardly died away before an answering -shot was wafted back to him. - -“Thank goodness I have found them,” he cried. And the next instant he -was off at the top of Dobbins’s speed. - -Gus came out to meet him. Despite the rain the stout youth’s face was -covered with a broad smile. - -“Crickety! but I’m glad you’re here!” he called out. “I was afraid the -storm would swallow you up.” - -“And it nearly did,” replied Oliver; “I’ve had a narrow escape.” - -By the time they had reached the others the rain began to abate as -rapidly as it had come on. The dark, angry clouds broke up in all -directions, and presently a glint of sunshine appeared far in the west. - -“Always act that way,” said Cottle. “This is the blamedest region for -such showers ever was.” - -All gathered around Oliver to hear what he had to say, and all agreed -that his escape was miraculous. - -“After this we must be more careful to keep together,” said Mr. Whyland -gravely. “He might have lost his life and none of us been the wiser. I -did not miss you, Oliver, till we were out here.” - -“Nor did any of us,” put in Cottle. “I tried to look back for you, but -the rain was too thick; I couldn’t see a thing.” - -In half an hour the sun was shining as brightly as ever. As the day was -warm all hands took off their coats and hung them on their mules’ backs -to dry. - -“We may as well make camp before any of us take cold,” remarked Mr. -Whyland; “it is only about an hour from sunset.” - -“There is a good spot just a quarter of a mile farther,” said Cottle. -“We will be there in five minutes.” - -Quarter of an hour later they were in camp. The tent was pitched on a -bit of high, sandy ground, and a roaring fire was started just outside -of the entrance. The following day was Sunday. Cottle would have gone -ahead as usual; but the boys and Mr. Whyland voted to remain in camp -and take a rest, and let the mules do the same. - -“Besides,” said Oliver, “nothing will ever be gained by breaking in on -the Sabbath when there is no absolute necessity for so doing.” - -“You are right,” said Gus. - -“I like to hear young men talk like that,” put in Mr. Whyland; “it -shows a proper spirit. Let us spend the day as it should be spent.” - -“Not many men keep the day out here,” remarked Cottle. “Many of them -don’t know what a Sunday is after they once leave the city.” - -The entire Sunday was a beautiful one. After breakfast Mr. Whyland -read several chapters out of a Bible he had brought along, and offered -prayer; and then they took a long walk about the neighborhood, leaving -Cottle lying in the door of the tent smoking his pipe and watching the -mules. - -“As I have heard remarked, this is God’s country, and so in very truth -it is,” said Mr. Whyland. “Some day all these hills will be dotted with -farmhouses and barns, and the sound of the thresher and reaper will be -heard on every hand.” - -“It is a rich country,” returned Oliver. “I would not wish for better -farming lands than these.” - -“And yet all who come here do so only for gold and silver,” put in Gus. - -“It will not be so long. The people who mine must live, and somebody -must raise the stuff for them to eat.” - -“In that direction lies the Aurora mine,” went on Mr. Whyland, pointing -with his finger to the south-east. “Cottle says we ought to reach it by -Tuesday noon.” - -“Colonel Mendix has already arrived there, I suppose,” said Oliver. -“Won’t he be surprised when we appear on the scene?” - -“No doubt he will do all in his power to outwit us.” - -“But he shall not do it,” said Oliver decidedly. And he meant it from -the bottom of his heart. - -Sunrise on Monday found them once more on the way. Riding was now much -easier, and they made rapid progress, all traveling side by side. - -That night they encamped near the edge of another mountain torrent. It -was a beautiful spot, the prettiest they had yet stopped at. - -Oliver sat on a flat rock, his chin in his hands. It was the last -night’s camp on that lone spot. What did the morrow hold in store? - -All through the night he slept but little. Once Gus awoke and noticed -it. Rolling over, he whispered,―― - -“Don’t worry, old boy; it will be all right, mark my words.” - -“I trust so,” replied Oliver. “I wish it was over.” - -He was the first to be stirring, and he cautioned Cottle to halt as -soon as the mining district should appear in sight. Then in a short -quarter of an hour they were off. - -On and over the plain, five, ten, fifteen miles. Then they began slowly -to ascend a steep but small mountain, halting at the top. - -“There,” said the guide, pointing to a spot not a quarter of a mile -away, “there is the Cortez mine, and just below it is the Aurora!” - -[Illustration: “THERE IS THE CORTEZ MINE, AND JUST BELOW IT IS THE -AURORA.”] - - - - - CHAPTER XXVII. - - AN INTERESTING CONVERSATION. - - -The Aurora mine had been reached at last! - -Oliver Bright, as he sat on his mule, drew a long breath. His tedious -journey had come to an end. - -“The Aurora mine!” he repeated. “That way, beyond that row of -buildings, is the Aurora mine?” - -“It is the shaft leading to it,” said Cottle. “It is a very peculiar -mine, running, as it does, parallel to the mountain for some six -hundred feet. I could never understand how Colonel Guerotaz, as he -is called, could abandon it, seeing as it paid so well; but when he -approached it from the extremity of the Cortez I began to smell a -mouse, and what you have told me makes it as plain as day. He will be -greatly surprised to see you.” And the guide gave a long, low laugh. - -“I have been thinking I had better go down alone,” said Oliver. “He -will know you, Mr. Whyland, and you too, Cottle.” - -“I have been thinking the same thing,” replied the former. “But you had -better take Gregory with you, and if you get into any trouble fire off -your pistol. You know what to say.” - -“Of course,” replied Oliver; for he and Mr. Whyland had had too many -conversations on the matter for him to make any mistake. - -A little later Oliver and Gus rode forth from the bushes in which the -confab had taken place, and headed directly for the group of buildings -below. - -“Hope you ain’t nervous, Olly,” said the stout youth, as they moved on -at a rapid gait. - -“I am anxious but not nervous,” was the low reply. “This Colonel -Mendix has grossly wronged my father, and I intend to have matters set -straight.” - -“I’m feeling mighty funny myself――” - -“If you want to go back――” began Oliver. - -“Not a bit of it; not if I knew I was going to have my head taken off,” -cried Gus. “What, after all you did for me on the Polly Eliza! Not -much!” and he spurted on ahead. - -In a few minutes they had arrived at the row of buildings. Only a -single man was in sight, the rest probably being at work. - -“Is Colonel Men――I mean Colonel Guerotaz anywhere about?” asked Oliver. - -The man stared at them. - -“Reckon you’ll find him over there in the office,” was the slow answer. -“Anything particklar?” - -But Oliver did not reply. Riding over to the building indicated, he -dismounted, followed by Gus, and rapped loudly upon the door. - -“Come,” said a sharp voice from the inside; and they entered. - -It was a plain room, furnished with a desk, a small safe, and half a -dozen chairs. In one corner lay a number of specimens of ore; and that -was all. - -In front of the desk sat Colonel Mendix, deep in the perusal of a -number of written statements. He glanced up in surprise as the two -entered. He had expected to see some of his own workmen. - -“Hello! Who are you?” he exclaimed. - -“Is this Colonel Guerotaz?” asked Oliver, advancing as calmly as he -could, though his heart beat as it never had before. - -“That’s my name,” was the short reply. “And you are?” - -“A couple of mine-hunters all the way from San Francisco,” returned -Oliver. “This is my friend Mr. Gregory. My name is Oliver.” - -The Spaniard bowed. - -“I am pleased to meet you, Mr. Oliver,” he said, falling into a natural -mistake, as Oliver had intended he should. “You are looking for a mine?” - -“Yes; a mine that was located a number of years ago.” - -“And what mine was that?” - -“The Aurora.” - -The Spaniard turned pale, and clasped his hands together. - -“I――I――know of no such mine around here,” he faltered. - -“Not at all?” asked Oliver sharply. - -“No, no; I am quite sure. What makes you think there is a mine by that -name near here?” - -“I did not say it was near here, did I?” asked the boy innocently. - -“Oh!” Colonel Mendix breathed a sigh of relief. “I thought――” - -“But I am told it is quite near here,” went on Oliver. - -Colonel Mendix jumped to his feet. - -“Who told you that?” he demanded. - -“Mr. Arthur Bright.” - -“Arthur Bright! I don’t know such a man.” - -“His son says you do.” - -“His son!” the man staggered back. “Where did you meet his son?” - -“His son was in San Francisco about a week ago.” - -“I――I――did not know he had a son,” faltered the colonel. - -Oliver could not help but smile, the man was so confused. - -“If you do not know the man it is not likely that you would know he had -a son,” he said. - -Colonel Mendix jumped to his feet. - -“I want none of your smart sayings, young man!” he said. - -“And I haven’t anything very smart to say,” replied Oliver. “I only -want to know the location of this Aurora mine.” - -“What do you want to know that for?” - -“I want to find out about it for Mr. Bright.” - -“Did he send you?” - -“No; but he could not come himself, and so I came for him. He said the -mine was somewhere out here, and I promised to look it up.” - -Colonel Mendix looked at Oliver sharply for a moment. - -“Who ran this mine?” he asked slowly. - -“Colonel Mendix.” - -At the mention of that name the Spaniard could not help but flinch. But -he quickly recovered. - -“Ah, yes, I knew Colonel Mendix,” he replied. “He went to South America -several years ago.” - -“He did?” - -“Yes. If you are after the mine he opened I can tell you all about it. -But it is of small consequence, I can assure you.” - -“Why?” - -“Because the mine is utterly worthless. Colonel Mendix had great hopes -of it proving a bonanza and sunk a good deal of money in it. The -investment made him a poor man.” - -“Was it all his own money he used?” - -“I think he had some Eastern capitalists interested; but when he saw -the mine was a failure he never tried to settle the matter; simply sold -off the machinery to pay off the indebtedness, and cleared out.” - -“Have you heard from him since?” - -“Never.” - -“And where is the mine? I would like to be able to tell Mr. Bright that -I had seen it.” - -“It is about a quarter of a mile below here, and half-way up the -mountain. Follow the wagon-track that leads to the south and you cannot -miss it.” - -Of course Oliver knew that the man was telling a falsehood; yet he -wished to hear all the colonel might have to say. - -“And the claim is quite abandoned?” he asked. - -“Entirely. It would not pay to reopen it under any consideration. This -mine of mine, the Cortez, pays but poorly, and it is by far the best in -the district.” - -“Thank you, we will take a look at the mine you speak of and then come -back,” said Oliver; and the two withdrew, leaving the Spaniard gazing -after them earnestly. - - - - - CHAPTER XXVIII. - - COLONEL MENDIX IS ASTONISHED. - - -“I believe that man would lie when the truth would do!” burst out Gus, -when they had ridden out of hearing. “Of course you don’t take any -stock in what he says.” - -“No, indeed! Even if Cottle had not told us all about his little trick, -I would never believe him after he had passed himself off as somebody -else. We will ride on in the direction he indicated as far as he can -see us, and then turn back to where we left Mr. Whyland.” - -This was done; and fifteen minutes later they had rejoined their friend -and the guide. - -“I was getting a little worried,” said the former; “well, what luck?” - -Oliver told him of what had occurred. - -“The old fraud sent you off to the Johnny Brill mine!” burst in Cottle. -“Brill opened it, and when it was nearly played out, turned it over to -Mendix; why I never knew, excepting that the Spaniard wanted to palm it -off as the Aurora.” - -“That was probably his scheme,” said Mr. Whyland. “He is a deep one. I -wish I knew just where he keeps all of his papers.” - -“There was a safe in the place called the office,” replied Oliver. - -“Yes; but he may have some place in San Francisco――” - -“Guess not,” returned the guide. “I reckon you will find all you want -right in that little building.” - -“If we could only get hold of them――” - -“I’d ride in and take possession,” continued Cottle. “If you have a -right to the mine I wouldn’t wait a minute.” - -“We have if it’s the right mine,” said Oliver. - -“I can vouch for it that it is. I know every foot of the ground around -here.” - -“Here is the description of the mine,” said Oliver, producing the -papers. “Listen, I will read them off;” and he did so. - -“That’s it to a T, and no mistake. The Cortez is only a blind to the -regular mine. I’d swoop down on him.” And the guide shook his head -decidedly. He would have been better pleased if there had been a -regular muss with a bit of shooting added. - -“I wish I knew where the sheriff of the county was located,” began Mr. -Whyland. - -“The sheriff is Dan Shattock,” replied Cottle. “He lives over to Fennel -Gulch.” - -“And how far is that from here?” - -“About thirty-five or forty miles.” - -“If I gave you a letter to him could you bring him back with the -necessary papers?” - -“Certainly. Only Dan will want pay in advance.” - -“I will give you the hundred dollars that you have earned. You can pay -him whatever is necessary, and I will pay you back with good interest. -Come, I will write the letter without delay.” - -“Yes, do,” said Oliver. “Colonel Mendix may smell a mouse and try to -head us off ere long. He had not expected to be disturbed, but now you -can rest assured he will be on his guard.” - -Mr. Whyland sat down immediately to compose the letter. It was not a -very long epistle, but it was just to the point. Oliver read it over -and offered several suggestions that the other deemed valuable, and -then the letter was folded and placed in Cottle’s hand. - -“I’ll be off at once,” said the guide; and he mounted his mule. - -“And how long before you will be back?” asked Oliver. - -“Depends on where I catch Dan Shattock. Not longer than three days, I -reckon.” And with these final words Cottle rode away. - -“I trust he will be lucky enough to find his man at once,” said Mr. -Whyland. “Having the sheriff here will be a great help to us.” - -“I suppose Gus and I had better ride back to carry out the deception,” -said Oliver. “Mendix will be looking for us.” - -“And I will remain in camp down here in the hollow,” said Mr. Whyland. -“I think as long as the colonel does not see me we will be safe. But if -you need me, fire off a shot as before agreed.” - -A moment later Oliver and Gus were on the return. They followed the -track they had come by, and in less than half an hour had passed the -abandoned mine, and were once more at the Cortez’s office. - -“Well, are you satisfied now?” asked the colonel as he came out to meet -them. - -“That mine is certainly abandoned,” replied Oliver, raising a light -laugh, far, however, from natural. - -“Yes; it is utterly worthless.” Colonel Mendix paused. “Was that all -you were hunting in this region?” - -Oliver hesitated for a moment, not knowing exactly what to say in -return. - -“It was all we wanted to know about the mine,” he answered slowly. “But -you tell me that mining around here doesn’t pay?” - -“Hardly. It did years ago, but we have nearly reached the end.” - -“If you have no objection I would like to take a look around your -mine,” said Oliver. “I was never in a mine just like this.” He did not -deem it necessary to say that he had never been in a mine of any kind. -“It must be an interesting sight.” - -Colonel Mendix frowned slightly. The idea of these two suspicious young -men prowling about the place did not suit him. - -“It is not such an amusing sight,” he replied with a short laugh. - -“Still you don’t object, I suppose,” said Oliver. - -“Oh, no; I――I――will send for a man to show you through. It is not often -we have visitors away out here. Take seats while I send for the man.” - -He indicated a couple of chairs, and the two boys seated themselves. -Oliver’s heart beat like a trip-hammer. What would be the result of -this strange visit to the mine? - -“Have you good stout boots?” went on Colonel Mendix; “you need them in -a place like this.” - -“Oh, we always wear tough sole-leather,” laughed Gus. “We have been -knocking about too long to do otherwise.” - -This reply put the colonel off the track once more. But he went on,―― - -“You are from the West then?” - -“We came from Central America,” replied Oliver; “but we have been -spending some time in San Francisco.” - -“Ah, I see.” - -There was a short pause after this. Oliver felt the colonel’s sharp -eyes bent full upon him, and to avoid confusion he bent over and began -an examination of the sole of one of his boots. - -“That is getting a little worn,” he said to Gus; “I guess I will pare -that edge off with a knife.” And getting out his penknife he began to -do so. - -While at work several men came into the office and asked for -instructions. Oliver became much interested in what was said, referring -as it did to the transfer of some heavy machinery from San Francisco -to the mine. He laid down his knife, pulled up his boot, and drank in -every word. - -From this he learned that on the day following a party of six men with -eighteen mules were to start for the coast. On arriving there, the -machinery was to be put up in packs, loaded on the mules, and then -brought to the mine. The trip would occupy the best part of a month. - -This conversation gave the boy considerable satisfaction. It would -decrease the force of men in the mine by six, and this would count -for much if the sheriff should have any trouble in establishing -their claim. He trusted that Colonel Mendix would not discover their -intentions before the start was made. - -When the men were about to leave, the colonel motioned for one of them -to remain. - -“Here, Restrepo, I want you to show these two young men through the -mine,” he said. And then followed some instructions in Spanish to the -effect that the trip should be a short one and nothing of importance -should be shown. - -“_Si, signor_,” replied the fellow, touching his cap. - -“This man will show you through,” said the colonel, turning to the two; -and there was nothing left to do but to follow the man out; and this -they did. - -No sooner were they gone and the door closed, than the colonel sank -back in his chair in deep thought. - -“That Oliver’s face reminds me strongly of one that I have seen -before,” he muttered to himself. “I do not like the manner of either of -them. Bah! I must be getting nervous. What can two boys do?” - -He was about to turn again to the papers before him, when his eyes -rested upon the penknife Oliver had left lying on the floor. Half -abstractedly he picked it up. - -“Oliver Bright!” he ejaculated, as he read that name upon the handle. -“That boy must be Arthur Bright’s son! Ah, I see it all! He is spying -upon me!” He clinched his hands. “I must attend to this at once!” he -cried. - - - - - CHAPTER XXIX. - - IN THE AURORA MINE. - - -The guide that Colonel Mendix had furnished the two boys was a tall, -swarthy Spaniard of sinister aspect. He had been in the colonel’s -employ for many years, and was his favorite tool upon all occasions. - -“Follow me, please you,” he said brokenly; “we go down quick.” - -He led the way from the office across a strip of yard piled high with -crushed ore and dismantled machinery of old-fashioned pattern, and at -length they came to the opening of the mine, directly into the side of -the mountain. - -“It must be dark in there,” said Gus as they passed the threshold. - -“Not dark, many lamps,” said Restrepo. “Come, close by me, please you.” -And leaving the pure light of day behind they entered the passageway. - -For the instant the boys could see nothing. But gradually their eyes -became accustomed to the gloom, and then they distinguished far ahead a -number of flames flickering like so many yellow stars in a dark sky. - -“This is the first lode,” said the Spaniard. “Pay good many year ago; -not much now.” - -“And how many others are they?” asked Oliver eagerly. - -The man hesitated. He had been cautioned not to say too much. - -“Only few,” he replied evasively. “I show, please you.” And on they -went. - -They had nearly reached the lights when a man, carrying a lantern, came -running towards them. - -“Back!” he cried. “Half a minute! Back!” - -“What is the matter?” exclaimed Gus in sudden terror. - -“Fire blast,” answered Restrepo. He turned and motioned them back. - -They lost no time in returning to the entrance. A few seconds later a -dull roar was heard, followed by the sound of falling rocks. - -“All right now,” said the Spaniard; “no more for an hour.” - -“I wouldn’t want to be around when any of these blasts go off,” -shuddered Gus. “Might kill a fellow without half trying.” - -“You are right,” replied Oliver. “Ever kill any one?” he asked of -Restrepo. - -“Killed two last year,” was the grim reply. “But their fault, no other. -They not run away far; stand close; blast go off; both get heads -blowed away, please you.” - -“Horrible!” cried Oliver. And he made a mental vow that should he ever -become master of the mine he would take extra precautions against such -tragedies occurring. - -“I suppose some men get so reckless they don’t value their lives,” -remarked Gus. “Mr. Whyland was――” - -Oliver gave him a sharp pinch in the arm. “Take care what you say!” he -whispered. - -In an instant Gus understood the slip he had made. - -“Oh!” He drew a deep breath. “Mr. _Ryder_ told me they don’t seem to -care whether they live or not.” - -Oliver was relieved to hear his friend turn the slip he had made. - -“Well, Mr. _Ryder_ ought to know,” he replied. “But I should think -every man’s life would be sweet to him,” he went on. - -“And so it is,” broke in a voice behind them. - -Both boys started. Turning, they beheld Colonel Mendix close at hand. - -“I thought I would come down and show you through myself,” he said -blandly; “it is not often that I have visitors, and I think it my duty -to show you all the points of interest. Restrepo, you may go to work -again.” And he added some words in Spanish to the man, who departed at -once. - -Oliver could not help but feel uncomfortable. Why this sudden change in -the colonel’s manner? Did he suspect anything? - -Then he began to wonder if Colonel Mendix had overheard the slip Gus -had made. He sincerely hoped not. It might prove the cause of trouble. - -But the colonel appeared to suspect nothing. He led the way, chatting -gayly, pointing out this object and that in the most natural manner, -until both boys were completely disarmed. - -“Never seen a mine like this before?” he said. “Well, it is a sight -well worth a good many miles of travel. Of course to us it is a very -humdrum business, blasting and crushing day in and day out.” - -“And do you never leave the mine?” asked Oliver. - -“Very seldom. Once in a while I take a trip to ’Frisco on business, but -that is all. I have no family ties, and this life here suits me just as -well as any other.” - -Before the boys were aware an hour had slipped by. Colonel Mendix led -them into a number of abandoned passages, and they did not see the -miners quit work for the day and leave the mine. - -“Now, if you can do a little climbing, I will show you the richest lode -in the mine,” said the colonel at length, when he was sure they were -left alone. - -“I guess I can climb anywhere you can,” replied Oliver with a laugh; -“and I can help my friend along.” - -“Perhaps you had better stay behind,” suggested Colonel Mendix to Gus. - -“No, no, I’ll go wherever he does,” cried the stout youth. - -A look of disappointment crossed the Spaniard’s face. - -“Very well then. Follow me.” And he led the way up a narrow passage, -and through a small hole into a rough sort of chamber. - -“We can only get to it this way,” he said. “To leave it one must take a -different route.” - -“How is that?” asked Oliver. - -“Because to reach it this way one must drop down a distance of fifteen -feet, and it is too much of a job getting back. But the other way the -return is very easy, though rather long. Here is the place to drop, -over these rocks. Do you think you can do it?” And he held the lantern -over the edge. - -“I guess I can,” replied Oliver; “but――but――” - -“But what?” asked the colonel sharply. - -Oliver did not know what to reply. - -“Here, I will hold the lantern for you,” continued Colonel Mendix. “You -go over first and I will follow, and we will catch your friend.” - -This seemed fair enough, and getting down, Oliver swung himself over -the ledge and dropped. - -About ten feet below his feet struck some slanting projection; but it -was too slippery with water to catch a footing, and he went down fully -fifteen feet farther. - -“Hello!” he cried. “I――” - -“Now you,” cried the colonel to Gus. And before the latter could say -a word he found himself pushed to the brink and sent rolling over. He -clutched the edge with his hands, but was unable to draw himself up, -and went over just as Oliver had done. - -“What do you mean?” he demanded. “You pushed me over!” - -“It is a trap,” whispered Oliver, helping Gus to his feet. “Are you -coming down?” he called to the man above. - -“I don’t think I shall,” was the mocking reply. “That is one of the -worst pits in the mine, and if I once got in I am afraid I would never -get out again.” - -“You don’t mean――” began Oliver, with his heart in his throat. - -Colonel Mendix gave a loud laugh. - -“I mean, Oliver Bright, that I have found you out,” he replied. “You -thought you were smart, but you are not smart enough to outwit me. You -are completely in my power. It may be that you do not realize it just -at present, but you will, later on, never fear. You cannot get the best -of me as easily as you may imagine.” - - - - - CHAPTER XXX. - - A PERILOUS SITUATION. - - -Oliver Bright was never so taken aback as when he found himself and Gus -Gregory in a deep pit in the Aurora mine, and in Colonel Mendix’s power. - -The turn of affairs was so unexpected that for a moment he could not -utter a word. The villainous colonel had found him out, and what the -result would be no one could conjecture. - -“American boys are not always so smart as they think themselves,” -continued the Spaniard, as he seated himself upon the ledge above and -looked down upon the two. - -“What do you intend to do?” asked Oliver. - -“That is my business,” was the cold answer. “First, however, I want to -ask you a few questions.” - -“Maybe we won’t answer them,” returned Gus sharply. He ached all over -from the tumble he had had. - -“You had better,” was the pointed reply. “Both of you are completely in -my power; I hold your very lives in my hands.” - -Oliver could not help but shudder. As for Gus, he gave a half-suppressed -groan. - -“First, I want to know who sent you out here?” went on Colonel Mendix. -“Was it Arthur Bright?” - -Oliver was silent. - -“Did you hear my question?” - -“I did.” - -“And why didn’t you answer?” - -“I shall say nothing until you help us out of this pit and conduct us -back to your office,” was the boy’s determined reply. - -“What! do you defy me?” - -“I do. You have no right to treat us in this fashion.” - -“Ha, ha! right! Might is right out here. You must answer my question.” - -“And I refuse to do so.” - -“Think well. I am not a man to be trifled with.” - -“I don’t need to think it over. I shall not answer a single question -till we are back in your office.” - -“Then you will tell me everything?” - -“Perhaps I will.” - -“I would not trust you. I think I had better leave you here.” - -“Leave us here!” cried Gus in terror. - -“Exactly. Leave you here to the darkness and the rats.” Colonel Mendix -gave a cold laugh. “Oh, I can tell you the rats are nice companions, -especially when they crawl all over you and nip you in the legs.” - -Gus gave a shiver. The idea of a rat attacking him! - -“Perhaps _you_ would like to tell something,” went on the colonel. - -“Don’t you do it,” put in Oliver. - -“Not much,” replied Gus. “If you don’t say anything, you can depend -upon it neither will I.” - -“Come, what do you say?” went on the Spaniard impatiently. - -“I refer you to my friend,” said Gus. “He is the only one to do the -talking for this crowd. Your threats don’t frighten me for a cent,” he -added boastfully, more to keep up his courage than aught else. - -“And you would rather be left here to starve to death?” - -Neither of the boys replied. - -“Very well then,” said the colonel, rising; “I will leave you to -yourselves for the night. Perhaps in the morning you will have a -different story to tell.” - -“You are going to leave us here?” asked Oliver. - -“Yes; unless you tell all I want to know.” - -“I will tell nothing.” - -“Then good-night to you. There is no use trying to escape. Even if you -manage to get up here again, I shall take pains to close the passage -in such a way that you cannot get out.” And, with another loud laugh, -Colonel Mendix took up his lantern and disappeared, leaving the two -boys in total darkness. - -“Crickety, but we are in a pretty mess and no mistake!” said Gus, as -the last ray of light left them. - -“You are right; but don’t let us despair,” returned Oliver. “I think I -did what was right; but it is rough on you.” - -“Don’t mind me,” said Gus. “I owe you a good deal. The question is, -what is best to be done?” - -“Listen!” - -They did so. Far in the distance they could hear the echo of Colonel -Mendix’s footsteps, and the moving of several stones, and then all -became silent. - -“Do you think he spoke the truth about the rats?” asked Gus with a -shudder. - -“I don’t know, Gus; there may be rats here. But he evidently wanted to -frighten us all he could.” - -“Ugh! it makes me shiver to think of them. I wish we had a light.” - -“I have some matches. I will strike one and see what kind of a place -this is.” - -“Hold on till I tear some pages out of my note-book and make lighters -out of them. We want to save our matches.” - -“That’s so.” - -Gus soon had the lighters made. Then Oliver struck a match, and they -gazed about them. - -The place into which the Spaniard had led them was a veritable pit, -some thirty or forty feet in diameter. On all sides the walls rose to -the height of twenty feet or more――steep walls, which caused Oliver to -shake his head sadly as he gazed at them. - -“Pretty tough job to climb them,” he said; “but perhaps it can be done.” - -“It will _have_ to be done. You do not intend to stay down in this -confounded hole?” - -“Not a minute longer than I have to. Remember, Mr. Whyland will grow -anxious if we do not return in a reasonable time.” - -“Colonel Mendix puts me in mind of a snake. His eyes are so cold and -calculating they make me shiver every time I look at them.” - -“Now if we only had a lamp,” said Oliver. - -“But we haven’t.” - -“I wonder if we could get this piece of wood to burn,” went on the -other, holding a stick he had picked up. - -“You might, if you split up the end. Here, let me do it with my knife.” - -As Gus spoke Oliver felt in his pocket for his knife. - -“My knife is gone!” he exclaimed. “I left it in the colonel’s office -when I fixed the sole of my boot.” - -“Didn’t it have your name on?” - -“Why, of course! I see it all now! Colonel Mendix had an easy job -finding out who I was! What a fool I was to leave the knife lying -there!” - -“Never mind; it can’t be helped now, Olly, so let us make the best of -it. Here, I have the stick ready.” - -Gus handed back the stick. Oliver lit another match and applied it to -the split end. It was rather damp, but at last caught fire. - -“There! that is better than nothing!” declared the stout youth. “It is -bad enough to be down here, without being in the dark. Now let us look -around and see what the chances for escape are.” - -Oliver did not reply. He was looking at a name that was cut on the -stick. The name was JAMES BARR. - - - - - CHAPTER XXXI. - - SEEKING DELIVERANCE. - - -As will doubtless be remembered, James Barr was the name of the -surveyor who had been sent by Mr. Bright to assist Colonel Mendix in -locating the Aurora mine. - -Oliver’s surprise can therefore be imagined when he saw this same -individual’s name cut in the stick his friend had picked up to be used -as a firebrand. - -“James Barr!” he cried. “It must be the same. How wonderful!” - -“What are you talking about?” asked Gus. - -Oliver told him. - -“And he is reported to have lost his life in a flooding of the mine,” -he concluded. - -“It is strange,” said Gus; “but still it counts for nothing. Barr might -have cut his name on that stick in a moment of idleness.” - -“Of course; but it shows that he was here. And if that is so it is -pretty good proof that this is the Aurora mine.” - -“That is so. I did not think of that. I thought that was all settled -before.” - -“There is nothing like being doubly sure. But come, let us see if we -cannot find some means of escape while the stick lasts. When that is -gone we will be in darkness, for I see no more wood about.” - -Holding the stick up sideways, so that it would burn and light the way, -the two advanced on a tour of discovery. - -It soon came to an end. On all sides were the same perpendicular rocks. - -“Not much encouragement there,” remarked Oliver grimly. “But we must -find some way out. Here, hold the torch, while I see if I cannot scale -this side.” - -Gus took the extended torch, and Oliver made a desperate leap forward. - -He gained a hold, and arrived three-quarters of the way up. Then he -slipped, and rolled down to his friend’s feet. - -“Not that time,” he cried; “but I think I can do it.” - -Again he tried, and again the same result. - -“This clumsy coat and the heavy boots bother me,” he declared. “I will -take them off.” - -“How am I to get up, even if you do?” asked Gus dolefully. - -“One thing at a time, Gus. Here, take the things. One, two, three!” - -With a mighty spring Oliver made the jump. Half way up he paused. Was -he going to fail again? No; he clung fast, reached up overhead, and -drew himself up into the gloom. - -“All right!” he called back. “Throw me the stick and then perhaps I can -help you up.” - -Gus flung the firebrand as best he could. Oliver caught it and stuck it -in a crevice. - -“Now make the jump up the rocks and catch my hand,” he called down, and -he leaned as far as possible over the edge. - -Gus did so. Three times he failed. The fourth, Oliver caught his wrist, -and a moment later, puffing and blowing, both stood on the edge of the -pit, but on the side opposite to that where they had entered. - -“Crickety! I don’t want to try any more such jumps!” panted Gus. “I’ll -be out of wind for a month.” - -“And I trust we don’t get into any more such holes,” laughed Oliver. -“But the thing of it is, have we bettered ourselves by the movement?” - -“That we can’t tell till we see where this passage leads to,” returned -the other, pointing to a narrow opening in the rocks. “If that is only -a blind we are as bad off as we ever were.” - -“I think that if I were down here alone I would go mad,” said Oliver. - -“I am sure I would. Heou! let us get out as soon as we can!” - -Taking up the light, they proceeded down the narrow passage. It was a -low cavern, so low that in many spots even Gus, the shorter of the two, -was compelled to stoop. - -“Hold on,” cried Oliver who was in advance; “here is a stream of water. -We don’t want to be drowned!” - -“Indeed not! Is it deep?” - -Oliver made an examination with his hands. - -“Quite deep. But here is a spot that is not very broad. I can jump it -easily, and I guess you can do the same.” - -Holding out the firebrand, he made the leap, and landed safely upon the -other side. - -“Now you,” he called to Gus; and in a moment they were together again. - -It was not long before they entered what appeared to be a large -chamber. Here, from some place far above, streamed in a faint light. - -“Hurrah!” cried Oliver. “There is open daylight at last! If it was not -for the fact that the sun has set it would be lighter still. Come, let -us go on.” - -But they could not do so. On the opposite side of the chamber, if such -it might be called, could be seen nothing but the solid rocks. - -“Blocked!” cried Gus in dismay, and Oliver echoed the cry. “What shall -we do now? Go back?” - -“No, no! I think――” Oliver sprang aside and pointed to a corner. “Oh, -Gus, what is that?” - -The stout youth looked towards the spot indicated, and turned pale. And -small wonder; for there, lying on its back, was the skeleton of a human -being. - -Both of the boys approached it slowly. It was the first time they had -seen so ghastly an object, and it filled them with awe. - -“Some poor miner that wandered in here and could not get out,” said -Gus. “See, nothing but his bones remain to tell the tale!” - -“And if he wandered in here and could not find any way out, what are we -to do?” asked Oliver in almost a whisper, so horrible was the thought. - -“Don’t――don’t say that!” cried Gus; “my nerves are already unstrung. -We must do what we can, and do it quickly too; for it will soon be -night and then morning, and if we don’t find anything to eat――” And he -finished with a groan. - -Oliver put his hand to his brow. What should they do next? Which way -should they turn? - - - - - CHAPTER XXXII. - - A VALUABLE FIND. - - -As Oliver stood thinking, a bright object lying upon the ground -attracted his attention. He picked it up. It proved to be a silver -match-box. - -“Hello! here is something!” he said, and turned it over in his hands. -Upon one side were the initials J. B. - -“This must have belonged to James Barr also,” he went on. “I wonder if -that skeleton――” - -He did not finish. Gus shook his head. - -“It looks that way,” he said. “Open the box and see if there is -anything in it.” - -Oliver did so, and brought forth several pages that had been torn from -a diary. - -“Here is something,” he said. “Hold the light so that I can see what it -is.” - -With trembling hands he unfolded the sheets and scanned them over. He -had hardly read a dozen lines before he gave a loud cry. - -“Oh, what shame, what baseness!” he cried. “This is the dying statement -of James Barr, in which he says that Colonel Mendix has enticed him -hither and made him a prisoner; that he is dying with a fever, caught -some time before, and that the colonel wished to get him out of the way -for fear he may expose the fact that the Cortez mine lies wholly within -the Aurora mine limits; and that Colonel Mendix, _alias_ Guerotaz, is -in reality a Spanish counterfeiter named Guito!” - -Oliver was both pained and delighted over the discovery he had -made,――pained that James Barr had come to so heartless a death, and -delighted to know that he now had the means within his power to cause -Colonel Mendix’s immediate arrest, providing, of course, he could gain -his own liberty. - -“What a rascal that Spaniard is!” he exclaimed. “Just think of his -luring poor Barr to his death while the man was sick with the fever! I -would like nothing better than to give the brute a sound thrashing, and -he deserves a thousand!” - -“Never fear but what the law will take care of him,” replied Gus. “They -are not letting counterfeiters off so easily, to say nothing of Barr’s -death, and this mine swindle.” - -“If we were only out of this hole!” - -“That’s just it. But gracious, I don’t know how to turn!” - -“Let us go back to that watercourse,” suggested Oliver after a moment’s -thought. “That must lead somewhere.” - -“You are right. I never thought of that; but if there is escape that -way, I wonder why Barr didn’t――” - -“He was probably too sick with the fever,” said Oliver, partly to keep -his own courage up. “Come on. _Nil desperandum!_” - -In a few minutes they were back at the watercourse. Here they found a -narrow passage, scarcely a foot in height, leading upwards. - -“Shall we try it?” he asked. - -“Certainly. Try anything.” - -So Oliver crawled into the hole on his hands and knees, and Gus -followed. They had not gone far before they found the rock giving way -in many places to dirt. - -“I take that for a good sign,” said Oliver. “I think we are near the -top of the hill, but how far from the opening I cannot tell.” - -For ten minutes more they continued on their painful journey. Then -Oliver came to a halt. - -“Nothing but rock ahead,” he said. - -Both he and Gus were ready to cry with vexation. Had they taken all -this trouble in vain? - -“Are you sure?” - -“That is all I can see. Wait till I dig over it where there is a bit of -dirt.” - -Oliver went to digging vigorously. But with his bare hands it was slow -work, and he was about to give up in despair, when suddenly his hand -struck an opening beyond. - -“There is a passage!” he exclaimed. “Wait till I enlarge the opening.” - -He worked away for fully quarter of an hour more. Then he squeezed his -way through and helped the stout youth to do the same. - -“This is better!” remarked Gus, when they found themselves in a much -larger passage on the other side of the opening. “Now let us hurry; the -stick shows signs of going out.” - -There was no need of urging; Oliver was traveling at the height of his -speed. Up and up they went, the passage growing wider as they advanced. - -“Hold up,” cried Oliver, suddenly stopping short. Then he put the -firebrand behind him and peered ahead. “Hurrah! I see the light of -evening shining into the other end of this passage. We are out of it at -last!” - -And such proved to be a fact; for five minutes later they emerged, and -found themselves at the very top of the mountain, at a spot where they -could look down upon the mine buildings. - -“Thank God we are out of that hole!” cried Oliver. “Oh, how good it -seems to be in the open air once more!” - -“Won’t that Spaniard be taken aback when he learns that we have -escaped,” said Gus. “He was so positive he had outwitted you!” - -“We must find our way back to camp at once. Mr. Whyland will be getting -anxious concerning us.” - -“You are right. Let’s see, I think the spot is in that direction.” - -“So do I, just beyond the three tall trees.” - -A minute later, after a whiff of fresh air, they struck out for the -camp. They had hardly appeared in sight when Mr. Whyland came running -out to meet them. - -“You have been gone longer than I expected!” he exclaimed. “Where are -your mules?” - -“We have got a long story to tell,” said Oliver and Gus in a breath. -And sitting down beside the sheltered fire Mr. Whyland had started, -they related their adventures. - -Of course the gentleman was much astonished. - -“It sounds almost too strange to be true,” he said. “Let me see that -statement that was left by James Barr. No doubt it will prove of the -utmost importance to us.” - -He took the leaves, and by the light of the blazing fire read them -aloud. All hands listened with rapt attention. - -They contained but little more than what Oliver had intimated, saving -the telling of where much of the proof of Colonel Mendix’s villainy -could be found,――in San Francisco, and in a number of places in Brazil. - -“I guess we have _him_ in _our_ power now,” said Mr. Whyland when the -reading was finished. “If only Cottle was here, we might go ahead.” - -“I think we can afford to wait a day,” laughed Oliver, he felt so -relieved to be safe in camp once more. “Colonel Mendix still thinks we -are in the mine pit.” - -“That is so. If he saw you now he would think you were a ghost.” - -“I would like to play ghost on him and scare him into a fit,” said Gus. -“He deserves it.” - -“He will get more than a ghost scare when we get after him,” observed -Oliver sternly. “He will find out that leaving us there to perish is no -light offense.” - -“I cannot understand how I was so blind to his real character when I -went into the mine deal with him,” put in Mr. Whyland. - -“That proves he is a born actor as well as rascal,” said Oliver. - -“I can’t help but feel sorry for that James Barr,” observed Gus. “I -suppose he trusted Mendix just as much as anybody did.” - -“Undoubtedly,” rejoined Oliver. “If he had stood in with the Spaniard, -it isn’t likely he would have been left to die in that horrible -fashion.” - -“I presume you two lads are pretty well fagged out,” said Mr. Whyland a -few minutes later. “You had better turn in and try to get a good sleep.” - -“Fagged out don’t express it,” yawned Gus. “I am half asleep all over, -as the saying goes.” - -“You’ll be stiff enough in the morning, I’ll warrant,” laughed the -gentleman. “You are not accustomed to such climbing as you had to do in -the mine.” - -“No.” Gus shuddered. “My, but it was awful! I didn’t dare to think of -not getting out for fear my hair would turn white!” - -“I can realize now the horror of a cave-in in a coal-mine,” put in -Oliver. “It’s one of the most dreadful things that can happen to any -one.” - -“You are right, my lad,” said Mr. Whyland. “But come, there is no use -to dwell upon what you have gone through. Try to forget it, and give -your mind and body a chance to recuperate.” - -“Well, I’m going to try it, anyway,” grumbled Gus, as he prepared to -retire. “If I get a nightmare, just poke me in the ribs somebody.” - -“We will!” laughed Oliver. - -“You see, I don’t want to go through it again, even in my sleep.” - -After this there was quite a bit more of talking, and finally they -retired, to rest, if not to sleep. - -On the following morning as they were getting breakfast, they were -surprised to see a horseman approaching from the direction of the mine. - -“Who can it be?” questioned every one. - -“Perhaps it’s the colonel,” said Oliver. “Suppose you hide, Mr. -Whyland, and let only Gus and I meet him.” - -“A good idea.” - -The gentleman stepped behind some rocks. As he did so the horseman came -nearer, and they saw that it was indeed Colonel Mendix. - - - - - CHAPTER XXXIII. - - BROUGHT TO BOOK. - - -“Good-morning, Colonel,” began Oliver as they went forth to meet their -visitor, though with pistol in hand. - -The Spaniard nearly fell from his horse. - -“What, you!” he shrieked. “You!” - -“Yes, Colonel Mendix, I and my friend, as you see. You did not have us -quite so much in your power as you thought.” - -“How――how did you escape?” faltered the Spaniard. - -“That is our business.” - -The man’s brow darkened. - -“What do you want here, any way?” he demanded. “You have no right to -hang around my mine.” - -“Your mine? You mean my father’s mine.” - -“Bah! Not so. Your father’s mine is abandoned.” - -“My father’s mine is here, and in full operation. The Cortez and the -Aurora mines are one and the same.” - -“Who says so?” - -“Felix Cottle for one――” - -“His word is worth nothing. He is――” - -“He tells the truth.” - -“Right you are,” said a voice from behind; and turning, the two beheld -the guide, who had just ridden up. - -“Back already?” exclaimed Oliver. - -“Yes; and all O. K.,” replied Cottle with a knowing wink. “Collared my -man on the fly.” - -“Cottle!” cried Colonel Mendix, changing color. - -“Yes; just in time to see you get your deserts,” with a short, dry -laugh. “Reckon we are square now, Colonel.” - -“What do you mean?” - -“That there young man will tell you, him and Mr. Whyland.” - -“Whyland!” The colonel was deadly pale now. “Is he――” - -“Yes, he is here,” said a calm voice; and the gentleman stepped -forward. “Colonel Mendix, when we parted in the East years ago, I guess -you did not expect that we would meet some day out here.” - -The Spaniard bit his lips. He was trembling with fear. - -“I――I――what do you want?” he faltered. - -“We want our rights,” replied Oliver. - -“There is nothing here for you.” - -“I think there is,” returned Mr. Whyland. “Mr. Shattock!” he called -out, and a tall, sharp-eyed stranger rode from under cover. - -“The sheriff of the county!” muttered Colonel Mendix, and on the -instant his backbone seemed to desert him. - -It was an exciting moment for all. To Oliver Bright it was a time of -triumph. The termination of his quest was at hand, full of the promise -of success. - -As for Colonel Mendix, it took the Spaniard several seconds to recover -from the shock he experienced when the sheriff appeared upon the scene. -He saw at once that matters had taken a most serious turn. - -“Well, Colonel Guerotaz, this appears to be a grave business you have -been engaged in,” said the sheriff, as he dismounted from his horse and -strode over to where the Spaniard sat. - -“I do not know what you are talking about,” replied Colonel Mendix as -stiffly as he could. - -“You don’t?” - -“No, sir.” - -“Well, it is simply this: That you have done everything in your power -to defraud Mr. Whyland here and one Arthur Bright out of their lawful -share in a certain mining scheme connected with the Aurora mine――” - -“Not so,” cried the colonel. “The Aurora mine is one of no value, just -as represented to them.” - -“They are willing to swear otherwise, at least Mr. Whyland is, and -Felix Cottle is willing to testify――” - -“I don’t care. I have my rights. My word is as good as――” - -“And there is other proof,” put in Oliver. “James Barr――” - -Colonel Mendix jumped up as if shot. - -“James Barr! James Barr is dead.” - -“We know that. And we also know how he came to his death.” - -The Spaniard started. - -“But his dying statement remains――” - -“His dying statement? Why, he was drowned in the mine――” - -“No, not drowned, but made a prisoner while suffering from fever,” -replied Oliver. “And when you shut us up in the pit in the mine we came -across his skeleton, and near it found a statement in a match-box for -safe-keeping.” - -“It is false.” - -“It is the truth. That statement is now in Mr. Whyland’s possession. -Perhaps he will read it to you.” - -“That is not necessary,” said that gentleman. “I will put the statement -in Sheriff Shattock’s hands. It is enough to say that it proves our -claim to what is known as the Cortez mine, as well as the Aurora, and -also that Colonel Guerotaz, _alias_ Mendix, is in reality a noted -counterfeiter named Guito.” - -At the last words a shrill cry burst from the Spaniard’s lips. The -revelation had been so unexpected that it completely unnerved him. - -“You――you――” he began. - -“You had better not say much,” suggested the sheriff. “It may all count -against you at the trial.” He walked over and put his hand upon Colonel -Mendix’s knee. “You are my prisoner.” - -“Your prisoner!” - -“Exactly. You will please dismount at once.” - -“This is an outrage――” - -“Come, say no more. There are others who suspect you, and I have heard -before that you were supposed to be an escaped criminal.” - -“I will not submit. I will――” - -“You will submit,” replied the sheriff firmly. “Here, hold out your -hands―― Hello! Stop him!” For Colonel Mendix had on the instant wheeled -around his horse, and was galloping off at the top of the animal’s -speed. - -“Catch me, if you can!” he cried mockingly. “Catch Cirilo Guito if you -are able!” - -And away went horse and rider like a whirlwind. - -“Well, by thunder!” ejaculated Felix Cottle; “he’s going to try to -sneak!” - -“After him!” shouted the sheriff. “Come on, all of you!” - -“We’re with you!” responded Cottle. “He must not be allowed to reach -those hills yonder. If he does, it will be like looking for that pin in -the haystack, and worse.” - -Off went the sheriff and the guide, with Mr. Whyland not far behind -them. - -Oliver and Gus stared at each other. What should they do? - -“Come, Gus,” cried the former. “The more the better in a case of this -kind.” - -And he started for his animal, tethered but a short distance away. - -“But the camp”――began the stout youth. - -“Must take care of itself. There is no one about to rob us, anyway. -Come.” - -Gus needed no second urging. Indeed, he would not have remained behind -alone under any consideration. - -It took some time to put their animals in proper condition for use. By -the time they had mounted, the crowd ahead were just disappearing over -the brow of a low hill. - -Side by side, the two boys urged their animals along at top speed. -Oliver had his weapons ready for use, but trusted he would not be -called upon to use them. - -Crack! The sharp sound of a rifle broke the stillness. They rightfully -guessed that the sheriff had fired on the fugitive, but whether he had -reached his mark or not they could not tell. They continued to move -forward with eyes and ears painfully on the alert. - -The top of the hill gained, they could see Mr. Whyland and the others -climbing a rocky slope over to the westward. Near the top of the slope, -among some scanty brush, the boys could see Colonel Mendix, astride of -his horse, urging the animal along with hand and spur. - -Oliver could have fired at the man with ease, but the thought of -bloodshed held him back. He wished to capture the Spaniard as much as -did any of the others, but he would not run the risk of having the -rascal’s blood on his conscience. - -As Oliver and Gus began the ascent of the rocky slope Colonel Mendix -appeared at the extreme top. For a single instant he looked back and -shook his fist at his pursuers. - -Again the sheriff fired, and so did Felix Cottle; and this time the -fleeing criminal was wounded in the leg. He gave a shrill cry of pain, -sent back two shots in return, both of which flew wide of their mark -and disappeared. - -“He is gone!” gasped Oliver. - -“Don’t you think they will get him?” queried Gus. - -“I don’t see how they can; the woods over yonder are so thick. But -come, we may as well follow the others;” this as the stout youth began -to lag behind. - -“I’m so stiff, from yesterday,” groaned Gus. But, nevertheless, he -urged his horse on, and they steadily decreased the distance between -themselves and Mr. Whyland and the others. - -From the way the sheriff headed, it was evident he thought Colonel -Mendix was trying to ride in a circle. Sheriff Shattock’s words soon -proved this. - -“This Mendix, as you call him,” he said, “is trying to get back to the -mine. No doubt he wishes to clean out the office-safe before leaving -this section of the country.” - -“Then would it not be better if one of us went back toward the mine?” -suggested Mr. Whyland. - -“I reckon it would be.” - -“I’ll go to the mine if you say so,” put in Felix Cottle. “I’m better -acquainted around the place than any of you.” - -“All right; go,” said the sheriff; and at once the guide turned back on -the trail. - -He soon came upon the boys, to whom he explained the situation. Gus -wanted to return with him, but Oliver was for following Mr. Whyland; -and so they went on, leaving Felix Cottle to ride on to the Aurora mine -alone. - -“If we hurry we can catch up with Mr. Whyland,” said Oliver. “Come, -Gus; remember the chase is not likely to last long.” - -“I’ll do my best!” cried the stout youth. “Look-out, Oliver!” he went -on suddenly. - -He dropped down on his horse’s back, and instinctively Oliver did the -same. There were two reports, and a clipping through the leaves of the -trees followed. - -“My gracious, he’s firing on us!” gasped Gus. “We must try to keep out -of sight.” And he shuddered so greatly that he almost fell from his -saddle. - -“To the left――where the bushes are thicker!” exclaimed Oliver. - -He led the way; and hanging low behind his horse’s neck, Gus followed. -Soon they were once again well screened. - -In the meanwhile the shots fired by Colonel Mendix had served one good -purpose. The sheriff had lost sight of the rascal; but now the reports -helped the officer of the law to locate him, and he struck off on a -side trail, with Mr. Whyland close at his heels. - -The ground was rocky and uneven and full of loose stones, and the -horses made but poor headway. But in this matter they were no worse off -than was Colonel Mendix, and both were satisfied that they were making -just as good progress as the man they were pursuing. - -Five minutes later Oliver and Gus joined Mr. Whyland and the sheriff. -They came through a belt of timber and found the two men on the -defensive. - -“Hullo, it’s the boys!” cried Mr. Whyland. “Have you seen anything of -Mendix?” he went on anxiously. - -“He is over to the left, in the clump of pines,” responded Oliver. “But -be careful. Did you not hear him fire on us? The bullets whistled right -over our heads!” - -“We heard the shots,” said the sheriff. “The pines, eh? Then he is -making for the mine without a doubt.” - -“Is there no way of heading him off?” asked Mr. Whyland. - -“I believe there is――down at the mountain torrent some distance below -here. But no time is to be wasted.” - -Without further words they rode on through some low brush and over a -rocky plain. While on the latter spot, all hands kept a sharp lookout -for stray shots; but none came. Clearly Colonel Mendix had passed down -along the watercourse, just as the sheriff had surmised. - -“Wait!” - -The sheriff uttered the word in a low tone, as he halted on the very -edge of a large, overhanging rock. - -The others drew up behind him. - -Leaping to the ground, Sheriff Shattock moved cautiously to the front, -and peered over. - -“What do you see?” whispered Oliver. - -“Nothing, as yet; but wait. If I am right, he will come along the road, -just below here.” - -“And if he does?” put in Mr. Whyland. - -“I reckon I’ll make him come to terms,” was the slow but determined -response. - -A minute――and another――passed. To the boys they seemed hours. - -Suddenly the sheriff leaped up. - -“Halt!” he shouted, and aimed his pistol downward. “Halt!” - -Looking over the edge of the rock, the others saw Colonel Mendix riding -along a narrow path beside the watercourse. - -At the sound of the sheriff’s voice the Spaniard looked quickly around, -but he did not slacken his animal’s speed. - -“Did you hear?” demanded Sheriff Shattock. “Halt! I have a dead aim on -you.” - -At this Colonel Mendix uttered a loud cry to his horse, and away bound -the animal on a swift gallop. - -The sheriff fired, and the sound of the shot, echoing and re-echoing -through the cañon, frightened the animal below. He leaped to one side; -and in a trice horse and rider were in the mountain stream, and being -borne along by the swift current. - -“Just my miserable luck!” muttered the sheriff. “See, he knows enough -to duck under, and thus avoid another shot!” - -“What is best to do now?” asked Oliver anxiously. - -“We must go down to the slope below here and try to head him off. -Quick! there is not a moment to lose!” - -Again the sheriff went on, with the three others stringing after him -in single file. The flat rock was passed, and once more they found -themselves among the loose stones and short, thorny bushes. The sheriff -was the best rider of the party, and he soon drew ahead. Gus was the -worst laggard, and he begged Oliver not to leave him alone. - -“This bit of the country may be full of snakes and wild beasts,” said -the stout youth. “And I don’t want to face anything like that all -alone.” - -“I don’t doubt but what there are both snakes and wild beasts here,” -returned Oliver. “But I doubt if they molest us if we leave them -alone.” - -“But suppose a big mountain lion should leap out after us”―― - -“Oh, pshaw! Even that wouldn’t be any worse than having Colonel Mendix -use us for targets.” - -“That’s true too!” Gus gave a groan. “It’s a pity he can’t drown -himself in that river! It would be a good job done.” - -“Such rascals don’t pass out of existence so easily, Gus. But come, we -really must hurry along. If we don’t, we’ll miss Mr. Whyland and the -sheriff altogether. And I must confess I haven’t the least idea where -we are or in what direction our camp lies.” - -“Nor I. Well, I’ll do my best.” - -The thought that they would be left behind and become lost did more to -urge Gus ahead than anything else. They proceeded over the rocks on -a fairly brisk trot; and when the slope leading down to the mountain -stream was reached Mr. Whyland and the sheriff were but a hundred yards -in advance. - -The edge of the stream was hidden by an irregular growth of bushes, so -it was impossible to see what was beyond until these were parted. The -sheriff, finding a shallow spot, made his horse wade out into the open. - -“There he is!” - -“Where?” - -“Over on the opposite side! He is just crawling up the bank behind a -clump of overhanging trees!” - -The sheriff pointed with his finger, and Mr. Whyland and the boys, who -were just coming up, saw that he was right. - -“Where is his horse?” - -“Already on shore. Come; there is but one thing to do now,” went on -Sheriff Shattock. - -“What is that?” asked the three others simultaneously. - -“We must ford the stream.” - -“Can we do that?” asked Oliver. - -“Yes. Just below here it widens out and is not over a foot and a half -deep. I will show you the spot. And we will be certain to head off our -quarry, for he cannot turn back on that side.” - -Without giving Colonel Mendix time to discover them they drew -back behind the bushes and followed the sheriff’s lead along the -watercourse. In less than five minutes they came to the spot he had -mentioned. Here the stream was three times its natural width and one -could have almost leaped from rock to rock without wetting a foot. - -The horses went over readily enough, although they were dry, and longed -to drink. But they could not stop to humor the beasts. They reached the -opposite shore and drew up behind a convenient bowlder. - -A clatter of hoofs was heard, and an instant later Colonel Mendix -dashed past on his horse, rider and animal leaving a stream of wet -behind them. - -“Stop!” commanded the sheriff again. “You can’t escape us now!” - -The Spaniard muttered something in his native tongue, and went on -faster than ever, with the others in hot pursuit. - -“He intends to escape if he can,” said Gus. He was completely fagged -out and ready to drop from his saddle. - -“Come on!” - -It was the cry of the sheriff as he made after Colonel Mendix, riding -as he had never ridden before. He was warmed up to the chase, and meant -to end it in a very few minutes. - -The way was a treacherous one, and the rascal ahead was compelled -shortly to slow up. Soon the sheriff was again within hailing distance. - -“Stop, or I’ll fire!” he commanded. - -The Spaniard turned. He held a pistol in his hand and pointed it at -Sheriff Shattock’s head. - -Before he could pull the trigger, the officer fired his own weapon. The -shot struck Colonel Mendix’s horse, and the animal leaped into the air -and fell down, throwing the Spaniard over his head. - -When they drew near, they saw that in falling the Spaniard had struck -his head upon a sharp rock, and that the blood was flowing profusely -from a wound in his temple. He was unconscious, and it took fully ten -minutes to bring him to his senses. - -“I give up,” he said in a faint voice. “The fates are against me, and I -am in the hands of the law at last.” - -Shortly after, the whole party rode to the office of the Cortez mine. -Here the safe was opened, and an examination of its contents proved all -the statements made against Colonel Mendix to be true. - -Sheriff Shattock at once took charge of the criminal. By the suggestion -of Mr. Whyland he appointed Cottle as temporary superintendent of the -mine until the law should have taken its course. - -The situation of affairs was fully explained to all the men at -work,――some thirty in number. They were surprised; but as none of them -had ever liked Mendix, they took the change in good part, especially -after Mr. Whyland told them that they should every one be well rewarded -if they remained true to their duty. - -Then Oliver and Mr. Whyland sat down to figure out the probable value -of the mine. It was a tedious, but highly gratifying task. - -“One hundred and seventy-five thousand dollars!” gasped Oliver, as he -surveyed the figures. “Can it be possible?” - -“It is,” laughed the gentleman. “Your father will be a rich man.” - -“What welcome news it will be to him! This mine was our last hope. Had -it failed us we would have been thrown upon the world without a dollar. -But I am glad for your sake also, for you did so much towards getting -our rights.” - -“Not half as much as you, my boy. The real credit is wholly yours.” - -On the following day, after all necessary preparations were made, -Oliver and Gus departed with the sheriff and the prisoner on the -return. At Ford’s store the sheriff left them, but the two boys had no -difficulty in following the trail back to Sacramento. - -“Now for the first train home!” said Oliver. “Father must hear the good -news without delay.” - - - - - CHAPTER XXXIV. - - CONCLUSION. - - -“Too bad! I thought there would surely be some word from Oliver to-day.” - -It was Mr. Bright who spoke. He sat in an invalid chair on the side -porch, propped up by soft pillows. Donald, the man of all work, had -just returned from the post-office with the information that there were -no letters. - -Mr. Bright was getting well rapidly, but the lines of care were plainly -to be seen upon his brow. He started up with a deep sigh. - -“Nearly two weeks since I received any word,” he murmured to himself. -“How slowly the time drags! Can it be possible that he was too hopeful -and that the Aurora has proved worthless after all?” - -He passed his hand over his brow. - -“If that is so what is to become of us? I am getting too old to work, -and he has no trade to which he can turn his hand.” - -As he concluded, the latch on the gate was lifted, and, looking up, the -sick man saw Dr. Tangus enter the yard, and walk up the gravel path. - -“Good-morning, Mr. Bright,” he said stiffly. - -“Good-morning, doctor,” was the low reply. “Take a seat on the bench. I -am sorry there is not a chair here.” - -“This will do very well.” The learned man paused for a moment. “How are -you feeling?” he asked. - -“Much better, thank you. Another week and I think I will be all right.” - -“I am glad to hear it. I suppose you know the purpose of my visit -to-day.” - -“You are after the payment of that money.” - -“Yes. You know it was due yesterday.” - -“I know it was. But cannot you wait a few days longer? I am expecting -word from my son by every mail or by telegraph.” - -“Concerning that mining scheme you mentioned?” - -“Yes.” - -Dr. Tangus tossed his head. - -“I don’t believe that amounts to much,” he said. “You are altogether -too sanguine about it.” - -“My son Oliver――” - -“That boy isn’t as smart as you think he is. His going off on a -wild-goose chase――” - -“It was no wild-goose chase, doctor.” - -“I think it was. But, of course, that is none of my business. All I ask -is that you pay the money due.” - -“I cannot do that just at present.” - -“Then I will have to put the case in my lawyer’s hands――” - -“At once?” - -“At once.” - -Mr. Bright felt a deep pang shoot through his heart. His pecuniary -difficulties were to be dragged before the public at last. - -“Well, if you must,” he began slowly. Then he stopped short and -half rose from his chair. That figure hurrying so swiftly down the -road towards the house seemed strangely familiar. Was it――could it -be――“Oliver!” he cried out, “Oliver, my boy!” - -“Yes, father, home again!” was the glad response; and a moment later -father and son were in each other’s arms. - -“I did not write or telegraph because I wanted to surprise you,” said -the boy. “How do you feel?” And then, noticing Dr. Tangus, “Excuse me, -Doctor, I did not see you before. How do you do?” and he held out his -hand. - -Dr. Tangus took it coldly. - -“So you are back from your wild trip,” he remarked. - -“Yes, sir; and glad of it.” - -“Dr. Tangus has just called for his money,” put in Mr. Bright. “He says -he must be paid at once or he will go to law. Tell me the worst, my -boy.” - -“There is no worst to tell,” replied Oliver. “Dr. Tangus shall be paid -whenever he wishes the money. The Aurora mine has been located, and is -to-day worth one hundred and seventy-five thousand dollars.” - -“Oliver!” - -“It is true, father, every word of it. Here are the papers to prove the -fact.” And the boy drew from his pocket a large envelope and handed it -over. - -“And your father owns an interest in this mine?” asked Dr. Tangus. He -felt mighty cheap. - -“My father owns five-eighths of it. Of the other three-eighths, one -part belongs to the estate of one James Barr, and the other two to Mr. -Whyland of Boston, who has very kindly loaned us his check for three -thousand dollars to help my father out of his difficulties;” and Oliver -passed the check over for inspection. - -“Seems straight enough,” grunted the doctor. “I will call again -to-morrow. I have no more time to spare to-day;” and catching up his -hat, he left without another word. - -“Oliver, you have saved us from ruin!” cried Mr. Bright with tears in -his eyes. “But for you it would have gone hard indeed with us.” - -“I am glad the search has ended so well,” said the boy; “glad for your -sake, and glad for my own.” - - * * * * * - -Several years have passed. Oliver is now at college, and has for a -room-mate Gus Gregory, who is as stout and as full of good-humor as -ever. - -The Aurora mine is in active operation, managed by competent and -trustworthy men. James Barr’s interest was purchased by Mr. Whyland, -and the money went to support the surveyor’s aged mother, his only -known relative. - -The Spaniard, known to the reader as Colonel Mendix, is now in prison, -suffering the full penalty of the law. Let us trust that when he comes -forth once more it will be with the determination to lead a better life -in the future. - -Mr. Bright still lives at his old home, surrounded with all the ease -and comfort that money can procure. Of Oliver he never tires of talking. - -“One boy in a thousand,” he says. “Thank God for giving me such a son -in my old age!” - -And with these words let us say good-by. - - - THE END. - - - - - THE STRATEMEYER POPULAR SERIES - - - 10 volumes Illustrated and handsomely bound in gold and colors - Attractive new cover designs Price $.75 per volume - - -[Illustration] - -Since the passing of Henty, Edward Stratemeyer is the most widely read -of all living writers for the young, and each year extends the vast -and enthusiastic throng. In obedience to the popular demand we have -established this POPULAR SERIES comprising ten representative books by -this great writer, on which special prices can be made. The stories are -bright and breezy, moral in tone, and while full of adventure, are not -sensational. These books, at a popular price, will be a rare treat for -the boys and girls. - - 1. The Last Cruise of the Spitfire Or Luke Foster’s Strange Voyage - - 2. Reuben Stone’s Discovery Or The Young Miller of Torrent Bend - - 3. True to Himself Or Roger Strong’s Struggle for Place - - 4. Richard Dare’s Venture Or Striking Out for Himself - - 5. Oliver Bright’s Search Or The Mystery of a Mine - - 6. To Alaska for Gold Or The Fortune Hunters of the Yukon - - 7. The Young Auctioneer Or The Polishing of a Rolling Stone - - 8. Bound to be an Electrician Or Franklin Bell’s Success - - 9. Shorthand Tom the Reporter Or The Exploits of a Bright Boy - - 10. Fighting for His Own Or The Fortunes of a Young Artist - - - Lothrop, Lee & Shepard Co., Boston - - - - - THE FAMOUS “OLD GLORY SERIES” - - By EDWARD STRATEMEYER - - _Author of “The Bound to Succeed Series,” “The Ship and Shore - Series,” “Colonial Series,” “Pan-American Series,” etc._ - - Six volumes Cloth Illustrated Price per volume $1.25 - - -[Illustration] - - UNDER DEWEY AT MANILA - Or The War Fortunes of a Castaway - - A YOUNG VOLUNTEER IN CUBA - Or Fighting for the Single Star - - FIGHTING IN CUBAN WATERS - Or Under Schley on the Brooklyn - - UNDER OTIS IN THE PHILIPPINES - Or A Young Officer in the Tropics - - THE CAMPAIGN OF THE JUNGLE - Or Under Lawton through Luzon - - UNDER MACARTHUR IN LUZON - Or Last Battles in the Philippines - - -“A boy once addicted to Stratemeyer stays by him.”――_The Living Church._ - -“The boys’ delight――the ‘Old Glory Series.’”――_The Christian Advocate, -New York._ - -“Stratemeyer’s style suits the boys.”――JOHN TERHUNE, _Supt. of Public -Instruction, Bergen Co., New Jersey_. - -“Mr. Stratemeyer is in a class by himself when it comes to -writing about American heroes, their brilliant doings on land and -sea.”――_Times, Boston._ - -“Mr. Stratemeyer has written a series of books which, while -historically correct and embodying the most important features of -the Spanish-American War and the rebellion of the Filipinos, are -sufficiently interwoven with fiction to render them most entertaining -to young readers.”――_The Call, San Francisco._ - - -_For sale by all booksellers, or sent, postpaid, on receipt of price by_ - - Lothrop, Lee & Shepard Co., Boston - - - - - SOLDIERS OF FORTUNE SERIES - - By EDWARD STRATEMEYER - - - VOLUME ONE - - _ON TO PEKIN_ - _Or Old Glory in China_ - - Cloth 330 pages Illustrated by A. B. Shute $1.25 - -The hero, Gilbert Pennington, goes from the Philippines with the Ninth -Regiment to take part in the rescue of the beleaguered British Embassy -at Pekin by the international forces. Mr. Stratemeyer has risen to the -occasion by giving, in addition to one of his very best stories, a -store of information concerning China and the Chinese, conveyed in a -natural and entertaining manner. - - -The demands of boy readers are peculiar, and the author who can -satisfy them, not once or twice, but uniformly, must possess rare -ability in an extremely difficult field. Such an author is Edward -Stratemeyer.――_Sunday News, Newark, N. J._ - - - VOLUME TWO - - _UNDER THE MIKADO’S FLAG_ - _Or Young Soldiers of Fortune_ - - 320 pages Cloth Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25 - -“Under the Mikado’s Flag” relates the adventures of two young -Americans in Korea and Manchuria during the outbreak of the great war -between Russia and Japan, one of the leading characters being Gilbert -Pennington, the hero of “On to Pekin,” and the other, Ben Russell, who -with his brothers, Larry and Walter, is so well known to the thousands -of readers of the famous “Old Glory Series.” It closes with the great -Battle of Liao-Yang, and is as valuable for the information conveyed as -it is interesting as a story. - - -Mr. Stratemeyer is undoubtedly improving very greatly on the average -book for boys.――_Star, St. Louis, Mo._ - -He knows how to attract and hold boy readers.――_Evening Standard, New -Bedford, Mass._ - - - VOLUME THREE - - _AT THE FALL OF PORT ARTHUR_ - _Or A Young American in the Japanese Navy_ - - 300 pages Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25 - -“At the Fall of Port Arthur” is another of Mr. Stratemeyer’s spirited -war stories. It relates, primarily, the adventures of Larry Russell, -so well known to countless thousands of readers of the famous “Old -Glory Series.” Larry is on board his old ship, the _Columbia_, which is -carrying a cargo for the Japanese government, and is made a prisoner. A -chase ensues, followed by a thrilling sea fight, and the young American -escapes to one of the Japanese cruisers. The young sailor joins the -Japanese navy, and under Admiral Togo assists at the bombardment of -Port Arthur. Life in the Japanese navy is described in detail, and also -life in Port Arthur during the siege and bombardment, which has few -parallels in history. - - -Mr. Stratemeyer is easily foremost among all writers of boys’ books -dealing with great events as they occur.――_Observer, New York._ - -“At the Fall of Port Arthur” is very well told.――_Chronicle, San -Francisco._ - -The story is timely, describing life in the Japanese navy in -detail.――_Times, Buffalo, New York._ - -Mr. Stratemeyer is one of the few writers for boys whose works -may be relied upon for historic accuracy without sacrifice of -interest.――_Journal, New York._ - -Presented with the skill of one of the cleverest juvenile writers of -the period.――_Globe-Democrat, St. Louis._ - -A rattling good story for boys.――_Republican, Denver, Col._ - - - - - PAN-AMERICAN SERIES - - By EDWARD STRATEMEYER - - - VOLUME ONE - - _LOST ON THE ORINOCO_ - _Or American Boys in Venezuela_ - - 12mo Cloth Illustrated Price $1.25 - -This volume tells of five American youths, who, with their tutor, -sail from New York to La Guayra, touching at Curaçao on the way. They -visit Caracas, the capital, Macuto, the fashionable seaside resort, -go westward to the Gulf of Maracaibo and lake of the same name, and -at last find themselves in the region of the mighty Orinoco, and of -course they have some exciting experiences, one of which gives name to -the book. Just the book boys and young men should read, in view of the -general interest in matters Pan-American. - - -Its pictures of South American life and scenery are novel and -instructive.――_The Literary World, Boston._ - -The scenes described are of the sort to charm the hearts of adventurous -boys.――_The Outlook, N. Y._ - - - VOLUME TWO - - _THE YOUNG VOLCANO EXPLORERS_ - _Or American Boys in the West Indies_ - - 12mo Cloth Illustrated Price $1.25 - -This is a complete tale in itself, but has the same characters which -have appeared so successfully in “Lost on the Orinoco.” The boys, -with their tutor, sail from Venezuela to the West Indies, stopping at -Jamaica, Cuba, Hayti, and Porto Rico. They have numerous adventures -on the way, and then set out for St. Pierre, Martinique, where they -encounter the effects of the eruption of Mt. Pelee, and two of the boys -are left on a raft to shift for themselves. Life in the West Indies is -well portrayed, and the tale will appeal to many an older person as -well as to the boys. - - - VOLUME THREE - - _YOUNG EXPLORERS OF THE ISTHMUS_ - _Or American Boys in Central America_ - - 306 pages Cloth Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25 - -This is a complete tale in itself, but forms a new volume in the -surprisingly popular Pan-American series. It relates adventures in a -tour covering Nicaragua, Costa Rica, and the Isthmus of Panama. The -party travel the various canal routes, and have a number of highly -interesting experiences. The volume contains a vast amount of timely -information, and will be read with interest by young men as well as -boys. - - -It is a splendid book that will not only amuse and interest the reader, -but will supply him with most valuable instruction and information upon -subjects which every young American who takes pride in his country, and -what pertains to it, ought to know.――_American Boy._ - - - VOLUME FOUR - - _YOUNG EXPLORERS OF THE AMAZON_ - _Or American Boys in Brazil_ - - 300 pages 12mo Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25 - -An absorbing tale of sight-seeing and adventures in Brazil. The five -boys and their tutor travel the whole seacoast from Rio de Janeiro to -Para, and then move up the Amazon into the rubber country and beyond. -The volume is filled with pen-pictures of life as it exists in Brazil -to-day, and will be heartily enjoyed by all young people. - - -The Pan-American Series by Edward Stratemeyer has been declared by the -boys of this country to be the most up-to-date of all reading for the -young. Filled with action and good fellowship.――_Waverley Magazine._ - -Mr. Stratemeyer has acquired the art of weaving a good deal of solid -information with his web of startling adventure.――_San Francisco -Bulletin._ - - - - - COLONIAL SERIES - - By EDWARD STRATEMEYER - - - FIRST VOLUME - - _WITH WASHINGTON IN THE WEST_ - _Or a Soldier Boy’s Battles in the Wilderness_ - - 12mo Cloth Illustrated by A. B. Shute 302 pages $1.25 - -[Illustration] - -Washington’s earlier life has received scant attention, notwithstanding -its possibilities. Mr. Stratemeyer has woven into an excellent story -something of Washington’s youthful experience as a surveyor, leading on -to the always thrilling Braddock’s defeat. The hero, David Morris, is -several years younger than Washington, with whom he becomes intimately -associated. Pictures of pioneer life are given; scenes with friendly -Indians; and old-time games. - - - SECOND VOLUME - - _MARCHING ON NIAGARA_ - _Or The Soldier Boys of the Old Frontier_ - - 12mo Cloth Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25 - -This tale is complete in itself, but many of its characters have -appeared in “With Washington in the West.” - -The story relates the doings of two young soldiers who join the -Colonial forces in a march on Fort Niagara, during the time of the -war with France, when the whole territory between the Blue Ridge and -the Great Lakes was in a state of unrest. Many side lights are thrown -into the colonial homes, and much useful information is given of the -pioneers who helped to make our country what it is to-day. - - -David Morris is a fine fellow, and about him is woven a fine “Injun” -story that is sure to delight the boys.――_Universalist Leader, Boston._ - -Mr. Stratemeyer is an entertaining story-teller, and his books are -clean.――_Herald, Rochester, N. Y._ - - - THIRD VOLUME - - _AT THE FALL OF MONTREAL_ - _Or a Soldier Boy’s Final Victory_ - - Illustrated by A. B. Shute 12mo Cloth Price $1.25 - -This volume relates the adventures of Dave Morris and his cousin Henry -during the two last campaigns against the French for the possession -of Canada and the territory below the great lakes. The scaling of the -heights of Quebec under General Wolfe, and the memorable battle on -the Plains of Abraham, are given in detail. There are many stirring -scenes of battle, but the tale is not all of war. Pictures of the -rough-and-ready camp life of that day are given, and there are also -adventures while fishing and hunting, and with the Indians. - - -Since the passing of Henty and Alger, Mr. Stratemeyer controls the -field in this particular branch of literature. The chief charm -of his stories lies in the fact that an enormous quantity of -valuable information, collected from the most reliable sources, -is deftly woven into the narrative without taking away from the -interest.――_Philadelphia Inquirer._ - - - FOURTH VOLUME - - _ON THE TRAIL OF PONTIAC_ - _Or Pioneer Boys of the Ohio_ - - 12mo Cloth Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25 - -This volume tells of times in our country immediately after the war -with France for the possession of Canada. The tale is complete in -itself, but in it are introduced a number of characters which have -already figured in this series, including that brave young soldier, -Dave Morris, his sturdy cousin, Henry, and their common friend, Sam -Barringford. Pontiac, the great chief of the Ottawas, is also a leading -figure and much is told of his work in organizing his great conspiracy -against the whites. A fight with the Indians and the French in a -snowstorm is especially realistic, and the entire book carries with it -the atmosphere of colonial times. - - -Boys are attracted to stories by Edward Stratemeyer, and they will -enjoy “On the Trail of Pontiac.”――_Plain Dealer, Cleveland, O._ - - - - - American Boys’ Biographical Series - - By EDWARD STRATEMEYER - - - VOLUME ONE - - _AMERICAN BOYS’ - LIFE OF WILLIAM McKINLEY_ - - 300 pages Illustrated by A. B. Shute and from Photographs $1.25 - -Here is told the whole story of McKinley’s boyhood days, his life at -school and at college, his work as a school teacher, his glorious -career in the army, his struggles to obtain a footing as a lawyer, his -efforts as a Congressman and a Governor, and lastly his prosperous -career as our President, all told in a style particularly adapted to -boys and young men. The book is full of interesting anecdotes, all -taken from life, showing fully the sincere, honest, painstaking efforts -of a life cut all too short. The volume will prove an inspiration to -all boys and young men, and should be in every library. - - -For nearly a year Mr. Stratemeyer has been gathering material and -giving careful study to the life of the young William, his childhood, -his boyhood, and all his inspiring and romantic history. The story was -nearing its end when the awful finale came and tragedy ended the drama -of President McKinley’s life.――_New York Journal._ - - - VOLUME TWO - - _AMERICAN BOYS’ LIFE OF - THEODORE ROOSEVELT_ - - 300 pages 12mo Illustrated from Photographs $1.25 - -[Illustration] - -This excellent work for young people covers the whole life of our -strenuous executive, as schoolboy, college student, traveler, author, -hunter and ranchman, as assemblyman, as civil service commissioner, as -Assistant Secretary of the Navy, as a daring rough rider, as Governor -of New York, and lastly as President. Full of stories taken from real -life and told in a manner to interest both young and old. - - -We unreservedly recommend Mr. Stratemeyer’s books for boys. They -are wholesome, accurate as to historical details, and always -interesting.――_Boston Times._ - - - - - GOOD BOOKS FOR BOYS - - By EDWARD STRATEMEYER - - - _LARRY THE WANDERER_ - _Or The Rise of a Nobody_ - - Cloth Illustrated Price $1.00 - -This is a plain tale of everyday life, written especially for boys and -girls who do not care particularly for stories with a historical or -geographical background. Larry is a youth who has been knocked around -from pillar to post for a number of years. The unravelling of the -curious mystery which surrounds the lad’s identity makes good reading. - - - _JOE, THE SURVEYOR_ - _Or The Value of a Lost Claim_ - - Illustrated by A. B. Shute 12mo Cloth Price $1.00 - -This story relates the trials and triumphs of a sturdy country youth, -who is compelled, by the force of circumstances, to go forth into the -world and earn, not alone his own living, but also support for his twin -sister and his invalid father. - - - _TWO YOUNG LUMBERMEN_ - _Or From Maine to Oregon for Fortune_ - - 320 pages Cloth Illustrated Price $1.25 - -A splendid story, the scene shifting from Maine to Michigan and the -Great Lakes, and then to the Columbia and the Great Northwest. The -heroes are two sturdy youths who have been brought up among the -lumbermen of their native State, and who strike out in an honest -endeavor to better their condition. An ideal volume for every -wide-awake American who wishes to know what our great lumber industry -is to-day. - - -Mr. Stratemeyer’s books are not only entertaining but -instructive.――_Daily Press, Portland, Me._ - - - _BETWEEN BOER AND BRITON_ - _Or Two Boys’ Adventures in South Africa_ - - Illustrated by A. Burnham Shute 354 pages Price $1.25 - -Relates the experiences of two boys, cousins to each other, one -American and the other English, whose fathers are engaged in the -Transvaal, one in farming and the other in mining operations. While the -two boys are off on a hunting trip after big game the war between the -Boers and Britons suddenly breaks out, and while endeavoring to rejoin -their parents the boys find themselves placed between hostile armies. - - -A stirring story of the South African War.――_The Journal, Indianapolis, -Ind._ - - - * * * * * - - - Transcriber’s Notes: - - ――Text in italics is enclosed by underscores (_italics_). - - ――Punctuation and spelling inaccuracies were silently corrected. - - ――Archaic and variable spelling has been preserved. - - ――Variations in hyphenation and compound words have been preserved. - -*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK OLIVER BRIGHT'S SEARCH *** - -Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions will -be renamed. - -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the -United States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following -the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use -of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for -copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very -easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation -of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project -Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may -do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected -by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark -license, especially commercial redistribution. - -START: FULL LICENSE - -THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK - -To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. - -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the -person or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph -1.E.8. - -1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. - -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the -Foundation" or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg-tm License when -you share it without charge with others. - -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country other than the United States. - -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: - -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work -on which the phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the -phrase "Project Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: - - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and - most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no - restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it - under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included with this - eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org. If you are not located in the - United States, you will have to check the laws of the country where - you are located before using this eBook. - -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase "Project -Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg-tm -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. - -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. - -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg-tm License. - -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format -other than "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm website -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original "Plain -Vanilla ASCII" or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg-tm License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. - -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. - -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works -provided that: - -* You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, "Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation." - -* You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg-tm - works. - -* You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - -* You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. - -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of -the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the Foundation as set -forth in Section 3 below. - -1.F. - -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg-tm collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain "Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. - -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right -of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. - -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. - -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. - -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. - -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg-tm work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. - -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm - -Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. - -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at -www.gutenberg.org - -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation - -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. - -The Foundation's business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, -Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up -to date contact information can be found at the Foundation's website -and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact - -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg -Literary Archive Foundation - -Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without -widespread public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. - -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular -state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate - -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. - -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. - -Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate - -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works - -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg-tm concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. - -Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. - -Most people start at our website which has the main PG search -facility: www.gutenberg.org - -This website includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. diff --git a/old/66171-0.zip b/old/66171-0.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 15575c7..0000000 --- a/old/66171-0.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/66171-h.zip b/old/66171-h.zip Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5f52651..0000000 --- a/old/66171-h.zip +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/66171-h/66171-h.htm b/old/66171-h/66171-h.htm deleted file mode 100644 index 028f4b7..0000000 --- a/old/66171-h/66171-h.htm +++ /dev/null @@ -1,10681 +0,0 @@ -<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" - "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> -<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> - <head> - <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=utf-8" /> - <meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> - - <title> - Oliver Bright’s Search, by Edward Stratemeyer—A Project Gutenberg eBook - </title> - - <link rel="coverpage" href="images/cover.jpg" /> - - <style type="text/css"> - -/* DACSoft styles */ - -body { - margin-left: 10%; - margin-right: 10%; -} - -/* General headers */ -h1 { - page-break-before: always; - text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ - clear: both; -} - -/* Chapter headers */ -h2 { - text-align: center; - font-weight: bold; - margin: .75em 0; -} - -div.chapter { - page-break-before: always; -} - -h2.nobreak { - page-break-before: avoid; -} - -/* Indented paragraph */ -p { - margin-top: .51em; - margin-bottom: .49em; - text-align: justify; - text-indent: 1em; -} - -/* Unindented paragraph */ -.noi {text-indent: 0em;} - -/* Centered unindented paragraph */ -.noic { - text-indent: 0em; - text-align: center; -} - -/* Drop caps */ -p.cap {text-indent: 0em;} - -p.cap:first-letter { - float: left; - padding-right: 3px; - font-size: 250%; - line-height: 83%; -} - -.x-ebookmaker p.cap:first-letter { - float: left; - padding-right: 3px; - font-size: 250%; - line-height: 83%; -} - -/* Non-standard paragraph margins */ -.p0 { - margin-top: 0em; - margin-bottom: 0em; -} - -.p2 {margin-top: 2em;} - -.p2clr { - margin-top: 2em; - clear: both; -} - -.p4 {margin-top: 4em;} - -.p6 {margin-top: 6em;} - -.padl2 { - padding-left: 2em; -} - -/* Horizontal rules */ -hr { - width: 33%; - margin-top: 2em; - margin-bottom: 2em; - margin-left: 33.5%; - margin-right: 33.5%; - clear: both; -} - -hr.tb { - width: 35%; - margin-top: 1em; - margin-bottom: 1em; - margin-left: 32.5%; - margin-right: 32.5%; -} - -hr.chap { - width: 65%; - margin-left: 17.5%; - margin-right: 17.5%; -} - -hr.r20 { - width: 20%; - margin-left: 40%; - margin-right: 40%; - margin-top: 1em; - margin-bottom: 1em; -} - -/* Lists */ -ol {list-style-position: outside;} - -ul {list-style-type: none;} - -li { - text-indent: 0em; - padding-left: 0em; -} - -/* Tables */ -table { - margin-left: auto; - margin-right: auto; -} - -/* Table cell alignments */ -.tdl {text-align: left;} - -.tdrb { - text-align: right; - vertical-align: bottom; -} - -.tdrt { - text-align: right; - padding-right: 0.75em; - vertical-align: top; -} - -th { - font-weight: normal; -} - -.pr { - padding-right: .5em; -} - -/* Physical book page and line numbers */ -.pagenum { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */ - /* visibility: hidden; */ - position: absolute; - right: 3%; -/* left: 92%; */ - font-size: x-small; - font-style: normal; - font-weight: normal; - font-variant: normal; - text-align: right; - color: gray; -} /* page numbers */ - -/* Blockquotes */ -.blockquot { - font-size: 90%; - margin-top: 1em; - margin-left: 10%; - margin-right: 10%; - margin-bottom: 1em; -} - -/* Alignment */ -.right {text-align: right;} - -.flright { - float: right; -} - -.x-ebookmaker .flright { - float: right; -} - -/* Text appearance */ -.smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} - -.oldenglish {font-family: "Old English Text MT", - "Engravers Old English BT", - "Old English", - "Collins Old English", - "New Old English", - serif; -} - -/* Small fonts and lowercase small-caps */ -.citefont { - font-size: .9em; -} - -.smfont { - font-size: .8em; -} - -.smfontc { - font-size: .75em; - text-align: center; -} - -.smfontr { - font-size: .75em; - text-align: right; -} - -/* Illustration caption */ -.caption { - font-size: .75em; - font-weight: bold; -} - -/* Images */ -img { - max-width: 100%; /* no image to be wider than screen or containing div */ - height:auto; /* keep height in proportion to width */ -} - -.illowe10 {width: 10em;} - -.figcenter { - margin: auto; - text-align: center; - page-break-inside: avoid; - max-width: 90%; /* div no wider than screen, even when screen is narrow */ -} - -.figleft { - float: left; - clear: left; - margin-left: 0; - margin-bottom: 1em; - margin-top: 0em; - margin-right: 1em; - padding: 0; - text-align: center; - page-break-inside: avoid; - max-width: 35%; -} - -.x-ebookmaker .figleft {float: left;} - -.figright { - float: right; - clear: right; - margin-left: 1em; - margin-bottom: 1em; - margin-top: 0em; - margin-right: 0; - padding: 0; - text-align: center; - page-break-inside: avoid; - max-width: 35%; -} - -.x-ebookmaker .figright {float: right;} - -/* Poetry */ -.poetry { - display: block; - text-align: left; - margin-left: 10%; - margin-right: 10%; -} - -.poetry .stanza {margin: 1em auto;} - -.poetry .verse { - padding-left: 3em; - text-indent: -3em; -} - -/* Poetry indents */ -.poetry .indent0 {padding-left: 3em;} - -/* Transcriber's notes */ -.tnote { - background-color: #E6E6FA; - margin-left: 10%; - margin-right: 10%; - padding: .5em; -} - -.tntitle { - font-size: 1.25em; - font-weight: bold; - text-align: center; - clear: both; -} - -/* Title page borders and content. */ -.title { - font-size: 1.75em; - font-weight: bold; - text-align: center; - clear: both; -} - -.subtitle { - font-size: 1.5em; - text-align: center; - clear: both; -} - -.author { - font-size: 1.25em; - text-align: center; - clear: both; -} - -.works { - font-size: .75em; - text-align: center; - clear: both; -} - -/* Advertisement formatting. */ -.adseries { - font-size: 1.5em; - font-weight: bold; - text-align: center; - clear: both; -} - -.adtitle { - font-size: 1.25em; - clear: both; -} - -.adauthor { - font-size: 1.25em; - clear: both; -} - -/* Hanging indent. */ -.hang { - text-indent: -2em; - padding-left: 3em; -} - -.ident { - padding-left: 2em; -} - - </style> - </head> - -<body> - -<div style='text-align:center; font-size:1.2em; font-weight:bold'>The Project Gutenberg eBook of Oliver Bright's Search, by Edward Stratemeyer</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and -most other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions -whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms -of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online -at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you -are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws of the -country where you are located before using this eBook. -</div> - -<p style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:0; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Title: Oliver Bright's Search</p> -<p style='display:block; margin-top:0; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:0;'>or, The Mystery of a Mine</p> - -<div style='display:block; margin-top:1em; margin-bottom:1em; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Author: Edward Stratemeyer</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>Release Date: August 29, 2021 [eBook #66171]</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>Language: English</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'>Character set encoding: UTF-8</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin-left:2em; text-indent:-2em'>Produced by: Donald Cummings and the Online Distributed Proofreading Team at https://www.pgdp.net</div> - -<div style='margin-top:2em; margin-bottom:4em'>*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK OLIVER BRIGHT'S SEARCH ***</div> - - -<div class="figcenter" id="cover"> - <img src="images/cover.jpg" alt="cover" title="cover" /> -</div> - - - - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p class="noic adauthor">EDWARD STRATEMEYER’S BOOKS</p> -</div> - -<p class="noic adtitle oldenglish">Old Glory Series</p> - -<p class="noic"><i>Six Volumes. Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25.</i></p> - -<ul> -<li class="hang">UNDER DEWEY AT MANILA.</li> -<li class="hang">A YOUNG VOLUNTEER IN CUBA.</li> -<li class="hang">FIGHTING IN CUBAN WATERS.</li> -<li class="hang">UNDER OTIS IN THE PHILIPPINES.</li> -<li class="hang">THE CAMPAIGN OF THE JUNGLE.</li> -<li class="hang">UNDER MacARTHUR IN LUZON.</li> -</ul> - - -<p class="noic adtitle oldenglish">Stratemeyer Popular Series</p> - -<p class="noic"><i>Ten Volumes. Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $0.75.</i></p> - -<ul> -<li class="hang">THE LAST CRUISE OF THE SPITFIRE.</li> -<li class="hang">REUBEN STONE’S DISCOVERY.</li> -<li class="hang">TRUE TO HIMSELF.</li> -<li class="hang">RICHARD DARE’S VENTURE.</li> -<li class="hang">OLIVER BRIGHT’S SEARCH.</li> -<li class="hang">TO ALASKA FOR GOLD.</li> -<li class="hang">THE YOUNG AUCTIONEER.</li> -<li class="hang">BOUND TO BE AN ELECTRICIAN.</li> -<li class="hang">SHORTHAND TOM, THE REPORTER.</li> -<li class="hang">FIGHTING FOR HIS OWN.</li> -</ul> - - -<p class="noic adtitle oldenglish">Soldiers of Fortune Series</p> - -<p class="noic"><i>Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25.</i></p> - -<ul> -<li class="hang">ON TO PEKIN.</li> -<li class="hang">AT THE FALL OF PORT ARTHUR.</li> -<li class="hang">UNDER THE MIKADO’S FLAG.</li> -<li class="hang">WITH TOGO FOR JAPAN.</li> -</ul> - - -<p class="noic adtitle oldenglish">American Boys’ Biographical Series</p> - -<p class="noic"><i>Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25.</i></p> - -<ul> -<li class="hang">AMERICAN BOYS’ LIFE OF WILLIAM McKINLEY.</li> -<li class="hang">AMERICAN BOYS’ LIFE OF THEODORE ROOSEVELT.</li> -</ul> - - -<p class="noic adtitle oldenglish">Colonial Series</p> - -<p class="noic"><i>Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25.</i></p> - -<ul> -<li class="hang">WITH WASHINGTON IN THE WEST.</li> -<li class="hang">MARCHING ON NIAGARA.</li> -<li class="hang">AT THE FALL OF MONTREAL.</li> -<li class="hang">THE FORT IN THE WILDERNESS.</li> -<li class="hang">ON THE TRAIL OF PONTIAC.</li> -<li class="hang">TRAIL AND TRADING POST.</li> -</ul> - - -<p class="noic adtitle oldenglish">Pan-American Series</p> - -<p class="noic"><i>Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25.</i></p> - -<ul> -<li class="hang">LOST ON THE ORINOCO.</li> -<li class="hang">THE YOUNG VOLCANO EXPLORERS.</li> -<li class="hang">YOUNG EXPLORERS OF THE ISTHMUS.</li> -<li class="hang">YOUNG EXPLORERS OF THE AMAZON.</li> -</ul> - - -<p class="noic adtitle oldenglish">Dave Porter Series</p> - -<p class="noic"><i>Cloth. Illustrated. Price per volume $1.25.</i></p> - -<ul> -<li class="hang">DAVE PORTER AT OAK HALL.</li> -<li class="hang">DAVE PORTER IN THE SOUTH SEAS.</li> -</ul> - -<hr class="r20" /> - -<ul> -<li class="hang">TWO YOUNG LUMBERMEN. <i>Price $1.25.</i></li> -<li class="hang">BETWEEN BOER AND BRITON. <i>Price $1.25.</i></li> -<li class="hang">JOE, THE SURVEYOR. <i>Price $1.00.</i></li> -<li class="hang">LARRY, THE WANDERER. <i>Price $1.00.</i></li> -</ul> - - - - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<div class="figcenter" id="i_frontis"> - <img src="images/i_frontis.jpg" alt="" title="" /> - <div class="caption"> - <p class="noic"><span class="smcap"><a href="#Page_129">Before the other could interfere, Oliver was on -the rail and over the side.</a></span></p> - </div> -</div> -</div> - - - - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<h1><span class="smcap">Oliver Bright’s Search</span></h1> - -<p class="noic">OR</p> - -<p class="noi subtitle"><i>The Mystery of a Mine</i></p> - -<p class="p2 noic">BY</p> - -<p class="noi author">EDWARD STRATEMEYER</p> - -<p class="noi works">AUTHOR OF “UNDER DEWEY AT MANILA,” “A YOUNG VOLUNTEER IN CUBA,”<br /> -“FIGHTING IN CUBAN WATERS,” “RICHARD DARE’S VENTURE,”<br /> -“TO ALASKA FOR GOLD,” ETC., ETC.</p> - -<p class="p4 noic"><i>ILLUSTRATED</i></p> - -<p class="p4 noic">BOSTON:<br /> -<span class="adauthor">LOTHROP, LEE & SHEPARD CO.</span></p> - - - - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p class="noic smcap">Copyright, 1895,</p> - -<p class="noic smcap">By THE MERRIAM COMPANY.</p> - -<p class="p2 noic"><span class="smcap">Copyright, 1899, by Lee and Shepard.</span></p> - -<hr class="r20" /> - -<p class="noic"><i>All Rights Reserved.</i></p> - -<hr class="r20" /> - -<p class="noic smcap">Oliver Bright’s Search.</p> - -<p class="p6 noic oldenglish">Norwood Press</p> - -<p class="noi works">J. S. Cushing & Co.—Berwick & Smith<br /> -Norwood Mass. U.S.A.</p> -</div> - - - - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<h2 class="nobreak" id="PREFACE">PREFACE TO THE REVISED EDITION.</h2> -</div> - - -<p>“<span class="smcap">Oliver Bright’s Search</span>,” the second volume of -the “Bound to Succeed” Series, relates the adventures -of a manly American youth who goes West to locate a -mine in which his invalid father owns a large interest. -Oliver is just out of school, and has but little experience -in travelling, yet he does not hesitate to take -the trip to California, by way of the Isthmus of Panama, -and thence into the interior on horseback.</p> - -<p>Oliver is, in every respect, an up-to-date boy; one -who will stand no nonsense when dealing with those -who would defraud his father out of his lawful property; -yet the boy’s moral principles are of a high order, -and he is not unmerciful when the object of his long -search has been gained.</p> - -<p>It was hoped, when the book was first issued, that -the story would stand well beside “Richard Dare’s -Venture,” which had preceded it. It has been even -more successful than the other volume named, and -once more the author must thank the readers and -critics who have taken such an interest in what he has -written.</p> - -<p>In conclusion, the author would say a word in regard -to the scenes in the mining districts of California. -These were drawn very largely from the narratives of -a close and dear relative who spent much time out -there, going as an Argonaut of ’49, and to whom the -vicinity of Sutter’s Mill and the Mokelumne River -became as an open book, not only then but later on. -To write down these descriptions was, therefore, not -only a work of interest, but of love.</p> - -<p class="right">EDWARD STRATEMEYER.</p> - -<p><span class="smcap">Newark, N.J.</span>,<br /> -<span class="padl2">April 1, 1899.</span></p> - - - - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_3"></a>[3]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CONTENTS">CONTENTS.</h2> -</div> - - -<table border="0" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="0" summary="Contents"> -<col style="width: 20%;" /> -<col style="width: 70%;" /> -<col style="width: 10%;" /> -<tr> - <th class="pr smfontr">CHAPTER</th> - <th class="tdl"></th> - <th class="smfontr">PAGE</th> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">I.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_I">An Unexpected Disclosure</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">5</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">II.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_II">The Story of the Aurora Mine</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">12</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">III.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_III">Mr. Bright’s Resolve</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">19</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">IV.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_IV">An Accident</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">25</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">V.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_V">Leaving Home</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">32</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">VI.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_VI">At the Steamship Office</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">39</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">VII.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_VII">A Conversation of Importance</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">45</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">VIII.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_VIII">A Night in New York</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">52</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">IX.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_IX">On the Steamer</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">58</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">X.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_X">The Storm off Cape Hatteras</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">65</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">XI.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XI">Mr. Whyland</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">73</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">XII.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XII">Arrival at Aspinwall</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">79</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">XIII.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIII">Mr. Whyland’s Story</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">86</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">XIV.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIV">In the Wilds of the Isthmus</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">94</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">XV.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XV">An Adventure on the Isthmus</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">101</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">XVI.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVI">A Change of Plan</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">108</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">XVII.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVII">A Startling Cry</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">114</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">XVIII.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XVIII">Oliver’s Heroism</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">120</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">XIX.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XIX">Gus has an Adventure</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">127</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">XX.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_4"></a>[4]</span></td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XX">A Flying Glance</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">134</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">XXI.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXI">An Unsuccessful Pursuit</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">141</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">XXII.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXII">Felix Cottle</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">148</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">XXIII.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXIII">Off for the Mines</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">155</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">XXIV.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXIV">In the Mountains</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">162</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">XXV.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXV">A Storm in the Mountains</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">169</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">XXVI.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXVI">The Aurora Mine at Last</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">175</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">XXVII.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXVII">An Interesting Conversation</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">182</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">XXVIII.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXVIII">Colonel Mendix is astonished</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">188</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">XXIX.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXIX">In the Aurora Mine</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">195</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">XXX.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXX">A Perilous Situation</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">202</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">XXXI.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXI">Seeking Deliverance</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">208</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">XXXII.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXII">A Valuable Find</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">213</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">XXXIII.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXIII">Brought to Book</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">221</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdrt">XXXIV.</td> - <td class="tdl smcap"><a href="#CHAPTER_XXXIV">Conclusion</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">238</td> -</tr> -</table> - - - - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<h2 class="nobreak" id="ILLUSTRATIONS">LIST OF ILLUSTRATIONS.</h2> -</div> - - -<table border="0" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="0" summary="Illustrations"> -<col style="width: 90%;" /> -<col style="width: 10%;" /> -<tr> - <th> </th> - <th class="smfontc">FACING<br />PAGE</th> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdl hang"><a href="#i_frontis">Before the other could interfere, Oliver was on -the rail and over the side</a> <span class="flright"> <i>Frontispiece</i></span></td> - <td class="tdrb"> </td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdl hang"><a href="#i_fp010">Yes, Oliver, alas! I am ruined</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">10</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdl hang"><a href="#i_fp160">The next instant his body disappeared over the edge!</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">160</td> -</tr> -<tr> - <td class="tdl hang"><a href="#i_fp180">There is the Cortez mine, and just below it is the -Aurora.</a></td> - <td class="tdrb">180</td> -</tr> -</table> - - - - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_5"></a>[5]</span></p> -<p class="noi title">OLIVER BRIGHT’S SEARCH.</p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_I">CHAPTER I.<br /> -<small>AN UNEXPECTED DISCLOSURE.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>“If you please, Master Oliver, your father wishes -to see you at once,” said Donald, the man of all work, -as he entered the summer-house where Oliver Bright -sat poring over a volume of travels.</p> - -<p>“What does he want of me?” asked the youth, as -he reluctantly closed the book.</p> - -<p>“He didn’t say; but he wants you to come at once.”</p> - -<p>“Very well, Donald; where is he?”</p> - -<p>“In the library.”</p> - -<p>Oliver rose to his feet somewhat slowly. He was -in no humor just then to face his respected sire. A -few words will explain why.</p> - -<p>Oliver was afraid he was in for a lecture, and -perhaps worse. He was not a boy of bad disposition, -but for once the combination of circumstances had led -him into serious difficulty.</p> - -<p>Oliver was a student at the Rockvale Academy, also -catcher for the local baseball nine. Two days before,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_6"></a>[6]</span> -on the very afternoon that the nine was to play -an important game with the club from Elmport, -Oliver had been kept in by Dr. Tangus for a supposed -fault of which he was not guilty. This had angered -Oliver, and as his particular chum, Gus Gregory, -was kept in at the same time, the two planned -to “get square,” as they termed it.</p> - -<p>Their plan of action was simple and harmless -enough, but it bore grievous results. Gus proposed -to take the doctor’s pet calf from her pasture and -lead her into the schoolroom, and Oliver agreed -that if this was done he would make the old cow -follow.</p> - -<p>At dead of night the two boys started to carry out -their plan. But both the calf and the cow made such -a noise that the doctor’s whole household was aroused, -and the two boys had to run for it.</p> - -<p>In making their escape Gus Gregory had stumbled -over a hothouse bed, smashing a dozen panes of -glass or more, thus provoking a shot from the doctor’s -hired man, who imagined burglars were around.</p> - -<p>When Oliver reached home he found he had quite -a severe cut upon his left hand, obtained in his effort -to help Gus out of the hotbed frame.</p> - -<p>In the morning the wound, despite the fact that he -had bathed it in arnica, appeared as bad as ever. But -Oliver did not dare to ask permission to remain at<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_7"></a>[7]</span> -home, and so set out for the academy in anything -but a cheerful mood.</p> - -<p>Gus Gregory met him at the gate with a long-drawn -face; and small wonder.</p> - -<p>Dr. Tangus had found them out. Gus had dropped -his note-book in the hotbed and the gardener had -picked it up. In a terrible rage, the doctor soon -after called at the Gregory home, and forced a full -confession from Gus. Mr. Gregory had promised to -pay his full share of the damage done, and to bring -his son to account, and the doctor left saying he -would call on Oliver’s father later.</p> - -<p>When Oliver entered the academy he was at once -called aside by the doctor. But little was said; Dr. -Tangus merely stating what he had discovered, and -declaring his intention to settle the matter outside -of the school.</p> - -<p>This had happened Friday morning. It was now -Saturday, and Oliver firmly believed that the hour -of retribution had come. He took all the time possible -to walk up the gravel path and through the -broad hall, and hesitated several seconds before turning -the handle of the library door.</p> - -<p>When he entered the room he found his father -seated at the desk, his forehead resting on his hand. -Mr. Bright was a man well past the middle age of -life, and somewhat broken down in health.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_8"></a>[8]</span></p> - -<p>He was tall and slender, with brown hair and eyes. -His manner as a general rule was gentle, and as -Oliver gazed at his parent, his heart smote him for -the trouble he had brought about.</p> - -<p>“You sent for me, father,” he said, as he stopped -by the door.</p> - -<p>Mr. Bright started up from the revery into which -he had fallen.</p> - -<p>“Yes, Oliver,” he replied. “Come in and sit down. -I want to have a talk with you.”</p> - -<p>The boy did as requested, taking a chair that stood -in the bay-window at the farther end of the room. -He could not help but look at his father closely. -Surely he did not appear to be much provoked over -what had occurred.</p> - -<p>“Come closer, Oliver; here, take this chair by my -side,” went on Mr. Bright. “I do not wish any one -to overhear what I have to say.”</p> - -<p>The boy took the seat indicated. Then for the -first time he noticed how careworn his father appeared. -There were numerous wrinkles upon Mr. -Bright’s brow and his eyes were sunken and troubled.</p> - -<p>“You are nearly seventeen years old, I believe,” -began Mr. Bright after a moment of silence.</p> - -<p>“I’ll be seventeen next May,” replied the boy, -relieved at being asked such an ordinary question.</p> - -<p>“And your term at the academy closes next month, -I believe?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_9"></a>[9]</span></p> - -<p>“Yes, sir; three weeks from yesterday.”</p> - -<p>“And when you have finished your course there -have you thought of what was to be done next?”</p> - -<p>“Why I thought I was to go to college,” said -Oliver, somewhat astonished at the question. “Of -course you didn’t say I was to go; but all the others -were going, and—”</p> - -<p>“It was my full intention to have you go, Oliver. -But circumstances will make a change necessary. I -hate to disappoint you, but I am afraid it cannot -be helped.” And Mr. Bright turned away his face.</p> - -<p>Oliver’s heart grew cold in an instant. Give up -going to college! Give it up after having anticipated -it so long, after having talked it over so many times -with the other boys! Surely his father intended to -punish him too severely altogether.</p> - -<p>“Oh, don’t say that, father!” he cried. “I will -try to do better in the future! I did not mean to -do so wrong! I—I did not stop to think.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Bright straightened up and looked at his son -curiously.</p> - -<p>“What are you talking about, Oliver?” he asked. -“I am not finding fault with the way you have conducted -yourself at the academy. In fact, I must -congratulate you on the general excellence of the reports -Dr. Tangus sends in. By the last I see that -you stood next to the highest in the class, and that<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_10"></a>[10]</span> -counts for much where there are so many bright boys. -I have no doubt that the doctor is proud of you.”</p> - -<p>Oliver was completely mystified by this speech. -It was evident that his father knew nothing concerning -what had taken place. The boy gave an inward -groan as he thought of what a change there -would be when exposure came.</p> - -<p>“Then Dr. Tangus has not been here?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“No. What put that in your head?”</p> - -<p>“I thought he had come to report me.”</p> - -<p>“No; I have not seen the doctor in a month, -though I expect him to call soon.” Oliver started. -“I have had no reasons to find fault with you for -the way in which you conduct yourself. The trouble -in this case comes from an entirely different quarter.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Bright paused. Oliver noted that there was -a slight quiver in his father’s voice. Surely something -quite out of the ordinary was wrong.</p> - -<p>“You are the only one who is left to me, Oliver,” -Mr. Bright continued. “It was always my intention -to give you the best education that money can buy, -for I know the value of such, and then give you a -first-class start in whatever professional pursuit you -might choose to enter. But now, my poor boy”—</p> - -<p>Mr. Bright broke off short.</p> - -<p>“What is the matter, father?” cried Oliver. “Why -cannot you do as you intended? I thought sure I<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_11"></a>[11]</span> -would go to college and then, after perhaps a year -or so of traveling, I would settle down and become -a lawyer—that is, if you thought I was smart -enough.”</p> - -<p>“That programme would have suited me exactly, -Oliver. Your Uncle William was a lawyer, and you -take after him a good deal. But now it cannot be -thought of.”</p> - -<p>“Why?”</p> - -<p>“Ah, it is a bitter story, my boy, and I do not see -how I can tell it to you. I was very blind and foolish, -trusting those that were not worthy of my confidence, -and now both of us must suffer for it.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t understand.”</p> - -<p>“And perhaps you never will, quite. I was never -of a speculative nature; but this was apparently so -easy, and so sure to turn out profitably, that I entered -into it without due consideration.”</p> - -<p>“It is money-matters, then, father, that makes -you say that I must change my plans; must give -up thinking of going to college, and all that?” faltered -Oliver.</p> - -<p>“<a href="#i_fp010">Yes, Oliver, alas!</a> yes.” Mr. Bright heaved a -deep sigh. “<a href="#i_fp010">I am ruined</a>; I am not worth a dollar -in the world!” he added.</p> - -<div class="figcenter" id="i_fp010"> - <img src="images/i_fp010.jpg" alt="" title="" /> - <div class="caption"> - <p class="noic"><a href="#Page_11">“<span class="smcap">Yes, Oliver, alas! I am ruined.</span>”</a></p> - </div> -</div> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_12"></a>[12]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_II">CHAPTER II.<br /> -<small>THE STORY OF THE AURORA MINE.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>Oliver Bright was greatly astonished by his -father’s disclosure. There had been nothing said or -done heretofore to indicate that Mr. Arthur Bright -was on the brink of financial disaster. The two had -lived in exceedingly comfortable, if not elegant, -style, and the boy was granted every reasonable -desire.</p> - -<p>“You are ruined?” he repeated, with eyes wide -open at the announcement.</p> - -<p>“Yes, Oliver, completely ruined. This very roof -that shelters us is no longer my own.”</p> - -<p>“And is there no hope?”</p> - -<p>Mr. Bright shook his head.</p> - -<p>“I have hoped, until now; all hope is useless—that -is”—and the man paused.</p> - -<p>“What, father? What is the chance?” asked the -boy eagerly.</p> - -<p>“It is hardly worth considering, Oliver, it is so -small. We had better face the truth, bitter as it is.”</p> - -<p>Oliver drew a long breath. To endure poverty -is no pleasant thing, especially when one has once<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_13"></a>[13]</span> -been rich. The boy was so completely taken aback -that for a moment he did not say a word.</p> - -<p>“I should have spoken of this before and prepared -you for its coming,” went on Mr. Bright; “but -day after day I trusted that matters would take a -better turn and all would be right. I am to blame -there.”</p> - -<p>“Never mind; you did what you thought was -right,” responded Oliver as bravely as he could. “But -I wish I had known; I would not have laid so many -plans for the future. I might have got ready to go -to work instead.”</p> - -<p>“I have not yet decided what I shall do when we -leave this home. I have been out of active business -so long that I suppose it will come hard to resume -it again. Perhaps I will go back to the book business, -that is, if I can find a suitable opening.”</p> - -<p>Oliver looked at his father in dismay. For a man -in Mr. Bright’s state of health to go back to active -life after a retirement of eight years would be hard -indeed.</p> - -<p>“I wish I knew something of the book business; -I’d sail right in and work for both of us,” he declared -with considerable vim. “But I don’t know -the first thing about business of any kind,” he added -with a sigh.</p> - -<p>“You are bright by nature as well as by name,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_14"></a>[14]</span> -Oliver,” said his father with a faint smile. “I think -you will stand a fair chance of making your way.”</p> - -<p>“I hope so. Any way, I intend to try. But, -father, won’t you tell me something of your affairs?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, Oliver; I intend to tell you as much as -you can understand. It may prove a useful lesson -to you.” Mr. Bright ran his hand over his forehead -as if to collect his thoughts. “About a year after -I sold out my interest in the Franklin Book Company -and settled here, I became acquainted with Colonel -Mendix. Do you remember him?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, yes. He was a dark, Spanish gentleman, -with a heavy black beard.”</p> - -<p>“You are right, saving that he was far from being -a gentleman, though I did not know that at the time. -This Mendix was introduced to me by James Barr, an -intimate friend of mine, who was a surveyor and who -had become interested in several mining schemes.”</p> - -<p>“I remember him also.”</p> - -<p>“This Mendix visited me several times, and finally -unfolded to me a simple plan for making a fortune -on the outlay of a comparatively small sum of money. -As you say, he was of Spanish descent, his people -coming from some place in South America. He had -also a number of relatives among the early settlers in -California, who, you know, settled there before the -gold fever broke out.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_15"></a>[15]</span></p> - -<p>“Yes, I have heard of those Spanish settlements.”</p> - -<p>“Colonel Mendix said that among these relatives -were two old men who had in their possession a paper -containing the full directions for reaching and locating -a very valuable mine somewhere up among the -mountains. These two men were too old to work the -mine themselves, and they were willing to sell out -their secret and rights for ten thousand dollars, to be -paid when the mine was located and found to be as -they represented.”</p> - -<p>“What was the mine supposed to be worth?” asked -Oliver with interest.</p> - -<p>“Colonel Mendix placed its value at not less than -seventy-five thousand dollars, and said it might be -worth several hundred thousand.”</p> - -<p>“It’s a wonder he didn’t buy the mine himself, -without saying anything about it.”</p> - -<p>“He said he had not the cash, and he did not wish -to apply to any of his Spanish friends for fear they -would make inquiries and buy the mine for themselves. -Mendix was a very plausible talker, and before -I was aware of what I was doing, I had agreed -to advance the money, stipulating, however, that -James Barr should be the one to locate the mine -and determine its value. I had known Barr so long -that I felt sure I could trust him.</p> - -<p>“Well, the contract was drawn up and signed.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_16"></a>[16]</span> -By it Mendix was to have a quarter interest in the -Aurora Mine, as we had christened it, and James -Barr was to have an eighth. The remainder was to -be mine. I was to advance the purchasing money -as well as the cash to open up the place, either to -work it ourselves or place it on the market. Do -you follow, Oliver?”</p> - -<p>“Easily enough; it’s as plain as day.”</p> - -<p>“As soon as this was done, Mendix and Barr set -out for California. Two months later I received word -that they had obtained the directions and were about -setting out for the mine, which was located somewhere -back of a place called Sutter’s Mill.</p> - -<p>“Four months passed. Then came a long letter -from Mendix and a note from Barr. The mine had -been found even better than represented, and they -wished to close the bargain at once, and asked me -to forward a draft for five thousand dollars additional, -which they intended to use in purchasing the machinery -of an abandoned mine some ten miles distant, -and have it transported to the Aurora. The outlook -seemed so favorable that I complied without hesitation.</p> - -<p>“Another letter came a month later from Mendix, -saying the mine had been opened, but that another -five thousand dollars would be needed to put in additional -machinery for draining the water and crushing -the rock. This I also paid, although in order to do<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_17"></a>[17]</span> -it I was compelled to take a mortgage on this place -for three thousand.”</p> - -<p>“Didn’t you have other money?”</p> - -<p>“Only in stocks, and those I did not care to sell -as they were then low and I thought they would -rise. I found that Dr. Tangus had money to loan, -and so I went to him.”</p> - -<p>“Dr. Tangus!” cried Oliver, thinking of what -was to come.</p> - -<p>“Yes. He let me have the money and took a -mortgage on this place. The money fell due last -week, and yesterday I received a note from the -doctor asking for payment.”</p> - -<p>Oliver gave a groan. Was it possible his own doings -had hurried Dr. Tangus’s actions?</p> - -<p>“And you cannot pay him?”</p> - -<p>“No. But I am ahead of my story. Time went -on and I heard no more from the mine. I wrote to -Mendix and to Barr, but received no reply. Then -came a draft for four thousand dollars to pay for -some more machinery Mendix had ordered. I paid -the claim, but immediately sent word not to contract -any more debts, as I would not pay them, and -demanding an accounting.</p> - -<p>“None came, and I sent an agent to San Francisco -to find out how matters stood. At the end of two -months I received word from this man, Bentwell,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_18"></a>[18]</span> -and also from Mendix, that the mine had become -flooded with water, that it could not be drained, and -that in making surveys of the place James Barr had -been drowned.</p> - -<p>“This news was so disheartening I knew not what -to do. I was out twenty-four thousand dollars, and -had not a thing to show for it. I was on the point -of starting for California myself when a friend of -Mendix appeared on the scene.</p> - -<p>“This man had been out to the mine, and knew -all about it. He said the Aurora was utterly worthless, -that Mendix had at last found it so, and that -the man had left in disgust for South America. Private -creditors had levied upon such machinery as was -above ground, and that I might as well give up all -hope of ever receiving a dollar out of the thing.</p> - -<p>“This news all but prostrated me; for in the meanwhile -stocks here in the East were declining rapidly. -I kept up as long as I could, but now it is no use to -do so longer. As I said before, every dollar is gone.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Bright turned away to hide his emotion. The -story had been a hard one to tell. Oliver knew not -what to say.</p> - -<p>At this juncture there was a knock at the door, -and Mrs. Hanson, the housekeeper, appeared.</p> - -<p>“Dr. Tangus is here to see you,” she said to Mr. -Bright.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_19"></a>[19]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_III">CHAPTER III.<br /> -<small>MR. BRIGHT’S RESOLVE.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>The announcement that Dr. Tangus had come to -see his father filled Oliver Bright with dismay. Considering -the story he would have to tell, the doctor’s -arrival at any time would have been unpleasant for -the boy, but under existing circumstances it was a -thing to be dreaded. What would his father think -when the whole miserable story came to light?</p> - -<p>And yet, if it must be told, he wished that his -father should first hear it from his own lips. He -knew the doctor could turn the case so that it might -look very black indeed.</p> - -<p>Therefore, before Mr. Bright had time to tell the -housekeeper to show the schoolmaster in, the boy -leaned over and whispered,—</p> - -<p>“I would like to speak a few words with you -before the doctor comes in.”</p> - -<p>His father nodded, thinking that his son wished -to continue the conversation that had just been interrupted.</p> - -<p>“Take the doctor in the parlor, Mrs. Hanson,” he -said. “Say I will see him in a moment.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_20"></a>[20]</span></p> - -<p>Mrs. Hanson at once disappeared. When the two -were left alone Mr. Bright looked at Oliver inquiringly.</p> - -<p>“There is nothing more to tell,” he said; “Dr. Tangus’s -visit caps the climax. He, no doubt, has called -for his money; and unless I get an extension of time -in which to pay up, the matter will be put into the -sheriff’s hands, and the place will be sold.”</p> - -<p>“It is too bad,” returned the boy. “But there is -something else I wish to speak about.” He colored -up painfully. “I did not think so much of it at -the time—that is, I did not think it was so wicked -a deed to do. When I came in I thought Dr. Tangus -had been here and told you all about it.”</p> - -<p>“About what?”</p> - -<p>In a few words, and with a very troubled look -upon his face, Oliver told his tale. Mr. Bright -listened in silence.</p> - -<p>“I know now just how bad and senseless a thing -it was to do,” said the boy, at the conclusion.</p> - -<p>“I trust you do,” replied his father. “Pranks of -that kind to my mind show only a lack of wit. You -ought to be above such things, Oliver.” Mr. Bright -heaved a sigh. “I am afraid this will tend to make -the doctor stiff in his demands. I thought the tone -of yesterday’s letter was rather severe.”</p> - -<p>“I am afraid so too.” Oliver bit his lip in vexation.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_21"></a>[21]</span> -“I wish he had punished me in school instead. -It isn’t fair to make you suffer for what I have -done!” he cried.</p> - -<p>“When we do wrong we are not always sure who -will suffer for it. But we will say no more about -it. What I have revealed will be punishment enough -for you. Now I must go; it will not do to keep -the doctor waiting any longer.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Bright rose and left the library. Oliver remained -where he sat, his chin resting in the palm -of his hand.</p> - -<p>What a change had taken place since he had -entered that room only a short hour before! He -had thought himself a well-to-do boy, with every -prospect of a brilliant future; now he knew he was -as poor as the humblest lad in Rockvale. Instead -of going to college and taking things easy for a year -or so thereafter, he must roll up his sleeves and go to -work. What had brought this great change about?</p> - -<p>Carefully he reviewed all the facts which his father -had related. Not an incident was forgotten. He -wished he had the letters from California to read -over; they might contain some particulars his father -had forgotten to mention.</p> - -<p>“I would like to see that Aurora mine, and satisfy -myself that everything is as this Colonel Mendix -claimed,” he thought. “He was a thorough sharper<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_22"></a>[22]</span> -in my opinion; and if I was father I would not take -his word for the matter.”</p> - -<p>His thoughts were interrupted by the entrance of -Mr. Bright, accompanied by Dr. Tangus, a stout and -highly important looking individual.</p> - -<p>Oliver rose and greeted the visitor, offering him a -chair at the same time, his face flushing the while. -Dr. Tangus looked at him sharply.</p> - -<p>“Well, young man, your father tells me you have -told him of your mischief-making,” began the schoolmaster.</p> - -<p>“Yes, doctor; and I am quite sorry for what I have -done.”</p> - -<p>“Humph! boys generally are after they are found -out,” sniffed the learned gentleman. “However, now -that you have told your father, I intend to leave -the case in his hands. You are generally a pretty -good boy, and I am sorry you have broken your -record.”</p> - -<p>Oliver did not reply, and the doctor turned to Mr. -Bright.</p> - -<p>“Then you will grant me an extension of time?” -asked the latter anxiously.</p> - -<p>“I will give you two months, Mr. Bright,” was -the somewhat slow response; “but more than that I -cannot do. If at the end of that time you cannot -pay I will foreclose.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_23"></a>[23]</span></p> - -<p>“Very well, we will so understand it,” said Oliver’s -father; “and I thank you for the accommodation,” -he added politely. “Here are the papers.”</p> - -<p>The document in the matter was duly drawn up -and signed. Then Dr. Tangus took his leave.</p> - -<p>“I trust you are able to meet the claim when due,” -said he on departing.</p> - -<p>“I shall try my best,” responded Mr. Bright.</p> - -<p>When the door was closed he sank down in his chair.</p> - -<p>“We have two months’ grace, Oliver. If I cannot -pay at the end of that time, out we go.”</p> - -<p>“Two months is quite a while,” replied the boy as -bravely as he could. “A good deal may happen in -that time. Any way, it will give us both a chance -to look around for situations. But tell me, isn’t this -place worth more than the mortgage he holds?”</p> - -<p>“Yes; but it wouldn’t bring it at a forced sale. I -am quite sure we will be left without anything but -our personal effects. Of course they amount to considerable; -but oh, how I hate to part with any of -them!”</p> - -<p>“I hope it won’t become necessary, father. But -will you let me see those letters that Colonel Mendix -wrote you? I have an idea he didn’t tell you the -truth about that mine.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Bright started.</p> - -<p>“The same thought has occurred to me,” he said.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_24"></a>[24]</span> -“I often wished I had gone to the place and seen for -myself.”</p> - -<p>“Why didn’t you?”</p> - -<p>“I was ill, and too much interested in bonds here. -The bonds that I carried were of the par value of one -hundred thousand dollars, four times what the mine -cost. I gave my attention to the larger deal. Besides, -there was another reason; I did not know exactly -where the mine was located nor how to reach it.”</p> - -<p>“You did not?”</p> - -<p>“No. Mendix had all the papers; and he kept -them, or destroyed them, I do not know which.”</p> - -<p>“Then for all you know the mine may be valuable -and in running order to-day,” went on Oliver excitedly.</p> - -<p>“I doubt it, Oliver; and yet”—</p> - -<p>“If Mendix was a rascal, his saying that the mine -was flooded might only be a ruse to get you to abandon -your claim to it.”</p> - -<p>“That is so. To tell the truth, more than once, -since I lost my other property, I have thought of -going out and making an examination.”</p> - -<p>“Then why don’t you go? It will do no harm, and -may save you from ruin.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Bright started up.</p> - -<p>“I will go, Oliver,” he cried.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_25"></a>[25]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_IV">CHAPTER IV.<br /> -<small>AN ACCIDENT.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>His sudden resolve seemed to liven up Mr. Bright -considerably. He rubbed his hands and strode up -and down the room.</p> - -<p>“Yes; I will go,” he repeated. “As you say, it -can do no harm, and may save us from ruin.”</p> - -<p>“May I go too?” asked Oliver eagerly.</p> - -<p>Mr. Bright thought in silence for a moment.</p> - -<p>“I would like to have you with me,” he said; -“but I think you had better remain behind. One -of us ought to stay here, and, besides, the expense -of the journey will be considerable.”</p> - -<p>“I am sorry,” said the boy; “I would like to go -first-rate.”</p> - -<p>“Come, we will go over what letters and papers -I have together. Perhaps you will see something in -them that I have overlooked,” said Mr. Bright.</p> - -<p>Opening one of the locked drawers of the desk, -Mr. Bright brought forth the various communications -he had received from Colonel Mendix and James -Barr. Both father and son read them over carefully.</p> - -<p>“It is my impression that this Mendix did not<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_26"></a>[26]</span> -wish you to visit the Aurora mine,” said Oliver. -“If you will notice, throughout the letters he speaks -of the hard road to travel to get there, and the unhealthiness -of the climate, and all that. He knew -you were not strong, and he hoped that would deter -you from venturing.”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps you are right, Oliver. I did not think -of that before.”</p> - -<p>“Are you sure this Mendix has gone to South -America?”</p> - -<p>“I was; but your questions fill me with doubt. I -begin to think that perhaps I have been blind all -this time. I think—my! my! What is the matter -with Jerry?”</p> - -<p>Oliver’s gaze followed that of his father out of the -window. There, on the smooth lawn, a spirited horse -was acting in an exceedingly strange manner, throwing -his head viciously from side to side.</p> - -<p>“Donald has been whipping him again,” said Oliver. -“He ought to know better.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Bright did not reply. Springing from his chair, -he hurried from the library, his son following.</p> - -<p>In his day Mr. Bright had been quite a horseman, -and Oliver, too, liked to ride. Both hated to see an -animal abused, and both were excited over the present -sight.</p> - -<p>“Whoa! Jerry! whoa!” cried Mr. Bright, running -up to the horse.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_27"></a>[27]</span></p> - -<p>He caught the animal by the halter, which had -been broken off rather short, and attempted to soothe -him. But Jerry’s blood was up, and before Mr. -Bright was aware he was thrown in the air and -came down heavily against the grape arbor.</p> - -<p>“Oh!” He gave a deep groan of pain. “Catch -him, Oliver; but be careful about it.”</p> - -<p>The boy was already advancing. He caught the -halter, and then vaulted upon Jerry’s back.</p> - -<p>For a moment there was a fierce struggle, but -Oliver kept his seat, and feeling himself mastered, -the horse subsided. Then the boy jumped to the -ground and turned him over to the man of all work.</p> - -<p>“Take him back to the stable, Donald,” he said; -“and mind you, he is to be whipped no more.”</p> - -<p>“I only struck him once”—began the man.</p> - -<p>“That was once too often. Jerry is too nervous -to be handled in that manner.”</p> - -<p>Oliver saw the horse led away, and then turned -his attention to his father. To his surprise Mr. -Bright had fainted.</p> - -<p>Running to the well, the boy procured some cold -water, which he sprinkled in his father’s face. It -had the effect of reviving him almost immediately.</p> - -<p>“Are you hurt?” asked Oliver in deep anxiety.</p> - -<p>“I—I am afraid I am. My chest hurts, and I -cannot use my right leg.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_28"></a>[28]</span></p> - -<p>“I’ll call Dr. Kitchell,” replied Oliver.</p> - -<p>Fortunately the physician lived directly across the -road. He was at home, and in less than three minutes -the boy had him over.</p> - -<p>“Humph! two ribs broken, and also the right -leg!” said Dr. Kitchell. “Rather a serious accident. -Come, we will carry him into the house.”</p> - -<p>Donald was called, and the three succeeded in -carrying the unfortunate man into the house and -placing him on the lounge in the sitting-room.</p> - -<p>Then the man of all work was dispatched to the -drug-store, and the doctor went to work to set the -broken limb and fix up the fractured ribs. Oliver -assisted all he could, the tears standing in his eyes -meanwhile.</p> - -<p>“Never mind,” said Dr. Kitchell, noticing his grief. -“It will be all right. All your father wants is -quietness for a couple of months. There is small -danger.”</p> - -<p>Oliver felt relieved at this statement. And yet he -could not help but think of the trip to California. -His father would have to abandon that now, and he -would hardly be well before they would be obliged -to leave the house and seek a home elsewhere.</p> - -<p>Towards evening Mr. Bright felt somewhat easier, -and he and Oliver had quite a talk. He demurred -strongly at being compelled to rest quietly for eight<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_29"></a>[29]</span> -weeks or longer, and spoke of the plans that must -now be cast aside.</p> - -<p>“Why not let me go?” said Oliver suddenly. “I -am sure I can get along all right.”</p> - -<p>“No, Oliver; it would be asking too much of -you.”</p> - -<p>“No, it would not. Can you get along without -me?”</p> - -<p>“I suppose I might; Mrs. Hanson is a capital -nurse. But it is too big an undertaking for a boy.”</p> - -<p>“You forget, father, that I am nearly seventeen -years old.”</p> - -<p>“No, I do not; nor do I forget that you are smart -for your age. But still I would hate to send you -on a journey that might prove full of danger. If -their accounts be true, the road is a perilous one, -and the mining districts are full of rough characters.”</p> - -<p>“After I left San Francisco I could go well armed. -I don’t think it would be so dangerous. A good -class of settlers are pouring into the place, and they -would surely not molest me. You must remember -that things are not as they were at the close of the -war.”</p> - -<p>“What you say is true, Oliver; but I would hate -to send you into the midst of danger, however slight. -If you were only going to San Francisco it would<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_30"></a>[30]</span> -be different. But to go away up in the mountains, -and utterly alone”—</p> - -<p>Mr. Bright did not finish, a violent twitch of pain -stopping him short. Seeing that his father could not -stand conversing, Oliver withdrew.</p> - -<p>He ascended to his own room, and, taking a chair -by the window, sat down to think. For fully half -an hour he did not move. Then he went below and -made his way to the kitchen, where Mrs. Hanson -was preparing some broth for the sick man.</p> - -<p>“Mrs. Hanson,” he said, calling her aside, “father -was planning to go on a journey, and now that he -can’t go, I’ve been thinking of going for him without -letting him know—that is, for several days. Do -you think you could get along without me while I -am gone?”</p> - -<p>“Why, bless you, Oliver, yes! I’ve been a nurse -these ten years before I was a housekeeper. It will -be no trouble whatever.”</p> - -<p>“And you will not let him know that I have -gone—that is, for a few days? It might only -worry him.”</p> - -<p>“If you wish it.”</p> - -<p>“Then it’s settled.”</p> - -<p>“When will you go?”</p> - -<p>“Monday morning early.”</p> - -<p>“Very well; I won’t say a word. It’s business, I -suppose?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_31"></a>[31]</span></p> - -<p>“Yes; father’s business; something that must be -attended to.”</p> - -<p>All that evening Oliver was busy with his preparations. -There was a big valise to pack, and numerous -other things to do. At ten o’clock, when the -others had retired, he stole down to the library, and -seating himself at the table, took complete copies of -all the letters and papers relating to the Aurora -mine and Colonel Mendix’s peculiar method of transacting -business.</p> - -<p>“Now I am ready to start,” he said to himself, -as he arose. “When I arrive in New York I will -either sell or pawn my gold watch and my diamond -pin, and then—ho, for the Aurora mine!”</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_32"></a>[32]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_V">CHAPTER V.<br /> -<small>LEAVING HOME.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>On the following morning Oliver found his father -somewhat recovered from the rude shock he had received. -Of course the man was unable to move from -the couch upon which he rested, but he was able to -sit up and converse without, apparently, more than -an occasional dull pain.</p> - -<p>Mr. Bright was, however, much worried over the -disarrangement of his plans, sighing out continually -his disappointment at not being able to leave on a -tour of discovery. To all this Oliver made no reply, -saving to urge his parent not to worry, as all would -yet turn out right.</p> - -<p>During the day, the boy managed, by skillful questioning, -to gain all the additional information that -was to be had. In the afternoon he attended Sunday-school, -the last time, he thought, for many weeks -and perhaps months to come.</p> - -<p>In the class with Oliver was Gus Gregory, his chum, -a short and exceedingly stout youth, with a freckled -but not unpleasant face. At the close of the service -he and Oliver left together.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_33"></a>[33]</span></p> - -<p>“Well, how did you make out over our fun at -the doctor’s?” was Gus’s first question.</p> - -<p>Oliver told him.</p> - -<p>“My, but you got off easier than I did!” exclaimed -the stout youth. “Didn’t pop give it to me though! -I haven’t been able to sit down with any kind of -comfort since.”</p> - -<p>Oliver did not reply. He was silent for a moment, -and then laid his hand on his chum’s shoulder.</p> - -<p>“Say, Gus,” he said, “will you keep a secret if -I tell it to you?”</p> - -<p>“Why, of course, Olly,” was the prompt reply. -“Did I ever let out anything I shouldn’t?”</p> - -<p>“Well, then, I’m going away.”</p> - -<p>“Going away? Where?”</p> - -<p>“To California.”</p> - -<p>“Phew! you don’t mean it!”</p> - -<p>“Yes, I do. I’m going to start to-morrow morning -first thing. I thought I’d tell you and say good-by.”</p> - -<p>“Does your father know?”</p> - -<p>“No. Only Mrs. Hanson, and now you.”</p> - -<p>“What are you going for? just to run away? -I thought you said your father didn’t touch you for -the trouble we got into.”</p> - -<p>“Neither did he. I’m going on business. Come, -let us sit under that tree, and I’ll tell you all about -it.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_34"></a>[34]</span></p> - -<p>And seated under a stately elm that grew by the -roadside, Oliver related all there was in his mind.</p> - -<p>Gus Gregory was deeply interested.</p> - -<p>“I hope you’ll succeed,” he said. “My, how I wish -I was going along! Nothing would suit me better.”</p> - -<p>“And nothing would suit me better than to have -you,” replied Oliver; “but that can’t be thought of.”</p> - -<p>“Which way are you going?”</p> - -<p>“By the way of Panama.”</p> - -<p>“It will cost quite a bit.”</p> - -<p>“Something less than a hundred dollars.”</p> - -<p>“That is quite a sum, but not so much as I -thought. Have you got your ticket yet?”</p> - -<p>“No; I intend to get that in New York to-morrow. -The steamer sails for Aspinwall on Wednesday.”</p> - -<p>The two boys talked the matter over for some -time. Gus was intensely interested.</p> - -<p>“Well, I hope you’ll meet with success,” he said -on parting. “I think it is a big undertaking for -a boy, but I wish it was I instead of you.”</p> - -<p>The remainder of the Sunday passed quickly. In -the evening Oliver spent another pleasant hour with -his father.</p> - -<p>When the time came for parting, the boy could -hardly keep back the tears. Who knew how long -it would be before he should see his father again? He -was almost tempted to tell all, but the fear of being -told to give up the project kept back the words.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_35"></a>[35]</span></p> - -<p>Oliver slept but little that night, and he was up -at early dawn. Making a hasty toilet, he took up -his valise and stole down-stairs. Mrs. Hanson had -anticipated him, and a warm breakfast stood ready -to which he did but scant justice.</p> - -<p>Half an hour later he was off, the housekeeper -wishing him Godspeed. The railroad station was -half a mile distant; but it took the boy scarcely any -time to cover that distance, so fearful was he of being -discovered and told to return.</p> - -<p>Rockvale was a town of considerable size, situated -some forty miles from the metropolis. There were -over a dozen trains daily to Jersey City, the first at -half-past six in the morning. This was the one Oliver -had calculated on taking, and buying a ticket, he -waited a few moments, and then, as the train came -rolling in, got aboard.</p> - -<p>There was a sudden jerk, and the train started and -rolled out away from the station. Oliver Bright was -off on his strange quest at last.</p> - -<p>He felt queer as he settled back in his seat which -he occupied alone. What would the outcome of his -trip be? Would he succeed or fail?</p> - -<p>The run to Jersey City was an uneventful one. -Oliver had taken it a great number of times, so it was -no novelty, and he occupied the time in studying -a guide-book he had purchased at the news-stand.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_36"></a>[36]</span> -When they arrived at the ferry he followed the stream -of people on to the boat, and off again at the other -side.</p> - -<p>“New York!” he thought to himself as he passed -up Liberty Street. “Now to sell or pawn the watch -and the pin, and then I will go to the steamship -ticket-office and engage a berth.”</p> - -<p>Before leaving home, the boy had cut from the metropolitan -paper Mr. Bright was in the habit of taking -the names and addresses of several pawnbrokers, and -toward one of these Oliver now bent his steps.</p> - -<p>He much preferred pawning the articles to selling -them, as both the watch and the diamond scarf-pin -were gifts from his father, and he wanted the chance -to recover them.</p> - -<p>Entering the establishment, he drew out the gold -watch, and passing it over to the clerk, asked how -much would be allowed upon it.</p> - -<p>“Your own?” was the first question.</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir; a birthday gift.”</p> - -<p>The clerk sent the watch to the back part of the -store for examination.</p> - -<p>“Fifty dollars,” he said upon his return.</p> - -<p>“Fifty dollars!” exclaimed Oliver, in some dismay. -“I thought I could get more! The watch cost over -a hundred.”</p> - -<p>“That is all we can allow.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_37"></a>[37]</span></p> - -<p>“I cannot let it go for that;” and Oliver slipped -the timepiece in his pocket.</p> - -<p>The clerk paid another visit to the office.</p> - -<p>“We will make that sixty dollars,” he said, coming -back. “You will not get more anywhere.”</p> - -<p>“I shall try,” replied Oliver.</p> - -<p>Another establishment was close at hand. But here -the proprietor would not go above fifty dollars; so -Oliver went back to the first place.</p> - -<p>“I guess I’ll take that sixty dollars,” he said.</p> - -<p>“Told you you couldn’t get any more,” returned -the clerk coolly, as he made out the ticket and handed -over the money.</p> - -<p>“And now how much will you allow me for this -pin?” asked Oliver, as he drew it from his wallet. -“It is a pure diamond.”</p> - -<p>“Is this also a gift?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir.”</p> - -<p>The clerk took it back to the private office. When -he returned he told Oliver to go back, as the proprietor -would like to see him.</p> - -<p>Oliver did so, and found himself face to face with a -thin, sharp nosed individual.</p> - -<p>“Where did you get that pin?” was the man’s -question.</p> - -<p>“My father gave it to me on Christmas, two years -ago.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_38"></a>[38]</span></p> - -<p>“Rather a fine Christmas gift.”</p> - -<p>“It was, sir.”</p> - -<p>“What is your name and address, please?” And -the man prepared to write it down.</p> - -<p>Oliver told him.</p> - -<p>“And you are sure your father gave you this pin -for Christmas?”</p> - -<p>“Certainly I am,” replied the boy, flushing. “I -hope you don’t think I—”</p> - -<p>“I have nothing to say, excepting that a gold watch -and a diamond pin were stolen from a boarding-house -in Twenty-fourth Street last evening.”</p> - -<p>“And you think—” began Oliver, his heart rising -in his throat.</p> - -<p>“Never mind what I think, young man. Of course -you may be innocent. But we must always be on our -guard. I have sent my clerk around to the police -precinct close by. You will please remain here until -he returns.”</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_39"></a>[39]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_VI">CHAPTER VI.<br /> -<small>AT THE STEAMSHIP OFFICE.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>Oliver was astonished and dismayed by the pawnbroker’s -statement. What if the police should think -he was the thief? It would cause him no end of -trouble, and might prove the means of compelling -him to return home.</p> - -<p>“I don’t see what reasons you have for supposing -the things are not mine,” he began.</p> - -<p>“I do not say they are not,” was the reply. “In -fact, I must say you look thoroughly honest. But, -as I said before, we must be careful. We cannot -afford to take in things that have been stolen and -then give them up to the police.”</p> - -<p>Oliver sank down in a chair. He had but a -short ten minutes to wait, but the time seemed an -eternity.</p> - -<p>He was glad to see the clerk return alone.</p> - -<p>“It’s all right,” were his words. “The goods taken -were recovered an hour ago.”</p> - -<p>How relieved Oliver felt! He sprang to his feet.</p> - -<p>“Please give me the pin,” he said.</p> - -<p>The man handed it over.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_40"></a>[40]</span></p> - -<p>“I am sorry I suspected you,” he said. “But -business is business.”</p> - -<p>“I suppose it is.”</p> - -<p>“I thought you wanted to pawn that pin?”</p> - -<p>“So I do; but I shall take it elsewhere now.”</p> - -<p>And without waiting to be questioned further, -Oliver hurried from the place.</p> - -<p>About a block down the street he came to a similar -establishment—indeed, the neighborhood was full -of them. The proprietor took the pin and examined -it closely.</p> - -<p>“What did you give for this pin?” he asked -cautiously.</p> - -<p>“I did not buy it. My father gave it to me.”</p> - -<p>“How much do you want on it?”</p> - -<p>Oliver hesitated. He knew he had better place the -figure high.</p> - -<p>“Seventy-five dollars.”</p> - -<p>“The pin did not cost that.”</p> - -<p>“It cost more than that.”</p> - -<p>“I will let you have forty dollars on it.”</p> - -<p>“I must have at least sixty.”</p> - -<p>Finally a compromise was effected, and Oliver received -his ticket and fifty dollars.</p> - -<p>“That makes one hundred and ten dollars for the -two,” he said to himself when on the street once -more; “and that, added to what I have saved up from<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_41"></a>[41]</span> -my spending money, gives me a capital of one hundred -and eighty-five dollars. By hook or by crook -that amount must see me through.”</p> - -<p>From the pawnbroker’s Oliver made his way to -lower Broadway, where the steamship office was located. -It was a busy place, and the boy was compelled -to wait for his turn.</p> - -<p>While he stood in line he meditated on what he -would have to pay for a ticket. If there was any -such thing as going second or third class he intended -to do so. In his present straitened circumstances -every dollar counted.</p> - -<p>Suddenly a young man behind him touched him -on the elbow and said,—</p> - -<p>“Say, do you know if they take back tickets -here?”</p> - -<p>“What do you mean?” asked Oliver.</p> - -<p>“I mean tickets to California. I have a ticket for -Wednesday’s steamer and I can’t go because my -uncle has just died, and I must take charge of part -of his business.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t know,” said Oliver. “I am just here to -buy a ticket for myself,” he continued.</p> - -<p>“Is that so? Then let me sell you mine. I paid -eighty dollars for it, and I’ll let you have it for -sixty; that is, if they won’t take it back.”</p> - -<p>“Is that the cheapest passage?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_42"></a>[42]</span></p> - -<p>“It is on the regular lines.”</p> - -<p>“Then I’ll take it, if they won’t take it back.”</p> - -<p>At the desk it was found that the ticket could -be exchanged for a later boat, but could not be canceled. -As the young man did not know whether, -under the present condition of things, he would go -to California or not, he decided to sell the ticket -to Oliver; and the transfer was made on the spot.</p> - -<p>Oliver was told that the boat would leave at ten -o’clock Wednesday morning from the pier on the -North River. He made a note of the time and the -number of the pier, and then quitted the place.</p> - -<p>As he did so, he ran plump into a man who was -hurrying up the steps.</p> - -<p>“I beg your pardon!” he exclaimed. “I did not -mean”—</p> - -<p>And then he stopped short. And small wonder. -The man he had encountered was Colonel Mendix!</p> - -<p>In all his life Oliver was never more astonished. -He knew not what to say or do.</p> - -<p>Colonel Mendix, having seen him but once, and -that many years previous, did not recognize the boy. -He stepped back, then passed Oliver, and entered -the steamship office.</p> - -<p>“Has the Rosabel sailed yet?” Oliver heard him -ask.</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir; half an hour ago.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_43"></a>[43]</span></p> - -<p>“Ha, too bad! And the next steamer?”</p> - -<p>“Sails Wednesday.”</p> - -<p>“Was there a passenger on the Rosabel named -Whyland—Thomas Whyland?” continued the colonel -anxiously.</p> - -<p>The clerk looked over the register.</p> - -<p>“No, sir.”</p> - -<p>“You are sure?”</p> - -<p>“His name is not here. If he was aboard he must -have sailed on some one else’s ticket.”</p> - -<p>“Ah, I see. Thank you.”</p> - -<p>Colonel Mendix turned and left the building. Almost -mechanically Oliver followed him.</p> - -<p>He knew not what to make of the unexpected -meeting. Had Mendix just returned from South -America or had he never been to that country?</p> - -<p>“I must find out,” thought the boy. “Perhaps -if I discover his business here I may be able to -find out something about the Aurora mine also. I -wish I had caught the name of the man he asked -for.”</p> - -<p>He had the day before him, and also Tuesday, and -he resolved to make good use of the time. Who -knew but what he might be able to gain a deal of -information before starting for the West?</p> - -<p>Colonel Mendix walked rapidly up Broadway until -he reached Trinity Church. Then he crossed over<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_44"></a>[44]</span> -and hurried down Wall Street. Oliver was close -behind and saw him enter an office not far away.</p> - -<p>Walking past the place, he read the sign,—</p> - -<p class="noic">EZRA DODGE & CO.,<br /> -<span class="smcap">California Mining Stocks</span>,</p> - -<p class="noi">over the door. He would have liked to follow Colonel -Mendix inside, but could find no pretext for so -doing until he noticed a slip on the window which -read,—</p> - -<p class="noic"><span class="smcap">Free Circulars Inside.</span></p> - -<p>Entering the place, he saw that the colonel had -taken a seat within the office railing and was in -earnest conversation with an elderly gentleman, presumably -Mr. Dodge.</p> - -<p>Oliver stepped up to a clerk in charge.</p> - -<p>“Will you kindly give me a circular of stocks?” -he asked.</p> - -<p>“Certainly,” was the reply. “Think of investing?”</p> - -<p>“I wish to see what you have.”</p> - -<p>“Offer you some fine inducements,” said the clerk, -handing over a folded paper.</p> - -<p>Oliver opened the circular, and pretended to look -it over.</p> - -<p>“Now, Dodge, about this Aurora mine,” he heard -Colonel Mendix say, and immediately he was all attention.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_45"></a>[45]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_VII">CHAPTER VII.<br /> -<small>A CONVERSATION OF IMPORTANCE.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>Oliver Bright was sure that he was going to -hear something of importance, and he determined -that not a word of the conversation between Colonel -Mendix and Ezra Dodge should escape him. With -his eyes fixed upon the circular in his hand, he kept -his ears wide open for whatever might be said.</p> - -<p>“Yes, about the Aurora mine,” rejoined Ezra -Dodge. “I want to know if you have a clear title -to it?”</p> - -<p>“Why, of course—that is, I and another have.”</p> - -<p>“Then that’s all right. I wanted to know what -I was loaning money on.”</p> - -<p>“Didn’t I give enough other security?” asked the -colonel, with a slight sneer in his tones.</p> - -<p>“Certainly. If you hadn’t I wouldn’t have loaned -you a dollar. Why, I don’t even know where your -mine is located, excepting that it is somewhere on -the Mokelumne River.”</p> - -<p>“Well, whether you know it or not, the mine is -there, and that is enough for me.”</p> - -<p>“Does it pay?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_46"></a>[46]</span></p> - -<p>“Perhaps it does.”</p> - -<p>“Are you working it?”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps I am.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, pshaw! if you don’t want to say anything -about it, tell me so,” cried Ezra Dodge, in evident -disgust.</p> - -<p>“Well, I don’t. What I want to know is, where -can that machinery be bought?”</p> - -<p>“Right in San Francisco.”</p> - -<p>“You are sure?”</p> - -<p>“Positive. If you don’t care to believe me, buy -it in New York and have it shipped out.”</p> - -<p>“Come, Dodge, don’t get mad. If I want to keep -the location of my mine to myself, it ought to be all -right. I intend”—</p> - -<p>Oliver did not hear any more of the conversation. -The clerk in the establishment approached him, and -talked stocks so persistently that the boy was glad -to escape from the office.</p> - -<p>He had, however, overheard several important facts. -The mine was located on the Mokelumne River; Mendix -did not care to speak of its value, but was -evidently investing considerable money in buying -machinery, which would tend to show that the claim -was worth a good deal.</p> - -<p>“How fortunate that I met the man!” thought -Oliver. “I wouldn’t have missed this chance for a<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_47"></a>[47]</span> -hundred dollars! And to tell father that he was in -South America while he has been in California all -the while! On the Mokelumne River. That ought -not to be so hard to locate.”</p> - -<p>Oliver did not stop to consider that the spot mentioned -was many miles in extent, and in a very wild -and mountainous region. His mind was filled only -with the desire to reach the place, and view with his -own eyes his father’s property.</p> - -<p>Walking to the opposite side of the street, he stood -in the shadow of a doorway and waited for Colonel -Mendix to appear. Five minutes passed, and then -the man came from Ezra Dodge’s office, walked up -Wall Street, and turned down into Broad.</p> - -<p>Oliver followed him as best he could, but suddenly -Mendix turned another corner, and before the boy -could reach the spot the man had disappeared.</p> - -<p>In vain Oliver hunted up and down and in the -several side streets; Colonel Mendix was nowhere to -be seen, and after half an hour’s search Oliver gave -up the task.</p> - -<p>It was now half-past twelve, and walking about had -made Oliver hungry. He moved along until he -came to a restaurant, and entering, ordered dinner.</p> - -<p>While at the table he was astonished at the bustle -and confusion around him. It was true he had -been to the metropolis many times, but on every succeeding<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_48"></a>[48]</span> -occasion the city seemed to be more busy, -more full of life.</p> - -<p>Having eaten his meal, and settled the amount of -the check at the desk, Oliver sauntered out upon -the street once more. He had a day and a half -before him, and hardly knew what to do. He walked -up Nassau Street to Park Row, and then turning, -drifted with the tide of humanity down Broadway. -The knowledge that he was carrying so much cash -about worried him, but each time he felt for it he -found that his money was still safe in the inside -pocket of his vest.</p> - -<p>At length Oliver reached the Battery, and sat -down on one of the benches that line the promenades. -His long walk in the afternoon sun had tired -him, and his head was beginning to ache.</p> - -<p>The sights around him interested him not a little. -Directly opposite to him was a poor women with a -sick baby, the little thing fairly gasping for breath. -To his right sat a shabby workman, or he might have -been a tramp, half asleep, and beside him a tall, -gaunt, almost starved looking boy, certainly not much -older than himself.</p> - -<p>Upon another bench three emigrant Germans were -holding an animated conversation in their own -tongue, though Oliver occasionally heard the names -Chicago and Milwaukee mentioned.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_49"></a>[49]</span></p> - -<p>The sick baby interested the boy most of all. His -heart ached to see the little one in such misery, and -when he saw the mother wipe the tears from her -eyes, he hastily rose and walked over to her.</p> - -<p>“You seem in distress,” he said kindly. “Can I -do anything for you?”</p> - -<p>She looked up into his honest, open face.</p> - -<p>“My baby is so sick!” she cried. “I would not -care if it was myself—but baby”—and she broke -down completely.</p> - -<p>“You ought to go to a doctor,” he went on.</p> - -<p>“Alas! I have no money!” she replied. “I spent -the last fifty cents I had yesterday.”</p> - -<p>Oliver’s hand went down into his pocket on the -instant. He could ill spare the money, but he would -have done anything rather than refuse the woman -assistance.</p> - -<p>“Here is a dollar for you,” he said, holding out -that amount. “I wish I could make it more; but -that will help you some.”</p> - -<p>For an instant the woman stared at him. Then -she snatched the silver coin from his hand.</p> - -<p>“Oh, thank you, thank you!” she cried; “I did -not expect it. You are too kind.”</p> - -<p>“I would advise you to get medicine for the baby -at once.”</p> - -<p>“I will, sir; I know something that I think will<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_50"></a>[50]</span> -just cure my poor Ellie. Oh, thank you, sir, and -God bless you!”</p> - -<p>And with tears of joy streaming down her face -the woman hurried away.</p> - -<p>A warm feeling surged through Oliver’s heart as -he slowly followed, the feeling that always comes -when one has done a noble action.</p> - -<p>“Poor woman, poor baby,” he murmured to himself. -“I hope she gets the medicine and that it -cures her Ellie. What a dear baby it was!”</p> - -<p>He had hardly gone a dozen steps before he felt -a hand upon his shoulder. It was the gaunt-looking -boy.</p> - -<p>“Will you please help me a little?” he asked -pleadingly. “I have been out of work for three -weeks and can’t get anything to do anywhere.”</p> - -<p>“You are telling the truth?” asked Oliver sharply, -to make sure that he was not being deceived.</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir. I worked in Haddan’s piano action -factory that burnt down.”</p> - -<p>“And you cannot get work anywhere?”</p> - -<p>“No, sir. Oh, you don’t know how hard I have -tried! Every morning I answer the advertisements -in the papers, but there are always a hundred men -for one place.”</p> - -<p>By the way the boy spoke Oliver knew that he -told the truth. He hesitated for a moment, and then -handed out another dollar.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_51"></a>[51]</span></p> - -<p>“There,” he said. “I cannot afford that very well, -but I hate to see any one in want. I hope by the -time that is gone you will find work. Are you alone -in the world?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir.”</p> - -<p>“Then, if you cannot get work here, I advise you -to strike out for some other place.”</p> - -<p>“Thank you; I won’t stay in New York much -longer.”</p> - -<p>Oliver did not reply, and the two separated.</p> - -<p>“Cannot find work anywhere,” mused the boy; -“it must be hard indeed. What will father and -I do if the Aurora mine scheme proves a failure? I -would be nearly as badly off as that poor chap. God -grant it does not come to that!”</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_52"></a>[52]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_VIII">CHAPTER VIII.<br /> -<small>A NIGHT IN NEW YORK.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>From the Battery, Oliver made his way back to -Wall Street. He was in hopes of seeing Colonel -Mendix again, and for this reason passed and repassed -Ezra Dodge’s office several times.</p> - -<p>But his watching was fruitless, and finally by five -o’clock he gave up. By this time the financial center -was almost deserted, and he saw Ezra Dodge’s clerk -close the office up for the day, and walk away.</p> - -<p>Instantly he decided to follow and accost the -young man, and this he did before he had formed -any clear plan of action.</p> - -<p>“Excuse me,” he said; “but I think I saw you -down in Mr. Dodge’s office.”</p> - -<p>“You did,” replied the clerk wonderingly.</p> - -<p>“Wasn’t Colonel Mendix there?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, he was; this morning.”</p> - -<p>“Can you tell me where he is stopping?”</p> - -<p>“At the Gilliford House.”</p> - -<p>“The Gilliford House?”</p> - -<p>“Yes. It is on Broadway near Sixth Avenue. Did -you want to see him?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_53"></a>[53]</span></p> - -<p>“I did. Do you suppose he is there now?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t know. He intends to start for California -soon.”</p> - -<p>“So I understand. He has a mine there, I believe.”</p> - -<p>“Yes.” The clerk hesitated. “I don’t know much -about Colonel Mendix,” he continued.</p> - -<p>“Does he live here?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, no; he comes from Sacramento City.”</p> - -<p>“Thank you. And you think he is up at the -Gilliford House?”</p> - -<p>“He is if he hasn’t left for the West yet.”</p> - -<p>“Did he speak of leaving so soon?”</p> - -<p>“I heard him tell Mr. Dodge he might take the -train for St. Louis to-day.”</p> - -<p>The clerk nodded and then boarded a Broadway -car. Oliver stood on the pavement in wonder.</p> - -<p>“Might take the train for St. Louis to-day!” he -murmured; “and I thought all the while that he -intended to stay in New York for some time at least! -If he has gone he will have a full day’s start of me, -to say nothing of the difference in the trip overland -and the one by the way of the isthmus. I wish I -was going by train instead.”</p> - -<p>After a moment’s reflection, he resolved to go at -once to the Gilliford House and see if the colonel -had yet departed. If he had, then there was nothing -to do but wait for the steamer on Wednesday.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_54"></a>[54]</span></p> - -<p>On the corner was a policeman, and the officer -quickly directed the boy to the proper elevated road -by which he could reach the hotel mentioned. Oliver -climbed the steps, procured his ticket, dropped it into -the box, and a moment later was aboard the train.</p> - -<p>Though he had been to New York a number of -times, the ride in the air as it were was somewhat -of a novelty to him. He sat in one of the little -cross seats in the middle of the car, and thoroughly -enjoyed the panorama that swept by—a panorama -that was so close to him that he could note every -detail.</p> - -<p>At length Thirty-third Street was reached. Here -Oliver left the train, went down the long stairs, and -inquired his way to the Gilliford House.</p> - -<p>It was not a long distance off, and in five minutes -more he had entered the office.</p> - -<p>“Is Colonel Mendix stopping here?” he asked of -the clerk at the desk.</p> - -<p>The young man looked at the register.</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir. Wish to see him?”</p> - -<p>Oliver hesitated for a moment.</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir.”</p> - -<p>“I will send up your card.”</p> - -<p>“I—I— He would not know me,” stammered -Oliver. “Cannot you say that a young man wishes -to see him?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_55"></a>[55]</span></p> - -<p>“Certainly. Just wait a moment. I’ll send right -up.”</p> - -<p>Oliver took a seat and waited. The bell-boy was -gone probably five minutes.</p> - -<p>“Colonel Mendix is out,” were the clerk’s words -upon his return.</p> - -<p>“Have you any idea when he will be back?” asked -Oliver, somewhat disappointed, and yet relieved to -think he would not have to face the man just then, -when he was hardly prepared.</p> - -<p>“No, sir.”</p> - -<p>Oliver stood for a moment in thought. He would -have to remain in New York over that night and -the next. Why not stay where he was?</p> - -<p>“Can I engage a room here for to-morrow night -and to-night?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“Certainly. What kind of a room do you desire?”</p> - -<p>“Not too high priced.”</p> - -<p>“European or American plan?” was the clerk’s -question, meaning thereby, as many of my readers -know, if he wished it without or including meals.</p> - -<p>“European.”</p> - -<p>“From one to three dollars.”</p> - -<p>“I will take the dollar room, sir.”</p> - -<p>“Very well. Pay in advance.”</p> - -<p>“I will pay for to-night. If I stay to-morrow I -will pay that in the morning.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_56"></a>[56]</span></p> - -<p>Oliver paid the money. He did not wish to arrange -for meals at the hotel, for he did not know -where he would be during the following day.</p> - -<p>“John, show this gentleman to room 234.”</p> - -<p>“And if Colonel Mendix comes in, will you let -me know?”</p> - -<p>“I will if I see him.”</p> - -<p>Taking Oliver’s valise, the porter led the way to -the elevator, and they were raised to the fifth floor. -Number 234 proved to be a cozy room at the rear -of the hall. It was well furnished, with all conveniences, -even to the pens and ink that stood on -a side table.</p> - -<p>Throwing off his coat, vest, and hat, the boy took -a good wash in the marble bowl and combed his -hair. This refreshed him and made his head feel -better. Then locking up the room so that his baggage -would be safe, he went below to a neighboring -restaurant, and procured a light supper.</p> - -<p>The sight of the pens and ink in his room made -him think of writing a letter to his father, and he -spent the best part of the evening doing so. He -told of all that had happened, and begged his father -not to be angry at his having taken the matter in -hand.</p> - -<p>The letter finished, Oliver went out and posted -it. Upon returning he asked about Colonel Mendix,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_57"></a>[57]</span> -and was told the gentleman had not yet come -back.</p> - -<p>At ten o’clock Oliver retired. He was quite worn -out, but the strangeness of his situation caused him -to sleep but little. At seven o’clock he was dressed -and at the desk.</p> - -<p>“Colonel Mendix has sent word that his baggage -be taken to the depot,” said the clerk. “He took -the train last night for the West.”</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_58"></a>[58]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_IX">CHAPTER IX.<br /> -<small>ON THE STEAMER.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>Oliver Bright was so taken aback by the announcement -that Colonel Mendix had left New York -that he hardly knew what to do. Since the day before -he had calculated upon having a talk with the -Spanish gentleman, and hoped to gain some important -knowledge without revealing his own identity.</p> - -<p>But now that chance was lost. The colonel had -gone, and it was not likely that the two would meet -this side of San Francisco.</p> - -<p>“Took the train last night?” he repeated slowly.</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir,” replied the clerk. “Did you wish to see -him very much?”</p> - -<p>“I did indeed. What time did the train start?”</p> - -<p>“At nine fifteen.”</p> - -<p>“Thank you.”</p> - -<p>Oliver left the desk, and walked slowly from the -hotel. He was in no humor for eating his breakfast, -and strolled up Broadway for a considerable distance, -and up and down a number of the side streets.</p> - -<p>“He will reach the West long before I do,” he reflected. -“Perhaps before I get to San Francisco he<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_59"></a>[59]</span> -will be at the mines. Still, he may stop over to buy -that machinery he spoke of. Heigh-ho! it’s a chance -lost anyway.”</p> - -<p>Oliver was not naturally of a desponding disposition, -and in an hour his spirits had brightened, and he was -once more himself. He walked into a modest looking -restaurant and procured a light breakfast, and then, -in lieu of something more important to do, started out -to see the sights.</p> - -<p>The morning passed quickly enough. At noon -Oliver found himself far over by the East River. He -walked down the Bowery until he came to the Brooklyn -Bridge, and taking a walk over this magnificent -structure, procured his dinner in Brooklyn. By the -time it was finished, and he had recrossed the bridge, -it was nearly three o’clock.</p> - -<p>“I’ll wait until six, and then see if there are any -letters for me,” he said to himself, as he passed the -post-office building. “Father may write to me at once, -or get some one to write for him.”</p> - -<p>For a long time Oliver stood on Park Row, watching -the newsboys folding their papers and disposing of -them. One little mite of a chap, who was certainly -not over five years of age, interested him greatly.</p> - -<p>The boy was so small he could hardly carry his -bundle of papers, and yet he seemed to drive a brisk -trade, often selling a paper where some one larger<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_60"></a>[60]</span> -than he had met with a rebuff. Crimpsey, he heard -some of the other boys call him; and finally Oliver -patronized him to the extent of buying an afternoon -paper for a cent.</p> - -<p>“How’s trade?” he said, as he waited for his -change.</p> - -<p>“Nuthin’ extra,” was the little chap’s reply. -“There ain’t no extra news in ter day.” And away -he went shouting, “Extra! Last ’dition!”</p> - -<p>“I shouldn’t want to be a newsboy,” thought Oliver; -“yet I would rather do that than starve.”</p> - -<p>Walking over to the little park in front of the City -Hall, he sat down on one of the benches and read the -paper he had bought. There was but little in it to -interest him, and he had soon finished. Then he -threw down the sheet. In an instant a man sitting -near snatched it up.</p> - -<p>“Through?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“Yes,” replied Oliver.</p> - -<p>“Thanks;” and immediately the man was deeply -absorbed in the journal.</p> - -<p>“Evidently he is too poor to buy a paper, and yet -he is hungry for something to read,” thought Oliver, -and he hit it exactly.</p> - -<p>The boy found the time hanging heavily upon his -hands after this. He detested spending a day in idleness, -yet it could not be helped. He walked over to<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_61"></a>[61]</span> -the North River, and then up West Street, and finally -returned up Vesey Street to the post-office.</p> - -<p>Here he hunted up the right window, and asked -if there were any letters.</p> - -<p>For reply one was handed out.</p> - -<p>How eagerly Oliver took it up! It bore the Rockvale -postmark. It was from home!</p> - -<p>Stepping over to one of the windows, he tore the -epistle open. It was from his father, and ran as -follows:—</p> - -<div class="blockquot"> - -<p><span class="smcap">My dear Oliver</span>,—As you supposed, I was greatly astonished -to find that you had left home to go to California to hunt -up the Aurora mine. I was inclined to think that it was a foolhardy -undertaking; but upon reflection I will only say, now you -have started, take care of yourself, and don’t run into unnecessary -danger.</p> - -<p>I have not time to write all I desire, as I am afraid you will -not receive the letter if I do not put it in the morning mail.</p> - -<p>You say you have enough money for the present. When you -reach San Francisco there will be a letter with a money order or -express order for you.</p> - -<p>I can understand what a surprise it was to meet Colonel -Mendix. Have you seen him again? Be sure and keep out of -trouble. I have no doubt but that he was deceiving me all the -time, and cannot forgive myself for having trusted him as I did.</p> - -<p>I suppose you did not return home Tuesday because you -thought I might detain you. Well, Oliver, perhaps I might -have done so, but as it is, you may go, and God be with you.</p> - -<p>I am feeling as well as can be expected. Dr. Kitchell says -I must keep quiet and all will be well. It is hard to do so, but I -will try to be content.</p> - -<p>Let me hear from you as often as possible, and do not hesitate<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_62"></a>[62]</span> -to return at any time, no matter whether you accomplish -anything or not. Although if you fail it will be a bitter blow, -we will manage somehow to get along.</p> - -<p>Now I must close. With all my love I remain, your father,</p> - -<p class="right"><span class="smcap">Arthur Bright</span>.</p> -</div> - -<p>Oliver had quite some trouble in deciphering the -letter, which had been written in great haste. It is -needless to say its contents pleased him greatly. A -heavy load was lifted from his heart, for he had -dreaded the thought of being recalled, and giving up -the quest.</p> - -<p>“I must not fail,” he murmured to himself, as -he put the letter in his pocket. “Father expects -me to succeed, even if he doesn’t say so. I am sure -if I do not he will never get over the blow.”</p> - -<p>There was some truth in this, though not as much -as Oliver was inclined to believe. Yet the boy -walked from the post-office with a firmer determination -to follow his purpose to its end and recognize -no such word as fail.</p> - -<p>He spent the evening in writing a long reply to -his father, and also in sending several letters to intimate -friends, including one to Gus Gregory, which -was destined never to reach his chum for reasons that -will soon appear.</p> - -<p>Oliver slept more comfortably that night than he -had the first. He was up, however, at seven o’clock; -and after getting breakfast and settling his bill made<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_63"></a>[63]</span> -his way down to the steamer which was to afford -him passage to Aspinwall.</p> - -<p>Here he found all bustle and confusion. Passengers -and the last of the cargo, as well as the mails, -were arriving all at the same time. He sought out -his stateroom and stowed away his valise, and then -went on deck to view the scene.</p> - -<p>He wondered who his room-mate was to be; but -though he asked several he was unable to find out, -and no one appeared.</p> - -<p>“Maybe I will have the room all to myself,” he -thought; “that will be much nicer.”</p> - -<p>But the stream of people that were coming aboard -seemed to indicate otherwise. What a motley crowd -it was! Americans, Spaniards, Englishmen, several -Chinamen, and half a dozen blacks.</p> - -<p>Surely time would not hang heavily among such -people. Oliver was already interested in the manners -and speeches to be seen and heard around him.</p> - -<p>At length the time for sailing came; and lashed -fast to an energetic little steam-tug, the steamer -swung off from the pier and moved slowly down -the stream.</p> - -<p>There was a crowd left behind that waved a parting -adieu, cheers and tears well mixed. On board -some were laughing, some crying.</p> - -<p>Oliver felt mighty sober. There was no one to<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_64"></a>[64]</span> -see him off; yet he was leaving home and friends -behind. When would he see all again?</p> - -<p>Before long a tear stole down his cheek. He -brushed it away hastily and took a deep breath. How -he wished they were well on their way, and this -parting was over! And yet he strained his eyes -until the pier could be seen no longer, and eagerly -watched the shore with its varied shipping.</p> - -<p>“No use in talking, there is nothing like home,” -he murmured to himself; “if it wasn’t for what I -hope to accomplish, you wouldn’t catch me leaving -it.”</p> - -<p>Suddenly a snatch of song reached his ears,—</p> - -<div class="poetry"> - <div class="stanza"> - <div class="verse indent0">“The dearest spot on earth to me is home, sweet home.”</div> - </div> -</div> - -<p>“Paine spoke the truth when he wrote that,” said -Oliver to a man standing near.</p> - -<p>“You’re right, Oliver,” added a voice from behind, -and turning, the boy was dumfounded to see Gus -Gregory standing close at hand.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_65"></a>[65]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_X">CHAPTER X.<br /> -<small>THE STORM OFF CAPE HATTERAS.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>For the moment Oliver could not believe his eyesight. -He stared at his chum without saying a -word.</p> - -<p>“Yes, it is I,” said Gus Gregory finally. “Do you -think it is my ghost?”</p> - -<p>“Gus!” gasped Oliver. “Where in the world did -you come from?”</p> - -<p>“Where did you suppose? From Rockvale.”</p> - -<p>“And what—what are you doing here?”</p> - -<p>“I’m bound for California; going to accompany -you.”</p> - -<p>“You are! Why—why”—Oliver could not finish -the question.</p> - -<p>“Don’t try to ask too many questions at once, -and perhaps I’ll answer some of them,” laughed the -stout boy. “In the first place, I left Rockvale yesterday -morning about eleven o’clock. I came at once -to New York, and after getting a good bath, so as -not to look quite like a tramp, I bought a ticket for -this steamer, and here I am.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, but do your folks know of all this?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_66"></a>[66]</span></p> - -<p>“Well, I guess not! I wouldn’t be here but for -the awful time I had with pop.”</p> - -<p>And Gus Gregory shook his head over the remembrance -of the occurrence.</p> - -<p>“Then you ran away?”</p> - -<p>“I suppose you would call it that. But I didn’t -run; I couldn’t. I walked, and mighty slow at that!”</p> - -<p>“But what made you come away at all?”</p> - -<p>“It was all on account of that scrape we got into -over at Dr. Tangus’s. On Monday night pop called -me into the library, and said he had got a bill of -damages from the old man. What do you suppose -it was? Forty-five dollars!”</p> - -<p>“Forty-five dollars! Phew!” ejaculated Oliver. -“That was the whole damage done, I suppose.”</p> - -<p>“No; that was only my share. I can tell you -father was mad, and he sailed right into me. He -had been suffering from a toothache all day, and his -temper was none of the best. I can tell you I -caught it!”</p> - -<p>Gus Gregory drew a deep breath and shifted his -shoulders uneasily.</p> - -<p>“First it was words and then it came to blows,” -he resumed. “At last I said I wished I was a -thousand miles from home, and my father took me -up and said I could go and never come back; and -here I am.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_67"></a>[67]</span></p> - -<p>“But he didn’t mean that, Gus.”</p> - -<p>“Never mind, he said it, and I took him up. So -that night I packed my grip,—had quite a job, I -was in such a tremendous hurry,—and found out all -about the steamer and so forth. I left home right -after breakfast.</p> - -<p>“Just as I passed out of the garden, father saw -me, and called out to know where I was going. I -told him a thousand miles away, as he had wished. -He said I was a fool, and ordered me back. When -I didn’t mind, he came running after me. I started -up the road, with my eye on him over my shoulder. -I didn’t notice a puddle in the way, and the first -thing went a-sousing into it. Maybe I wasn’t a sight -to behold! I had on my best clothes too!”</p> - -<p>Oliver laughed heartily. He could well imagine -the scene.</p> - -<p>“But you got away?” he asked with deep interest.</p> - -<p>“Of course; if I hadn’t I wouldn’t be here. -When I reached the station the train had just come -in. I jumped aboard, and in a moment we were off. -But what a mess I was in! I was mud from head -to foot, and my face resembled that of the worst -tramp you ever saw! I tried to clean myself as -best I could, but nevertheless every one stared at -me, and I had the whole seat to myself the entire -way.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_68"></a>[68]</span></p> - -<p>“I can see the mud yet,” said Oliver.</p> - -<p>“Humph! that isn’t a hundredth part of it. As -soon as I reached the city I hunted up a bath, and -told the proprietor I had met with an accident, and -he fixed me up. But I can tell you, Olly, I don’t -want any more such tumbles!”</p> - -<p>“And where did you get your money to pay for -the trip?” asked Oliver.</p> - -<p>“Didn’t I have a hundred dollars that Uncle Dick -left me before he started for Australia? I had that -and twenty-five dollars besides. I thought you would -take this steamer, and as soon as I saw your name -on the register, I engaged a berth too.”</p> - -<p>“And what do you intend to do when you reach -San Francisco?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t know yet. But see here, Olly, you don’t -act a bit as if you cared to have me with you,” -added Gus in injured tones.</p> - -<p>“I do care a good deal. But I’m sorry you ran -away. What will your father and mother think of it?”</p> - -<p>“I sent them a long letter just before we sailed, -so they won’t worry.”</p> - -<p>“But they will worry, Gus.”</p> - -<p>“Well, to tell the truth, I am sorry on mother’s -account. To be real candid, if I had stopped to -think perhaps I wouldn’t have come at all. But -now I am here, and that is all there is to it.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_69"></a>[69]</span></p> - -<p>Oliver shook his head. He knew well enough that -once Gus had made up his mind there was no use -to argue with him.</p> - -<p>“Let us go below,” continued the stout boy; “I -have a surprise for you.”</p> - -<p>“What is it?”</p> - -<p>“Never mind; come along.”</p> - -<p>So Oliver followed him down the broad steps and -along the passageway, and Gus entered a stateroom.</p> - -<p>“My stateroom!” cried Oliver. “How did you -know it?”</p> - -<p>“By the register. It is mine also. We are to be -room-mates. Aren’t you glad?”</p> - -<p>Glad? Indeed Oliver was. The feeling of loneliness, -so acute but a quarter of an hour before, was -all gone now.</p> - -<p>While they were below, Gus told much of what -had passed in Rockvale after Oliver’s departure. To -be sure the boy had been gone but two days, yet -that was long enough for all the other boys to wonder -what had become of him.</p> - -<p>Gus’s haste in leaving was amply proven by the -contents of his valise, all tumbled in one mess. There -were two extra shoes, but they were not mates, and -most of the clothing he had brought was just such -as he did not desire.</p> - -<p>“Humph! the next time I run away I’d better<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_70"></a>[70]</span> -take a week to do it in!” he grumbled. “Did you -ever see such a collection? Looks as if I came out -of a junk-shop.”</p> - -<p>“Never mind; I’ll lend you what I have,” said -Oliver. “But my advice is to return home the first -landing we make.”</p> - -<p>“Not much! I’m bound West ho!”</p> - -<p>In a little while the two boys went on deck again. -They were now drawing towards Sandy Hook, and -the heavy swells made Gus turn a sickly green.</p> - -<p>“I suppose it’s about dinner time,” said Oliver; -“I feel mighty hungry.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t want anything to eat,” replied the stout -boy, drawing his mouth tightly together.</p> - -<p>“You don’t!”</p> - -<p>“No; not a mouthful.”</p> - -<p>“Why?”</p> - -<p>“Never mind; I don’t, that’s all.”</p> - -<p>Oliver gave him a searching glance.</p> - -<p>“Gus Gregory, you’re seasick!” he cried.</p> - -<p>“Not a bit of it; I’m only a bit dizzy,” was the -hopeful reply.</p> - -<p>But he had hardly spoken the words before Gus -swallowed a lump in his throat and then rushed for -the side. Oliver, who felt perfectly well, could not -help but laugh.</p> - -<p>He went to dinner alone. The table was more<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_71"></a>[71]</span> -than three-quarters deserted—nearly every one was -under the weather. When he came from the dining-saloon -he found his chum in the stateroom flat on -the floor.</p> - -<p>“What! as bad as this?” he asked kindly.</p> - -<p>“Don’t say a word!” moaned Gus. “I’ll never -travel on the water again, never! I wish the steamer -was at the bottom of the sea, and myself with it.”</p> - -<p>He continued to roll and moan for the rest of the -day. Oliver tried to help him in various ways, but -it was of no avail. There is nothing to do but to -let seasickness run its course.</p> - -<p>The boys never forgot that first night on shipboard. -Several times Oliver’s head began to swim -from the motion, which towards morning grew worse. -He slept but little, and was one of the first on -deck.</p> - -<p>“We are getting into the neighborhood of Cape -Hatteras,” said a gentleman standing near. “It -is always rough here, but more than usually so -now.”</p> - -<p>“Why?” asked Oliver.</p> - -<p>“Because there is a storm coming up.”</p> - -<p>“A storm?”</p> - -<p>“Yes; and a heavy one. Look over there at that -black mass of clouds. There will be lively times on -board to-day.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_72"></a>[72]</span></p> - -<p>The gentleman spoke the truth. In less than a -quarter of an hour the sky was heavily overcast, and -a heavy rainstorm burst over their heads. Somewhat -fearful, Oliver hurried below.</p> - -<p>He had often heard of the fearful storms experienced -off Cape Hatteras, and wondered if that which -was approaching would do the steamship any serious -damage.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_73"></a>[73]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XI">CHAPTER XI.<br /> -<small>MR. WHYLAND.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>“My stars! what’s the matter with the ship?” asked -Gus, as Oliver entered the stateroom.</p> - -<p>“We are going to have a storm,” was the reply; -“it’s raining already.”</p> - -<p>“Then maybe we will go to the bottom,” groaned -Gus. “Or else we’ll turn clear over, see if we -don’t.”</p> - -<p>He had been feeling just a trifle better, but now -he was worse. From looking green he was deadly -white, and he shook from head to foot.</p> - -<p>“I wish I could do something for you,” said Oliver -kindly, for at least the fiftieth time. “But I don’t -know of a thing that will help you.”</p> - -<p>“It’s a punishment for running away, I suppose. -I’ll never be well until we reach land again.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, nonsense! You’ll feel all right as soon as -this storm clears off.”</p> - -<p>Gus made no reply. Oliver remained in the stateroom -for a while, and then ventured above to take -another observation.</p> - -<p>As he stepped on deck a violent gust of wind blew<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_74"></a>[74]</span> -a man’s hat directly toward him. He made a dive -for the tile and captured it.</p> - -<p>“Hello, there! got it?” sang out a voice, and an -instant later the gentleman who had told Oliver that -a storm was coming rushed up.</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir; here you are.”</p> - -<p>“Thanks. My, but this is rough, and no mistake!” -The gentleman jammed the hat tightly over his head. -“Just look at those waves over there!” And he -pointed over to the starboard where the water appeared -to be mountainous in its height.</p> - -<p>“I trust we will get through in safety,” said Oliver -with a shudder. “I have no desire to go to the bottom -of the sea.”</p> - -<p>“Nor I,” laughed the gentleman. “Traveling -alone?” he went on curiously.</p> - -<p>“I have a schoolmate with me—that is, we met -on board.”</p> - -<p>“That very stout young man?”</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir.”</p> - -<p>“Ah, yes, I see. Rather young to be traveling -alone. I am glad to meet you. My name is Thomas -Whyland. I suppose we shall be thrown together -quite some during the voyage.”</p> - -<p>“Are you going to San Francisco?”</p> - -<p>“Yes.”</p> - -<p>“Then I’m glad to have met you,” said Oliver<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_75"></a>[75]</span> -with a smile. “I do not know a soul but my chum. -My name is Oliver Bright.”</p> - -<p>The two shook hands. Mr. Whyland appeared to -be a pleasant gentleman, and Oliver thought they -would be friends. He did not dream how well acquainted -they were destined to become.</p> - -<p>“Where is your chum now?” asked Mr. Whyland.</p> - -<p>“In the stateroom, sick.”</p> - -<p>As Oliver spoke a tremendous wave broke over -the deck, wetting both him and Mr. Whyland. A -moment later one of the deck-hands came forward -with word that all the passengers had been ordered -below.</p> - -<p>“That means us too,” said Mr. Whyland. “Come, -let us adjourn to the cabin.”</p> - -<p>It was with difficulty that they descended the companionway. -When half-way down Oliver slipped, and -had it not been for his friend would have rolled to -the bottom.</p> - -<p>In the cabin they found a motley crowd assembled—mostly -passengers who were too frightened to -retire to their staterooms. Amongst them was the -head steward and two other officers, trying all they -could to quiet the fears that were expressed.</p> - -<p>“Nothing unusual, sir,” said the steward to Oliver; -“I’ve passed through a dozen of ’em.”</p> - -<p>“Excuse me; one is enough,” laughed the boy;<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_76"></a>[76]</span> -“and you may depend upon it I will never forget -the experience.”</p> - -<p>He and Mr. Whyland took a seat well forward, and -began to talk over the prospects. Presently Oliver -felt a hand on his arm, and turning, saw Gus standing -beside him.</p> - -<p>“Hello! what brought you out?” he exclaimed.</p> - -<p>“I didn’t want to drown alone,” replied the stout -boy. “We’re all going to the bottom, do you know -it?”</p> - -<p>“The officers of the boat say not,” returned Oliver. -“They say it is quite an ordinary storm.”</p> - -<p>“I call it a most extraordinary, howling, rambunctious -cyclone,” said Gus. “I’m expecting the ship to -turn clear over any moment.”</p> - -<p>Oliver introduced his companion to Mr. Whyland, -and their mutual sympathy soon placed them on the -plane of friendship. But Gus was too sick to remain -long, and before a great while retired again to the -stateroom, whither he was presently followed by -Oliver.</p> - -<p>“What do you think of Mr. Whyland?” asked the -latter.</p> - -<p>“Very nice man,” returned Gus. “I’d like him -still better if he would only order this storm to stop. -Creation! it seems to me I’d give all I’m worth to -be on land once more!”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_77"></a>[77]</span></p> - -<p>“Then you don’t think you would care to be a -sailor, to sail the briny deep?” asked Oliver with a -smile.</p> - -<p>“Sailor!” Gus uttered the word in deep disgust.</p> - -<p>“Yes. It’s a splendid life—at least so the novelists -say.”</p> - -<p>“Humph! I guess those novelists never saw the -blue and black water, or they wouldn’t put down -any such nonsense! No, sir! this is my first and last -trip on the flowing sea. As Paddy said, ‘The next -time I ship I’ll travel be land!’”</p> - -<p>“Which means that when you return home you’ll -do so overland.”</p> - -<p>“If I’m ever allowed to return home, which I very -much doubt, if this confounded storm keeps up.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, it isn’t so bad, Gus.” Oliver mused for a -moment, while Gus turned on the berth with a groan. -“I wonder if Mr. Whyland is acquainted in San -Francisco.”</p> - -<p>“Why?”</p> - -<p>“If he is, he may be able to give me considerable -information about the place.”</p> - -<p>“It isn’t likely that he ever heard of this Colonel -Mendix.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, I suppose not; but he will know about the -mining exchange and all that, and that is what I must -learn about. They must know something of Mendix.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_78"></a>[78]</span> -He couldn’t keep that mine a secret so long out -there.”</p> - -<p>“Suppose you can’t find out a single thing in San -Francisco, what then?”</p> - -<p>“It will be a disappointment, but I shall not give -up. I will make a hunt up the river upon which it -is said to be situated. Sooner or later I am bound -to stumble upon a clew.”</p> - -<p>“I admire your grit, Olly. You deserve success.”</p> - -<p>“And I’ll obtain it, mark my word, Gus.”</p> - -<p>During the afternoon, instead of abating, the storm -grew wilder. The sky became even blacker than before, -and all the lanterns were lit. The wind shrieked -through the rigging and across the deck, and everything -that was loose and light was carried over the -rail.</p> - -<p>Seated on the edge of the lower berth the two -boys talked in a low tone. Sleep was out of the -question, and, as Gus expressed it, somehow speech -made them more courageous.</p> - -<p>“We must be near Cape Hatteras,” said Oliver. -“If we—”</p> - -<p>He did not finish the sentence, for at that instant -a terrible shock was felt that sent both boys sprawling -to the other side of the stateroom. There was a crashing -and a tearing, and they heard piercing cries of -alarm. What did it mean?</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_79"></a>[79]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XII">CHAPTER XII.<br /> -<small>ARRIVAL AT ASPINWALL.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>Both boys were frightened at the terrific shock they -experienced while in the stateroom. Gus had the wind -completely knocked out of him, and Oliver was little -better off.</p> - -<p>“What can it mean?” cried Oliver as he scrambled -to his feet.</p> - -<p>“Guess we’ve smashed on the rocks!” groaned the -stout youth. “Told you we’d go to the bottom.”</p> - -<p>“If we have, I’m not going to stay below any longer. -Come, let us go on deck.”</p> - -<p>Oliver helped Gus to regain his feet, and trembling -with excitement as well as fear, they made their -way to the cabin. Here nearly all the passengers -were assembled, most of them in a high state of excitement.</p> - -<p>Among the crowd was Mr. Whyland, who quickly -joined the boys.</p> - -<p>“What is it? What have we struck?” asked -Oliver anxiously.</p> - -<p>“I do not know. It was a fearful blow.”</p> - -<p>“Are we going to the bottom?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_80"></a>[80]</span></p> - -<p>“Hardly. These steamers are very strongly built. -I’ll go on deck and find out.”</p> - -<p>But at the companionway he was stopped.</p> - -<p>“No one allowed on deck,” said the man in charge -of the stairs. “There is no danger, sir.”</p> - -<p>“What did we strike?”</p> - -<p>“Struck a small freight schooner, and carried away -her bow.”</p> - -<p>“Did she sink?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, no. But we are steaming near her so as to -be on the safe side.”</p> - -<p>This news was heard by every one who stood -around, and its effect was to quiet the fearful ones. -Many wondered if the schooner was seriously damaged, -and if she would be able to continue her -voyage.</p> - -<p>It is safe to say that there was little or no sleep -that night for those on board the steamer. Towards -morning the storm cleared off, and the sun rose -bright as ever.</p> - -<p>“Well, I never!” declared Gus. “The scene has -changed as quickly as it does in a panorama!”</p> - -<p>Now that the dreadful rolling had ceased, he felt -better, and Oliver was glad to see him indulge in -a fair-sized breakfast.</p> - -<p>The meal finished, they went on deck. The freight -schooner that had been struck was nowhere to be<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_81"></a>[81]</span> -seen. Inquiries brought the information that she had -not been seriously damaged and had gone on her way.</p> - -<p>The two boys found the day rather monotonous. -Look where they might, nothing could be seen but -sky and water, the one nearly as blue as the other.</p> - -<p>“Blue all around makes one feel blue,” remarked -Gus. “But I’m thankful I’m over that awful seasickness. -If it had kept up much longer I believe I -would have died.”</p> - -<p>“No one ever dies of seasickness,” said Mr. Whyland, -who had come up. “Your health will be -better after this dose.”</p> - -<p>“Well, it ought to be,” laughed Gus. “I’ve suffered -enough. I ought to have some reward.”</p> - -<p>“But we do not always get what we deserve in -this world,” responded the gentleman, and for a -moment a light shadow swept across his brow. -“Sometimes both evil and good pass us by.”</p> - -<p>At dinner Oliver did full justice to what was -passed to him. Gus felt decidedly strange, and it -was some time before he could get into the peculiar -way of eating that was prevalent. Everything that -he had, seemed to be inclined to slide into his lap.</p> - -<p>“We can’t stand on much ceremony,” he said. “I -think this chicken leg is better in my stomach than -on the floor, so here goes.” And he took the extremity -of the fowl between his fingers and ate it -that way.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_82"></a>[82]</span></p> - -<p>That day and the next passed slowly. Gus was -of the opinion they would stop at some place before -reaching Aspinwall, but in this he was mistaken. -They passed close to the coast of Florida, so close in -fact that the sandy shore with the tall and waving -trees and bushes could be distinctly seen. On the -following day they took the course between Cuba -and Yucatan, passing not far from the latter on account -of the tide. They were now in the Caribbean -Sea, with the Bay of Honduras behind them.</p> - -<p>“Looks very much like any other bay or gulf, I -suppose,” observed Gus, as he and Oliver stood by -the rail watching some sea-gulls as they winged their -way around the ship.</p> - -<p>“I guess water looks very much the same in all -parts of the earth,” was Oliver’s reply.</p> - -<p>“Mostly,” put in Mr. Whyland, who had overheard -the last words; “although there are some -places where it is quite different. Lake Como in -Switzerland is as blue as indigo; the waters of some -South American rivers are intensely green; and then -there are the Red and Black Seas—so called from -their general appearance.”</p> - -<p>“I should like to see them all,” returned Oliver. -“Some day, if I am able, I intend to become a great -traveler.”</p> - -<p>“It is very pleasant,” said the gentleman. “But it -takes a lot of money, I can assure you.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_83"></a>[83]</span></p> - -<p>Early on the day following, land somewhere on -the isthmus was seen; and late in the afternoon they -steamed into the harbor at Aspinwall, and dropped -anchor. The boys were eager to go ashore, but were -told that no passengers would be allowed to land -until the following morning.</p> - -<p>“Well, so much of the journey is done,” said -Oliver. “How I wish this was San Francisco Bay!”</p> - -<p>“I don’t know as I do,” returned Gus. “Now -that I’ve got over that nasty seasickness, I rather -enjoy the trip.”</p> - -<p>“I would too, if I didn’t have anything on my -mind.”</p> - -<p>“Well, you ought not to let that interfere. Worry -won’t do any good.”</p> - -<p>In the fast approaching darkness but little could -be seen. The boys were sure Aspinwall was a poorly -illuminated town, so few lights could be distinguished. -They went below and made all necessary preparations -for leaving the steamer.</p> - -<p>The evening passed quickly. At ten o’clock the -boys turned in so as to be on hand bright and early.</p> - -<p>And on hand they were. At ten o’clock both -stepped out on the dock and walked slowly up the -narrow and dirty street.</p> - -<p>“Humph! not much of a city,” said Gus. “See -the funny houses all on stilts!”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_84"></a>[84]</span></p> - -<p>“I suppose they build them that way to keep from -getting flooded out when it rains,” laughed Oliver; -“or else the sea may occasionally drive in too far.”</p> - -<p>“I would not care to see myself living here. My, -how muddy it is! I guess they haven’t much of a -street-cleaning department.”</p> - -<p>From one of the officers of the ship the boys learned -that, in order to make connections with the steamer at -Panama, they would have to take the train for that -port on the following morning.</p> - -<p>“That will give us a whole day in this place,” said -Oliver. “Come, let us start out on a voyage of discovery.”</p> - -<p>Gus was nothing loath, and they set out. They -passed down the main street, where they discovered -several fine-looking hotels,—quite in contrast with -their shabby surroundings,—and then turned down -another road close beside the water.</p> - -<p>Most all of the people they met were either Spaniards, -Frenchmen, or natives. But few Americans -were to be seen, and this made both boys feel more -strange than did all the other surroundings.</p> - -<p>“We are in a different country, and no mistake,” -said Oliver. “See what queer ways the folks have! -It makes me feel like a cat in a strange garret!”</p> - -<p>Presently they drifted into quite a crowd that lined -a wharf where a large boat was discharging fruit.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_85"></a>[85]</span> -Anxious to see what was going on, they pressed their -way to the front until a tall Spaniard with a long whip -rushed out, and jabbering at all the strangers, drove -them off.</p> - -<p>“Not a very sociable fellow,” grunted Gus. “By -crickety! I thought he was going to fetch me one -across the legs!”</p> - -<p>It was now getting toward noon, and both boys were -hungry. Oliver was for going back to the steamer for -dinner, but Gus persuaded him to enter one of the -strange eating-houses kept by a native.</p> - -<p>“I want to see what kind of stuff they furnish,” he -explained.</p> - -<p>“All right. Only you must order,” replied Oliver.</p> - -<p>So Gus ordered dinner as best he could. While -they were waiting for it to be brought both boys felt -in their pockets for money to pay for it. Neither had -so much as a cent!</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_86"></a>[86]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XIII">CHAPTER XIII.<br /> -<small>MR. WHYLAND’S STORY.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>“Have you any money?” gasped Gus.</p> - -<p>“No,” returned Oliver; and he added, “I have been -robbed! I had nearly two dollars in change when I -left the steamer.”</p> - -<p>“Then I am luckier than you, for I remember now -that I left my purse in my valise. What are we to -do?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t know,” returned Oliver blankly. “I’ll -bet I was robbed down in that crowd at the wharf.”</p> - -<p>“Most likely.”</p> - -<p>“It’s a good thing I didn’t have more with me. I -suppose I’ll never see that money again.”</p> - -<p>“You’re right. To get it back would probably be -more bother than it is worth. Still, I would tell the -captain when we get back.”</p> - -<p>“I certainly shall. In the meanwhile how are we -to pay for our meal here?”</p> - -<p>“I suppose we had better not eat it. Let us tell -the waiter what has happened.”</p> - -<p>In a moment more the Frenchman who had taken -their order appeared, his tray piled high with dishes.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_87"></a>[87]</span> -Gus told their story, and motioned as if to go away. -Evidently the man did not understand the stout youth, -for his face grew dark.</p> - -<p>“You have ordered the meal; you must pay for it,” -he said in French.</p> - -<p>Of course Gus did not understand him, and only -shook his head. This made the man angry, and he -called the proprietor, and the two talked to both boys -in a high pitch of voice. Oliver turned his pockets -inside out and Gus did the same, but even this had -no effect save to make the proprietor of the place -grow pale with passion.</p> - -<p>“It’s no use,” cried Oliver. “They think we are -only trying to fool them, that we never intended to -take dinner here. What in the world shall we do?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t know.” Gus gave a gasp. “I wonder -if they will dare to have us arrested?”</p> - -<p>“Arrested? Oh, I trust not!” Oliver looked -about him in deep perplexity; “but I cannot imagine -what is best to do.”</p> - -<p>At that instant the boy’s gaze was turned towards -the door, and he was overjoyed to see Mr. Whyland -enter. Breaking from the group, he ran up to him.</p> - -<p>“Oh, Mr. Whyland, how glad I am that you came -in!” he exclaimed. “My friend and I have got into -an awful muss.”</p> - -<p>“Is that so? What is the trouble?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_88"></a>[88]</span></p> - -<p>As briefly as he could Oliver related the misfortune -that had overtaken himself and Gus. Mr. Whyland -listened attentively.</p> - -<p>“It is too bad you have had your money stolen,” -he said. “There is no use in trying to recover it. -It would certainly take more time and trouble than -it is worth. You must be more careful in the future.”</p> - -<p>“I intend to be. But what shall I do here? The -proprietor insists that I want to cheat him or else -am fooling him.”</p> - -<p>“I will pay the bill. I suppose travelers often impose -upon him and he has grown suspicious. I will -speak to him in French.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Whyland was as good as his word. The restaurant -keeper listened closely, and then began to -bow and smile, and sent the waiter off for more stuff.</p> - -<p>“I have told him that I will settle the bill and -that I will have dinner with you,” explained Mr. -Whyland. “He says only last week a party of three -Americans came in and fooled him, and he thought -you belonged to the same crowd.”</p> - -<p>“They ought to have been ashamed of themselves,” -sniffed Gus. “Might have got us into a terrible -mess.”</p> - -<p>“Yes; Americans away from home ought to be more -circumspect in their actions. A few of them can give -the entire nation a bad name.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_89"></a>[89]</span></p> - -<p>The things that Mr. Whyland had ordered were -not long in coming, and then the three sat down. It -was a somewhat different meal from what they had -been accustomed to at home, yet not enough so to -make it noticeable.</p> - -<p>“These people are very quick to remember how -Americans like things served,” said Mr. Whyland. -“That is why you do not notice any great difference -from a Broadway restaurant.”</p> - -<p>The meal finished, their friend settled the bill as -he had agreed. Oliver and Gus thanked him, and -the former promised to pay back their share as soon -as the steamer was reached.</p> - -<p>“There is no need to trouble yourself. It was but -fifty cents—twenty-five apiece,” said Mr. Whyland. -“What were you young men doing? taking a look -around?”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” replied Oliver; “but there doesn’t seem -to be much to see.”</p> - -<p>“You are right; Aspinwall is not a very attractive -city—that is, by comparison with what we have left. -It is almost too unhealthy to thrive.”</p> - -<p>On the way back to the steamer the three became -even better acquainted than before. The gentleman -asked where the two boys were bound, and stepped -back in astonishment when Oliver, in a burst of confidence, -told him that, while Gus was off merely for<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_90"></a>[90]</span> -a trip, he himself was in quest of a hidden mine -in California.</p> - -<p>“Surely, surely you are joking!” gasped Mr. Whyland.</p> - -<p>“No, sir; I am telling the truth,” affirmed Oliver. -“I would not tell you at all, but you have been so -kind to me.”</p> - -<p>“And may I ask where this mine is situated—in -what direction?”</p> - -<p>“It is somewhere on the Mokelumne River.”</p> - -<p>“And is it called the Aurora Mine?” continued -Mr. Whyland with intense interest.</p> - -<p>“It is!” cried Oliver. “But how did you know -the name?”</p> - -<p>“I am looking for the same mine myself.”</p> - -<p>“You!”</p> - -<p>“Exactly. Do you know the owner of the claim?”</p> - -<p>“My father owns the claim,” replied Oliver decidedly.</p> - -<p>“But Colonel Mendix”—</p> - -<p>“Do you know that man?” asked Oliver quickly.</p> - -<p>“Quite well, although I have not seen him for two -years. He sold me a quarter interest in the mine -for ten thousand dollars, and then he disappeared.”</p> - -<p>“My father gave him a quarter interest to open -up the mine for him. That must be the interest he -sold you. You say you have not seen Colonel Mendix<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_91"></a>[91]</span> -for two years; I saw him in New York the day -before we sailed.”</p> - -<p>“Is it possible?”</p> - -<p>“I tried to meet him to have a talk with him; but -before I could do so he took the train for the West.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Whyland was astonished over what Oliver had -to say. He asked the boy to tell his story, and as -Oliver could see no harm in so doing, he complied.</p> - -<p>“From what you say we are undoubtedly on the -same errand,” remarked Mr. Whyland when he had -finished. “You are searching for your father’s share, -and I am searching for the share given to Colonel -Mendix, which that individual transferred to me. It -is most fortunate that we met. If you have no objection -we will work together.”</p> - -<p>“I shall be happy to do so, Mr. Whyland. You -are a man, and a man can, as a rule, do more than a -boy.”</p> - -<p>“But I take you to be a remarkably bright boy,” -laughed the gentleman. “I am sure we will get -along famously together. I have not much to tell, -excepting that I met Colonel Mendix in Boston, -where he was introduced to me by James Barr, the -surveyor you have mentioned. By Mr. Barr’s advice -I invested in the mine. I waited for a long -time to hear from the two, but never did. Other -business claimed my attention. But now I am free<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_92"></a>[92]</span> -to hunt the matter up, and I intend to do so. The -amount at stake is not a large one to me; but still -I wish to learn positively whether I have been swindled -or not.”</p> - -<p>“The amount is a good deal to my father,” said -Oliver. “He has lost all of his other property, and -this is his last hope.”</p> - -<p>“Then I trust that for his sake as well as for my -own the mine proves of value.”</p> - -<p>“You’ve got to find it first,” put in Gus. “Remember -the old saying about counting chickens before -they are hatched.”</p> - -<p>“I would say, don’t count the eggs before they -are found,” laughed Mr. Whyland. “But we will -trust for the best.”</p> - -<p>The three talked over the situation for a long time. -Oliver was glad that he had run across Mr. Whyland. -It would undoubtedly lighten his task to a great degree. -The gentleman was experienced and rich, and -that would count for a good deal in what was to come.</p> - -<p>The remainder of the day passed quickly. In the -evening they went aboard of the steamer for the last -time. All slept soundly, and were up at a seasonable -hour.</p> - -<p>“What an odd little railroad!” remarked Gus, as -they boarded the train in the morning. “Only a -single track.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_93"></a>[93]</span></p> - -<p>“It is only about forty-eight miles long,” said Mr. -Whyland, “but it cost an enormous sum of money -to build.”</p> - -<p>Soon there was a tremendous jerk, and they were -off on the trip across the isthmus. Oliver looked out -of the window at the marshy ground, and the rank -pools of stagnant water.</p> - -<p>Suddenly they came to a sharp stop. What was -up now?</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_94"></a>[94]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XIV">CHAPTER XIV.<br /> -<small>IN THE WILDS OF THE ISTHMUS.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>Oliver calculated that they had been traveling not -more than an hour when the sudden stoppage occurred. -The shock was so great it threw him up against the -seat in front of him, and awoke Gus from a comfortable -nap.</p> - -<p>“What’s the matter?” exclaimed the stout youth -in alarm.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know,” was Oliver’s reply. “Something -wrong ahead, I suppose.”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps part of the roadbed has sunk,” suggested -Mr. Whyland, who sat on the other side of the aisle. -“I understand such a thing frequently occurs here.”</p> - -<p>They all sat quiet for ten minutes. By this time -one and another of the passengers began to get out, -and finally the three joined them, and walked up to -where the engine stood, blowing off steam.</p> - -<p>Mr. Whyland’s surmise proved correct. Not fifty -feet distant the rails of the road were submerged in a -murky pool of foul-smelling water. The length of -the depression was about one hundred feet, and its -greatest depth a foot and a half.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_95"></a>[95]</span></p> - -<p>Already a gang of native laborers were at work repairing -the damage. There were a dozen or more of -them, but they worked so slowly that hardly any -progress was made.</p> - -<p>“Seems to me if I was overseer here I would hurry -those men up,” remarked Gus, after they had watched -the proceedings for some time.</p> - -<p>“They cannot hurry much,” said Mr. Whyland. -“The climate is against them. I doubt if you could -stand the work more than an hour. Come, let us get -away from that pool. It is a regular hotbed of fever.”</p> - -<p>“I wonder how long this will delay us?” said -Oliver, as they walked back to the car.</p> - -<p>“Suppose we ask the conductor?” said Gus.</p> - -<p>After some little trouble they found the man, who -was surrounded by a crowd of passengers, all eager -to know what would be the result of the delay.</p> - -<p>“We will go through as soon as possible,” he replied. -“The men will work hard, and I think in two hours, -or three at the most, we will be able to move.”</p> - -<p>“Three hours!” exclaimed Oliver. “That is quite -a time.”</p> - -<p>“Let us spend it in exploring the vicinity,” suggested -Gus.</p> - -<p>Oliver was agreeable. Mr. Whyland did not care -to go, but sat down to read a magazine, and the two -boys started off alone.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_96"></a>[96]</span></p> - -<p>“We won’t go far,” said Oliver. “I suppose they -will blow the whistle before they start, so that we can -get back.”</p> - -<p>In five minutes the boys were in a veritable forest. -On every side could be seen tall palms, interspersed -with cocoa, sycamore, and other tropical trees. Beneath -their feet grew a rank vegetation, and wherever -there was a bit of water, gorgeous lilies sprang up, -the like of which they had never before beheld.</p> - -<p>And the birds and monkeys overhead! Never had -they seen such a sight, and it seemed they would -never get done wondering over it. Every tree was -full, and the air resounded with sweet song and -senseless chatter.</p> - -<p>“Those monkeys beat any menagerie show I ever -saw!” declared Gus, as they stood watching two old -fellows, who had evidently got into a dispute over -the ownership of a particular cocoanut.</p> - -<p>“My, just hear them call each other names! See, -now the black has got it! But the red won’t let him -keep it. See, he has it now, and is going to break it -open. There! the black has it again, and he—well, -by crickety!”</p> - -<p>As Gus uttered the last word he dodged, and just in -time. The monkey who held the nut had discovered -that he was being watched, and without ceremony had -hurled the nut at the stout youth’s head.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_97"></a>[97]</span></p> - -<p>“Thank you for the nut,” said Gus, picking it up -and bowing in mock politeness, “but next time please -don’t present it so forcibly.”</p> - -<p>Going to a tree, he endeavored to break the shell -of the cocoanut by hammering the article against the -trunk. As he did so, two more nuts landed beside -him.</p> - -<p>“Hello! what does this mean?” he exclaimed. -“Did I knock those down?”</p> - -<p>“No, you didn’t; they threw them,” replied Oliver. -“We had better get out of here before we have our -heads cracked open. Look out!” and he dodged just -as a perfect volley came raining down.</p> - -<p>One of the nuts just grazed Gus’s ear, causing him -to cry out with pain. He dropped the nut he held -and ran across the clearing, followed by Oliver.</p> - -<p>“By crickety! but that was a narrow escape!” he -cried when they were once more safe. “If one of -those nuts had hit us, it would have ended our existence -right then and there.”</p> - -<p>“It will teach us a lesson to mind our own business,” -returned Oliver. “I suppose that monkey -thought we had no right to spy into his affairs.”</p> - -<p>“I would like to own a monkey,” observed Gus; -“that is, one that is peaceful. I always thought -them so cute.”</p> - -<p>“They are cute, but not always in the way you<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_98"></a>[98]</span> -imagine. Come, I suppose we ought to be getting -back.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, there is lots of time! Why, we haven’t -been gone half an hour yet. Just wait; I want to -pick some of those splendid flowers growing near -that pond.”</p> - -<p>“I wouldn’t, Gus; for all you know they may be -poisonous.”</p> - -<p>“Do you think they are? They are awfully -pretty.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t know; but they might be, and you had -better be on the safe side.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll get just one of each. Here, let me have your -knife.” Gus took Oliver’s knife and cut off the -flowers he wished. “Phew, what a nasty smell!” -he cried in disgust. “That’s the worst of it, with -so many pretty flowers. The smell—oh, my! how -they burn! My hand is on fire!”</p> - -<p>He threw the flowers away from him and danced -around in pain, shaking his hands in the air.</p> - -<p>“Oh, I hope you have not been poisoned!” cried -Oliver. “Go wash your hands in the pool.”</p> - -<p>“You won’t catch me fooling around any flowers -again; that is, strange ones,” said Gus, as he did as -directed. “My, what a nasty place this is! No -wonder the railroads have to offer a man a small fortune -to work for them. I wouldn’t—Oh, Oliver,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_99"></a>[99]</span> -look! what is that?” And straightening up, the -stout youth pointed to the opposite side of the bit -of water. “It looked like the head of a turtle or -something,” he went on. “I wonder if there are -any turtles here?”</p> - -<p>“I don’t see why there shouldn’t be. Still it -might have been something else. Let us go.”</p> - -<p>“Wait till I have a shy at it with this gourd.” Gus -poised the gourd in his hand and let drive. “There! -I reckon I hit him. Oh, my stars!”</p> - -<p>Gus tumbled back in great haste, and Oliver did -the same. The supposed turtle’s head had suddenly -lifted, and there was revealed a hissing snake, fully -eight feet long.</p> - -<p>“A snake!” cried both.</p> - -<p>For an instant the reptile seemed to stand nearly -upright, its eyes glittering, and its slimy body quivering -with anger. Then with a final hiss it darted -headfirst into the pool and disappeared.</p> - -<p>“Huh! that gives me a chill!” cried Gus. “I -wonder where he has gone?”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps he is coming after us,” replied Oliver. -“Let us get out of here as fast as we can.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t think he will make his appearance again, -but still we had better go. There may be more.”</p> - -<p>“There are!” cried Oliver. “See there!” He -pointed almost under their feet and pulled Gus<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_100"></a>[100]</span> -away. “That is the same or his mate. Let us run -for it.”</p> - -<p>There was no necessity for the last words, for both -were running as fast as the nature of the ground -would permit. The snake followed for a short distance, -and then was lost to view.</p> - -<p>But the boys kept right on, and it was not until -both found themselves in a perfect labyrinth of undergrowth -that they slackened their pace and finally -came to a stop.</p> - -<p>“Thank Heaven we have got away from him,” -exclaimed Gus, puffing to catch his breath. “Huh! -I can almost feel him coiling around my body!”</p> - -<p>“So can I,” returned Oliver. “Of all things to -meet I think a snake is the worst. I would just as -lief encounter a tiger or a lion.”</p> - -<p>“Let us get back at once,” said Gus; “I won’t -feel safe until I am in the car, and when I am you -won’t catch me leaving the train again until we arrive -at Panama.”</p> - -<p>“Just my sentiments,” rejoined Oliver. “Let us—”</p> - -<p>He stopped short. “Where are we?”</p> - -<p>Both suddenly gazed around them in alarm. Which -way should they turn? Neither knew. They were -lost in the forest!</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_101"></a>[101]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XV">CHAPTER XV.<br /> -<small>AN ADVENTURE ON THE ISTHMUS.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>Lost in the forest! Oliver and Gus looked at -each other with blanched faces. Here indeed was -a sorry situation. What was to be done?</p> - -<p>On every side could be seen nothing but the dense -undergrowth and tall trees. They might be only a -hundred feet from the railroad, or they might be a -mile away.</p> - -<p>“We were very foolish not to note the path,” said -Oliver. “Have you any idea which way we ought -to turn?”</p> - -<p>“I have not, excepting that we might trace the -way back to that pool,” answered Gus. “And I don’t -want to do that if I can help it,” he added with -a shudder. “I’d rather tramp five miles than face -those snakes again.”</p> - -<p>“So would I. But we must try some way. Here, -let us see if we cannot get our bearings by the -sun. Now, I think this is the right direction,” went -on Oliver, after a careful survey of the light overhead.</p> - -<p>“And I think it is this way,” affirmed Gus, pointing<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_102"></a>[102]</span> -out a course directly at right angles with the -other. “Come, let us try that opening beyond.”</p> - -<p>Gus insisted that he was right, and somewhat -against his will, Oliver followed his chum. They -crossed the clearing, and then plunged into another -mass of bushes and vines, the stout lad leading.</p> - -<p>“Hold up!” he shouted suddenly. “Don’t come -any farther, or you’ll get into a regular bog-hole!” -And he turned and hastily scrambled back to where -Oliver stood.</p> - -<p>“It’s lucky I stopped where I did,” he went on; -“if we hadn’t we would have got into a pool worse -than the other one was. My! what a beastly place -this is!”</p> - -<p>More dismayed than ever, they made their way -back to the clearing. Something must be done, but -what?</p> - -<p>“If we don’t get back soon, the train will leave -without us,” said Oliver. “Come, let us try the -direction I thought was right.” And off they started -as fast as they could.</p> - -<p>It was miserable walking, and before they had proceeded -a hundred steps both had their feet wet, and -unfortunate Gus had his coat torn in a dozen places.</p> - -<p>“It’s positively the worst place I ever got into!” -he groaned. “If we don’t get out soon I won’t have -a patch of clothing left.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_103"></a>[103]</span></p> - -<p>On and on they went, until Oliver called a halt.</p> - -<p>“No use to go farther. If this was the right road -we would have crossed the track long ago. We are -going wrong, and that is all there is to it.”</p> - -<p>“But what shall we do?” demanded Gus, more -dismayed than ever. “We can’t stand still here.”</p> - -<p>Oliver leaned against a tree. Truly their position -was far from enviable. Suppose they should be left, -what would they do when night came on?</p> - -<p>“I don’t know,” he replied in a low voice. “If -we could only—hark! what is that?”</p> - -<p>Both listened intently. From a distance came the -unmistakable sound of a steam-whistle.</p> - -<p>“It’s the locomotive!” cried Gus. “They are getting -ready to start!”</p> - -<p>“Hurry up,” cried Oliver. “Come, this way.”</p> - -<p>And he sprang off through the bushes at the top -of his speed. It was a rough journey, but what was -that compared to the agonizing thought that they -might be left behind?</p> - -<p>Fortunately the steam-whistle continued sounding, -and it proved a good guide; for in ten minutes more -they reached the railroad track, and just beyond stood -the train, all ready to start.</p> - -<p>“Thank fortune!” cried Oliver, and he waved his -hand to the conductor to wait for them.</p> - -<p>In another moment they were safe on board and<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_104"></a>[104]</span> -in their seats, and then the train with a final warning -moved off.</p> - -<p>“Where have you two been?” asked Mr. Whyland, -gazing in astonishment at their torn clothing and wet -feet; “I was very much afraid you might miss the -train.”</p> - -<p>“You weren’t half as much scared about it as we -were,” responded Gus ruefully.</p> - -<p>Oliver told their story. Mr. Whyland smiled, but -shook his head.</p> - -<p>“Both of you want to be more careful,” he said. -“Those flowers may have been poisonous, and also -the snakes. It is well enough to go out on a tour -of inspection, but one must be mighty cautious.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll not leave the car until we reach Panama,” -affirmed Gus, and he was as good as his word.</p> - -<p>The train moved along slowly, as if feeling its way. -Gus said he could very well walk about as fast; but -when Oliver suggested that he get out and try it, -the stout youth begged to be excused.</p> - -<p>On the way they passed a number of villages, none -of them very large, and many of them merely a collection -of bamboo huts, with a big pole in the center, -and covered over for the most part with palm leaves. -The natives appeared to be quite respectable, but not -over fond of work. Here and there a group could -be seen moving slowly about, and singing to themselves;<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_105"></a>[105]</span> -or they were to be found in a corner dozing, -or contentedly smoking their tobacco.</p> - -<p>“It’s a lazy life,” said Oliver, “but I suppose the -climate has something to do with it.”</p> - -<p>“It has everything to do with it,” replied Mr. Whyland. -“Still, the people here are more industrious -than they used to be before the railroad was built.”</p> - -<p>Once the train came to a standstill. It was a sort -of a station, and on the platform stood a number of -the natives of the place—tall, and not bad-looking -fellows.</p> - -<p>One of them held an immense quantity of small -wares by a string over his shoulder, and was trying -to dispose of them. He approached the window at -which Oliver and Gus were sitting, and could hardly -be made to take “no” for an answer.</p> - -<p>“I don’t want any,” said Gus, for at least the tenth -time.</p> - -<p>“<i lang="es" xml:lang="es">Si caballeros</i>,” the native insisted. “Yes, gentlemen, -only feety centa.”</p> - -<p>To get rid of the fellow they at last closed the window, -and then the man went off in apparent anger.</p> - -<p>“They have an idea down here that all Americans -are rich, and free to spend their money,” said -Mr. Whyland. “The same idea prevails in Europe, -and American tourists are generally made to pay a -little more for what they purchase than other folks.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_106"></a>[106]</span></p> - -<p>“I wouldn’t mind having some of the things he -had to sell, but I have no money to spare,” remarked -Oliver.</p> - -<p>“Just my case,” put in Gus. “And it makes me -mad enough to have to say no, without having some -one insist the other way.”</p> - -<p>The remainder of the journey took but a short while. -Soon the train rolled past a number of ancient and -squalid-looking houses, and Mr. Whyland announced -that they had reached the outskirts of Panama.</p> - -<p>But around the odd-looking station things were not -so bad. To be sure all was new and strange to the -boys, and they kept their eyes wide open for all such -sights.</p> - -<p>“They often have most outrageous bull-fights here,” -said Mr. Whyland as they alighted.</p> - -<p>“I should like to see one,” rejoined Gus. “Not -that I would enjoy the sport, but it would be so -strange.”</p> - -<p>“I would not care to go,” put in Oliver. “I -think it is too cruel!”</p> - -<p>“It is the height of cruelty,” responded Mr. Whyland. -“I went once. It was held on a Sunday, and -a friend insisted that I should accompany him. When -the poor beasts were brought out, and a number of -things done to enrage them, I was disgusted; and -when the fight began I grew sick, not only at heart,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_107"></a>[107]</span> -but physically as well. What sport there is in the -thing I cannot see.”</p> - -<p>“Nor can any one else who has any heart,” said -Oliver decidedly; “it is nothing short of barbarism.”</p> - -<p>“I wonder when our steamer leaves?” observed -Gus, as they walked out upon the street.</p> - -<p>“To-morrow morning at ten o’clock. At least, -that is what the conductor said,” replied Oliver.</p> - -<p>“Suppose we go to the office and make sure,” -said Mr. Whyland. “We do not wish to take any -chances. They often make changes here.”</p> - -<p>So off for the office of the steamship company -they started. It was not a great distance, and it -took them but a few minutes.</p> - -<p>As they neared the spot, they met a number of -their fellow-passengers returning with fallen looks.</p> - -<p>“Something is wrong,” said Oliver. “I just heard -that man in brown say it was a shame to be kept -waiting so long. Something has happened.”</p> - -<p>They were not long in finding out what that something -was. In entering the harbor, the steamship had -got one of her wheels caught in some wreckage and -badly damaged. She must be laid up for repairs, and -passengers would have to wait for the next steamer.</p> - -<p>“And how long will that be?” asked Oliver ruefully.</p> - -<p>“Ten days,” was the reply.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_108"></a>[108]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XVI">CHAPTER XVI.<br /> -<small>A CHANGE OF PLAN.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>It was dismaying news. Ten days to wait in -Panama! To the boys, especially to Oliver, it seemed -an eternity.</p> - -<p>“Might as well settle down here,” grumbled Gus. -“What in the world are we to do, caged up in this -dreary place for a week and a half?”</p> - -<p>“The company will have to board us,” remarked -Mr. Whyland, who was disposed to make the best -of the matter. “As far as that goes it will be their -loss, not ours.”</p> - -<p>“But I do not wish to lose the time. I suppose -Colonel Mendix is already in San Francisco, or maybe -even on his way to the mine,” said Oliver.</p> - -<p>“That is true. But what can we do?”</p> - -<p>“I wonder if there are no other ships that carry -passengers?” asked Oliver. “In a place like this -there ought to be.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, but we’ve got our tickets,” put in Gus. “I -can’t afford to lose the amount I paid on mine.”</p> - -<p>“We won’t lose that,” replied Mr. Whyland. -“The company will have to take them back for<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_109"></a>[109]</span> -what they are worth if they cannot carry us at the -stipulated time. But is there any other steamer?”</p> - -<p>“I suppose we can find out by going down to the -different offices,” said Oliver. “Suppose we do that -before they close for the day?”</p> - -<p>“A good plan,” rejoined Mr. Whyland. “I do -not care to remain here any more than you do.”</p> - -<p>Stopping an Englishman whom they met, they -secured directions to the various shipping-offices, and -then started for the nearest at once.</p> - -<p>“The Neolia sails in four days,” was the reply -received here; “but the passenger list is full. No -more can be taken.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t care much,” remarked Gus when they -were once more outside. “Four days to wait are -nearly as bad as ten. Maybe we will find something -that goes to-morrow.”</p> - -<p>“Small chance of that, I think,” said Mr. Whyland. -“Still, let us try.”</p> - -<p>In five minutes they were at another office. Here -they were told that no vessel would sail within several -days, and nearly every one was full.</p> - -<p>“I thought it would be so,” said Mr. Whyland -when they stood outside once more. “Perhaps the -steamship company has bought up the places.”</p> - -<p>At that moment a man with a nautical bearing -stepped up and tapped Oliver on the shoulder.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_110"></a>[110]</span></p> - -<p>“Excuse me,” said he; “but didn’t I see you in -the steamship office inquiring about passage to San -Francisco?”</p> - -<p>“You did,” replied Oliver. “What of it?”</p> - -<p>“Maybe I can accommodate ye, seeing as how the -Polly Eliza is going to sail first thing to-morrow -morning,” responded the stranger. “My name is -Morris, Niles Morris, and I’m part owner and captain -of the Polly Eliza, as trim a little coast steamer -as there is in these parts. If you want to ship with -me, now is your chance, one or all of ye.”</p> - -<p>Oliver looked at the man. He was short and stout, -with a ruddy face, and his voice had a hearty ring.</p> - -<p>“We do want passage,” said Oliver. “What do -you say?” the last to Mr. Whyland.</p> - -<p>“We would like to see your vessel,” replied that -gentleman. “Is she lying anywhere near?”</p> - -<p>“Just down at the end of the bay. Come right -along with me and I’ll show ye. You’ll find her -with first-class accommodations, even if she is small.”</p> - -<p>Captain Morris led the way along the street, down -a long wharf, and into a small rowboat. In five minutes -they reached a spot where a neat-looking steamer -was lying. They were taken aboard, and found what -her captain had said was true. All was as new as a -pin, and it pleased the boys as well as Mr. Whyland.</p> - -<p>“And you sail to-morrow morning?” said the latter.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_111"></a>[111]</span></p> - -<p>“Aye, sir; we’ll be outside by ten o’clock.”</p> - -<p>“And what will you take the three of us for?”</p> - -<p>“Were you going by the steamer?”</p> - -<p>“Yes.”</p> - -<p>“Then I’ll do it for just what the steamer has to -allow you for your tickets—or, in other words, I’ll -take your tickets for the trip.”</p> - -<p>“That is certainly very fair. Are you sure you can -dispose of the tickets?”</p> - -<p>“Oh, a captain always can. An ordinary passenger -might have trouble, but we never do. Just give me -your tickets, and I’ll give you passes on my vessel for -the trip.”</p> - -<p>“Well, I guess”—began Mr. Whyland.</p> - -<p>“How long will it take you to reach San Francisco?” -put in Oliver.</p> - -<p>“About twenty days, if we have favorable weather.”</p> - -<p>“I mean at the most.”</p> - -<p>“Not over twenty-six days.”</p> - -<p>The two boys and Mr. Whyland held a brief consultation. -At the conclusion they informed Captain -Morris that they had decided to accept his offer, and -the transfer of tickets was made on the spot.</p> - -<p>“Mr. Willett, the purser, will show you to your -staterooms,” said Captain Morris after their business -was concluded. “There are two nice ones close together -that you will occupy, and he will make it -comfortable for ye.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_112"></a>[112]</span></p> - -<p>Mr. Willett was called, and he at once led the way -below. They found everything as Captain Morris -had described it, and in less than an hour they felt -quite at home.</p> - -<p>“This is a lucky thing for us in more ways than -one,” said Mr. Whyland to Oliver. “If Colonel -Mendix has discovered that we are on his track this -new move will throw him off. He will think we -are here in Panama waiting for the steamer while -we will be half-way to San Francisco.”</p> - -<p>“That is true,” returned Oliver, “and I am glad -of it, although I guess he hasn’t the slightest idea -that I am after him.”</p> - -<p>“I wish I could say the same. But I have a feeling -that that is not so in my case. He is an awfully -sharp fellow.”</p> - -<p>“Let us trust he has overreached himself,” said -Oliver hopefully.</p> - -<p>They took their evening meal at a small restaurant -in the town, and later on strolled along the all but -deserted battlements of the coast, and one or two of -the ancient looking streets, and around a tumbled-down -convent.</p> - -<p>“Panama is almost a city of the past,” remarked -Mr. Whyland. “Its former glory seems to be gone -for good.”</p> - -<p>At nine o’clock a boat came to the wharf to take<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_113"></a>[113]</span> -them and Captain Morris and the first mate on board. -It was a fine moonlight evening; but as soon as they -reached the deck of the Polly Eliza they went below, -so heavy was the night dew.</p> - -<p>Oliver, with Gus as a room-mate, slept soundly -that night. When he awoke the peculiar noise overhead -told him that the ship was getting underway. -He sprang up and aroused his companion.</p> - -<p>“Don’t want to get up. Let me sleep,” mumbled -Gus.</p> - -<p>“You’ve got to,” was all Oliver replied; and he -gave Gus a poke that started the stout youth at -once.</p> - -<p>“Wonder you wouldn’t wake a fellow in the middle -of the night,” grumbled Gus, as he began slowly -to dress.</p> - -<p>“Middle of the night? It’s seven o’clock, at least.”</p> - -<p>“Well, what of it? You say it as if it meant ten.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, come, Gus, hurry up. We want to see the -steamer leave Panama—at least I do.”</p> - -<p>In five minutes more Oliver was on deck, and the -stout lad slowly followed him. They found that Mr. -Whyland was ahead of them.</p> - -<p>“We are off,” said that gentleman. “We shall -not set foot on ground again until we land in San -Francisco.”</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_114"></a>[114]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XVII">CHAPTER XVII.<br /> -<small>A STARTLING CRY.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>“Won’t we stop at any points in Mexico?” asked -Oliver.</p> - -<p>“I think not. Captain Morris is anxious to make -the voyage as quickly as possible, for he thinks he -can get a good return cargo.”</p> - -<p>“If we had the time to spare I wouldn’t like anything -better than to stop at La Libertad, Champerico, -and the rest of the towns,” continued Oliver; -“I love to see strange places.”</p> - -<p>“I think most every one does,” returned Mr. Whyland. -“I have traveled for many years, and I never -tire of it. There is always something unexpected -turning up.”</p> - -<p>“I like to keep moving,” put in Gus; “I hate to -stay too long in one place. Now, take a town like -Panama, for instance; a day or two is sufficient to -see all there is to be seen.”</p> - -<p>“You are quite mistaken there,” replied Mr. Whyland. -“There are many ancient convents and historic -ruins there, which, if studied up, would prove -interesting for several weeks; that is, if you didn’t -have anything else on your mind.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_115"></a>[115]</span></p> - -<p>The Polly Eliza was steaming down the bay -rapidly. In a couple of hours she had passed -the point. The day was a delightful one, and the -three spent the entire forenoon on deck.</p> - -<p>“This used to be a very odd kind of a voyage -during the first years of the gold fever,” said Mr. -Whyland. “There were very few steamers, and the -sailing-vessels took from sixty to ninety days to -reach San Francisco.”</p> - -<p>“Didn’t some people come by sailing-vessels all the -way around Cape Horn?” asked Gus.</p> - -<p>“Yes; almost all the first people that did not go -overland came that way. It was a tedious journey. -The second vessel that made the trip took nine -months.”</p> - -<p>“Nine months!” exclaimed Oliver. “Why, that is -three-quarters of a year.”</p> - -<p>“When they reached the Golden Gate nearly half -of the passengers were sick with scurvy, and many -of them were buried up to their necks in the ground -to cure them.”</p> - -<p>“I wouldn’t want to take any such trip as that,” -put in Gus. “I would get so sick of seeing nothing -but water and sky I wouldn’t know what to do.”</p> - -<p>“It is no easy matter to double the Horn, as it -is called,” continued Mr. Whyland. “It took that -vessel nearly seven weeks to do it. Every time she<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_116"></a>[116]</span> -was nearly around, the fierce trade winds from the -Pacific would drive her back.”</p> - -<p>“I’m glad I didn’t have to go that way,” said -Gus with a grimace.</p> - -<p>“So you see this voyage is really nothing,” laughed -Mr. Whyland.</p> - -<p>During the afternoon it began to grow foggy, -and then the two boys went below and put their -stateroom in order.</p> - -<p>This task was hardly completed before Gus began -to feel queer and drew down the corners of his mouth.</p> - -<p>“What’s the matter?” asked Oliver, although he -suspected the cause.</p> - -<p>“I—I—am afraid I—I—” stammered the stout -youth.</p> - -<p>“Seasick?”</p> - -<p>“Yes.”</p> - -<p>“Better rest in the bunk for a while.”</p> - -<p>“I guess I will.”</p> - -<p>In half an hour poor Gus was as bad as ever. -Oliver did all for his chum that he could think of, -and even went to the purser for advice.</p> - -<p>“Can’t do a thing,” replied Mr. Willett. “Perhaps -he may not be so bad as he was on the trip -around Cape Hatteras.”</p> - -<p>“I trust not,” returned Oliver. “I haven’t been -seasick myself, but I imagine it’s something awful.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_117"></a>[117]</span></p> - -<p>“It is,” responded the purser. “Get it real bad -and you won’t care whether you live or not. I have -followed the sea for twelve years, but once in a -while my stomach goes back on me even yet.”</p> - -<p>“Why, I thought sailors never got sick!”</p> - -<p>“That’s a big mistake. You may be a sailor all -your life and get it just as bad as if it were your -first voyage. You can thank your stars that you -are not one of the seasick kind.”</p> - -<p>“Yes; I am lucky that way.”</p> - -<p>Poor Gus lay in the cabin all that afternoon and -all night. In the morning he felt better, however, -and though rather weak, managed to eat a little -breakfast.</p> - -<p>“Now I hope I’m over it for good,” he said. “If -I am not I’ll just jump overboard, that’s what I’ll -do.”</p> - -<p>“And make food for the sharks,” laughed Mr. -Whyland. “Just look out there at the ferocious -fellows moving around. That one would just make -about three mouthfuls of you.”</p> - -<p>As he spoke he pointed over the side to where an -ugly shovel-nose shark was swimming leisurely along.</p> - -<p>“Ough!” shuddered Gus, drawing back. “I -didn’t see him.”</p> - -<p>“I suppose he would think you were a good fat -morsel,” laughed Oliver.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_118"></a>[118]</span></p> - -<p>There was a general smile, and then Mr. Whyland -pointed directly to the westward.</p> - -<p>“That is the Island of Quibo, and far back of -it you can see the coast line of Central America. -We are getting along, true enough.”</p> - -<p>That day and the next flew by rapidly. There -were many things on board the small coast steamer -that were new to the two boys, and as the purser -had taken a decided liking to them they gained much -information by “nosing around,” as Gus put it.</p> - -<p>One evening they found themselves far out of -sight of land. All hands enjoyed a beautiful sunset, -and it was nearly eight o’clock when the little -party went below.</p> - -<p>“Getting more used to it?” asked Mr. Whyland, -as they separated for the night after a quiet game -of dominoes in the cabin.</p> - -<p>“Somewhat,” replied Oliver.</p> - -<p>“I’m not,” said Gus. “I wish something real -exciting would happen. Something that would stir -up a fellow’s blood.”</p> - -<p>“Are you anxious to be shipwrecked?” laughed -Mr. Whyland.</p> - -<p>“No, not that exactly; but I hate to have things -so tame.”</p> - -<p>“Well, maybe something will happen,” was the -quiet reply.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_119"></a>[119]</span></p> - -<p>Little did Mr. Whyland realize how quickly his -thought would become a fact. Had he done so it -is not likely that he would have gone to his cabin -with such a tranquil heart.</p> - -<p>When they reached their stateroom the two boys -sat for a long time discussing matters in general, -the principal question being what should each do -when the steamer reached San Francisco.</p> - -<p>“You had better telegraph to your father, Gus. He -will be very anxious concerning your whereabouts.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll do that, Oliver,” was the stout youth’s reply. -“I begin to see that running away wasn’t -such a brilliant thing to do after all.”</p> - -<p>“Now you’ve hit the nail right on the head,” -replied Oliver; and he said no more.</p> - -<p>Half an hour later both boys were in their berths -and sleeping soundly. How long they remained in -this state neither could tell exactly.</p> - -<p>Suddenly Oliver awoke with a start. He jumped -out on the floor wondering what had aroused him. -Gus, too, was wide awake.</p> - -<p>“Somebody hammered on the door,” cried the -stout youth. “Maybe—”</p> - -<p>He did not finish, for at that instant a wild cry -came from the deck overhead.</p> - -<p>“Fire! Fire! Fire!”</p> - -<p>Both stared at each other with blanched faces.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_120"></a>[120]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XVIII">CHAPTER XVIII.<br /> -<small>OLIVER’S HEROISM.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>It would be useless to deny the fact that Oliver -and Gus were thoroughly startled when they heard -the cry of fire that came from the deck of the Polly -Eliza.</p> - -<p>They could easily realize the danger of their situation. -Out of sight of land, and in the darkness of -night, which way should they turn? What could -they do?</p> - -<p>“Let us hurry on deck,” cried Oliver. “There is -not a moment to spare.”</p> - -<p>There was no need to hurry Gus, for that youth -was already struggling to get into his clothing. By -the time Oliver was ready, Gus was also dressed. As -they rushed out and into the cabin, they met Mr. -Whyland. He was deadly pale.</p> - -<p>“I was just going to call you,” he said. “I was -afraid you had not heard the cries.”</p> - -<p>“What is the matter?” asked Oliver. “Where is -the fire?”</p> - -<p>“In the forward hold. It started in some loose -waste that ought never to have been allowed there.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_121"></a>[121]</span></p> - -<p>“Is it dangerous?” faltered Gus.</p> - -<p>“I hope not; but we cannot tell. It is a hard -fire to get at.”</p> - -<p>By this time the three were on deck. All was confusion. -The pump attached to the engine had been -brought into play, and the sailors were pouring the -water into the hold as well as they were able.</p> - -<p>“Don’t be alarmed,” said Captain Morris, as calmly -as he could. “It may be all over in an hour. It -is a small fire.”</p> - -<p>“But a nasty one, I take it,” put in the purser, -who stood near.</p> - -<p>“Why don’t the men go below and try to locate -the flames?” asked Oliver, as he noted that no one -went below decks.</p> - -<p>“Sailors have too much horror of fire,” responded -Mr. Whyland; “and Captain Morris’s place is here -on deck.”</p> - -<p>“They might do a good deal more good by going -below,” put in Gus.</p> - -<p>Meanwhile the fire began to spread towards the -stern. All the sailors began to shake their heads, -and several said it would be better to spend the -time in getting ready to leave the steamer.</p> - -<p>“Leave the ship!” exclaimed Captain Morris. -“Leave the Polly Eliza! Not much! If I wasn’t -so old and asthmatic I’d go down into the hold -myself.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_122"></a>[122]</span></p> - -<p>Oliver stood for a moment in meditation.</p> - -<p>“Let me go down,” he said suddenly. “If somebody -don’t go the ship may burn up and we’ll all -go to the bottom. If I can’t do any good I’ll come -up at once.”</p> - -<p>And without waiting for a reply, Oliver hurried -towards the partly closed hatchway.</p> - -<p>There was a small step-ladder at hand, and getting -the sailors to help him put this down, Oliver took -a deep breath and quickly descended into the hold.</p> - -<p>“There’s bravery for you!” exclaimed Captain -Morris. “I should think this would make some -of you feel mighty cheap,” he added to the men.</p> - -<p>It was indeed a bold thing to do. The hold was -one mass of thick, stifling smoke, and breathing -down there was next to impossible.</p> - -<p>As soon as Oliver reached the bottom he dropped -on his hands and knees. Dragging the nozzle of -the hose behind him, he crawled rapidly to the spot -where the flames arose.</p> - -<p>A minute later and he was right beside the fire. -He saw that it was confined to some loose waste, as -Mr. Whyland had said, and also to half a dozen bales -of cloth stored close at hand.</p> - -<p>By the time Oliver had made this discovery his -eyes were all but blinded, and his head swam as it -never had before.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_123"></a>[123]</span></p> - -<p>“I’ll fix this pipe fast so the water will pour right -on the fire,” he thought; “then there will be no -use in staying.”</p> - -<p>After some little difficulty this was done. The -effects of the water pouring directly on the flames -told at once. But the smoke became thicker than -ever, and Oliver hurried to the hatchway.</p> - -<p>As soon as he appeared in the opening he was -hauled out. He was so weak he could not stand. -He sank in a heap on a seat.</p> - -<p>“I left the hose pouring water right on the fire,” -he gasped. “If somebody will go down you can -have the fire out in ten minutes.”</p> - -<p>“I will go,” said Mr. Willett. “I will not be -outdone by a boy, even though he be as noble as -this lad.” And he disappeared down the hatchway.</p> - -<p>Anxiously those on deck waited for him to reappear. -At the end of five minutes he did so.</p> - -<p>“It is about out,” he reported. “The hose has -soaked everything, and there is no more danger. -The smoke that is coming up doesn’t amount to -anything.”</p> - -<p>“Thank God it is so!” exclaimed Mr. Whyland; -and everybody near echoed the sentiment.</p> - -<p>“Our safety is due to this young man,” said -Captain Morris, grasping Oliver by the shoulder. -“You deserve a medal for your bravery.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_124"></a>[124]</span></p> - -<p>At this Oliver was compelled to blush. But he -blushed even more when a cheer, led by Gus, was -taken up by all hands.</p> - -<p>“I didn’t do so much,” he said.</p> - -<p>“You did enough,” rejoined Mr. Whyland. “What -more could be wanted than that?”</p> - -<p>“I shall never forget the service,” put in the -captain heartily; “I don’t know what I would -have done had the Polly Eliza been burned. She -has been my home for so many years.”</p> - -<p>A little later a number of the sailors went below, -and under directions from the purser, made a thorough -search of the hold. It was thought every spark of -fire had been extinguished; but to make doubly sure -two of the men were told to remain on guard for -the balance of the night and all the next day.</p> - -<p>“Then I suppose we might as well go to bed -again,” said Gus who, now that the excitement -was over, began to feel sleepy.</p> - -<p>“Yes; there is no further danger,” returned Captain -Morris. “To-morrow I will hold a strict investigation -as to the cause of the fire. If I find any -of the men are to blame, they shall pay the penalty, -I can tell you.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Whyland went below, and Oliver followed Gus -to their stateroom. Both undressed and turned in, -but it was nearly daylight before either of them -dropped asleep.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_125"></a>[125]</span></p> - -<p>Oliver was the first to awaken. He turned to his -friend and found the stout youth tossing and mumbling -uneasily to himself.</p> - -<p>“Fire! Save me! save me!” mumbled Gus.</p> - -<p>Oliver gave him a vigorous shaking, and the stout -youth sat up and rubbed his eyes.</p> - -<p>“Where—where?” he stammered. “Thank goodness -it was only a dream! I thought I was down -in the hole, burning up.”</p> - -<p>“Well, you were wishing for an adventure and -you got one,” laughed Oliver. “Want any more of -them?”</p> - -<p>“Not just for the present,” replied Gus with a -shiver. “Suppose you and the rest hadn’t put out -the fire, what then?”</p> - -<p>“It would have been bad enough, and no mistake,” -replied Oliver.</p> - -<p>At the breakfast-table Captain Morris again thanked -Oliver for what he had done. He said he had found -out that the fire had been caused by friction amongst -the cargo, and that no one in particular was to blame.</p> - -<p>During the day, the sailors busied themselves in -throwing out all the burned matter and in rearranging -the cargo, so that a repetition of the affair -might not occur.</p> - -<p>Oliver and Gus watched the operation for a while, -and then turned their attention to the sea where countless -sharks loomed up in all directions.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_126"></a>[126]</span></p> - -<p>“The water here is generally full of them,” said -Mr. Whyland. “I have spent a day or two fishing -for them.”</p> - -<p>“Fishing for them?” repeated Oliver in surprise.</p> - -<p>“Yes.”</p> - -<p>“I thought you had to spear them.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, no; you can catch them with a hook and -line provided both be strong enough.”</p> - -<p>“I’d like to try the sport,” said Gus.</p> - -<p>“We will do so to-morrow if Captain Morris will -lend us a hook and line. He is too busy to be bothered -now.”</p> - -<p>The answer did not quite suit Gus. Having heard -of shark fishing, he was anxious to try it at once. A -little later he procured a large hook and a stout line -from the purser, and some meat from the cook, and -began to fish on his own account.</p> - -<p>At this time Oliver was in deep conversation with -Mr. Whyland. They were speaking of the Aurora -mine, and did not notice what Gus was doing.</p> - -<p>Suddenly came a sharp cry for help. Gus had -caught a shark and was unable to hold the ugly monster. -The two made a dash for the rail; but before -they could reach the boy’s side the line tightened, and -with a wild cry Gus slid overboard.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_127"></a>[127]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XIX">CHAPTER XIX.<br /> -<small>GUS HAS AN ADVENTURE.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>The accident that had happened to the stout youth -was easily explained. In order to make sure that the -line should not slip through his hands, Gus had very -foolishly tied it about his wrist; and when it became -evident that he could not haul in the shark, he found -that neither could he loosen the line, which was now -pulled into a hard knot.</p> - -<p>He then braced himself against the rail and raised -the cry for help heard by the others. But the strain -on his arm was terrible, and when the shark gave -an extra heavy tug, Gus went overboard in a twinkling.</p> - -<p>The tension on the rope carried him fully fifteen -feet from the steamer. He struck the water with a -loud splash, and then disappeared beneath the surface.</p> - -<p>“Man overboard!” cried Oliver. “Good heavens! -what shall we do?”</p> - -<p>“Man the boat!” sang out Captain Morris, who -saw at a glance what had taken place. “Quick, boys! -Sharks are thick here!”</p> - -<p>These last words carried terror to Oliver’s heart.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_128"></a>[128]</span> -They could bear but one meaning, and that was that -poor Gus was in danger of being devoured.</p> - -<p>“What can we do?” he asked, appealing to Mr. -Whyland.</p> - -<p>“Not much. They are getting the boat out as -fast as they can. Your friend was very foolish to -tie that line fast to his wrist.”</p> - -<p>“See! see! the shark is making for him!” cried -Oliver in a strained voice. “What can we do? -Oh, Mr. Whyland!”</p> - -<p>“We can do nothing. Heaven grant they reach -the poor boy in time. But—but—I fear not!” -And the gentleman turned away to hide his emotion.</p> - -<p>Oliver glanced around. It was terrible to be so -helpless. He and Gus were the closest of friends. -He could never let his chum perish without trying -to save him. He ought to do something—he would -do something!</p> - -<p>He looked along the deck, and his gaze fell upon -a short but stout knife that the sailors had used in -cutting away some of the half-burned bales of cloth. -He picked up the knife, and taking it between his -teeth, stripped off his coat.</p> - -<p>“What are you going to do?” asked Mr. Whyland, -hurrying towards him.</p> - -<p>“See if I cannot help him,” was Oliver’s determined -reply.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_129"></a>[129]</span></p> - -<p>“But the peril—”</p> - -<p>“I would never forgive myself if Gus perished -and I did not do a thing to save him.”</p> - -<p>And <a href="#i_frontis">before the other could interfere, Oliver was -on the rail and over the side</a>.</p> - -<p>“The bravery of one boy in a thousand,” murmured -Mr. Whyland to himself. “I would give half -I possess to have such a son!”</p> - -<p>Oliver had made a careful calculation before he -left the rail, and when he rose to the surface of -the water he was not over two yards away from -Gus. He struck out at once, and in an instant -was beside his friend.</p> - -<p>“Oliver! Save me!”</p> - -<p>“Is the rope fast to your wrist?”</p> - -<p>“Yes.”</p> - -<p>“Let me cut it.”</p> - -<p>Gus held up his arm, and the next moment the -cord was severed.</p> - -<p>“Now strike out for the steamer,” said Oliver. -“The shark is after you!”</p> - -<p>And side by side they struck out.</p> - -<p>But the shark was already close at hand. Try -their best, they could not get away from him. Gus -gave a piercing shriek.</p> - -<p>“He is after my foot!”</p> - -<p>“Dive!” called out Oliver; and he set the example.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_130"></a>[130]</span></p> - -<p>Gus followed. When they rose again, the shark was -but a few feet away. They could see him getting -ready to turn over, preparatory to opening his jaws -for a snap at either one or the other.</p> - -<p>The monster turned toward Gus. The stout youth -gave another cry of terror.</p> - -<p>“Help! Help!”</p> - -<p>Then Oliver thought of the knife still in his hand. -Grasping the handle of the weapon firmly, he swam up, -and buried the blade deeply in the shark’s head.</p> - -<p>There was a wild slashing of the monster’s tail, and -the water was dyed crimson. A moment later the boat -appeared, and Gus was hauled in.</p> - -<p>Then the shark turned his attention to Oliver. But -the boy struck out firmly with the knife, once, twice, -three times; and then the shark turned over and floated -off—dead.</p> - -<p>“The bravest deed I ever saw!” cried Mr. Willett, -as they helped Oliver into the boat. “After this -don’t dare to tell me the age of heroes is gone by.”</p> - -<p>“Can we get that shark?” panted Oliver. “I—I -would like to keep some part of the fellow as a remembrance -of this event.”</p> - -<p>“We’ll haul him on board,” said Mr. Willett. And -later on this was done.</p> - -<p>When they turned their attention to Gus they found -that he had fainted. It took fully a quarter of an<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_131"></a>[131]</span> -hour’s work to restore him to consciousness, and even -then he was so weak from the terror of what had occurred -that he had to lie down for the remainder of the -day.</p> - -<p>Now that it was all over, Oliver, too, felt rather shaky -in the legs. However, he watched the men get the -shark aboard, and then spent some time in examining -the monster.</p> - -<p>“As large a shovel-nose as I have ever seen,” said -Captain Morris. “It’s a wonder that he didn’t make -mince-meat of both of you.”</p> - -<p>The boy selected some of the teeth, and after they -were broken out of the jaw-bone, the carcass was sent -to the galley to be tried out.</p> - -<p>“I guess we won’t want to go shark fishing after -this,” said Mr. Whyland.</p> - -<p>“No,” rejoined Oliver with a shiver; “I don’t -even want to see another of the ugly things!”</p> - -<p>“They are awfully dangerous creatures,” went on -Mr. Whyland. “Many a one-legged sailor has had the -missing limb taken off by just such a fellow as this.”</p> - -<p>“And many a sailor has had his head taken off -instead of his leg,” put in Captain Morris. “I -wouldn’t do what you did for a thousand dollars!”</p> - -<p>“Neither would I again,” replied Oliver; “but I -think too much of Gus to let him become food for -sharks.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_132"></a>[132]</span></p> - -<p>After this they separated, and Oliver went down -to the stateroom. No sooner did he enter than Gus -threw his arms about his chum’s neck.</p> - -<p>“Oh, Olly! how can I thank you?” he cried. -“You saved my life!” And the tears streamed down -his cheeks.</p> - -<p>“Don’t try to do it, Gus. I know you would -have done as much for me if it was necessary.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t know. You are awfully brave. I’ll never -forget it as long as I live!”</p> - -<p>“I guess you’ve had enough adventures on this -trip,” said Oliver. He found his own eyes growing -moist, and he thought best to turn the matter into a -laugh.</p> - -<p>“Yes, indeed! I sha’n’t attempt another thing -while I am on board.”</p> - -<p>On the following day the steamer sighted Mazatlan. -The course of the Polly Eliza was now directly -across the bay of Lower California.</p> - -<p>“We shall soon be in sight of Cape St. Lucas,” -said Captain Morris; “and unless something happens -we’ll soon reach the Golden Gate.”</p> - -<p>Fortunately the weather remained fine, and the little -party was thus enabled to spend the days on deck. -Much about the little coast steamer pleased the boys, -and Captain Morris and the others made every effort -to have the time pass pleasantly.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_133"></a>[133]</span></p> - -<p>“It won’t be long afore we part,” he said to Oliver. -“I trust we may meet again some day; but if we -don’t you can make up your mind that I’ll never -forget what you did towards saving the Polly Eliza -from destruction.”</p> - -<p>“Will you remain long in San Francisco?” asked -Oliver.</p> - -<p>“Only long enough to get my cargo. But if I can -be of service to you I’ll stay a week,” added the captain -quickly.</p> - -<p>“I only wanted to know where the mining boards -and stock companies are located.”</p> - -<p>“Most of them are on Montgomery and Pine Streets. -You’ll find them in the directory.”</p> - -<p>“Then that’s all I want to know for the present.”</p> - -<p>The time seemed to drag now, so impatient were the -boys to set foot on shore. Mr. Whyland could not -help but smile at both of them, though he himself was -also very eager to have the voyage over.</p> - -<p>But all journeys must come to an end, and one fine -morning the Polly Eliza dropped anchor just outside -of one of the many wharves.</p> - -<p>Then the boat took them and Mr. Whyland ashore. -They were not long in scrambling up the dock.</p> - -<p>“San Francisco at last!” cried Oliver.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_134"></a>[134]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XX">CHAPTER XX.<br /> -<small>A FLYING GLANCE.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>“Yes, San Francisco at last,” repeated Gus and Mr. -Whyland; and the latter added, “Now, the question is, -what is it best to do first?”</p> - -<p>“I guess we’ll find out quick enough,” said Oliver. -“Let us take a look about the city and see if we can -find out if Colonel Mendix has arrived.”</p> - -<p>“Of course he has arrived; that is, unless he stopped -on the way.”</p> - -<p>“That is just what I mean. He may have stopped -in Chicago or St. Louis for that machinery he wished -to purchase.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t think it would be a bad plan to look over -the registers at the various hotels.”</p> - -<p>“That’s a good idea,” replied Oliver. “We can do -that this morning.”</p> - -<p>“I know what I am going to do,” said Gus. “I’m -going to the post-office and see if my father has -written to me.”</p> - -<p>“Let’s all go,” burst out Oliver. “I am as anxious -to hear from home as any one.”</p> - -<p>“And so am I,” laughed Mr. Whyland.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_135"></a>[135]</span></p> - -<p>They had landed near the foot of Brannan Street, -and now walked up to Kearney Street. A policeman -directed them to the post-office, and it did not -take the party long to reach the place.</p> - -<p>There were letters for all three. How eagerly -Oliver cut open the envelope and read that which -had been penned by his father! This was what he -wrote:—</p> - -<div class="blockquot"> - -<p>“I trust that when you receive this you will have had a -safe journey. I suppose you found the trip a tedious one, not -because it is devoid of interest, but because you were undoubtedly -anxious to reach its end and begin the active part -of your quest.</p> - -<p>“I received your letter containing the particulars of what -occurred in New York. I believe you are able to go ahead -without my advice, and all I have to say is, be careful; for -I am now sure that Colonel Mendix is a thoroughly bad man, -and may get desperate if brought to bay.</p> - -<p>“I inclose you an express money-order for one hundred -dollars. Use it as you think best. I know you will not do -so recklessly.</p> - -<p>“I suppose that Gregory boy is with you. If he is, see -that he does not get into trouble. His parents are much -worried about him.</p> - -<p>“I am getting well rapidly, and expect to be about before -long. In the meanwhile I trust you will keep me posted on -what you are doing, as I am getting more anxious every day. -Write as soon as you receive this.”</p> -</div> - -<p>Such was the gist of the affectionate father’s epistle. -But there was much besides,—kind, loving<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_136"></a>[136]</span> -words that need not be repeated here, but which, -nevertheless, went straight to Oliver’s heart.</p> - -<p>“I’ll write him a letter at once,” he thought; -and buying stamps and paper, did so, stating that a -long letter would follow almost immediately.</p> - -<p>Gus Gregory’s face lengthened considerably when -he read the letter his father had written to him. It -was kind, but firm, and told how much all at home -had suffered on account of his unexpected departure. -When Gus read how his mother had wept over his -foolish act, his own eyes grew dim, and he half wished -himself back at Rockvale.</p> - -<p>But the latter end of the letter was more cheerful. -Mr. Gregory had intended, during the summer following, -to let his son take a trip to Europe before settling -down to college work. Now, instead, he wrote -that Gus might spend the present time in California, -and give up the trip across the ocean.</p> - -<p>He also inclosed a money-order for fifty dollars, -and said that more might follow when he heard what -his son was doing. He also hoped that Gus was with -Oliver and that they would stay together, for he knew -that Oliver was a manly fellow and one to be trusted.</p> - -<p>Oliver blushed when Gus showed him this part of -the letter.</p> - -<p>“Oh, nonsense,” he exclaimed; “you are big -enough to take care of yourself.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_137"></a>[137]</span></p> - -<p>“No, I am not, as that adventure with the shark -proves,” replied the stout youth. “Just wait till I -write to them about that.”</p> - -<p>“I suppose you will make it as sensational as you -can, and put me in as a regular dime-novel hero,” -laughed Oliver; and he blushed more than ever.</p> - -<p>Mr. Whyland’s letter was from his business partners, -and told him that everything in the East was -running smoothly. This news brought great relief -to him, and he said that now he would be able to -bend all his energies to hunting down Colonel Mendix -and the Aurora mine swindle.</p> - -<p>“I think we had better attend to our money-orders -first,” suggested Oliver.</p> - -<p>This was agreed to, and they started out at once. -Being strangers, they had some difficulty in getting -the orders cashed; but finally this was accomplished, -and the two boys emerged upon the streets richer -than before.</p> - -<p>“Now that father has written that I can stay in -California for a while, I intend to unite my fortunes -with you,” said Gus; “that is, if you will allow -me to do so.”</p> - -<p>“I am perfectly willing, if you wish it,” replied -Oliver; “but I do not know about Mr. Whyland.”</p> - -<p>“I shall be pleased to have Mr. Gregory along if -he wishes to come,” said that gentleman. “But you<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_138"></a>[138]</span> -must remember we may have some pretty rough experiences -before we accomplish what we have set out -to do,” he added seriously.</p> - -<p>“I am willing to put up with whatever comes, sir.”</p> - -<p>“The West is not the East in more ways than -one,” continued Mr. Whyland. “Many things are -mighty rough here, especially when you get up in -the mountains.”</p> - -<p>From the express-office they started for the nearest -hotel, where they looked carefully over the register; -but looked in vain.</p> - -<p>“Failure number one,” said Oliver. “I suppose -we may have a number of them before we are lucky -enough to strike the right house.”</p> - -<p>“It would be funny if we ran across this Mendix -the first thing,” said Gus. “My, wouldn’t he be -surprised!”</p> - -<p>“He doesn’t know me, I believe,” said Oliver.</p> - -<p>“And that is where you have an advantage,” put -in Mr. Whyland. “Perhaps you can get into his -good graces, and learn much before you make yourself -known.”</p> - -<p>“That is certainly an idea,” returned Oliver.</p> - -<p>From the first hotel they went to a number of -others, but nowhere could a trace of the colonel be -found.</p> - -<p>“I have half an idea he uses a false name while<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_139"></a>[139]</span> -here,” suggested Oliver. “A man like him would -not hesitate at anything.”</p> - -<p>“It may be so. If it is, there is no use in searching -further. Suppose we go around to some of the -mining stock brokers or to the exchange? We may -find out about him there. We will certainly discover -something of the Aurora mine.”</p> - -<p>This was agreed to, and the remainder of the forenoon -was spent down in Pine and Montgomery Streets. -They entered a great number of offices, but no one -had heard of the Aurora mine, nor did any one know -such a person as Colonel Mendix.</p> - -<p>“This completely baffles me,” said Mr. Whyland -at last. “I was sure the mine would be known -here. How can he work it if it is not known? -Such a place must give employment to scores of -men. It is a great mystery.”</p> - -<p>“We <em>must</em> find out about it,” replied Oliver with -determination. “I sha’n’t give up in this fashion. If -I can’t find him by his name I’ll see if there isn’t -some one who knows him from his appearance.”</p> - -<p>“Good! I like such grit!” cried Mr. Whyland. -“If your determination has anything to do with it -we shall certainly win.”</p> - -<p>They were out on the street once more. Oliver -had the address of a large hotel on Market Street, -and this place he said he would visit and examine -the register.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_140"></a>[140]</span></p> - -<p>“It won’t take a great deal of time,” he said -“and I don’t want a single chance to slip of bringing -him to justice.”</p> - -<p>“That’s right,” put in Gus. “Do the work thoroughly -while you are about it.”</p> - -<p>Suddenly Mr. Whyland gave a cry and pointed -to a cable-car that was just then passing.</p> - -<p>“See, it is Mendix himself!” he exclaimed, indicating -a man on the rear platform.</p> - -<p>Oliver looked, and saw that he was right.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_141"></a>[141]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XXI">CHAPTER XXI.<br /> -<small>AN UNSUCCESSFUL PURSUIT.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>Oliver Bright, as may be imagined, was astonished -when Mr. Whyland discovered the very man -they were looking for, standing calmly on the rear -end of a passing cable-car.</p> - -<p>For an instant he doubted the evidence of his own -eyesight, but a second look told him that in truth -it was the colonel.</p> - -<p>For a moment he stood still. Then he started -forward to stop the car.</p> - -<p>But those in charge did not see him and the cable-car -went bounding on its way with Oliver after it.</p> - -<p>Mr. Whyland and Gus started to run also, but soon -gave up the chase.</p> - -<p>“I am getting too old for that sort of thing,” gasped -the former, as he leaned against a building, all out -of breath.</p> - -<p>“And I get winded too easily,” groaned the stout -youth. “Oliver must catch the fellow alone.”</p> - -<p>“I hope he will succeed. We may not get another -such chance.” And then they both started on -a walk in the direction in which the car had gone.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_142"></a>[142]</span></p> - -<p>Meanwhile the car kept moving at a rapid rate, -with the boy nearly a block behind it. Sometimes -Oliver would get nearer, but then he would lose -time at some crossing and the distance would be -increased.</p> - -<p>Finally, at the end of eight or ten blocks, he -managed to come up to the car, and as it stopped, -he sprang on board.</p> - -<p>He gave a hasty look around. Colonel Mendix -had disappeared.</p> - -<p>Oliver was deeply chagrined. Was it possible that -he had made a mistake in the car?</p> - -<p>“It looks like the same car,” he thought; “but then -they all look alike.”</p> - -<p>Presently the conductor came to him, and Oliver -asked him if a Spanish gentleman had been aboard.</p> - -<p>“What kind of a looking man?”</p> - -<p>Oliver described Colonel Mendix as best he could.</p> - -<p>“Yes, he was on; got off two or three blocks -back; maybe four,” was the conductor’s reply.</p> - -<p>“Thank you,” replied Oliver; and he hopped off -the car and started to retrace his steps.</p> - -<p>“Too bad he couldn’t have remained on the car -a minute longer,” he muttered to himself. “I suppose -he has disappeared into some building or down -some side street by this time. I’ll go back and -take a look around.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_143"></a>[143]</span></p> - -<p>He had proceeded about three blocks when he -came face to face with the others.</p> - -<p>“What luck?” cried Mr. Whyland.</p> - -<p>Oliver told him.</p> - -<p>“Too bad, after such a splendid chance.”</p> - -<p>“I’d keep a sharp lookout for him along here,” -put in Gus; “he can’t be far off.”</p> - -<p>“I have a plan,” returned Oliver. “Let us separate, -and each watch several squares. By doing that -we can cover nearly all the ground necessary.”</p> - -<p>“A good idea,” cried Mr. Whyland. “We will -carry it out at once.”</p> - -<p>“And where shall we meet again?” asked Gus.</p> - -<p>“In front of this large building,” said Oliver, “at -one o’clock.”</p> - -<p>They immediately separated, and each proceeded -to watch in his own way. Oliver peered into every -store and office, and down every street, but without -success. At the end of the time appointed he went -back to the designated meeting-place.</p> - -<p>Mr. Whyland was already there.</p> - -<p>Neither had had any luck.</p> - -<p>In five minutes Gus arrived.</p> - -<p>“I thought I saw him,” he said. “I tried to follow, -but at the end of the block I found I was -mistaken.”</p> - -<p>“So we are now no further ahead than we ever -were,” remarked Oliver, somewhat bitterly.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_144"></a>[144]</span></p> - -<p>“Never mind; we won’t despair,” replied Mr. -Whyland. “Remember, we have not been a whole -day at the hunt.”</p> - -<p>“I’m not despairing; but the sooner we find this -man the better.”</p> - -<p>All three were now, not only tired out, but tremendously -hungry. Mr. Whyland led the way to a -neighboring restaurant, and here they indulged in -a substantial dinner.</p> - -<p>“Now, what next?” asked Gus.</p> - -<p>“I’m going around to that hotel, and then the -mining board again,” said Oliver. “I shall look -for him by appearance, not by name now.”</p> - -<p>In this quest Oliver decided to go alone. If the -three were together they might excite suspicion.</p> - -<p>“Then I’ll go back to the hotel where we left -our baggage,” said Mr. Whyland.</p> - -<p>“And I’ll go and send a telegram to my father,” -put in Gus. “I suppose he’ll be awfully anxious -about me until he hears that I am safe.”</p> - -<p>This was agreed to, and in a moment more Oliver -was on his way to Montgomery Street.</p> - -<p>“You say the man you are looking for is a tall, -dark Spaniard?” inquired one of the gentleman to -whom he applied.</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir. I thought his name was Mendix.” And -Oliver described the colonel as fully as was possible.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_145"></a>[145]</span></p> - -<p>“I think you mean Colonel Guerotaz,” said the -man in charge of the office. “He is interested in -several mining schemes, I believe, all up the Mokelumne -River.”</p> - -<p>“And where can I find this Colonel Guerotaz?” -asked the boy with deep interest.</p> - -<p>“I do not know. He was in here several times -during the earlier part of the week. I believe he -is getting ready to go up the country just as soon -as he can get some machinery shipped.”</p> - -<p>This last statement made Oliver feel certain that -the two colonels were the same person. Colonel -Mendix had asked Ezra Dodge where he could purchase -the machinery he wanted, and that person had -informed him he could get it in San Francisco.</p> - -<p>“And you do not know anything of the Aurora -mine?” went on Oliver.</p> - -<p>“I do not. There was an Aurora mine somewhere -up the Sacramento River, and another elsewhere; but -both of them were abandoned years ago.”</p> - -<p>Oliver’s heart sank for a moment.</p> - -<p>“You do not know where the Aurora mine was -situated?” he faltered.</p> - -<p>“I don’t remember exactly. But I am quite sure -it was not up the Mokelumne.”</p> - -<p>“Then neither of them can be the one I am looking -for,” returned the boy, with something of a sigh -of relief.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_146"></a>[146]</span></p> - -<p>“Are you interested in the mine?” asked the -man kindly.</p> - -<p>“My father is. Do you know the names of the -mines that this Colonel Guerotaz is interested in?”</p> - -<p>“The Excelsior is the principal one, I believe. -Then there is the Cortez; but I do not know much -about that, nor does any one else.”</p> - -<p>“And they are both up the Mokelumne River?”</p> - -<p>“Yes; you’ll find them on the mining-map.”</p> - -<p>“Thank you, sir.”</p> - -<p>Oliver quitted the office in deep thought. Of -one thing he was certain,—Colonel Mendix and -Colonel Guerotaz were one and the same person. -Now, could it be possible that the Cortez and the -Aurora were one and the same mine?</p> - -<p>“It seems to me,” he thought, “about the only -way he could commit such a piece of villainy would -be to change the name of the mine. If he didn’t -do that any one could easily visit the place and -find out its value. I begin to understand how poor, -trusting father was duped.”</p> - -<p>While Oliver had been in the office on Montgomery -Street he had not noticed a tall, lank fellow -lounging about the door. This man had been -deeply interested in the boy’s inquiries, and when -Oliver left the place the man was not slow to follow.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_147"></a>[147]</span></p> - -<p>At the corner he stepped up and tapped Oliver on -the shoulder.</p> - -<p>“Excuse me,” he said in a low voice; “but I -would like to have a few words with you on the -quiet.”</p> - -<p>Oliver surveyed the man from head to foot.</p> - -<p>“What is it you want?” he asked rather shortly, -for he had never seen the fellow before.</p> - -<p>“Didn’t I hear you say something about the Aurora -mine?” asked the man.</p> - -<p>“You did,” replied Oliver with sudden interest. -“What of it?”</p> - -<p>“I know all about that mine,” was the slow reply.</p> - -<p>“You do?” cried the boy. “Who are you?”</p> - -<p>“My name is Felix Cottle. I used to be a mining -boss. I worked for Colonel Guerotaz for two -years. Then we had a terrible row, and he kicked -me out; but I know a good many of his secrets.”</p> - -<p>“Then, perhaps you are just the man I want to -see,” replied Oliver.</p> - -<p>“And you are just the party I want to meet,” -said Felix Cottle. “By your manner, I take it you -have it in for this Spaniard, and I would do ’most -anything to get square with him. What do you -want to know, and what is it worth to you?”</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_148"></a>[148]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XXII">CHAPTER XXII.<br /> -<small>FELIX COTTLE.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>Oliver looked the stranger over well before replying. -Perhaps this chap might be a tool of Colonel -Mendix, in which case the less he had to do -with the fellow the better.</p> - -<p>“And you worked for Colonel Men—Guerotaz -two years?” he asked slowly.</p> - -<p>“Yes.”</p> - -<p>“At what mine?”</p> - -<p>The man closed one eye and winked knowingly.</p> - -<p>“At the very mine you are looking for,” he replied.</p> - -<p>“The Aurora?”</p> - -<p>“That’s it, partner.”</p> - -<p>“Then you know its exact location?”</p> - -<p>“Of course.”</p> - -<p>“What is the mine called?”</p> - -<p>The man hesitated and rubbed his chin.</p> - -<p>“I’ll tell you what it is, stranger,” he replied slowly; -“since I came from the mines I’ve had mighty tough -luck in ’Frisco, and I’m rather hard up. Make it -worth a little to me, and I’ll give you all the information -you wish.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_149"></a>[149]</span></p> - -<p>“You mean you wish pay for telling what you -know of the place?”</p> - -<p>“Well, not that exactly, only a little something -to help me along. I’ve been out of a job for over -two months.”</p> - -<p>Oliver thought for a moment.</p> - -<p>“Suppose you come along with me,” he said. “I -have a friend staying at a hotel close by. He must -hear what you have to say as well as I. I will pay -you for your trouble.”</p> - -<p>“This is a square deal?”</p> - -<p>“Yes. If you have any real information I will -pay whatever it is worth.”</p> - -<p>“All right, I’ll go.”</p> - -<p>Oliver at once led the way to the hotel at which -they had left their traps. He found Mr. Whyland -in the reading-room, looking over a copy of the -<cite>Call</cite>.</p> - -<p>He quickly acquainted the gentleman with what had -taken place. Mr. Whyland was deeply interested.</p> - -<p>“I guess you are right about the two colonels -being the same person,” he said. “Let us interview -this stranger at once. I am willing to pay him -if he really knows anything of value.”</p> - -<p>Accordingly, Felix Cottle was at once brought in. -He wore a rough suit and big boots, and looked quite -out of place in the well-furnished apartment.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_150"></a>[150]</span></p> - -<p>“I am more at home in the mountains than here,” -he remarked, as he took a chair beside them. “I -was brought up on the streets of Little Rock when -a boy; but I would rather travel a lonely trail any -day than walk the pavements of a city.”</p> - -<p>“You know the mining district well, I suppose?” -said Mr. Whyland.</p> - -<p>“There ain’t much of it that I don’t know,” replied -Cottle. “Before I started to work for Guerotaz -I spent twelve years and ten thousand dollars prospecting, -here, there, and everywhere.”</p> - -<p>“Did you have any luck?” asked Oliver.</p> - -<p>He was interested in the man, and besides wanted -a chance to study the stranger.</p> - -<p>“I had some luck the first years,—located the Alice -and sold her for fifteen thousand dollars,—but towards -the last I lost every dollar I had, and then I went to -work for the colonel.”</p> - -<p>“And you know all about his affairs?” asked Mr. -Whyland.</p> - -<p>The man ran his hand through his matted hair.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know you, and I don’t want to get into -any trouble,” he said. “I told the young man I knew -some things he wanted to know.”</p> - -<p>“Well, you will get into no trouble with us, I can -assure you,” replied Mr. Whyland. “If you know -the location of the Aurora mine and will tell us, I -will pay you well.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_151"></a>[151]</span></p> - -<p>“I can take you straight to the Aurora inside of -a week,” replied Cottle in a low voice.</p> - -<p>“Is it a valuable mine?”</p> - -<p>“It was some time ago.”</p> - -<p>“Then that is the mine you worked in?” said -Oliver.</p> - -<p>The man bit his lip.</p> - -<p>“I didn’t say so,” he said.</p> - -<p>“But you meant it,” put in Mr. Whyland. “Are -not the Cortez and the Aurora one and the same -mine?”</p> - -<p>Felix Cottle started.</p> - -<p>“You want to know everything without paying a -cent!” he cried. “I guess I had better get out.”</p> - -<p>“No, don’t go,” exclaimed Mr. Whyland, catching -him by the arm. “I will pay you well. We want to -get to the Aurora mine. You say you know the -road—”</p> - -<p>“Yes; I’ll take you there as straight as straight can -be. There ain’t a better guide in the town of ’Frisco, -if I do say it myself.”</p> - -<p>“I suppose we’ll need a guide—” began Oliver.</p> - -<p>“If you don’t think so, just start out without one,” -laughed Felix Cottle in his peculiar voice. “I’ll bet -you couldn’t find the mine even if you had full directions.”</p> - -<p>“Why?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_152"></a>[152]</span></p> - -<p>“Because of its peculiar situation. Many a man -has been fooled on it.”</p> - -<p>“And you say you can take us there in a week?” -asked Mr. Whyland.</p> - -<p>“I can, on horseback or muleback.”</p> - -<p>“And prove to us beyond a doubt that it is really -the Aurora?”</p> - -<p>“Yes; and that it is run by Colonel Men—”</p> - -<p>Cottle stopped short. Oliver took him up.</p> - -<p>“Colonel Mendix.” He finished.</p> - -<p>“Yes; if you must know. But, gents, I expect -you to do the square thing to a fellow that is down -on his luck.”</p> - -<p>“We will do the square thing,” said Mr. Whyland. -“Take us to the Aurora mine and I will pay all expenses -and give you one hundred dollars for your -trouble.”</p> - -<p>“Is that square?” asked Cottle, leaning forward.</p> - -<p>“It is. If you want any references as to my reliability—”</p> - -<p>“Don’t want them, partner; the look on your face -is enough. I’ll take you up. A week from the day -you leave ’Frisco you shall stand in the Aurora mine. -I may be a little queer, but you can depend on Felix -Cottle every time.”</p> - -<p>Oliver had to like the man in spite of his odd -manner. Mr. Whyland was also impressed favorably.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_153"></a>[153]</span></p> - -<p>After this a long conversation ensued. Cottle said -that the Cortez mine was nothing but a “fake” mine, -leading underground to the real mine of value, which -was the Aurora. For several years Colonel Mendix -had reported the latter mine abandoned, which was -not the case.</p> - -<p>“And the Aurora is really valuable?” asked -Oliver.</p> - -<p>He spoke calmly enough, but oh, what excitement -was in his breast! How much was at stake for his -father and himself!</p> - -<p>“I think it is,” said Cottle. “Of course the Cortez -is worth something, but the best paying rock and dirt -come from the Aurora.”</p> - -<p>It was decided to leave San Francisco that very -evening. They were to go direct to Sacramento City, -and from there fit themselves out for a five days’ -journey over and around the mountains.</p> - -<p>When Gus came in, he was surprised to see the -stranger. He was at once introduced, and was soon -on good terms with the newly hired guide.</p> - -<p>Cottle remained with them for the balance of the -afternoon. When questioned as to Colonel Mendix, -he said he thought the colonel would soon be on the -way to the mines.</p> - -<p>“And we will be directly behind,” he added. -“Perhaps we may even catch up to him.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_154"></a>[154]</span></p> - -<p>“I do not wish to do that,” said Oliver. “It is -time enough to meet him when we are at the mine.”</p> - -<p>The party of three spent the night at the hotel. -Oliver had a long talk with Mr. Whyland, promising -to share whatever expense was incurred. The gentleman -agreed to do this, but said the hundred dollars -that had been promised to Cottle must come from -his own purse.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_155"></a>[155]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XXIII">CHAPTER XXIII.<br /> -<small>OFF FOR THE MINES.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>“What grand scenery this is!”</p> - -<p>It was Oliver who uttered the exclamation. He -rode beside Mr. Whyland, while Gus Gregory was -directly behind. Cottle, the guide, was but a short -distance ahead.</p> - -<p>For six hours the little party had been journeying -directly for the mountains far back of Sacramento City. -The road for the present was a well-defined one, but -Cottle said that before sundown it would become little -better than a wagon-track.</p> - -<p>“It will be as nice a road as any one wants to -travel in a few years, I take it,” he added; “but I -remember the time when there wasn’t even a respectable -wagon-track. Times change rapidly out here.”</p> - -<p>“One would hardly think that a handful of years -ago this was little more than a wilderness,” said Mr. -Whyland; “yet such is a fact. The earlier gold-hunters -were indeed pioneers.”</p> - -<p>“I wish I had been one of them,” put in Gus. -“What excitement it must have been, expecting -that every day would bring fortune!”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_156"></a>[156]</span></p> - -<p>“It was exciting; but many a man would have -done better to have remained at home.”</p> - -<p>“You’re right there,” said Cottle. “I knew men -that got reckless in the fever and never amounted -to shucks after they came away. I’ve had my fill -of it; and if I had my life to lead over again I -think I would steer clear of prospecting.”</p> - -<p>The three were now on good terms with the guide. -They found him a rather peculiar individual, but -thoroughly honest and obliging. He spent most of -the day in describing the country through which -they were passing, and Oliver never tired of listening -to his words.</p> - -<p>Yet the boy’s mind was busy with other things. -In what condition would they find the Aurora mine? -and what would Colonel Mendix say when they -appeared so unexpectedly upon the scene?</p> - -<p>He could well imagine the Spaniard’s surprise. -No doubt the man would do all in his power to -ward off their advances. He might even deny all -their rights to the mine. A man who had acted -as the colonel had would not hesitate at anything.</p> - -<p>Towards sundown they made camp in a little grove -of trees to one side of the road. To Oliver and -Gus the proceedings were novel, for in all their -lives they had never passed a night in the open.</p> - -<p>The mules were tethered a short distance away,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_157"></a>[157]</span> -a fire was started, a pot of water was set boiling -for the purpose of making coffee, and from out of -the various packs the boys and Mr. Whyland took -such articles as they wished for the evening meal.</p> - -<p>“To-morrow we will be getting more into a game -country,” said Cottle, as they sat down to eat, -“and then maybe I’ll show you one or two good -things to shoot. Can any of you handle a rifle?”</p> - -<p>“I can shoot some,” replied Gus.</p> - -<p>“I have often gone gunning in the woods back -of Rockvale,” replied Oliver; “but I never tried my -hand at any big game.”</p> - -<p>“We had better leave the big game alone,” laughed -Cottle. “As I understand it we are not on a hunting -tour, and it would take too much time.”</p> - -<p>“You are right,” said Mr. Whyland with a smile; -“we are after game of a different sort.”</p> - -<p>There was a general laugh, and then Gus observed,—</p> - -<p>“But I would like to have a shy at a bear or -something.”</p> - -<p>“Better leave bears alone,” put in Cottle with -a shudder. “I went after one once and it nearly -cost me my life.”</p> - -<p>By the time the meal was finished the sun had -set, and then it grew dark rapidly; while the dew -became so heavy that Oliver wrapped a blanket about<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_158"></a>[158]</span> -him to keep out the cold, and they all gathered -together under a big tree.</p> - -<p>Cottle arranged a temporary tent by throwing a -double blanket over one of the lower boughs of -the tree. He said this would be ample shelter so -long as it did not rain. Then some dry boughs -were strewn upon the ground, and he invited all -hands to turn in as soon as it pleased them to do so.</p> - -<p>It may well be imagined that Oliver slept but -little that night. The novelty of the situation, as -well as the strange sounds around him, kept him -awake until far into the small hours of the morning. -He was the first up, and by the time Cottle -and the others had their eyes open, he had the fire -started and the water in place.</p> - -<p>“I’m as stiff as a starched collar,” groaned Gus as -he arose; “if it’s all the same, I’ll sleep in a bed -to-night.”</p> - -<p>“You won’t see a bed for several weeks I’m -afraid,” laughed Mr. Whyland; “that is, unless -you want to turn back.”</p> - -<p>“Turn back? Not much! I think this is a jolly -good lark!” And that was the end of Gus’s -grumbling.</p> - -<p>They were soon on their way. As Cottle had -said, the road now became little more than a wagon-track, -crossed and recrossed in many places.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_159"></a>[159]</span></p> - -<p>“It is lucky Cottle is along,” said Mr. Whyland -to Oliver, as they dropped a bit behind. “We could -never find the right track by ourselves. To me half -a dozen appear to be the right ones.”</p> - -<p>“That is so,” returned the boy. “It isn’t like a -city with a signboard at every corner. One could -get completely lost without half trying.”</p> - -<p>“We must keep close together. I will warn your -friend too. Should one or the other stray away, much -time might be lost in coming together again.”</p> - -<p>The path was now up the side of quite a steep -mountain. It was full of huge bowlders from around -which the rain had long since washed all the sand -and gravel. To one side grew small trees and thick -bushes, while on the other was a steep incline, leading -far below to a raging mountain torrent.</p> - -<p>“Rather a dangerous place,” observed the boy as -he gazed down into the rushing waters; “if this -mule should take a false step”—</p> - -<p>“But they never do, as far as I ever heard,” said -Mr. Whyland. “They know the danger quite as -well as the rider.”</p> - -<p>Instead of getting better the road grew worse, until -Cottle stopped and allowed those in the rear to -catch up.</p> - -<p>“This path has been partly washed away since I -was over it before,” he said. “You want to be careful.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_160"></a>[160]</span> -If it gets much worse, we will have to turn -back and take another road that is better, but nearly -twice as long.”</p> - -<p>“We will follow you,” said Mr. Whyland. “We -trust ourselves entirely in your hands.”</p> - -<p>After this they kept close together. The mules -no longer stepped forward with ease. Each head was -down, and every foothold was tested before the step -was taken.</p> - -<p>Narrower and narrower grew the path until it was -scarcely two feet wide. Here the decline on the one -side became little better than a precipice.</p> - -<p>At last Cottle came to a halt.</p> - -<p>“It is no use,” said he; “we will have to take -the other path around this mountain. Last week’s -storm has ruined this road for good. Can you turn -around or back to that small turnout?” he asked of -Oliver, who was in the rear.</p> - -<p>“I’ll try,” replied the boy. “I guess I had better -get off and lead Dobbins.”</p> - -<p>“Be careful,” Mr. Whyland warned him.</p> - -<p>“Yes, be careful,” said Cottle; “that mule ain’t -the kindest critter in the world.”</p> - -<p>Throwing the reins on the animal’s neck, Oliver -essayed to slide to the ground. As he did so, Dobbins -shied nervously to one side.</p> - -<p>“Look out there!” yelled Cottle. “Catch him -quick!”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_161"></a>[161]</span></p> - -<p>“Yes, yes! Catch him!” echoed Mr. Whyland, -while Gus sat still, too terrorized to speak.</p> - -<p>Oliver tried to catch the beast as bidden, but again -Dobbins shied.</p> - -<p>The movement threw the boy to the very edge of -the path. He tried to save himself, but it was useless; -and <a href="#i_fp160">the next instant his body disappeared over -the edge</a>!</p> - -<div class="figcenter" id="i_fp160"> - <img src="images/i_fp160.jpg" alt="" title="" /> - <div class="caption"> - <p class="noic"><span class="smcap"><a href="#Page_161">The next instant his body disappeared -over the edge!</a></span></p> - </div> -</div> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_162"></a>[162]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XXIV">CHAPTER XXIV.<br /> -<small>IN THE MOUNTAINS.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>Without an instant’s warning, Oliver Bright found -himself in a situation that thrilled him with horror. -As he went over the edge of the narrow path he did -his best to save himself, but, as has been told, it was -useless; the grass he clutched came out by the roots, -and then he found himself going down and down, -he knew not where.</p> - -<p>He turned over and over as he rolled, and uttered -several wild cries—cries that fairly pierced the heart -of Gus, Mr. Whyland, and Cottle the guide, who -could do nothing to save him.</p> - -<p>The descent was fully sixty or seventy feet. Just -before reaching the whirling torrent below, Oliver’s -body struck a projecting rock, and this encounter, -rude as it was, undoubtedly saved his life.</p> - -<p>This can be easily seen, when it is told that to -have fallen into the river would have been instant -death. The current would have dashed him directly -on the rocks, and that would have ended all.</p> - -<p>But when Oliver’s body struck the rock that projected -from the decline, the blow caused it to bound<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_163"></a>[163]</span> -several feet out of its course, and in doing this he -was hurled directly into the branches of a short and -stout fir-tree.</p> - -<p>By this time consciousness had forsaken him, and -his body hung among the branches, a limp, inanimate -mass.</p> - -<p>“My heavens! the boy will be killed!” cried Mr. -Whyland, who was the first to recover from the awfulness -of the situation.</p> - -<p>“It’s a bad tumble,” replied Cottle, shaking his -head.</p> - -<p>As for Gus he could not say a word. Suppose -Oliver was killed? The very thought sent shiver -after shiver through his frame.</p> - -<p>“We must hurry down to him somehow,” went on -Mr. Whyland; “how can it be done?”</p> - -<p>“I think there is a path a little way ahead,” replied -the guide. “Come, we will dismount and see.”</p> - -<p>His directions were instantly followed. Sure enough, -a little distance farther there was a break where a -tiny watercourse led to the river below.</p> - -<p>It did not take them long to reach the bottom of -the ravine, and once down there they hurried back -with all possible speed.</p> - -<p>“He must have come down somewhere about here,” -said Cottle, as he came to a halt; “but I don’t see -anything of him.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_164"></a>[164]</span></p> - -<p>“Oh, I hope he hasn’t been carried down the river!” -cried Gus; and he added in a low tone, “Poor Olly! -if he is dead, oh, what will I do? It will break his -father’s heart!”</p> - -<p>“I don’t see—” began Mr. Whyland, and then, -happening to glance up, he ejaculated, “here he is -up in the tree!”</p> - -<p>In a moment more Cottle had climbed the tree -and had the body on the ground. He loosened Oliver’s -collar, and applied his ear to the boy’s heart.</p> - -<p>“Is he—is he alive?” faltered Gus.</p> - -<p>“Oh, yes; but he has had a severe shaking up. -Bring some water from the river.”</p> - -<p>Gus hurried off to do so. When he returned Oliver -was just stirring. Mr. Whyland put some of the -water on his face and hair.</p> - -<p>Presently Oliver opened his eyes and sat up.</p> - -<p>“Where am I?” he asked faintly. “What—what—oh, -I remember now! I didn’t go into the -river, did I?”</p> - -<p>“No, thank God, you did not,” replied Mr. Whyland. -“It was a most miraculous escape!”</p> - -<p>“How do you feel?” asked Gus. “I hope there -are no bones broken.”</p> - -<p>“I feel sore all over. Give me some of the water.”</p> - -<p>Cottle gave him a drink, and carefully noted its effect.</p> - -<p>“Did it hurt when it went down?” he asked.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_165"></a>[165]</span></p> - -<p>“No.”</p> - -<p>“Then that’s all right. If you were injured internally -you couldn’t drink without having a pain. -Better take it easy for a little while though.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll have to,” replied Oliver with a suppressed -groan; “I’m too sore to move much. Where is my -mule?”</p> - -<p>“Up on the path with the others. I’ll turn them -back to the other trail. All hands take it easy for -an hour or so till I get back.”</p> - -<p>In a moment more Cottle was gone. Gus and Mr. -Whyland sat down beside Oliver, one on either side.</p> - -<p>“I’m so glad, Olly,” cried the stout youth. “When -I saw you go over my heart jumped right into my -mouth, just as if I was going myself. Crickety! -but it was a nasty fall and no mistake!”</p> - -<p>In half an hour Oliver arose slowly to his feet. As -he had said, he ached in every joint, and his head, too, -felt queer, but otherwise he was all right.</p> - -<p>“But I never want another such tumble,” he declared. -“I shall never forget it if I live to be a -hundred years old!”</p> - -<p>At the specified time Cottle came back. He had -succeeded in turning the mules, and had found a -much better path a little to the northward.</p> - -<p>“Then we might as well go on,” said Oliver; -“there is no use in wasting time here.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_166"></a>[166]</span></p> - -<p>“Do you feel able to go on?” asked Gus.</p> - -<p>“I think so. We can try it any way.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Whyland could not help but smile at the boy’s -determination.</p> - -<p>“You have lots of backbone!” he declared. “Well, -since you say so, we will go on; but if you find it -hurts you, don’t hesitate to speak.” And up to the -path above they went, and then back to where Cottle -had left the mules.</p> - -<p>Walking pained Oliver considerably, and he was -glad enough when he could sink once more into his -easy saddle. Then the guide went to the front, and -the onward journey was resumed.</p> - -<p>By two o’clock in the afternoon they had passed -around the northern base of the mountain, and were -entering a long and narrow valley. Before them -loomed a long, low range of hills, and Cottle said -that the Aurora mine was located just beyond, and -about forty miles to the north-east.</p> - -<p>The scenery upon all sides was magnificent, and -had Oliver’s mind been free from anxiety, and his -body without pain, he would have enjoyed it to the -fullest extent. Even as it was, he sometimes reined -up his mule to drink in the prospect.</p> - -<p>“Beats the East all to bits!” he said to Gus as -they rode side by side.</p> - -<p>“You are right. I would rather take a trip about -here than go to Europe ten times over.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_167"></a>[167]</span></p> - -<p>“And yet you will find thousands of people who -prefer the latter trip,” put in Mr. Whyland. “Some -have gone to Europe half a dozen times and never -come West once.”</p> - -<p>“I guess they go because it’s the style,” suggested -Cottle. “But as for me, Uncle Sam’s domain is -good enough every time.”</p> - -<p>The riding was now much easier and all hands -urged the mules to a better gait.</p> - -<p>“If we can, we will make Billy Ford’s cabin before -we halt,” said the guide.</p> - -<p>“And who is Billy Ford?” asked Oliver.</p> - -<p>“An old timer who keeps a sort of cross-roads -store and tavern,” laughed Cottle.</p> - -<p>“A store! ’Way out here!” cried Gus. “Who -in creation can he have for customers?”</p> - -<p>“Miners come to him for forty miles around. Billy -has been here since prospecting first began. We -won’t buy much from him because he is so terribly -high in prices; but you had better patronize him a -little, just to keep him in good humor.”</p> - -<p>On and on they went, until, just as the sun was -setting over the mountain they had just passed, Cottle -pointed to a cabin far ahead.</p> - -<p>“There is Billy’s,” he said.</p> - -<p>In a quarter of an hour they had reached the spot. -It was where the road crossed a small mountain stream.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_168"></a>[168]</span> -Ford’s cabin proved to be a rude structure of logs -plastered over with mud. A sign hung outside, stating -that provisions and drinks were to be had on reasonable -terms.</p> - -<p>As they rode up, the proprietor came out, gun in -hand. As soon as he saw Cottle, however, he lowered -the weapon.</p> - -<p>“Hello, Felix! Who you got thar?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“A party bound for the mines, Billy,” was the -guide’s reply; and he jumped down and held out his -hand.</p> - -<p>“So? All right.” The two shook hands. “Going -to squat here over night?”</p> - -<p>“Reckon to, unless you say no.”</p> - -<p>“That’s all right. Come in, gents,” and Ford -turned to the others. “Suppose Cottle’s told you all -about my ranch?”</p> - -<p>“He told us something,” said Oliver as he dismounted.</p> - -<p>The party were soon on the ground, and Cottle -turned to take care of the horses. As he did so, -Ford walked up to him.</p> - -<p>“Say, Felix, it’s a wonder you didn’t strike this -place last night,” he said with a laugh. “There -might have been some fun if you had. Your old -boss, Colonel Guerotaz, stopped here.”</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_169"></a>[169]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XXV">CHAPTER XXV.<br /> -<small>A STORM IN THE MOUNTAINS.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>Oliver Bright was as much surprised as Cottle to -hear Ford’s words. Colonel Mendix had stopped at -the place only the night before! They were indeed -close upon his heels.</p> - -<p>Without replying, the guide turned an inquiring -look towards the boy. Oliver at once spoke up.</p> - -<p>“You say Colonel Guerotaz was here last night?”</p> - -<p>“Yes,” replied Ford. “Know the man?”</p> - -<p>“I know of him. Was he alone?”</p> - -<p>“No, no; had two new hands with him.”</p> - -<p>“Did they have any baggage? I mean heavy -stuff?”</p> - -<p>“Not as I know of. Are you off to see him?” -went on the keeper of the store curiously.</p> - -<p>“We are,” replied Oliver. “What time did the -colonel leave?”</p> - -<p>“At sunrise this morning. Oh, he’s a spry fellow, -I can tell you.”</p> - -<p>Oliver said no more, but walked back to Mr. Whyland -and Gus.</p> - -<p>“Colonel Mendix is just a full day’s journey ahead<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_170"></a>[170]</span> -of us,” he said. “I wonder if it is likely that we -catch up with him before we reach the mine.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t believe that would be advisable,” was Mr. -Whyland’s reply.</p> - -<p>“Nor I,” responded Gus. “I don’t want to face -the man until we reach the mine.”</p> - -<p>“We will tell Cottle of this. He can easily keep -a lookout ahead.”</p> - -<p>As soon as the mules were cared for, the little -party entered the store. It was a place scarcely -twenty feet square, lit up in the daytime by three -dirty windows and at night by a couple of smoky -lamps.</p> - -<p>The air was redolent of the aroma of various groceries, -mixed with the smell of tobacco and liquor. -Oliver remained about five minutes, and then went -out and sat down on the little porch to catch his -breath.</p> - -<p>Behind the store there was one room, used by Ford -as a dwelling. In this apartment all hands were invited -to spend the night with the proprietor; but all, -with the exception of Cottle, declined with thanks, -Oliver saying that now they were in the mountains, -they would prefer to sleep in the open.</p> - -<p>“I couldn’t sleep in that place if I was paid for it,” -he told Gus, when the three were alone.</p> - -<p>“Nor I,” replied the stout youth. “Crickety! the<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_171"></a>[171]</span> -smell was strong enough to walk! I don’t see how -Ford stands it.”</p> - -<p>“It is a matter of habit,” laughed Mr. Whyland. -“Just as the families of a wild tribe all live in one -wretched hut. With so much pure air around, one -would think they would want just that and nothing -else, but the opposite is the fact.”</p> - -<p>However, not wishing to offend Ford, they had -him furnish them with supper and breakfast, and before -leaving, Mr. Whyland purchased from him a -pound bag of tobacco for a dollar, which he afterwards -presented to Cottle for use in his stump of a -pipe.</p> - -<p>Half an hour after sunrise on the following morning -they bade the storekeeper good-by and were off. -Each one was in the best of spirits, though Oliver was -still sore from his frightful tumble.</p> - -<p>The little stretch of plain before them was soon -crossed. At its termination they came to a narrow -defile, between a small mountain on one side, and some -rugged rocks and bushes on the other.</p> - -<p>“Were it not for these natural roadways the journey -from one place to another would be next to impossible,” -said Mr. Whyland as they rode along.</p> - -<p>“I believe you,” said Oliver. “However would -we be able to climb this mountain, small as it is? -No mule could ascend such a steep place.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_172"></a>[172]</span></p> - -<p>“Don’t be too sure about that,” put in Cottle; -“it is wonderful what a mule can do when put to it. -But such an undertaking breaks them all up.”</p> - -<p>At noon they found themselves still in the pass. -Gus stated that he was growing tremendously hungry, -but Cottle said they had better wait for dinner.</p> - -<p>“We want to get out of this pass as soon as possible,” -he added; “in a couple of hours it won’t -be a safe place to be in.”</p> - -<p>“Why, what do you mean?” exclaimed Oliver.</p> - -<p>“I see some bad looking clouds over there,” replied -the guide, pointing with his finger. “We are -going to have a storm some time this afternoon.”</p> - -<p>“A storm!” cried Gus.</p> - -<p>“Yes; and I won’t be surprised if it is a heavy -one.”</p> - -<p>“Then why not seek shelter somewhere here?” -went on Gus. “I am sure we can keep dryer here -than out in the open.”</p> - -<p>“Not much!” responded the guide. “If that -storm is heavy this place will be a mighty dangerous -one. Come, we must hurry along.”</p> - -<p>“And why dangerous?” asked Oliver as they urged -the mules forward.</p> - -<p>“On account of the rocks that roll down the mountain, -and the wind. At times it is something fearful. -We must lose no time. I was in a storm down<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_173"></a>[173]</span> -in the Gedney Pass one day in September two years -ago, and I will never forget it. Hark!”</p> - -<p>As Cottle concluded, a low rumble far to the north-west -was heard, a rumble that seemed to rise and -fall like the billows of the ocean.</p> - -<p>“It’s coming!” cried the guide. “Forward as -fast as you can!”</p> - -<p>His directions were followed instantly. The mules -seemed to understand the situation and did their best.</p> - -<p>On and on they went, the sky above them each -instant getting blacker and the roll of thunder coming -nearer. Then a puff of heavy wind swept past -them.</p> - -<p>“It is coming!” shouted the guide. “Hurry up, -all of you.” And away he went faster than ever.</p> - -<p>Oliver and Gus were close behind. Mr. Whyland -brought up the rear. Another rush of wind followed, -and then it seemed to grow black as night.</p> - -<p>“We are going to catch it and no mistake!” exclaimed -Oliver. “I wish we were out in the open -once more.”</p> - -<p>“Half a mile farther will fetch it,” cried Cottle.</p> - -<p>He could say no more, for at that instant a flash -of lightning fairly blinded them. Then came a -deafening roar of thunder that lasted fully five minutes, -followed by a perfect deluge of rain.</p> - -<p>Oliver pulled his hat far down over his head and<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_174"></a>[174]</span> -eyes, and buttoned his coat up tightly. But it was -no use; in one minute he was soaked to the skin.</p> - -<p>“Don’t stop!” called out Cottle during a brief -lull. “We must get out of here if we wish to save -our lives!”</p> - -<p>Nobody replied; but every one understood the importance -of his words.</p> - -<p>Oliver’s mule was now getting winded, and the boy -had great trouble in making him keep up the pace. -He patted the animal and spoke encouragingly to -him, but all to no purpose. In a moment more they -had dropped behind.</p> - -<p>“What is the trouble?” asked Mr. Whyland, slacking -his pace.</p> - -<p>“The mule won’t go. He is winded, I guess.”</p> - -<p>“He must go. Keep him at it.”</p> - -<p>Another clap of thunder followed. The mule -pranced about wildly. All the others had gone -ahead, and Oliver was left alone to deal with the -animal.</p> - -<p>“Whoa!” he called out. “Whoa, Dobbins!”</p> - -<p>But Dobbins would not stop his prancing. Another -clap of thunder, and a mass of rocks came crashing -down close to the spot where the mule stood.</p> - -<p>In a twinkling his hind feet rose in the air, and -his rider was unseated and thrown to the ground. -Then Dobbins tore away, leaving Oliver to his fate.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_175"></a>[175]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XXVI">CHAPTER XXVI.<br /> -<small>THE AURORA MINE AT LAST.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>Oliver now found himself in an exceedingly perilous -position. The rain came down in such a torrent -that he could not see five yards ahead, and what had -become of his mule he did not know.</p> - -<p>He picked himself up from the spot where he had -been thrown, and crouched for a moment under an overhanging -rock. As he did so, a blinding flash of lightning -swept by, and on the instant a tall tree that stood -not over two hundred feet away was split from the -top to the bottom, and was wrapped in a blaze of -fire!</p> - -<p>The sight nearly made Oliver faint. The air was -charged with a peculiar odor,—probably sulphur,—and -the boy gasped for breath.</p> - -<p>“Struck by lightning!” he muttered. “Thank -Heaven I was not nearer!” It took him several moments -to recover sufficiently to proceed on his way. -Then he stumbled on and on, falling half a dozen -times. And all the while the rain came down in -sheets, until he thought a perfect deluge had overtaken -him.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_176"></a>[176]</span></p> - -<p>“I wonder where the others are?” he muttered. -“No use to call; my voice couldn’t be heard a dozen -steps away in this wind.”</p> - -<p>Ten minutes passed. He had progressed probably -the eighth of a mile. The stones of the road cut into -his soaked boots, and made his feet pain as they never -had before. He was all out of breath, and sat down -under an overhanging rock.</p> - -<p>“If this is life in the mountains I want none of it,” -was his thought. “If a rock should roll down upon -me I would be crushed into a jelly.”</p> - -<p>He wished earnestly that he was once more with -the others. What if he should miss them by the -way? The thought made him shiver.</p> - -<p>“I wouldn’t be alone out here for a million dollars!” -he cried aloud, and his voice sounded strange -to himself. “I must hurry and catch up by some -means.”</p> - -<p>As he concluded, a peculiar noise ahead made him -start. What was it? Some wild animal?</p> - -<p>He sincerely hoped not. His weapons were all upon -the mule’s back, and if attacked he would be next to -defenseless.</p> - -<p>The sound came from a bend above. For several -seconds Oliver hesitated about proceeding.</p> - -<p>And yet it had to be done. He must go ahead; -there was no other way.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_177"></a>[177]</span></p> - -<p>While hesitating, the sound was repeated. But this -time it was louder and more capable of interpretation. -In spite of himself the boy gave a low laugh.</p> - -<p>“Dobbins!” he cried. And in a moment more he -was around the bend.</p> - -<p>True enough, there stood the mule, shivering and -braying all to himself.</p> - -<p>It did not take Oliver long to climb upon the animal’s -back, and once there he urged the beast on as -before. Dobbins had had a short rest, and struck out -well.</p> - -<p>“Now to find the others. They cannot be so very -far away. Get up, Dobbins, you rascal!”</p> - -<p>In a few moments more the narrow pass came to an -end and Oliver found himself upon an open plain. -He tried to peer through the darkness and rain.</p> - -<p>To the southward he thought he could discern three -figures moving about. Were they his party?</p> - -<p>“I ought to be sure before I move away,” he told -himself. “Suppose I fire a shot and see?”</p> - -<p>No sooner had the thought entered his mind than -he decided to act upon it. The sound of the report -had hardly died away before an answering shot was -wafted back to him.</p> - -<p>“Thank goodness I have found them,” he cried. -And the next instant he was off at the top of Dobbins’s -speed.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_178"></a>[178]</span></p> - -<p>Gus came out to meet him. Despite the rain the -stout youth’s face was covered with a broad smile.</p> - -<p>“Crickety! but I’m glad you’re here!” he called out. -“I was afraid the storm would swallow you up.”</p> - -<p>“And it nearly did,” replied Oliver; “I’ve had a -narrow escape.”</p> - -<p>By the time they had reached the others the rain -began to abate as rapidly as it had come on. The -dark, angry clouds broke up in all directions, and presently -a glint of sunshine appeared far in the west.</p> - -<p>“Always act that way,” said Cottle. “This is the -blamedest region for such showers ever was.”</p> - -<p>All gathered around Oliver to hear what he had to -say, and all agreed that his escape was miraculous.</p> - -<p>“After this we must be more careful to keep together,” -said Mr. Whyland gravely. “He might -have lost his life and none of us been the wiser. I -did not miss you, Oliver, till we were out here.”</p> - -<p>“Nor did any of us,” put in Cottle. “I tried to -look back for you, but the rain was too thick; I -couldn’t see a thing.”</p> - -<p>In half an hour the sun was shining as brightly as -ever. As the day was warm all hands took off their -coats and hung them on their mules’ backs to dry.</p> - -<p>“We may as well make camp before any of us take -cold,” remarked Mr. Whyland; “it is only about an -hour from sunset.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_179"></a>[179]</span></p> - -<p>“There is a good spot just a quarter of a mile -farther,” said Cottle. “We will be there in five -minutes.”</p> - -<p>Quarter of an hour later they were in camp. The -tent was pitched on a bit of high, sandy ground, and -a roaring fire was started just outside of the entrance. -The following day was Sunday. Cottle would have -gone ahead as usual; but the boys and Mr. Whyland -voted to remain in camp and take a rest, and let the -mules do the same.</p> - -<p>“Besides,” said Oliver, “nothing will ever be gained -by breaking in on the Sabbath when there is no absolute -necessity for so doing.”</p> - -<p>“You are right,” said Gus.</p> - -<p>“I like to hear young men talk like that,” put -in Mr. Whyland; “it shows a proper spirit. Let us -spend the day as it should be spent.”</p> - -<p>“Not many men keep the day out here,” remarked -Cottle. “Many of them don’t know what a Sunday -is after they once leave the city.”</p> - -<p>The entire Sunday was a beautiful one. After -breakfast Mr. Whyland read several chapters out of -a Bible he had brought along, and offered prayer; -and then they took a long walk about the neighborhood, -leaving Cottle lying in the door of the tent -smoking his pipe and watching the mules.</p> - -<p>“As I have heard remarked, this is God’s country,<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_180"></a>[180]</span> -and so in very truth it is,” said Mr. Whyland. -“Some day all these hills will be dotted with farmhouses -and barns, and the sound of the thresher and -reaper will be heard on every hand.”</p> - -<p>“It is a rich country,” returned Oliver. “I would -not wish for better farming lands than these.”</p> - -<p>“And yet all who come here do so only for gold -and silver,” put in Gus.</p> - -<p>“It will not be so long. The people who mine -must live, and somebody must raise the stuff for -them to eat.”</p> - -<p>“In that direction lies the Aurora mine,” went on -Mr. Whyland, pointing with his finger to the south-east. -“Cottle says we ought to reach it by Tuesday -noon.”</p> - -<p>“Colonel Mendix has already arrived there, I -suppose,” said Oliver. “Won’t he be surprised when -we appear on the scene?”</p> - -<p>“No doubt he will do all in his power to outwit us.”</p> - -<p>“But he shall not do it,” said Oliver decidedly. -And he meant it from the bottom of his heart.</p> - -<p>Sunrise on Monday found them once more on the -way. Riding was now much easier, and they made -rapid progress, all traveling side by side.</p> - -<p>That night they encamped near the edge of another -mountain torrent. It was a beautiful spot, -the prettiest they had yet stopped at.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_181"></a>[181]</span></p> - -<p>Oliver sat on a flat rock, his chin in his hands. -It was the last night’s camp on that lone spot. -What did the morrow hold in store?</p> - -<p>All through the night he slept but little. Once -Gus awoke and noticed it. Rolling over, he whispered,—</p> - -<p>“Don’t worry, old boy; it will be all right, mark -my words.”</p> - -<p>“I trust so,” replied Oliver. “I wish it was -over.”</p> - -<p>He was the first to be stirring, and he cautioned -Cottle to halt as soon as the mining district should -appear in sight. Then in a short quarter of an -hour they were off.</p> - -<p>On and over the plain, five, ten, fifteen miles. -Then they began slowly to ascend a steep but small -mountain, halting at the top.</p> - -<p>“There,” said the guide, pointing to a spot not a -quarter of a mile away, “<a href="#i_fp180">there is the Cortez mine, -and just below it is the Aurora</a>!”</p> - -<div class="figcenter" id="i_fp180"> - <img src="images/i_fp180.jpg" alt="" title="" /> - <div class="caption"> - <p class="noic"><a href="#Page_181">“<span class="smcap">There is the Cortez mine, and just below -it is the Aurora.</span>”</a></p> - </div> -</div> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_182"></a>[182]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XXVII">CHAPTER XXVII.<br /> -<small>AN INTERESTING CONVERSATION.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>The Aurora mine had been reached at last!</p> - -<p>Oliver Bright, as he sat on his mule, drew a -long breath. His tedious journey had come to an -end.</p> - -<p>“The Aurora mine!” he repeated. “That way, -beyond that row of buildings, is the Aurora mine?”</p> - -<p>“It is the shaft leading to it,” said Cottle. “It -is a very peculiar mine, running, as it does, parallel -to the mountain for some six hundred feet. I could -never understand how Colonel Guerotaz, as he is -called, could abandon it, seeing as it paid so well; -but when he approached it from the extremity of -the Cortez I began to smell a mouse, and what you -have told me makes it as plain as day. He will be -greatly surprised to see you.” And the guide gave -a long, low laugh.</p> - -<p>“I have been thinking I had better go down -alone,” said Oliver. “He will know you, Mr. Whyland, -and you too, Cottle.”</p> - -<p>“I have been thinking the same thing,” replied -the former. “But you had better take Gregory with<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_183"></a>[183]</span> -you, and if you get into any trouble fire off your -pistol. You know what to say.”</p> - -<p>“Of course,” replied Oliver; for he and Mr. Whyland -had had too many conversations on the matter -for him to make any mistake.</p> - -<p>A little later Oliver and Gus rode forth from the -bushes in which the confab had taken place, and -headed directly for the group of buildings below.</p> - -<p>“Hope you ain’t nervous, Olly,” said the stout -youth, as they moved on at a rapid gait.</p> - -<p>“I am anxious but not nervous,” was the low reply. -“This Colonel Mendix has grossly wronged -my father, and I intend to have matters set straight.”</p> - -<p>“I’m feeling mighty funny myself—”</p> - -<p>“If you want to go back—” began Oliver.</p> - -<p>“Not a bit of it; not if I knew I was going to -have my head taken off,” cried Gus. “What, after -all you did for me on the Polly Eliza! Not much!” -and he spurted on ahead.</p> - -<p>In a few minutes they had arrived at the row of -buildings. Only a single man was in sight, the -rest probably being at work.</p> - -<p>“Is Colonel Men—I mean Colonel Guerotaz anywhere -about?” asked Oliver.</p> - -<p>The man stared at them.</p> - -<p>“Reckon you’ll find him over there in the office,” -was the slow answer. “Anything particklar?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_184"></a>[184]</span></p> - -<p>But Oliver did not reply. Riding over to the -building indicated, he dismounted, followed by Gus, -and rapped loudly upon the door.</p> - -<p>“Come,” said a sharp voice from the inside; and -they entered.</p> - -<p>It was a plain room, furnished with a desk, a -small safe, and half a dozen chairs. In one corner -lay a number of specimens of ore; and that was all.</p> - -<p>In front of the desk sat Colonel Mendix, deep in -the perusal of a number of written statements. He -glanced up in surprise as the two entered. He had -expected to see some of his own workmen.</p> - -<p>“Hello! Who are you?” he exclaimed.</p> - -<p>“Is this Colonel Guerotaz?” asked Oliver, advancing -as calmly as he could, though his heart beat as -it never had before.</p> - -<p>“That’s my name,” was the short reply. “And -you are?”</p> - -<p>“A couple of mine-hunters all the way from San -Francisco,” returned Oliver. “This is my friend Mr. -Gregory. My name is Oliver.”</p> - -<p>The Spaniard bowed.</p> - -<p>“I am pleased to meet you, Mr. Oliver,” he said, -falling into a natural mistake, as Oliver had intended -he should. “You are looking for a mine?”</p> - -<p>“Yes; a mine that was located a number of years -ago.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_185"></a>[185]</span></p> - -<p>“And what mine was that?”</p> - -<p>“The Aurora.”</p> - -<p>The Spaniard turned pale, and clasped his hands -together.</p> - -<p>“I—I—know of no such mine around here,” he -faltered.</p> - -<p>“Not at all?” asked Oliver sharply.</p> - -<p>“No, no; I am quite sure. What makes you think -there is a mine by that name near here?”</p> - -<p>“I did not say it was near here, did I?” asked -the boy innocently.</p> - -<p>“Oh!” Colonel Mendix breathed a sigh of relief. -“I thought—”</p> - -<p>“But I am told it is quite near here,” went on -Oliver.</p> - -<p>Colonel Mendix jumped to his feet.</p> - -<p>“Who told you that?” he demanded.</p> - -<p>“Mr. Arthur Bright.”</p> - -<p>“Arthur Bright! I don’t know such a man.”</p> - -<p>“His son says you do.”</p> - -<p>“His son!” the man staggered back. “Where did -you meet his son?”</p> - -<p>“His son was in San Francisco about a week ago.”</p> - -<p>“I—I—did not know he had a son,” faltered the -colonel.</p> - -<p>Oliver could not help but smile, the man was so -confused.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_186"></a>[186]</span></p> - -<p>“If you do not know the man it is not likely that -you would know he had a son,” he said.</p> - -<p>Colonel Mendix jumped to his feet.</p> - -<p>“I want none of your smart sayings, young man!” -he said.</p> - -<p>“And I haven’t anything very smart to say,” replied -Oliver. “I only want to know the location of -this Aurora mine.”</p> - -<p>“What do you want to know that for?”</p> - -<p>“I want to find out about it for Mr. Bright.”</p> - -<p>“Did he send you?”</p> - -<p>“No; but he could not come himself, and so I -came for him. He said the mine was somewhere -out here, and I promised to look it up.”</p> - -<p>Colonel Mendix looked at Oliver sharply for a -moment.</p> - -<p>“Who ran this mine?” he asked slowly.</p> - -<p>“Colonel Mendix.”</p> - -<p>At the mention of that name the Spaniard could -not help but flinch. But he quickly recovered.</p> - -<p>“Ah, yes, I knew Colonel Mendix,” he replied. -“He went to South America several years ago.”</p> - -<p>“He did?”</p> - -<p>“Yes. If you are after the mine he opened I can -tell you all about it. But it is of small consequence, -I can assure you.”</p> - -<p>“Why?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_187"></a>[187]</span></p> - -<p>“Because the mine is utterly worthless. Colonel -Mendix had great hopes of it proving a bonanza and -sunk a good deal of money in it. The investment -made him a poor man.”</p> - -<p>“Was it all his own money he used?”</p> - -<p>“I think he had some Eastern capitalists interested; -but when he saw the mine was a failure he never -tried to settle the matter; simply sold off the machinery -to pay off the indebtedness, and cleared out.”</p> - -<p>“Have you heard from him since?”</p> - -<p>“Never.”</p> - -<p>“And where is the mine? I would like to be -able to tell Mr. Bright that I had seen it.”</p> - -<p>“It is about a quarter of a mile below here, and -half-way up the mountain. Follow the wagon-track -that leads to the south and you cannot miss it.”</p> - -<p>Of course Oliver knew that the man was telling -a falsehood; yet he wished to hear all the colonel -might have to say.</p> - -<p>“And the claim is quite abandoned?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“Entirely. It would not pay to reopen it under any -consideration. This mine of mine, the Cortez, pays -but poorly, and it is by far the best in the district.”</p> - -<p>“Thank you, we will take a look at the mine you -speak of and then come back,” said Oliver; and the -two withdrew, leaving the Spaniard gazing after them -earnestly.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_188"></a>[188]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XXVIII">CHAPTER XXVIII.<br /> -<small>COLONEL MENDIX IS ASTONISHED.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>“I believe that man would lie when the truth -would do!” burst out Gus, when they had ridden -out of hearing. “Of course you don’t take any -stock in what he says.”</p> - -<p>“No, indeed! Even if Cottle had not told us all -about his little trick, I would never believe him after -he had passed himself off as somebody else. We -will ride on in the direction he indicated as far as -he can see us, and then turn back to where we left -Mr. Whyland.”</p> - -<p>This was done; and fifteen minutes later they had -rejoined their friend and the guide.</p> - -<p>“I was getting a little worried,” said the former; -“well, what luck?”</p> - -<p>Oliver told him of what had occurred.</p> - -<p>“The old fraud sent you off to the Johnny Brill -mine!” burst in Cottle. “Brill opened it, and when -it was nearly played out, turned it over to Mendix; -why I never knew, excepting that the Spaniard wanted -to palm it off as the Aurora.”</p> - -<p>“That was probably his scheme,” said Mr. Whyland.<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_189"></a>[189]</span> -“He is a deep one. I wish I knew just where -he keeps all of his papers.”</p> - -<p>“There was a safe in the place called the office,” -replied Oliver.</p> - -<p>“Yes; but he may have some place in San Francisco—”</p> - -<p>“Guess not,” returned the guide. “I reckon you -will find all you want right in that little building.”</p> - -<p>“If we could only get hold of them—”</p> - -<p>“I’d ride in and take possession,” continued Cottle. -“If you have a right to the mine I wouldn’t wait a -minute.”</p> - -<p>“We have if it’s the right mine,” said Oliver.</p> - -<p>“I can vouch for it that it is. I know every foot -of the ground around here.”</p> - -<p>“Here is the description of the mine,” said Oliver, -producing the papers. “Listen, I will read them off;” -and he did so.</p> - -<p>“That’s it to a T, and no mistake. The Cortez -is only a blind to the regular mine. I’d swoop down -on him.” And the guide shook his head decidedly. -He would have been better pleased if there had been -a regular muss with a bit of shooting added.</p> - -<p>“I wish I knew where the sheriff of the county -was located,” began Mr. Whyland.</p> - -<p>“The sheriff is Dan Shattock,” replied Cottle. “He -lives over to Fennel Gulch.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_190"></a>[190]</span></p> - -<p>“And how far is that from here?”</p> - -<p>“About thirty-five or forty miles.”</p> - -<p>“If I gave you a letter to him could you bring -him back with the necessary papers?”</p> - -<p>“Certainly. Only Dan will want pay in advance.”</p> - -<p>“I will give you the hundred dollars that you -have earned. You can pay him whatever is necessary, -and I will pay you back with good interest. -Come, I will write the letter without delay.”</p> - -<p>“Yes, do,” said Oliver. “Colonel Mendix may -smell a mouse and try to head us off ere long. He -had not expected to be disturbed, but now you can -rest assured he will be on his guard.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Whyland sat down immediately to compose -the letter. It was not a very long epistle, but it was -just to the point. Oliver read it over and offered -several suggestions that the other deemed valuable, -and then the letter was folded and placed in Cottle’s -hand.</p> - -<p>“I’ll be off at once,” said the guide; and he mounted -his mule.</p> - -<p>“And how long before you will be back?” asked -Oliver.</p> - -<p>“Depends on where I catch Dan Shattock. Not -longer than three days, I reckon.” And with these -final words Cottle rode away.</p> - -<p>“I trust he will be lucky enough to find his man<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_191"></a>[191]</span> -at once,” said Mr. Whyland. “Having the sheriff -here will be a great help to us.”</p> - -<p>“I suppose Gus and I had better ride back to -carry out the deception,” said Oliver. “Mendix -will be looking for us.”</p> - -<p>“And I will remain in camp down here in the hollow,” -said Mr. Whyland. “I think as long as the -colonel does not see me we will be safe. But if you -need me, fire off a shot as before agreed.”</p> - -<p>A moment later Oliver and Gus were on the return. -They followed the track they had come by, -and in less than half an hour had passed the abandoned -mine, and were once more at the Cortez’s -office.</p> - -<p>“Well, are you satisfied now?” asked the colonel -as he came out to meet them.</p> - -<p>“That mine is certainly abandoned,” replied Oliver, -raising a light laugh, far, however, from natural.</p> - -<p>“Yes; it is utterly worthless.” Colonel Mendix -paused. “Was that all you were hunting in this -region?”</p> - -<p>Oliver hesitated for a moment, not knowing exactly -what to say in return.</p> - -<p>“It was all we wanted to know about the mine,” -he answered slowly. “But you tell me that mining -around here doesn’t pay?”</p> - -<p>“Hardly. It did years ago, but we have nearly -reached the end.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_192"></a>[192]</span></p> - -<p>“If you have no objection I would like to take a -look around your mine,” said Oliver. “I was never -in a mine just like this.” He did not deem it necessary -to say that he had never been in a mine of any -kind. “It must be an interesting sight.”</p> - -<p>Colonel Mendix frowned slightly. The idea of -these two suspicious young men prowling about the -place did not suit him.</p> - -<p>“It is not such an amusing sight,” he replied with -a short laugh.</p> - -<p>“Still you don’t object, I suppose,” said Oliver.</p> - -<p>“Oh, no; I—I—will send for a man to show you -through. It is not often we have visitors away out -here. Take seats while I send for the man.”</p> - -<p>He indicated a couple of chairs, and the two boys -seated themselves. Oliver’s heart beat like a trip-hammer. -What would be the result of this strange -visit to the mine?</p> - -<p>“Have you good stout boots?” went on Colonel -Mendix; “you need them in a place like this.”</p> - -<p>“Oh, we always wear tough sole-leather,” laughed -Gus. “We have been knocking about too long to -do otherwise.”</p> - -<p>This reply put the colonel off the track once more. -But he went on,—</p> - -<p>“You are from the West then?”</p> - -<p>“We came from Central America,” replied Oliver;<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_193"></a>[193]</span> -“but we have been spending some time in San -Francisco.”</p> - -<p>“Ah, I see.”</p> - -<p>There was a short pause after this. Oliver felt the -colonel’s sharp eyes bent full upon him, and to avoid -confusion he bent over and began an examination of -the sole of one of his boots.</p> - -<p>“That is getting a little worn,” he said to Gus; -“I guess I will pare that edge off with a knife.” -And getting out his penknife he began to do so.</p> - -<p>While at work several men came into the office -and asked for instructions. Oliver became much interested -in what was said, referring as it did to the -transfer of some heavy machinery from San Francisco -to the mine. He laid down his knife, pulled -up his boot, and drank in every word.</p> - -<p>From this he learned that on the day following a -party of six men with eighteen mules were to start -for the coast. On arriving there, the machinery was -to be put up in packs, loaded on the mules, and -then brought to the mine. The trip would occupy -the best part of a month.</p> - -<p>This conversation gave the boy considerable satisfaction. -It would decrease the force of men in the -mine by six, and this would count for much if the -sheriff should have any trouble in establishing their -claim. He trusted that Colonel Mendix would not -discover their intentions before the start was made.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_194"></a>[194]</span></p> - -<p>When the men were about to leave, the colonel -motioned for one of them to remain.</p> - -<p>“Here, Restrepo, I want you to show these two -young men through the mine,” he said. And then -followed some instructions in Spanish to the effect -that the trip should be a short one and nothing of -importance should be shown.</p> - -<p>“<i lang="es" xml:lang="es">Si, signor</i>,” replied the fellow, touching his cap.</p> - -<p>“This man will show you through,” said the colonel, -turning to the two; and there was nothing left -to do but to follow the man out; and this they did.</p> - -<p>No sooner were they gone and the door closed, than -the colonel sank back in his chair in deep thought.</p> - -<p>“That Oliver’s face reminds me strongly of one -that I have seen before,” he muttered to himself. -“I do not like the manner of either of them. Bah! -I must be getting nervous. What can two boys do?”</p> - -<p>He was about to turn again to the papers before -him, when his eyes rested upon the penknife Oliver -had left lying on the floor. Half abstractedly he -picked it up.</p> - -<p>“Oliver Bright!” he ejaculated, as he read that -name upon the handle. “That boy must be Arthur -Bright’s son! Ah, I see it all! He is spying upon -me!” He clinched his hands. “I must attend to -this at once!” he cried.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_195"></a>[195]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XXIX">CHAPTER XXIX.<br /> -<small>IN THE AURORA MINE.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>The guide that Colonel Mendix had furnished the -two boys was a tall, swarthy Spaniard of sinister aspect. -He had been in the colonel’s employ for many -years, and was his favorite tool upon all occasions.</p> - -<p>“Follow me, please you,” he said brokenly; “we -go down quick.”</p> - -<p>He led the way from the office across a strip of -yard piled high with crushed ore and dismantled -machinery of old-fashioned pattern, and at length -they came to the opening of the mine, directly into -the side of the mountain.</p> - -<p>“It must be dark in there,” said Gus as they passed -the threshold.</p> - -<p>“Not dark, many lamps,” said Restrepo. “Come, -close by me, please you.” And leaving the pure light -of day behind they entered the passageway.</p> - -<p>For the instant the boys could see nothing. But -gradually their eyes became accustomed to the gloom, -and then they distinguished far ahead a number of -flames flickering like so many yellow stars in a dark -sky.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_196"></a>[196]</span></p> - -<p>“This is the first lode,” said the Spaniard. “Pay -good many year ago; not much now.”</p> - -<p>“And how many others are they?” asked Oliver -eagerly.</p> - -<p>The man hesitated. He had been cautioned not to -say too much.</p> - -<p>“Only few,” he replied evasively. “I show, please -you.” And on they went.</p> - -<p>They had nearly reached the lights when a man, -carrying a lantern, came running towards them.</p> - -<p>“Back!” he cried. “Half a minute! Back!”</p> - -<p>“What is the matter?” exclaimed Gus in sudden -terror.</p> - -<p>“Fire blast,” answered Restrepo. He turned and -motioned them back.</p> - -<p>They lost no time in returning to the entrance. A -few seconds later a dull roar was heard, followed by -the sound of falling rocks.</p> - -<p>“All right now,” said the Spaniard; “no more for -an hour.”</p> - -<p>“I wouldn’t want to be around when any of these -blasts go off,” shuddered Gus. “Might kill a fellow -without half trying.”</p> - -<p>“You are right,” replied Oliver. “Ever kill any -one?” he asked of Restrepo.</p> - -<p>“Killed two last year,” was the grim reply. “But -their fault, no other. They not run away far; stand<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_197"></a>[197]</span> -close; blast go off; both get heads blowed away, please -you.”</p> - -<p>“Horrible!” cried Oliver. And he made a mental -vow that should he ever become master of the mine -he would take extra precautions against such tragedies -occurring.</p> - -<p>“I suppose some men get so reckless they don’t -value their lives,” remarked Gus. “Mr. Whyland -was—”</p> - -<p>Oliver gave him a sharp pinch in the arm. “Take -care what you say!” he whispered.</p> - -<p>In an instant Gus understood the slip he had -made.</p> - -<p>“Oh!” He drew a deep breath. “Mr. <em>Ryder</em> -told me they don’t seem to care whether they live -or not.”</p> - -<p>Oliver was relieved to hear his friend turn the -slip he had made.</p> - -<p>“Well, Mr. <em>Ryder</em> ought to know,” he replied. -“But I should think every man’s life would be -sweet to him,” he went on.</p> - -<p>“And so it is,” broke in a voice behind them.</p> - -<p>Both boys started. Turning, they beheld Colonel -Mendix close at hand.</p> - -<p>“I thought I would come down and show you -through myself,” he said blandly; “it is not often that -I have visitors, and I think it my duty to show you<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_198"></a>[198]</span> -all the points of interest. Restrepo, you may go to -work again.” And he added some words in Spanish -to the man, who departed at once.</p> - -<p>Oliver could not help but feel uncomfortable. -Why this sudden change in the colonel’s manner? -Did he suspect anything?</p> - -<p>Then he began to wonder if Colonel Mendix had -overheard the slip Gus had made. He sincerely -hoped not. It might prove the cause of trouble.</p> - -<p>But the colonel appeared to suspect nothing. He -led the way, chatting gayly, pointing out this object -and that in the most natural manner, until both -boys were completely disarmed.</p> - -<p>“Never seen a mine like this before?” he said. -“Well, it is a sight well worth a good many miles -of travel. Of course to us it is a very humdrum -business, blasting and crushing day in and day out.”</p> - -<p>“And do you never leave the mine?” asked -Oliver.</p> - -<p>“Very seldom. Once in a while I take a trip to -’Frisco on business, but that is all. I have no family -ties, and this life here suits me just as well as -any other.”</p> - -<p>Before the boys were aware an hour had slipped -by. Colonel Mendix led them into a number of abandoned -passages, and they did not see the miners -quit work for the day and leave the mine.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_199"></a>[199]</span></p> - -<p>“Now, if you can do a little climbing, I will show -you the richest lode in the mine,” said the colonel -at length, when he was sure they were left alone.</p> - -<p>“I guess I can climb anywhere you can,” replied -Oliver with a laugh; “and I can help my friend -along.”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps you had better stay behind,” suggested -Colonel Mendix to Gus.</p> - -<p>“No, no, I’ll go wherever he does,” cried the -stout youth.</p> - -<p>A look of disappointment crossed the Spaniard’s -face.</p> - -<p>“Very well then. Follow me.” And he led the -way up a narrow passage, and through a small hole -into a rough sort of chamber.</p> - -<p>“We can only get to it this way,” he said. “To -leave it one must take a different route.”</p> - -<p>“How is that?” asked Oliver.</p> - -<p>“Because to reach it this way one must drop -down a distance of fifteen feet, and it is too much -of a job getting back. But the other way the return -is very easy, though rather long. Here is the place -to drop, over these rocks. Do you think you can -do it?” And he held the lantern over the edge.</p> - -<p>“I guess I can,” replied Oliver; “but—but—”</p> - -<p>“But what?” asked the colonel sharply.</p> - -<p>Oliver did not know what to reply.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_200"></a>[200]</span></p> - -<p>“Here, I will hold the lantern for you,” continued -Colonel Mendix. “You go over first and I will follow, -and we will catch your friend.”</p> - -<p>This seemed fair enough, and getting down, Oliver -swung himself over the ledge and dropped.</p> - -<p>About ten feet below his feet struck some slanting -projection; but it was too slippery with water -to catch a footing, and he went down fully fifteen -feet farther.</p> - -<p>“Hello!” he cried. “I—”</p> - -<p>“Now you,” cried the colonel to Gus. And before -the latter could say a word he found himself -pushed to the brink and sent rolling over. He -clutched the edge with his hands, but was unable -to draw himself up, and went over just as Oliver -had done.</p> - -<p>“What do you mean?” he demanded. “You -pushed me over!”</p> - -<p>“It is a trap,” whispered Oliver, helping Gus to -his feet. “Are you coming down?” he called to -the man above.</p> - -<p>“I don’t think I shall,” was the mocking reply. -“That is one of the worst pits in the mine, and if I -once got in I am afraid I would never get out again.”</p> - -<p>“You don’t mean—” began Oliver, with his heart -in his throat.</p> - -<p>Colonel Mendix gave a loud laugh.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_201"></a>[201]</span></p> - -<p>“I mean, Oliver Bright, that I have found you out,” -he replied. “You thought you were smart, but you -are not smart enough to outwit me. You are completely -in my power. It may be that you do not -realize it just at present, but you will, later on, never -fear. You cannot get the best of me as easily as you -may imagine.”</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_202"></a>[202]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XXX">CHAPTER XXX.<br /> -<small>A PERILOUS SITUATION.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>Oliver Bright was never so taken aback as when -he found himself and Gus Gregory in a deep pit in the -Aurora mine, and in Colonel Mendix’s power.</p> - -<p>The turn of affairs was so unexpected that for a -moment he could not utter a word. The villainous -colonel had found him out, and what the result would -be no one could conjecture.</p> - -<p>“American boys are not always so smart as they -think themselves,” continued the Spaniard, as he seated -himself upon the ledge above and looked down upon -the two.</p> - -<p>“What do you intend to do?” asked Oliver.</p> - -<p>“That is my business,” was the cold answer. “First, -however, I want to ask you a few questions.”</p> - -<p>“Maybe we won’t answer them,” returned Gus -sharply. He ached all over from the tumble he had -had.</p> - -<p>“You had better,” was the pointed reply. “Both of -you are completely in my power; I hold your very -lives in my hands.”</p> - -<p>Oliver could not help but shudder. As for Gus, he -gave a half-suppressed groan.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_203"></a>[203]</span></p> - -<p>“First, I want to know who sent you out here?” -went on Colonel Mendix. “Was it Arthur Bright?”</p> - -<p>Oliver was silent.</p> - -<p>“Did you hear my question?”</p> - -<p>“I did.”</p> - -<p>“And why didn’t you answer?”</p> - -<p>“I shall say nothing until you help us out of this -pit and conduct us back to your office,” was the boy’s -determined reply.</p> - -<p>“What! do you defy me?”</p> - -<p>“I do. You have no right to treat us in this -fashion.”</p> - -<p>“Ha, ha! right! Might is right out here. You -must answer my question.”</p> - -<p>“And I refuse to do so.”</p> - -<p>“Think well. I am not a man to be trifled with.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t need to think it over. I shall not answer a -single question till we are back in your office.”</p> - -<p>“Then you will tell me everything?”</p> - -<p>“Perhaps I will.”</p> - -<p>“I would not trust you. I think I had better leave -you here.”</p> - -<p>“Leave us here!” cried Gus in terror.</p> - -<p>“Exactly. Leave you here to the darkness and the -rats.” Colonel Mendix gave a cold laugh. “Oh, I -can tell you the rats are nice companions, especially -when they crawl all over you and nip you in the legs.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_204"></a>[204]</span></p> - -<p>Gus gave a shiver. The idea of a rat attacking him!</p> - -<p>“Perhaps <em>you</em> would like to tell something,” went -on the colonel.</p> - -<p>“Don’t you do it,” put in Oliver.</p> - -<p>“Not much,” replied Gus. “If you don’t say anything, -you can depend upon it neither will I.”</p> - -<p>“Come, what do you say?” went on the Spaniard -impatiently.</p> - -<p>“I refer you to my friend,” said Gus. “He is the -only one to do the talking for this crowd. Your -threats don’t frighten me for a cent,” he added boastfully, -more to keep up his courage than aught else.</p> - -<p>“And you would rather be left here to starve to -death?”</p> - -<p>Neither of the boys replied.</p> - -<p>“Very well then,” said the colonel, rising; “I will -leave you to yourselves for the night. Perhaps in the -morning you will have a different story to tell.”</p> - -<p>“You are going to leave us here?” asked Oliver.</p> - -<p>“Yes; unless you tell all I want to know.”</p> - -<p>“I will tell nothing.”</p> - -<p>“Then good-night to you. There is no use trying -to escape. Even if you manage to get up here again, I -shall take pains to close the passage in such a way that -you cannot get out.” And, with another loud laugh, -Colonel Mendix took up his lantern and disappeared, -leaving the two boys in total darkness.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_205"></a>[205]</span></p> - -<p>“Crickety, but we are in a pretty mess and no -mistake!” said Gus, as the last ray of light left -them.</p> - -<p>“You are right; but don’t let us despair,” returned -Oliver. “I think I did what was right; but it is -rough on you.”</p> - -<p>“Don’t mind me,” said Gus. “I owe you a good -deal. The question is, what is best to be done?”</p> - -<p>“Listen!”</p> - -<p>They did so. Far in the distance they could hear -the echo of Colonel Mendix’s footsteps, and the moving -of several stones, and then all became silent.</p> - -<p>“Do you think he spoke the truth about the rats?” -asked Gus with a shudder.</p> - -<p>“I don’t know, Gus; there may be rats here. But -he evidently wanted to frighten us all he could.”</p> - -<p>“Ugh! it makes me shiver to think of them. I -wish we had a light.”</p> - -<p>“I have some matches. I will strike one and -see what kind of a place this is.”</p> - -<p>“Hold on till I tear some pages out of my note-book -and make lighters out of them. We want to -save our matches.”</p> - -<p>“That’s so.”</p> - -<p>Gus soon had the lighters made. Then Oliver -struck a match, and they gazed about them.</p> - -<p>The place into which the Spaniard had led them<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_206"></a>[206]</span> -was a veritable pit, some thirty or forty feet in diameter. -On all sides the walls rose to the height -of twenty feet or more—steep walls, which caused -Oliver to shake his head sadly as he gazed at them.</p> - -<p>“Pretty tough job to climb them,” he said; “but -perhaps it can be done.”</p> - -<p>“It will <em>have</em> to be done. You do not intend to -stay down in this confounded hole?”</p> - -<p>“Not a minute longer than I have to. Remember, -Mr. Whyland will grow anxious if we do not return -in a reasonable time.”</p> - -<p>“Colonel Mendix puts me in mind of a snake. -His eyes are so cold and calculating they make me -shiver every time I look at them.”</p> - -<p>“Now if we only had a lamp,” said Oliver.</p> - -<p>“But we haven’t.”</p> - -<p>“I wonder if we could get this piece of wood to -burn,” went on the other, holding a stick he had -picked up.</p> - -<p>“You might, if you split up the end. Here, let -me do it with my knife.”</p> - -<p>As Gus spoke Oliver felt in his pocket for his -knife.</p> - -<p>“My knife is gone!” he exclaimed. “I left it -in the colonel’s office when I fixed the sole of my -boot.”</p> - -<p>“Didn’t it have your name on?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_207"></a>[207]</span></p> - -<p>“Why, of course! I see it all now! Colonel Mendix -had an easy job finding out who I was! What -a fool I was to leave the knife lying there!”</p> - -<p>“Never mind; it can’t be helped now, Olly, so -let us make the best of it. Here, I have the stick -ready.”</p> - -<p>Gus handed back the stick. Oliver lit another -match and applied it to the split end. It was rather -damp, but at last caught fire.</p> - -<p>“There! that is better than nothing!” declared -the stout youth. “It is bad enough to be down -here, without being in the dark. Now let us look -around and see what the chances for escape are.”</p> - -<p>Oliver did not reply. He was looking at a name -that was cut on the stick. The name was <span class="smcap">James -Barr</span>.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_208"></a>[208]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XXXI">CHAPTER XXXI.<br /> -<small>SEEKING DELIVERANCE.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>As will doubtless be remembered, James Barr was -the name of the surveyor who had been sent by Mr. -Bright to assist Colonel Mendix in locating the Aurora -mine.</p> - -<p>Oliver’s surprise can therefore be imagined when -he saw this same individual’s name cut in the stick -his friend had picked up to be used as a firebrand.</p> - -<p>“James Barr!” he cried. “It must be the same. -How wonderful!”</p> - -<p>“What are you talking about?” asked Gus.</p> - -<p>Oliver told him.</p> - -<p>“And he is reported to have lost his life in a flooding -of the mine,” he concluded.</p> - -<p>“It is strange,” said Gus; “but still it counts -for nothing. Barr might have cut his name on that -stick in a moment of idleness.”</p> - -<p>“Of course; but it shows that he was here. And -if that is so it is pretty good proof that this is the -Aurora mine.”</p> - -<p>“That is so. I did not think of that. I thought -that was all settled before.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_209"></a>[209]</span></p> - -<p>“There is nothing like being doubly sure. But -come, let us see if we cannot find some means of escape -while the stick lasts. When that is gone we -will be in darkness, for I see no more wood about.”</p> - -<p>Holding the stick up sideways, so that it would -burn and light the way, the two advanced on a tour -of discovery.</p> - -<p>It soon came to an end. On all sides were the -same perpendicular rocks.</p> - -<p>“Not much encouragement there,” remarked Oliver -grimly. “But we must find some way out. Here, -hold the torch, while I see if I cannot scale this -side.”</p> - -<p>Gus took the extended torch, and Oliver made a -desperate leap forward.</p> - -<p>He gained a hold, and arrived three-quarters of -the way up. Then he slipped, and rolled down to -his friend’s feet.</p> - -<p>“Not that time,” he cried; “but I think I can -do it.”</p> - -<p>Again he tried, and again the same result.</p> - -<p>“This clumsy coat and the heavy boots bother -me,” he declared. “I will take them off.”</p> - -<p>“How am I to get up, even if you do?” asked -Gus dolefully.</p> - -<p>“One thing at a time, Gus. Here, take the things. -One, two, three!”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_210"></a>[210]</span></p> - -<p>With a mighty spring Oliver made the jump. -Half way up he paused. Was he going to fail -again? No; he clung fast, reached up overhead, and -drew himself up into the gloom.</p> - -<p>“All right!” he called back. “Throw me the stick -and then perhaps I can help you up.”</p> - -<p>Gus flung the firebrand as best he could. Oliver -caught it and stuck it in a crevice.</p> - -<p>“Now make the jump up the rocks and catch my -hand,” he called down, and he leaned as far as possible -over the edge.</p> - -<p>Gus did so. Three times he failed. The fourth, -Oliver caught his wrist, and a moment later, puffing -and blowing, both stood on the edge of the pit, but -on the side opposite to that where they had entered.</p> - -<p>“Crickety! I don’t want to try any more such -jumps!” panted Gus. “I’ll be out of wind for a -month.”</p> - -<p>“And I trust we don’t get into any more such -holes,” laughed Oliver. “But the thing of it is, -have we bettered ourselves by the movement?”</p> - -<p>“That we can’t tell till we see where this passage -leads to,” returned the other, pointing to a narrow -opening in the rocks. “If that is only a blind we -are as bad off as we ever were.”</p> - -<p>“I think that if I were down here alone I would -go mad,” said Oliver.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_211"></a>[211]</span></p> - -<p>“I am sure I would. Heou! let us get out as -soon as we can!”</p> - -<p>Taking up the light, they proceeded down the narrow -passage. It was a low cavern, so low that in -many spots even Gus, the shorter of the two, was -compelled to stoop.</p> - -<p>“Hold on,” cried Oliver who was in advance; -“here is a stream of water. We don’t want to be -drowned!”</p> - -<p>“Indeed not! Is it deep?”</p> - -<p>Oliver made an examination with his hands.</p> - -<p>“Quite deep. But here is a spot that is not very -broad. I can jump it easily, and I guess you can -do the same.”</p> - -<p>Holding out the firebrand, he made the leap, and -landed safely upon the other side.</p> - -<p>“Now you,” he called to Gus; and in a moment -they were together again.</p> - -<p>It was not long before they entered what appeared -to be a large chamber. Here, from some place far -above, streamed in a faint light.</p> - -<p>“Hurrah!” cried Oliver. “There is open daylight -at last! If it was not for the fact that the -sun has set it would be lighter still. Come, let us -go on.”</p> - -<p>But they could not do so. On the opposite side -of the chamber, if such it might be called, could be -seen nothing but the solid rocks.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_212"></a>[212]</span></p> - -<p>“Blocked!” cried Gus in dismay, and Oliver -echoed the cry. “What shall we do now? Go -back?”</p> - -<p>“No, no! I think—” Oliver sprang aside and -pointed to a corner. “Oh, Gus, what is that?”</p> - -<p>The stout youth looked towards the spot indicated, -and turned pale. And small wonder; for -there, lying on its back, was the skeleton of a human -being.</p> - -<p>Both of the boys approached it slowly. It was -the first time they had seen so ghastly an object, -and it filled them with awe.</p> - -<p>“Some poor miner that wandered in here and -could not get out,” said Gus. “See, nothing but -his bones remain to tell the tale!”</p> - -<p>“And if he wandered in here and could not find -any way out, what are we to do?” asked Oliver in -almost a whisper, so horrible was the thought.</p> - -<p>“Don’t—don’t say that!” cried Gus; “my nerves -are already unstrung. We must do what we can, -and do it quickly too; for it will soon be night -and then morning, and if we don’t find anything -to eat—” And he finished with a groan.</p> - -<p>Oliver put his hand to his brow. What should -they do next? Which way should they turn?</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_213"></a>[213]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XXXII">CHAPTER XXXII.<br /> -<small>A VALUABLE FIND.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>As Oliver stood thinking, a bright object lying -upon the ground attracted his attention. He picked -it up. It proved to be a silver match-box.</p> - -<p>“Hello! here is something!” he said, and turned -it over in his hands. Upon one side were the initials -J. B.</p> - -<p>“This must have belonged to James Barr also,” -he went on. “I wonder if that skeleton—”</p> - -<p>He did not finish. Gus shook his head.</p> - -<p>“It looks that way,” he said. “Open the box and -see if there is anything in it.”</p> - -<p>Oliver did so, and brought forth several pages that -had been torn from a diary.</p> - -<p>“Here is something,” he said. “Hold the light so -that I can see what it is.”</p> - -<p>With trembling hands he unfolded the sheets and -scanned them over. He had hardly read a dozen -lines before he gave a loud cry.</p> - -<p>“Oh, what shame, what baseness!” he cried. -“This is the dying statement of James Barr, in -which he says that Colonel Mendix has enticed him<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_214"></a>[214]</span> -hither and made him a prisoner; that he is dying -with a fever, caught some time before, and that the -colonel wished to get him out of the way for fear -he may expose the fact that the Cortez mine lies -wholly within the Aurora mine limits; and that -Colonel Mendix, <em>alias</em> Guerotaz, is in reality a Spanish -counterfeiter named Guito!”</p> - -<p>Oliver was both pained and delighted over the -discovery he had made,—pained that James Barr had -come to so heartless a death, and delighted to know -that he now had the means within his power to -cause Colonel Mendix’s immediate arrest, providing, -of course, he could gain his own liberty.</p> - -<p>“What a rascal that Spaniard is!” he exclaimed. -“Just think of his luring poor Barr to his death -while the man was sick with the fever! I would -like nothing better than to give the brute a sound -thrashing, and he deserves a thousand!”</p> - -<p>“Never fear but what the law will take care of -him,” replied Gus. “They are not letting counterfeiters -off so easily, to say nothing of Barr’s death, -and this mine swindle.”</p> - -<p>“If we were only out of this hole!”</p> - -<p>“That’s just it. But gracious, I don’t know how -to turn!”</p> - -<p>“Let us go back to that watercourse,” suggested -Oliver after a moment’s thought. “That must -lead somewhere.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_215"></a>[215]</span></p> - -<p>“You are right. I never thought of that; but -if there is escape that way, I wonder why Barr -didn’t—”</p> - -<p>“He was probably too sick with the fever,” said -Oliver, partly to keep his own courage up. “Come -on. <i lang="la" xml:lang="la">Nil desperandum!</i>”</p> - -<p>In a few minutes they were back at the watercourse. -Here they found a narrow passage, scarcely -a foot in height, leading upwards.</p> - -<p>“Shall we try it?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“Certainly. Try anything.”</p> - -<p>So Oliver crawled into the hole on his hands and -knees, and Gus followed. They had not gone far -before they found the rock giving way in many -places to dirt.</p> - -<p>“I take that for a good sign,” said Oliver. “I -think we are near the top of the hill, but how far -from the opening I cannot tell.”</p> - -<p>For ten minutes more they continued on their -painful journey. Then Oliver came to a halt.</p> - -<p>“Nothing but rock ahead,” he said.</p> - -<p>Both he and Gus were ready to cry with vexation. -Had they taken all this trouble in vain?</p> - -<p>“Are you sure?”</p> - -<p>“That is all I can see. Wait till I dig over it -where there is a bit of dirt.”</p> - -<p>Oliver went to digging vigorously. But with his<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_216"></a>[216]</span> -bare hands it was slow work, and he was about to -give up in despair, when suddenly his hand struck -an opening beyond.</p> - -<p>“There is a passage!” he exclaimed. “Wait till -I enlarge the opening.”</p> - -<p>He worked away for fully quarter of an hour more. -Then he squeezed his way through and helped the -stout youth to do the same.</p> - -<p>“This is better!” remarked Gus, when they found -themselves in a much larger passage on the other side -of the opening. “Now let us hurry; the stick shows -signs of going out.”</p> - -<p>There was no need of urging; Oliver was traveling -at the height of his speed. Up and up they went, -the passage growing wider as they advanced.</p> - -<p>“Hold up,” cried Oliver, suddenly stopping short. -Then he put the firebrand behind him and peered -ahead. “Hurrah! I see the light of evening shining -into the other end of this passage. We are out of it -at last!”</p> - -<p>And such proved to be a fact; for five minutes -later they emerged, and found themselves at the very -top of the mountain, at a spot where they could look -down upon the mine buildings.</p> - -<p>“Thank God we are out of that hole!” cried Oliver. -“Oh, how good it seems to be in the open air -once more!”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_217"></a>[217]</span></p> - -<p>“Won’t that Spaniard be taken aback when he -learns that we have escaped,” said Gus. “He was -so positive he had outwitted you!”</p> - -<p>“We must find our way back to camp at once. Mr. -Whyland will be getting anxious concerning us.”</p> - -<p>“You are right. Let’s see, I think the spot is in -that direction.”</p> - -<p>“So do I, just beyond the three tall trees.”</p> - -<p>A minute later, after a whiff of fresh air, they struck -out for the camp. They had hardly appeared in sight -when Mr. Whyland came running out to meet them.</p> - -<p>“You have been gone longer than I expected!” -he exclaimed. “Where are your mules?”</p> - -<p>“We have got a long story to tell,” said Oliver -and Gus in a breath. And sitting down beside the -sheltered fire Mr. Whyland had started, they related -their adventures.</p> - -<p>Of course the gentleman was much astonished.</p> - -<p>“It sounds almost too strange to be true,” he said. -“Let me see that statement that was left by James -Barr. No doubt it will prove of the utmost importance -to us.”</p> - -<p>He took the leaves, and by the light of the blazing -fire read them aloud. All hands listened with rapt -attention.</p> - -<p>They contained but little more than what Oliver -had intimated, saving the telling of where much of<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_218"></a>[218]</span> -the proof of Colonel Mendix’s villainy could be found,—in -San Francisco, and in a number of places in -Brazil.</p> - -<p>“I guess we have <em>him</em> in <em>our</em> power now,” said -Mr. Whyland when the reading was finished. “If -only Cottle was here, we might go ahead.”</p> - -<p>“I think we can afford to wait a day,” laughed -Oliver, he felt so relieved to be safe in camp once -more. “Colonel Mendix still thinks we are in the -mine pit.”</p> - -<p>“That is so. If he saw you now he would think -you were a ghost.”</p> - -<p>“I would like to play ghost on him and scare him -into a fit,” said Gus. “He deserves it.”</p> - -<p>“He will get more than a ghost scare when we -get after him,” observed Oliver sternly. “He will -find out that leaving us there to perish is no light -offense.”</p> - -<p>“I cannot understand how I was so blind to his -real character when I went into the mine deal with -him,” put in Mr. Whyland.</p> - -<p>“That proves he is a born actor as well as rascal,” -said Oliver.</p> - -<p>“I can’t help but feel sorry for that James Barr,” -observed Gus. “I suppose he trusted Mendix just -as much as anybody did.”</p> - -<p>“Undoubtedly,” rejoined Oliver. “If he had stood<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_219"></a>[219]</span> -in with the Spaniard, it isn’t likely he would have -been left to die in that horrible fashion.”</p> - -<p>“I presume you two lads are pretty well fagged -out,” said Mr. Whyland a few minutes later. “You -had better turn in and try to get a good sleep.”</p> - -<p>“Fagged out don’t express it,” yawned Gus. “I -am half asleep all over, as the saying goes.”</p> - -<p>“You’ll be stiff enough in the morning, I’ll warrant,” -laughed the gentleman. “You are not accustomed -to such climbing as you had to do in the -mine.”</p> - -<p>“No.” Gus shuddered. “My, but it was awful! -I didn’t dare to think of not getting out for fear -my hair would turn white!”</p> - -<p>“I can realize now the horror of a cave-in in a -coal-mine,” put in Oliver. “It’s one of the most -dreadful things that can happen to any one.”</p> - -<p>“You are right, my lad,” said Mr. Whyland. “But -come, there is no use to dwell upon what you have -gone through. Try to forget it, and give your mind -and body a chance to recuperate.”</p> - -<p>“Well, I’m going to try it, anyway,” grumbled -Gus, as he prepared to retire. “If I get a nightmare, -just poke me in the ribs somebody.”</p> - -<p>“We will!” laughed Oliver.</p> - -<p>“You see, I don’t want to go through it again, -even in my sleep.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_220"></a>[220]</span></p> - -<p>After this there was quite a bit more of talking, -and finally they retired, to rest, if not to sleep.</p> - -<p>On the following morning as they were getting -breakfast, they were surprised to see a horseman approaching -from the direction of the mine.</p> - -<p>“Who can it be?” questioned every one.</p> - -<p>“Perhaps it’s the colonel,” said Oliver. “Suppose -you hide, Mr. Whyland, and let only Gus and I meet -him.”</p> - -<p>“A good idea.”</p> - -<p>The gentleman stepped behind some rocks. As he -did so the horseman came nearer, and they saw that -it was indeed Colonel Mendix.</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_221"></a>[221]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XXXIII">CHAPTER XXXIII.<br /> -<small>BROUGHT TO BOOK.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>“Good-morning, Colonel,” began Oliver as they -went forth to meet their visitor, though with pistol -in hand.</p> - -<p>The Spaniard nearly fell from his horse.</p> - -<p>“What, you!” he shrieked. “You!”</p> - -<p>“Yes, Colonel Mendix, I and my friend, as you -see. You did not have us quite so much in your -power as you thought.”</p> - -<p>“How—how did you escape?” faltered the -Spaniard.</p> - -<p>“That is our business.”</p> - -<p>The man’s brow darkened.</p> - -<p>“What do you want here, any way?” he demanded. -“You have no right to hang around my -mine.”</p> - -<p>“Your mine? You mean my father’s mine.”</p> - -<p>“Bah! Not so. Your father’s mine is abandoned.”</p> - -<p>“My father’s mine is here, and in full operation. -The Cortez and the Aurora mines are one and the -same.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_222"></a>[222]</span></p> - -<p>“Who says so?”</p> - -<p>“Felix Cottle for one—”</p> - -<p>“His word is worth nothing. He is—”</p> - -<p>“He tells the truth.”</p> - -<p>“Right you are,” said a voice from behind; and -turning, the two beheld the guide, who had just ridden -up.</p> - -<p>“Back already?” exclaimed Oliver.</p> - -<p>“Yes; and all O. K.,” replied Cottle with a knowing -wink. “Collared my man on the fly.”</p> - -<p>“Cottle!” cried Colonel Mendix, changing color.</p> - -<p>“Yes; just in time to see you get your deserts,” -with a short, dry laugh. “Reckon we are square -now, Colonel.”</p> - -<p>“What do you mean?”</p> - -<p>“That there young man will tell you, him and -Mr. Whyland.”</p> - -<p>“Whyland!” The colonel was deadly pale now. -“Is he—”</p> - -<p>“Yes, he is here,” said a calm voice; and the -gentleman stepped forward. “Colonel Mendix, when -we parted in the East years ago, I guess you did -not expect that we would meet some day out here.”</p> - -<p>The Spaniard bit his lips. He was trembling with -fear.</p> - -<p>“I—I—what do you want?” he faltered.</p> - -<p>“We want our rights,” replied Oliver.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_223"></a>[223]</span></p> - -<p>“There is nothing here for you.”</p> - -<p>“I think there is,” returned Mr. Whyland. “Mr. -Shattock!” he called out, and a tall, sharp-eyed -stranger rode from under cover.</p> - -<p>“The sheriff of the county!” muttered Colonel -Mendix, and on the instant his backbone seemed to -desert him.</p> - -<p>It was an exciting moment for all. To Oliver -Bright it was a time of triumph. The termination -of his quest was at hand, full of the promise of -success.</p> - -<p>As for Colonel Mendix, it took the Spaniard several -seconds to recover from the shock he experienced -when the sheriff appeared upon the scene. -He saw at once that matters had taken a most serious -turn.</p> - -<p>“Well, Colonel Guerotaz, this appears to be a -grave business you have been engaged in,” said the -sheriff, as he dismounted from his horse and strode -over to where the Spaniard sat.</p> - -<p>“I do not know what you are talking about,” replied -Colonel Mendix as stiffly as he could.</p> - -<p>“You don’t?”</p> - -<p>“No, sir.”</p> - -<p>“Well, it is simply this: That you have done -everything in your power to defraud Mr. Whyland -here and one Arthur Bright out of their lawful share<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_224"></a>[224]</span> -in a certain mining scheme connected with the -Aurora mine—”</p> - -<p>“Not so,” cried the colonel. “The Aurora mine -is one of no value, just as represented to them.”</p> - -<p>“They are willing to swear otherwise, at least Mr. -Whyland is, and Felix Cottle is willing to testify—”</p> - -<p>“I don’t care. I have my rights. My word is as -good as—”</p> - -<p>“And there is other proof,” put in Oliver. “James -Barr—”</p> - -<p>Colonel Mendix jumped up as if shot.</p> - -<p>“James Barr! James Barr is dead.”</p> - -<p>“We know that. And we also know how he came -to his death.”</p> - -<p>The Spaniard started.</p> - -<p>“But his dying statement remains—”</p> - -<p>“His dying statement? Why, he was drowned in -the mine—”</p> - -<p>“No, not drowned, but made a prisoner while suffering -from fever,” replied Oliver. “And when you -shut us up in the pit in the mine we came across his -skeleton, and near it found a statement in a match-box -for safe-keeping.”</p> - -<p>“It is false.”</p> - -<p>“It is the truth. That statement is now in Mr. -Whyland’s possession. Perhaps he will read it to -you.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_225"></a>[225]</span></p> - -<p>“That is not necessary,” said that gentleman. “I -will put the statement in Sheriff Shattock’s hands. It -is enough to say that it proves our claim to what -is known as the Cortez mine, as well as the Aurora, -and also that Colonel Guerotaz, <em>alias</em> Mendix, is in -reality a noted counterfeiter named Guito.”</p> - -<p>At the last words a shrill cry burst from the Spaniard’s -lips. The revelation had been so unexpected -that it completely unnerved him.</p> - -<p>“You—you—” he began.</p> - -<p>“You had better not say much,” suggested the -sheriff. “It may all count against you at the trial.” -He walked over and put his hand upon Colonel Mendix’s -knee. “You are my prisoner.”</p> - -<p>“Your prisoner!”</p> - -<p>“Exactly. You will please dismount at once.”</p> - -<p>“This is an outrage—”</p> - -<p>“Come, say no more. There are others who suspect -you, and I have heard before that you were -supposed to be an escaped criminal.”</p> - -<p>“I will not submit. I will—”</p> - -<p>“You will submit,” replied the sheriff firmly. -“Here, hold out your hands— Hello! Stop him!” -For Colonel Mendix had on the instant wheeled -around his horse, and was galloping off at the top of -the animal’s speed.</p> - -<p>“Catch me, if you can!” he cried mockingly. -“Catch Cirilo Guito if you are able!”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_226"></a>[226]</span></p> - -<p>And away went horse and rider like a whirlwind.</p> - -<p>“Well, by thunder!” ejaculated Felix Cottle; -“he’s going to try to sneak!”</p> - -<p>“After him!” shouted the sheriff. “Come on, all -of you!”</p> - -<p>“We’re with you!” responded Cottle. “He must -not be allowed to reach those hills yonder. If he -does, it will be like looking for that pin in the -haystack, and worse.”</p> - -<p>Off went the sheriff and the guide, with Mr. -Whyland not far behind them.</p> - -<p>Oliver and Gus stared at each other. What -should they do?</p> - -<p>“Come, Gus,” cried the former. “The more the -better in a case of this kind.”</p> - -<p>And he started for his animal, tethered but a -short distance away.</p> - -<p>“But the camp”—began the stout youth.</p> - -<p>“Must take care of itself. There is no one about -to rob us, anyway. Come.”</p> - -<p>Gus needed no second urging. Indeed, he would -not have remained behind alone under any consideration.</p> - -<p>It took some time to put their animals in proper -condition for use. By the time they had mounted, -the crowd ahead were just disappearing over the -brow of a low hill.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_227"></a>[227]</span></p> - -<p>Side by side, the two boys urged their animals -along at top speed. Oliver had his weapons ready -for use, but trusted he would not be called upon -to use them.</p> - -<p>Crack! The sharp sound of a rifle broke the -stillness. They rightfully guessed that the sheriff -had fired on the fugitive, but whether he had reached -his mark or not they could not tell. They continued -to move forward with eyes and ears painfully -on the alert.</p> - -<p>The top of the hill gained, they could see Mr. -Whyland and the others climbing a rocky slope over -to the westward. Near the top of the slope, among -some scanty brush, the boys could see Colonel Mendix, -astride of his horse, urging the animal along -with hand and spur.</p> - -<p>Oliver could have fired at the man with ease, but -the thought of bloodshed held him back. He wished -to capture the Spaniard as much as did any of the -others, but he would not run the risk of having -the rascal’s blood on his conscience.</p> - -<p>As Oliver and Gus began the ascent of the rocky -slope Colonel Mendix appeared at the extreme top. -For a single instant he looked back and shook his -fist at his pursuers.</p> - -<p>Again the sheriff fired, and so did Felix Cottle; -and this time the fleeing criminal was wounded in<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_228"></a>[228]</span> -the leg. He gave a shrill cry of pain, sent back -two shots in return, both of which flew wide of -their mark and disappeared.</p> - -<p>“He is gone!” gasped Oliver.</p> - -<p>“Don’t you think they will get him?” queried Gus.</p> - -<p>“I don’t see how they can; the woods over yonder -are so thick. But come, we may as well follow the -others;” this as the stout youth began to lag behind.</p> - -<p>“I’m so stiff, from yesterday,” groaned Gus. But, -nevertheless, he urged his horse on, and they steadily -decreased the distance between themselves and Mr. -Whyland and the others.</p> - -<p>From the way the sheriff headed, it was evident he -thought Colonel Mendix was trying to ride in a circle. -Sheriff Shattock’s words soon proved this.</p> - -<p>“This Mendix, as you call him,” he said, “is trying -to get back to the mine. No doubt he wishes to clean -out the office-safe before leaving this section of the -country.”</p> - -<p>“Then would it not be better if one of us went back -toward the mine?” suggested Mr. Whyland.</p> - -<p>“I reckon it would be.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll go to the mine if you say so,” put in Felix -Cottle. “I’m better acquainted around the place than -any of you.”</p> - -<p>“All right; go,” said the sheriff; and at once the -guide turned back on the trail.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_229"></a>[229]</span></p> - -<p>He soon came upon the boys, to whom he explained -the situation. Gus wanted to return with him, but -Oliver was for following Mr. Whyland; and so they -went on, leaving Felix Cottle to ride on to the Aurora -mine alone.</p> - -<p>“If we hurry we can catch up with Mr. Whyland,” -said Oliver. “Come, Gus; remember the chase is not -likely to last long.”</p> - -<p>“I’ll do my best!” cried the stout youth. “Look-out, -Oliver!” he went on suddenly.</p> - -<p>He dropped down on his horse’s back, and instinctively -Oliver did the same. There were two reports, -and a clipping through the leaves of the trees followed.</p> - -<p>“My gracious, he’s firing on us!” gasped Gus. -“We must try to keep out of sight.” And he shuddered -so greatly that he almost fell from his saddle.</p> - -<p>“To the left—where the bushes are thicker!” exclaimed -Oliver.</p> - -<p>He led the way; and hanging low behind his horse’s -neck, Gus followed. Soon they were once again well -screened.</p> - -<p>In the meanwhile the shots fired by Colonel Mendix -had served one good purpose. The sheriff had lost -sight of the rascal; but now the reports helped the -officer of the law to locate him, and he struck off on -a side trail, with Mr. Whyland close at his heels.</p> - -<p>The ground was rocky and uneven and full of loose<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_230"></a>[230]</span> -stones, and the horses made but poor headway. But in -this matter they were no worse off than was Colonel -Mendix, and both were satisfied that they were making -just as good progress as the man they were pursuing.</p> - -<p>Five minutes later Oliver and Gus joined Mr. Whyland -and the sheriff. They came through a belt of -timber and found the two men on the defensive.</p> - -<p>“Hullo, it’s the boys!” cried Mr. Whyland. “Have -you seen anything of Mendix?” he went on anxiously.</p> - -<p>“He is over to the left, in the clump of pines,” -responded Oliver. “But be careful. Did you not -hear him fire on us? The bullets whistled right over -our heads!”</p> - -<p>“We heard the shots,” said the sheriff. “The -pines, eh? Then he is making for the mine without -a doubt.”</p> - -<p>“Is there no way of heading him off?” asked -Mr. Whyland.</p> - -<p>“I believe there is—down at the mountain torrent -some distance below here. But no time is to be -wasted.”</p> - -<p>Without further words they rode on through some -low brush and over a rocky plain. While on the -latter spot, all hands kept a sharp lookout for stray -shots; but none came. Clearly Colonel Mendix had -passed down along the watercourse, just as the sheriff -had surmised.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_231"></a>[231]</span></p> - -<p>“Wait!”</p> - -<p>The sheriff uttered the word in a low tone, as -he halted on the very edge of a large, overhanging -rock.</p> - -<p>The others drew up behind him.</p> - -<p>Leaping to the ground, Sheriff Shattock moved -cautiously to the front, and peered over.</p> - -<p>“What do you see?” whispered Oliver.</p> - -<p>“Nothing, as yet; but wait. If I am right, he -will come along the road, just below here.”</p> - -<p>“And if he does?” put in Mr. Whyland.</p> - -<p>“I reckon I’ll make him come to terms,” was the -slow but determined response.</p> - -<p>A minute—and another—passed. To the boys -they seemed hours.</p> - -<p>Suddenly the sheriff leaped up.</p> - -<p>“Halt!” he shouted, and aimed his pistol downward. -“Halt!”</p> - -<p>Looking over the edge of the rock, the others saw -Colonel Mendix riding along a narrow path beside -the watercourse.</p> - -<p>At the sound of the sheriff’s voice the Spaniard -looked quickly around, but he did not slacken his -animal’s speed.</p> - -<p>“Did you hear?” demanded Sheriff Shattock. -“Halt! I have a dead aim on you.”</p> - -<p>At this Colonel Mendix uttered a loud cry to<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_232"></a>[232]</span> -his horse, and away bound the animal on a swift -gallop.</p> - -<p>The sheriff fired, and the sound of the shot, echoing -and re-echoing through the cañon, frightened -the animal below. He leaped to one side; and in a -trice horse and rider were in the mountain stream, -and being borne along by the swift current.</p> - -<p>“Just my miserable luck!” muttered the sheriff. -“See, he knows enough to duck under, and thus -avoid another shot!”</p> - -<p>“What is best to do now?” asked Oliver anxiously.</p> - -<p>“We must go down to the slope below here and -try to head him off. Quick! there is not a moment -to lose!”</p> - -<p>Again the sheriff went on, with the three others -stringing after him in single file. The flat rock was -passed, and once more they found themselves among -the loose stones and short, thorny bushes. The sheriff -was the best rider of the party, and he soon drew -ahead. Gus was the worst laggard, and he begged -Oliver not to leave him alone.</p> - -<p>“This bit of the country may be full of snakes -and wild beasts,” said the stout youth. “And I -don’t want to face anything like that all alone.”</p> - -<p>“I don’t doubt but what there are both snakes -and wild beasts here,” returned Oliver. “But I doubt -if they molest us if we leave them alone.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_233"></a>[233]</span></p> - -<p>“But suppose a big mountain lion should leap out -after us”—</p> - -<p>“Oh, pshaw! Even that wouldn’t be any worse -than having Colonel Mendix use us for targets.”</p> - -<p>“That’s true too!” Gus gave a groan. “It’s a -pity he can’t drown himself in that river! It would -be a good job done.”</p> - -<p>“Such rascals don’t pass out of existence so easily, -Gus. But come, we really must hurry along. If -we don’t, we’ll miss Mr. Whyland and the sheriff -altogether. And I must confess I haven’t the least -idea where we are or in what direction our camp -lies.”</p> - -<p>“Nor I. Well, I’ll do my best.”</p> - -<p>The thought that they would be left behind and -become lost did more to urge Gus ahead than anything -else. They proceeded over the rocks on a fairly -brisk trot; and when the slope leading down to the -mountain stream was reached Mr. Whyland and the -sheriff were but a hundred yards in advance.</p> - -<p>The edge of the stream was hidden by an irregular -growth of bushes, so it was impossible to see what -was beyond until these were parted. The sheriff, -finding a shallow spot, made his horse wade out into -the open.</p> - -<p>“There he is!”</p> - -<p>“Where?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_234"></a>[234]</span></p> - -<p>“Over on the opposite side! He is just crawling -up the bank behind a clump of overhanging trees!”</p> - -<p>The sheriff pointed with his finger, and Mr. Whyland -and the boys, who were just coming up, saw -that he was right.</p> - -<p>“Where is his horse?”</p> - -<p>“Already on shore. Come; there is but one thing -to do now,” went on Sheriff Shattock.</p> - -<p>“What is that?” asked the three others simultaneously.</p> - -<p>“We must ford the stream.”</p> - -<p>“Can we do that?” asked Oliver.</p> - -<p>“Yes. Just below here it widens out and is not -over a foot and a half deep. I will show you the -spot. And we will be certain to head off our quarry, -for he cannot turn back on that side.”</p> - -<p>Without giving Colonel Mendix time to discover -them they drew back behind the bushes and followed -the sheriff’s lead along the watercourse. In less than -five minutes they came to the spot he had mentioned. -Here the stream was three times its natural width -and one could have almost leaped from rock to -rock without wetting a foot.</p> - -<p>The horses went over readily enough, although -they were dry, and longed to drink. But they could -not stop to humor the beasts. They reached the -opposite shore and drew up behind a convenient -bowlder.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_235"></a>[235]</span></p> - -<p>A clatter of hoofs was heard, and an instant later -Colonel Mendix dashed past on his horse, rider and -animal leaving a stream of wet behind them.</p> - -<p>“Stop!” commanded the sheriff again. “You can’t -escape us now!”</p> - -<p>The Spaniard muttered something in his native -tongue, and went on faster than ever, with the -others in hot pursuit.</p> - -<p>“He intends to escape if he can,” said Gus. He -was completely fagged out and ready to drop from -his saddle.</p> - -<p>“Come on!”</p> - -<p>It was the cry of the sheriff as he made after -Colonel Mendix, riding as he had never ridden before. -He was warmed up to the chase, and meant -to end it in a very few minutes.</p> - -<p>The way was a treacherous one, and the rascal -ahead was compelled shortly to slow up. Soon the -sheriff was again within hailing distance.</p> - -<p>“Stop, or I’ll fire!” he commanded.</p> - -<p>The Spaniard turned. He held a pistol in his -hand and pointed it at Sheriff Shattock’s head.</p> - -<p>Before he could pull the trigger, the officer fired -his own weapon. The shot struck Colonel Mendix’s -horse, and the animal leaped into the air and fell -down, throwing the Spaniard over his head.</p> - -<p>When they drew near, they saw that in falling<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_236"></a>[236]</span> -the Spaniard had struck his head upon a sharp rock, -and that the blood was flowing profusely from a -wound in his temple. He was unconscious, and it -took fully ten minutes to bring him to his senses.</p> - -<p>“I give up,” he said in a faint voice. “The fates -are against me, and I am in the hands of the law at -last.”</p> - -<p>Shortly after, the whole party rode to the office -of the Cortez mine. Here the safe was opened, and -an examination of its contents proved all the statements -made against Colonel Mendix to be true.</p> - -<p>Sheriff Shattock at once took charge of the criminal. -By the suggestion of Mr. Whyland he appointed -Cottle as temporary superintendent of the -mine until the law should have taken its course.</p> - -<p>The situation of affairs was fully explained to -all the men at work,—some thirty in number. They -were surprised; but as none of them had ever liked -Mendix, they took the change in good part, especially -after Mr. Whyland told them that they should every -one be well rewarded if they remained true to their -duty.</p> - -<p>Then Oliver and Mr. Whyland sat down to figure -out the probable value of the mine. It was a tedious, -but highly gratifying task.</p> - -<p>“One hundred and seventy-five thousand dollars!” -gasped Oliver, as he surveyed the figures. “Can it -be possible?”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_237"></a>[237]</span></p> - -<p>“It is,” laughed the gentleman. “Your father will -be a rich man.”</p> - -<p>“What welcome news it will be to him! This -mine was our last hope. Had it failed us we would -have been thrown upon the world without a dollar. -But I am glad for your sake also, for you did so -much towards getting our rights.”</p> - -<p>“Not half as much as you, my boy. The real -credit is wholly yours.”</p> - -<p>On the following day, after all necessary preparations -were made, Oliver and Gus departed with the -sheriff and the prisoner on the return. At Ford’s -store the sheriff left them, but the two boys had no -difficulty in following the trail back to Sacramento.</p> - -<p>“Now for the first train home!” said Oliver. -“Father must hear the good news without delay.”</p> - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_238"></a>[238]</span></p> - -<h2 class="nobreak" id="CHAPTER_XXXIV">CHAPTER XXXIV.<br /> -<small>CONCLUSION.</small></h2> -</div> - - -<p>“Too bad! I thought there would surely be some -word from Oliver to-day.”</p> - -<p>It was Mr. Bright who spoke. He sat in an invalid -chair on the side porch, propped up by soft -pillows. Donald, the man of all work, had just returned -from the post-office with the information that -there were no letters.</p> - -<p>Mr. Bright was getting well rapidly, but the lines -of care were plainly to be seen upon his brow. He -started up with a deep sigh.</p> - -<p>“Nearly two weeks since I received any word,” he -murmured to himself. “How slowly the time drags! -Can it be possible that he was too hopeful and that -the Aurora has proved worthless after all?”</p> - -<p>He passed his hand over his brow.</p> - -<p>“If that is so what is to become of us? I am -getting too old to work, and he has no trade to -which he can turn his hand.”</p> - -<p>As he concluded, the latch on the gate was lifted, -and, looking up, the sick man saw Dr. Tangus enter -the yard, and walk up the gravel path.</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_239"></a>[239]</span></p> - -<p>“Good-morning, Mr. Bright,” he said stiffly.</p> - -<p>“Good-morning, doctor,” was the low reply. “Take -a seat on the bench. I am sorry there is not a chair -here.”</p> - -<p>“This will do very well.” The learned man paused -for a moment. “How are you feeling?” he asked.</p> - -<p>“Much better, thank you. Another week and I -think I will be all right.”</p> - -<p>“I am glad to hear it. I suppose you know the -purpose of my visit to-day.”</p> - -<p>“You are after the payment of that money.”</p> - -<p>“Yes. You know it was due yesterday.”</p> - -<p>“I know it was. But cannot you wait a few days -longer? I am expecting word from my son by every -mail or by telegraph.”</p> - -<p>“Concerning that mining scheme you mentioned?”</p> - -<p>“Yes.”</p> - -<p>Dr. Tangus tossed his head.</p> - -<p>“I don’t believe that amounts to much,” he said. -“You are altogether too sanguine about it.”</p> - -<p>“My son Oliver—”</p> - -<p>“That boy isn’t as smart as you think he is. His -going off on a wild-goose chase—”</p> - -<p>“It was no wild-goose chase, doctor.”</p> - -<p>“I think it was. But, of course, that is none of -my business. All I ask is that you pay the money -due.”</p> - -<p><span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_240"></a>[240]</span></p> - -<p>“I cannot do that just at present.”</p> - -<p>“Then I will have to put the case in my lawyer’s -hands—”</p> - -<p>“At once?”</p> - -<p>“At once.”</p> - -<p>Mr. Bright felt a deep pang shoot through his -heart. His pecuniary difficulties were to be dragged -before the public at last.</p> - -<p>“Well, if you must,” he began slowly. Then he -stopped short and half rose from his chair. That -figure hurrying so swiftly down the road towards the -house seemed strangely familiar. Was it—could it -be—“Oliver!” he cried out, “Oliver, my boy!”</p> - -<p>“Yes, father, home again!” was the glad response; -and a moment later father and son were in each -other’s arms.</p> - -<p>“I did not write or telegraph because I wanted -to surprise you,” said the boy. “How do you feel?” -And then, noticing Dr. Tangus, “Excuse me, Doctor, -I did not see you before. How do you do?” and -he held out his hand.</p> - -<p>Dr. Tangus took it coldly.</p> - -<p>“So you are back from your wild trip,” he remarked.</p> - -<p>“Yes, sir; and glad of it.”</p> - -<p>“Dr. Tangus has just called for his money,” put -in Mr. Bright. “He says he must be paid at once<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_241"></a>[241]</span> -or he will go to law. Tell me the worst, my -boy.”</p> - -<p>“There is no worst to tell,” replied Oliver. “Dr. -Tangus shall be paid whenever he wishes the money. -The Aurora mine has been located, and is to-day worth -one hundred and seventy-five thousand dollars.”</p> - -<p>“Oliver!”</p> - -<p>“It is true, father, every word of it. Here are -the papers to prove the fact.” And the boy drew -from his pocket a large envelope and handed it over.</p> - -<p>“And your father owns an interest in this mine?” -asked Dr. Tangus. He felt mighty cheap.</p> - -<p>“My father owns five-eighths of it. Of the other -three-eighths, one part belongs to the estate of one -James Barr, and the other two to Mr. Whyland of -Boston, who has very kindly loaned us his check for -three thousand dollars to help my father out of his -difficulties;” and Oliver passed the check over for inspection.</p> - -<p>“Seems straight enough,” grunted the doctor. “I -will call again to-morrow. I have no more time to -spare to-day;” and catching up his hat, he left without -another word.</p> - -<p>“Oliver, you have saved us from ruin!” cried -Mr. Bright with tears in his eyes. “But for you -it would have gone hard indeed with us.”</p> - -<p>“I am glad the search has ended so well,” said<span class="pagenum"><a id="Page_242"></a>[242]</span> -the boy; “glad for your sake, and glad for my -own.”</p> - -<hr class="tb" /> - -<p>Several years have passed. Oliver is now at college, -and has for a room-mate Gus Gregory, who -is as stout and as full of good-humor as ever.</p> - -<p>The Aurora mine is in active operation, managed -by competent and trustworthy men. James Barr’s -interest was purchased by Mr. Whyland, and the -money went to support the surveyor’s aged mother, -his only known relative.</p> - -<p>The Spaniard, known to the reader as Colonel Mendix, -is now in prison, suffering the full penalty of the -law. Let us trust that when he comes forth once -more it will be with the determination to lead a -better life in the future.</p> - -<p>Mr. Bright still lives at his old home, surrounded -with all the ease and comfort that money can procure. -Of Oliver he never tires of talking.</p> - -<p>“One boy in a thousand,” he says. “Thank God -for giving me such a son in my old age!”</p> - -<p>And with these words let us say good-by.</p> - - -<p class="p2 noic">THE END.</p> - - - - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p class="noi adseries"><span class="smcap">The Stratemeyer Popular Series</span></p> -</div> - - -<p class="noi">10 volumes Illustrated and handsomely bound in gold and -colors Attractive new cover designs Price $.75 per volume</p> - -<div class="figright" id="i_ad01"> - <img class="illowe10" src="images/i_ad01.jpg" - alt="Shorthand Tom the Reporter" - title="Shorthand Tom the Reporter" /> -</div> - -<p class="cap">Since the passing of Henty, Edward -Stratemeyer is the most widely read -of all living writers for the young, and -each year extends the vast and enthusiastic -throng. In obedience to the popular -demand we have established this <span class="smcap">Popular -Series</span> comprising ten representative -books by this great writer, on which -special prices can be made. The stories -are bright and breezy, moral in tone, and -while full of adventure, are not sensational. -These books, at a popular price, will be a -rare treat for the boys and girls.</p> - -<ol> -<li>The Last Cruise of the Spitfire Or Luke Foster’s Strange -Voyage</li> - -<li>Reuben Stone’s Discovery Or The Young Miller of Torrent -Bend</li> - -<li>True to Himself Or Roger Strong’s Struggle for Place</li> - -<li>Richard Dare’s Venture Or Striking Out for Himself</li> - -<li>Oliver Bright’s Search Or The Mystery of a Mine</li> - -<li>To Alaska for Gold Or The Fortune Hunters of the Yukon</li> - -<li>The Young Auctioneer Or The Polishing of a Rolling -Stone</li> - -<li>Bound to be an Electrician Or Franklin Bell’s Success</li> - -<li>Shorthand Tom the Reporter Or The Exploits of a Bright -Boy</li> - -<li>Fighting for His Own Or The Fortunes of a Young Artist</li> -</ol> - - -<p class="noic adauthor">Lothrop, Lee & Shepard Co., Boston</p> - - - - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p class="noi adseries">THE FAMOUS “OLD GLORY SERIES”</p> -</div> - -<p class="noi author">By EDWARD STRATEMEYER</p> - -<p class="noic"><i>Author of “The Bound to Succeed Series,” “The Ship and Shore -Series,” “Colonial Series,” “Pan-American Series,” etc.</i></p> - -<p class="noic">Six volumes Cloth Illustrated Price per volume $1.25</p> - -<div class="figleft" id="i_ad02"> - <img class="illowe10" src="images/i_ad02.jpg" - alt="Fighting in Cuban Waters" - title="Fighting in Cuban Waters" /> -</div> - -<ul> -<li>UNDER DEWEY AT MANILA<br /> -<span class="ident">Or The War Fortunes of a Castaway</span></li> - -<li>A YOUNG VOLUNTEER IN CUBA<br /> -<span class="ident">Or Fighting for the Single Star</span></li> - -<li>FIGHTING IN CUBAN WATERS<br /> -<span class="ident">Or Under Schley on the Brooklyn</span></li> - -<li>UNDER OTIS IN THE PHILIPPINES<br /> -<span class="ident">Or A Young Officer in the Tropics</span></li> - -<li>THE CAMPAIGN OF THE JUNGLE<br /> -<span class="ident">Or Under Lawton through Luzon</span></li> - -<li>UNDER MACARTHUR IN LUZON<br /> -<span class="ident">Or Last Battles in the Philippines</span></li> -</ul> - -<div class="citefont"> - -<p>“A boy once addicted to Stratemeyer stays by him.”—<cite>The Living -Church.</cite></p> - -<p>“The boys’ delight—the ‘Old Glory Series.’”—<cite>The Christian Advocate, -New York.</cite></p> - -<p>“Stratemeyer’s style suits the boys.”—<span class="smcap">John Terhune</span>, <cite>Supt. of Public -Instruction, Bergen Co., New Jersey</cite>.</p> - -<p>“Mr. Stratemeyer is in a class by himself when it comes to writing -about American heroes, their brilliant doings on land and sea.”—<cite>Times, -Boston.</cite></p> - -<p>“Mr. Stratemeyer has written a series of books which, while historically -correct and embodying the most important features of the Spanish-American -War and the rebellion of the Filipinos, are sufficiently interwoven -with fiction to render them most entertaining to young readers.”—<cite>The -Call, San Francisco.</cite></p> -</div> - -<p class="p2 noic"><i>For sale by all booksellers, or sent, postpaid, on receipt of price by</i></p> - -<p class="noic adauthor">Lothrop, Lee & Shepard Co., Boston</p> - - - - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p class="noi adseries">SOLDIERS OF FORTUNE SERIES</p> -</div> - -<p class="noi author">By EDWARD STRATEMEYER</p> - -<p class="p2 noic">VOLUME ONE</p> - -<p class="p0 noi adtitle"><cite>ON TO PEKIN</cite></p> - -<p class="p0 right adtitle"><cite>Or Old Glory in China</cite></p> - -<p class="noic">Cloth 330 pages Illustrated by A. B. Shute $1.25</p> - -<p class="cap">The hero, Gilbert Pennington, goes from the Philippines with the -Ninth Regiment to take part in the rescue of the beleaguered British -Embassy at Pekin by the international forces. Mr. Stratemeyer has -risen to the occasion by giving, in addition to one of his very best stories, -a store of information concerning China and the Chinese, conveyed in a -natural and entertaining manner.</p> - -<p class="citefont">The demands of boy readers are peculiar, and the author who can satisfy -them, not once or twice, but uniformly, must possess rare ability in -an extremely difficult field. Such an author is Edward Stratemeyer.—<cite>Sunday -News, Newark, N. J.</cite></p> - - -<p class="p2 noic">VOLUME TWO</p> - -<p class="p0 noi adtitle"><cite>UNDER THE MIKADO’S FLAG</cite></p> - -<p class="p0 right adtitle"><cite>Or Young Soldiers of Fortune</cite></p> - -<p class="noic">320 pages Cloth Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25</p> - -<p class="cap">“Under the Mikado’s Flag” relates the adventures of two young -Americans in Korea and Manchuria during the outbreak of the -great war between Russia and Japan, one of the leading characters being -Gilbert Pennington, the hero of “On to Pekin,” and the other, Ben -Russell, who with his brothers, Larry and Walter, is so well known to the -thousands of readers of the famous “Old Glory Series.” It closes with -the great Battle of Liao-Yang, and is as valuable for the information -conveyed as it is interesting as a story.</p> - -<div class="citefont"> - -<p>Mr. Stratemeyer is undoubtedly improving very greatly on the average -book for boys.—<cite>Star, St. Louis, Mo.</cite></p> - -<p>He knows how to attract and hold boy readers.—<cite>Evening Standard, -New Bedford, Mass.</cite></p> -</div> - - -<p class="p2 noic">VOLUME THREE</p> - -<p class="p0 noi adtitle"><cite>AT THE FALL OF PORT ARTHUR</cite></p> - -<p class="p0 right adtitle"><cite>Or A Young American in the Japanese Navy</cite></p> - -<p class="noic">300 pages Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25</p> - -<p class="cap">“At the Fall of Port Arthur” is another of Mr. Stratemeyer’s spirited -war stories. It relates, primarily, the adventures of Larry -Russell, so well known to countless thousands of readers of the famous -“Old Glory Series.” Larry is on board his old ship, the <i>Columbia</i>, -which is carrying a cargo for the Japanese government, and is made a -prisoner. A chase ensues, followed by a thrilling sea fight, and the young -American escapes to one of the Japanese cruisers. The young sailor -joins the Japanese navy, and under Admiral Togo assists at the bombardment -of Port Arthur. Life in the Japanese navy is described in detail, -and also life in Port Arthur during the siege and bombardment, which -has few parallels in history.</p> - -<div class="citefont"> - -<p>Mr. Stratemeyer is easily foremost among all writers of boys’ books -dealing with great events as they occur.—<cite>Observer, New York.</cite></p> - -<p>“At the Fall of Port Arthur” is very well told.—<cite>Chronicle, San -Francisco.</cite></p> - -<p>The story is timely, describing life in the Japanese navy in detail.—<cite>Times, -Buffalo, New York.</cite></p> - -<p>Mr. Stratemeyer is one of the few writers for boys whose works may be -relied upon for historic accuracy without sacrifice of interest.—<cite>Journal, -New York.</cite></p> - -<p>Presented with the skill of one of the cleverest juvenile writers of the -period.—<cite>Globe-Democrat, St. Louis.</cite></p> - -<p>A rattling good story for boys.—<cite>Republican, Denver, Col.</cite></p> -</div> - - - - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p class="noi adseries">PAN-AMERICAN SERIES</p> -</div> - -<p class="noi author">By EDWARD STRATEMEYER</p> - -<p class="p2 noic">VOLUME ONE</p> - -<p class="p0 noi adtitle"><cite>LOST ON THE ORINOCO</cite></p> - -<p class="p0 right adtitle"><cite>Or American Boys in Venezuela</cite></p> - -<p class="noic">12mo Cloth Illustrated Price $1.25</p> - -<p class="cap">This volume tells of five American youths, who, with -their tutor, sail from New York to La Guayra, -touching at Curaçao on the way. They visit Caracas, the -capital, Macuto, the fashionable seaside resort, go westward -to the Gulf of Maracaibo and lake of the same name, -and at last find themselves in the region of the mighty -Orinoco, and of course they have some exciting experiences, -one of which gives name to the book. Just the -book boys and young men should read, in view of the -general interest in matters Pan-American.</p> - -<div class="citefont"> - -<p>Its pictures of South American life and scenery are novel and instructive.—<cite>The -Literary World, Boston.</cite></p> - -<p>The scenes described are of the sort to charm the hearts of adventurous -boys.—<cite>The Outlook, N. Y.</cite></p> -</div> - - -<p class="p2 noic">VOLUME TWO</p> - -<p class="p0 noi adtitle"><cite>THE YOUNG VOLCANO EXPLORERS</cite></p> - -<p class="p0 right adtitle"><cite>Or American Boys in the West Indies</cite></p> - -<p class="noic">12mo Cloth Illustrated Price $1.25</p> - -<p class="cap">This is a complete tale in itself, but has the same -characters which have appeared so successfully in -“Lost on the Orinoco.” The boys, with their tutor, sail -from Venezuela to the West Indies, stopping at Jamaica, -Cuba, Hayti, and Porto Rico. They have numerous adventures -on the way, and then set out for St. Pierre, Martinique, -where they encounter the effects of the eruption -of Mt. Pelee, and two of the boys are left on a raft to shift -for themselves. Life in the West Indies is well portrayed, -and the tale will appeal to many an older person as well -as to the boys.</p> - - -<p class="p2 noic">VOLUME THREE</p> - -<p class="p0 noi adtitle"><cite>YOUNG EXPLORERS OF THE ISTHMUS</cite></p> - -<p class="p0 right adtitle"><cite>Or American Boys in Central America</cite></p> - -<p class="noic">306 pages Cloth Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25</p> - -<p class="cap">This is a complete tale in itself, but forms a new volume -in the surprisingly popular Pan-American series. -It relates adventures in a tour covering Nicaragua, Costa -Rica, and the Isthmus of Panama. The party travel the -various canal routes, and have a number of highly interesting -experiences. The volume contains a vast amount of -timely information, and will be read with interest by young -men as well as boys.</p> - -<p class="citefont">It is a splendid book that will not only amuse and interest the reader, -but will supply him with most valuable instruction and information upon -subjects which every young American who takes pride in his country, and -what pertains to it, ought to know.—<cite>American Boy.</cite></p> - - -<p class="p2 noic">VOLUME FOUR</p> - -<p class="p0 noi adtitle"><cite>YOUNG EXPLORERS OF THE AMAZON</cite></p> - -<p class="p0 right adtitle"><cite>Or American Boys in Brazil</cite></p> - -<p class="noic">300 pages 12mo Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25</p> - -<p class="cap">An absorbing tale of sight-seeing and adventures in -Brazil. The five boys and their tutor travel the -whole seacoast from Rio de Janeiro to Para, and then -move up the Amazon into the rubber country and beyond. -The volume is filled with pen-pictures of life as it exists -in Brazil to-day, and will be heartily enjoyed by all young -people.</p> - -<div class="citefont"> - -<p>The Pan-American Series by Edward Stratemeyer has been declared by -the boys of this country to be the most up-to-date of all reading for the -young. Filled with action and good fellowship.—<cite>Waverley Magazine.</cite></p> - -<p>Mr. Stratemeyer has acquired the art of weaving a good deal of solid -information with his web of startling adventure.—<cite>San Francisco Bulletin.</cite></p> -</div> - - - - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p class="noi adseries">COLONIAL SERIES</p> -</div> - -<p class="noi author">By EDWARD STRATEMEYER</p> - - -<p class="p2 noic">FIRST VOLUME</p> - -<p class="p0 noi adtitle"><cite>WITH WASHINGTON IN THE WEST</cite></p> - -<p class="p0 right adtitle"><cite>Or a Soldier Boy’s Battles in the Wilderness</cite></p> - -<p class="noic">12mo Cloth Illustrated by A. B. Shute 302 pages $1.25</p> - -<div class="figleft" id="i_ad03"> - <img class="illowe10" src="images/i_ad03.jpg" - alt="With Washington in the West" - title="With Washington in the West" /> -</div> - -<p class="cap">Washington’s earlier life -has received scant attention, -notwithstanding its possibilities. Mr. -Stratemeyer has woven into an excellent -story something of Washington’s -youthful experience as a surveyor, -leading on to the always thrilling -Braddock’s defeat. The hero, David -Morris, is several years younger than -Washington, with whom he becomes -intimately associated. Pictures of -pioneer life are given; scenes with -friendly Indians; and old-time games.</p> - - -<p class="p2clr noic">SECOND VOLUME</p> - -<p class="p0 noi adtitle"><cite>MARCHING ON NIAGARA</cite></p> - -<p class="p0 right adtitle"><cite>Or The Soldier Boys of the Old Frontier</cite></p> - -<p class="noic">12mo Cloth Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25</p> - -<p class="cap">This tale is complete in itself, but many of its characters -have appeared in “With Washington in the -West.”</p> - -<p>The story relates the doings of two young soldiers who -join the Colonial forces in a march on Fort Niagara, during -the time of the war with France, when the whole territory -between the Blue Ridge and the Great Lakes was in a -state of unrest. Many side lights are thrown into the -colonial homes, and much useful information is given of -the pioneers who helped to make our country what it is -to-day.</p> - -<div class="citefont"> - -<p>David Morris is a fine fellow, and about him is woven a fine “Injun” -story that is sure to delight the boys.—<cite>Universalist Leader, Boston.</cite></p> - -<p>Mr. Stratemeyer is an entertaining story-teller, and his books are clean.—<cite>Herald, -Rochester, N. Y.</cite></p> -</div> - - -<p class="p2 noic">THIRD VOLUME</p> - -<p class="p0 noi adtitle"><cite>AT THE FALL OF MONTREAL</cite></p> - -<p class="p0 right adtitle"><cite>Or a Soldier Boy’s Final Victory</cite></p> - -<p class="noic">Illustrated by A. B. Shute 12mo Cloth Price $1.25</p> - -<p class="cap">This volume relates the adventures of Dave Morris and his cousin -Henry during the two last campaigns against the French for the -possession of Canada and the territory below the great lakes. The scaling -of the heights of Quebec under General Wolfe, and the memorable -battle on the Plains of Abraham, are given in detail. There are many -stirring scenes of battle, but the tale is not all of war. Pictures of the -rough-and-ready camp life of that day are given, and there are also -adventures while fishing and hunting, and with the Indians.</p> - -<p class="citefont">Since the passing of Henty and Alger, Mr. Stratemeyer controls the -field in this particular branch of literature. The chief charm of his stories -lies in the fact that an enormous quantity of valuable information, collected -from the most reliable sources, is deftly woven into the narrative -without taking away from the interest.—<cite>Philadelphia Inquirer.</cite></p> - - -<p class="p2 noic">FOURTH VOLUME</p> - -<p class="p0 noi adtitle"><cite>ON THE TRAIL OF PONTIAC</cite></p> - -<p class="p0 right adtitle"><cite>Or Pioneer Boys of the Ohio</cite></p> - -<p class="noic">12mo Cloth Illustrated by A. B. Shute Price $1.25</p> - -<p class="cap">This volume tells of times in our country immediately after the war -with France for the possession of Canada. The tale is complete in -itself, but in it are introduced a number of characters which have already -figured in this series, including that brave young soldier, Dave Morris, -his sturdy cousin, Henry, and their common friend, Sam Barringford. -Pontiac, the great chief of the Ottawas, is also a leading figure and much -is told of his work in organizing his great conspiracy against the whites. -A fight with the Indians and the French in a snowstorm is especially -realistic, and the entire book carries with it the atmosphere of colonial -times.</p> - -<p class="citefont">Boys are attracted to stories by Edward Stratemeyer, and they will -enjoy “On the Trail of Pontiac.”—<cite>Plain Dealer, Cleveland, O.</cite></p> - - - - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p class="noi adseries">American Boys’ Biographical Series</p> -</div> - -<p class="noi author">By EDWARD STRATEMEYER</p> - - -<p class="p2 noic">VOLUME ONE</p> - -<p class="p0 noi adtitle"><cite>AMERICAN BOYS’</cite></p> - -<p class="p0 right adtitle"><cite>LIFE OF WILLIAM McKINLEY</cite></p> - -<p class="noic">300 pages Illustrated by A. B. Shute and from Photographs $1.25</p> - -<p class="cap">Here is told the whole story of McKinley’s boyhood days, his life -at school and at college, his work as a school teacher, his glorious -career in the army, his struggles to obtain a footing as a lawyer, -his efforts as a Congressman and a Governor, and lastly his prosperous -career as our President, all told in a style particularly adapted to boys and -young men. The book is full of interesting anecdotes, all taken from -life, showing fully the sincere, honest, painstaking efforts of a life cut all -too short. The volume will prove an inspiration to all boys and young -men, and should be in every library.</p> - -<p class="citefont">For nearly a year Mr. Stratemeyer has been gathering material and -giving careful study to the life of the young William, his childhood, his -boyhood, and all his inspiring and romantic history. The story was nearing -its end when the awful finale came and tragedy ended the drama of -President McKinley’s life.—<cite>New York Journal.</cite></p> - - -<p class="p2 noic">VOLUME TWO</p> - -<p class="p0 noi adtitle"><cite>AMERICAN BOYS’ LIFE OF</cite></p> - -<p class="p0 right adtitle"><cite>THEODORE ROOSEVELT</cite></p> - -<p class="noic">300 pages 12mo Illustrated from Photographs $1.25</p> - -<div class="figleft" id="i_ad04"> - <img class="illowe10" src="images/i_ad04.jpg" - alt="American Boys' Life of Theodore Roosevelt" - title="American Boys' Life of Theodore Roosevelt" /> -</div> - -<p class="cap">This excellent work for young -people covers the whole life of -our strenuous executive, as schoolboy, -college student, traveler, author, -hunter and ranchman, as assemblyman, -as civil service commissioner, -as Assistant Secretary of the Navy, -as a daring rough rider, as Governor -of New York, and lastly as President. -Full of stories taken from real life -and told in a manner to interest both -young and old.</p> - -<p class="citefont">We unreservedly recommend Mr. Stratemeyer’s -books for boys. They are wholesome, accurate as to historical -details, and always interesting.—<cite>Boston Times.</cite></p> - - - - -<hr class="chap x-ebookmaker-drop" /> - -<div class="chapter"> -<p class="noi adseries">GOOD BOOKS FOR BOYS</p> -</div> - -<p class="noi author">By EDWARD STRATEMEYER</p> - - -<div class="p2"> -<p class="p0 noi adtitle"><cite>LARRY THE WANDERER</cite></p> - -<p class="p0 right adtitle"><cite>Or The Rise of a Nobody</cite></p> -</div> - -<p class="noic">Cloth Illustrated Price $1.00</p> - -<p class="cap">This is a plain tale of everyday life, written especially for boys and -girls who do not care particularly for stories with a historical or -geographical background. Larry is a youth who has been knocked -around from pillar to post for a number of years. The unravelling of the -curious mystery which surrounds the lad’s identity makes good reading.</p> - - -<div class="p2"> -<p class="p0 noi adtitle"><cite>JOE, THE SURVEYOR</cite></p> - -<p class="p0 right adtitle"><cite>Or The Value of a Lost Claim</cite></p> -</div> - -<p class="noic">Illustrated by A. B. Shute 12mo Cloth Price $1.00</p> - -<p class="cap">This story relates the trials and triumphs of a sturdy country youth, -who is compelled, by the force of circumstances, to go forth into -the world and earn, not alone his own living, but also support for his -twin sister and his invalid father.</p> - - -<div class="p2"> -<p class="p0 noi adtitle"><cite>TWO YOUNG LUMBERMEN</cite></p> - -<p class="p0 right adtitle"><cite>Or From Maine to Oregon for Fortune</cite></p> -</div> - -<p class="noic">320 pages Cloth Illustrated Price $1.25</p> - -<p class="cap">A splendid story, the scene shifting from Maine to Michigan and -the Great Lakes, and then to the Columbia and the Great Northwest. -The heroes are two sturdy youths who have been brought up -among the lumbermen of their native State, and who strike out in an -honest endeavor to better their condition. An ideal volume for every -wide-awake American who wishes to know what our great lumber industry -is to-day.</p> - -<p class="citefont">Mr. Stratemeyer’s books are not only entertaining but instructive.—<cite>Daily -Press, Portland, Me.</cite></p> - - -<div class="p2"> -<p class="p0 noi adtitle"><cite>BETWEEN BOER AND BRITON</cite></p> - -<p class="p0 right adtitle"><cite>Or Two Boys’ Adventures in South Africa</cite></p> -</div> - -<p class="noic">Illustrated by A. Burnham Shute 354 pages Price $1.25</p> - -<p class="cap">Relates the experiences of two boys, cousins to each other, one -American and the other English, whose fathers are engaged in the -Transvaal, one in farming and the other in mining operations. While the -two boys are off on a hunting trip after big game the war between the -Boers and Britons suddenly breaks out, and while endeavoring to rejoin -their parents the boys find themselves placed between hostile armies.</p> - -<p class="citefont">A stirring story of the South African War.—<cite>The Journal, Indianapolis, Ind.</cite></p> - - - - -<hr class="chap" /> -<div class="tnote"> -<p class="noi tntitle">Transcriber’s Notes:</p> - -<p class="smfont">A List of Illustrations has been provided for the convenience of - the reader.</p> - -<p class="smfont">Punctuation and spelling inaccuracies were silently corrected.</p> - -<p class="smfont">Archaic and variable spelling has been preserved.</p> - -<p class="smfont">Variations in hyphenation and compound words have been preserved.</p> -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin-top:4em'>*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK OLIVER BRIGHT'S SEARCH ***</div> -<div style='text-align:left'> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Updated editions will replace the previous one—the old editions will -be renamed. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Creating the works from print editions not protected by U.S. copyright -law means that no one owns a United States copyright in these works, -so the Foundation (and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United -States without permission and without paying copyright -royalties. Special rules, set forth in the General Terms of Use part -of this license, apply to copying and distributing Project -Gutenberg™ electronic works to protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG™ -concept and trademark. Project Gutenberg is a registered trademark, -and may not be used if you charge for an eBook, except by following -the terms of the trademark license, including paying royalties for use -of the Project Gutenberg trademark. If you do not charge anything for -copies of this eBook, complying with the trademark license is very -easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose such as creation -of derivative works, reports, performances and research. Project -Gutenberg eBooks may be modified and printed and given away--you may -do practically ANYTHING in the United States with eBooks not protected -by U.S. copyright law. Redistribution is subject to the trademark -license, especially commercial redistribution. -</div> - -<div style='margin:0.83em 0; font-size:1.1em; text-align:center'>START: FULL LICENSE<br /> -<span style='font-size:smaller'>THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE<br /> -PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK</span> -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -To protect the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting the free -distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work -(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase “Project -Gutenberg”), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full -Project Gutenberg™ License available with this file or online at -www.gutenberg.org/license. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg™ -electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to -and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property -(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all -the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or -destroy all copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in your -possession. If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a -Project Gutenberg™ electronic work and you do not agree to be bound -by the terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person -or entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.B. “Project Gutenberg” is a registered trademark. It may only be -used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who -agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few -things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See -paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project -Gutenberg™ electronic works if you follow the terms of this -agreement and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works. See paragraph 1.E below. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation (“the -Foundation” or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection -of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works. Nearly all the individual -works in the collection are in the public domain in the United -States. If an individual work is unprotected by copyright law in the -United States and you are located in the United States, we do not -claim a right to prevent you from copying, distributing, performing, -displaying or creating derivative works based on the work as long as -all references to Project Gutenberg are removed. Of course, we hope -that you will support the Project Gutenberg™ mission of promoting -free access to electronic works by freely sharing Project Gutenberg™ -works in compliance with the terms of this agreement for keeping the -Project Gutenberg™ name associated with the work. You can easily -comply with the terms of this agreement by keeping this work in the -same format with its attached full Project Gutenberg™ License when -you share it without charge with others. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern -what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are -in a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, -check the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this -agreement before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, -distributing or creating derivative works based on this work or any -other Project Gutenberg™ work. The Foundation makes no -representations concerning the copyright status of any work in any -country other than the United States. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other -immediate access to, the full Project Gutenberg™ License must appear -prominently whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg™ work (any work -on which the phrase “Project Gutenberg” appears, or with which the -phrase “Project Gutenberg” is associated) is accessed, displayed, -performed, viewed, copied or distributed: -</div> - -<blockquote> - <div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> - This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere in the United States and most - other parts of the world at no cost and with almost no restrictions - whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or re-use it under the terms - of the Project Gutenberg License included with this eBook or online - at <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. If you - are not located in the United States, you will have to check the laws - of the country where you are located before using this eBook. - </div> -</blockquote> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is -derived from texts not protected by U.S. copyright law (does not -contain a notice indicating that it is posted with permission of the -copyright holder), the work can be copied and distributed to anyone in -the United States without paying any fees or charges. If you are -redistributing or providing access to a work with the phrase “Project -Gutenberg” associated with or appearing on the work, you must comply -either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 or -obtain permission for the use of the work and the Project Gutenberg™ -trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg™ electronic work is posted -with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution -must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any -additional terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms -will be linked to the Project Gutenberg™ License for all works -posted with the permission of the copyright holder found at the -beginning of this work. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg™ -License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this -work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg™. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this -electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without -prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with -active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project -Gutenberg™ License. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, -compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including -any word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access -to or distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg™ work in a format -other than “Plain Vanilla ASCII” or other format used in the official -version posted on the official Project Gutenberg™ website -(www.gutenberg.org), you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense -to the user, provide a copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means -of obtaining a copy upon request, of the work in its original “Plain -Vanilla ASCII” or other form. Any alternate format must include the -full Project Gutenberg™ License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, -performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg™ works -unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing -access to or distributing Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -provided that: -</div> - -<div style='margin-left:0.7em;'> - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from - the use of Project Gutenberg™ works calculated using the method - you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is owed - to the owner of the Project Gutenberg™ trademark, but he has - agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments must be paid - within 60 days following each date on which you prepare (or are - legally required to prepare) your periodic tax returns. Royalty - payments should be clearly marked as such and sent to the Project - Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the address specified in - Section 4, “Information about donations to the Project Gutenberg - Literary Archive Foundation.” - </div> - - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies - you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he - does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg™ - License. You must require such a user to return or destroy all - copies of the works possessed in a physical medium and discontinue - all use of and all access to other copies of Project Gutenberg™ - works. - </div> - - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of - any money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the - electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days of - receipt of the work. - </div> - - <div style='text-indent:-0.7em'> - • You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free - distribution of Project Gutenberg™ works. - </div> -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project -Gutenberg™ electronic work or group of works on different terms than -are set forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing -from the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the manager of -the Project Gutenberg™ trademark. Contact the Foundation as set -forth in Section 3 below. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable -effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread -works not protected by U.S. copyright law in creating the Project -Gutenberg™ collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may -contain “Defects,” such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate -or corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other -intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or -other medium, a computer virus, or computer codes that damage or -cannot be read by your equipment. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the “Right -of Replacement or Refund” described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project -Gutenberg™ trademark, and any other party distributing a Project -Gutenberg™ electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all -liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal -fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT -LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE -PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE -TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE -LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR -INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH -DAMAGE. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a -defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can -receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a -written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you -received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium -with your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you -with the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in -lieu of a refund. If you received the work electronically, the person -or entity providing it to you may choose to give you a second -opportunity to receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If -the second copy is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing -without further opportunities to fix the problem. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth -in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you ‘AS-IS’, WITH NO -OTHER WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT -LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied -warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of -damages. If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement -violates the law of the state applicable to this agreement, the -agreement shall be interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or -limitation permitted by the applicable state law. The invalidity or -unenforceability of any provision of this agreement shall not void the -remaining provisions. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the -trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone -providing copies of Project Gutenberg™ electronic works in -accordance with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the -production, promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg™ -electronic works, harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, -including legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of -the following which you do or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this -or any Project Gutenberg™ work, (b) alteration, modification, or -additions or deletions to any Project Gutenberg™ work, and (c) any -Defect you cause. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg™ -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Project Gutenberg™ is synonymous with the free distribution of -electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of -computers including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It -exists because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations -from people in all walks of life. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the -assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg™’s -goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg™ collection will -remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project -Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure -and permanent future for Project Gutenberg™ and future -generations. To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation and how your efforts and donations can help, see -Sections 3 and 4 and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non-profit -501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the -state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal -Revenue Service. The Foundation’s EIN or federal tax identification -number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent permitted by -U.S. federal laws and your state’s laws. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -The Foundation’s business office is located at 809 North 1500 West, -Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email contact links and up -to date contact information can be found at the Foundation’s website -and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Project Gutenberg™ depends upon and cannot survive without widespread -public support and donations to carry out its mission of -increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be -freely distributed in machine-readable form accessible by the widest -array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations -($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt -status with the IRS. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating -charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United -States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a -considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up -with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations -where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To SEND -DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any particular state -visit <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org/donate/">www.gutenberg.org/donate</a>. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we -have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition -against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who -approach us with offers to donate. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make -any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from -outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Please check the Project Gutenberg web pages for current donation -methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other -ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. To -donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate -</div> - -<div style='display:block; font-size:1.1em; margin:1em 0; font-weight:bold'> -Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg™ electronic works -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project -Gutenberg™ concept of a library of electronic works that could be -freely shared with anyone. For forty years, he produced and -distributed Project Gutenberg™ eBooks with only a loose network of -volunteer support. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Project Gutenberg™ eBooks are often created from several printed -editions, all of which are confirmed as not protected by copyright in -the U.S. unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not -necessarily keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper -edition. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -Most people start at our website which has the main PG search -facility: <a href="https://www.gutenberg.org">www.gutenberg.org</a>. -</div> - -<div style='display:block; margin:1em 0'> -This website includes information about Project Gutenberg™, -including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary -Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to -subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. -</div> - -</div> - -</body> -</html> diff --git a/old/66171-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/66171-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 00e6982..0000000 --- a/old/66171-h/images/cover.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/66171-h/images/i_ad01.jpg b/old/66171-h/images/i_ad01.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 904f0f3..0000000 --- a/old/66171-h/images/i_ad01.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/66171-h/images/i_ad02.jpg b/old/66171-h/images/i_ad02.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 55555dc..0000000 --- a/old/66171-h/images/i_ad02.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/66171-h/images/i_ad03.jpg b/old/66171-h/images/i_ad03.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 5e6ec82..0000000 --- a/old/66171-h/images/i_ad03.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/66171-h/images/i_ad04.jpg b/old/66171-h/images/i_ad04.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 6dee8ac..0000000 --- a/old/66171-h/images/i_ad04.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/66171-h/images/i_fp010.jpg b/old/66171-h/images/i_fp010.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 76c3519..0000000 --- a/old/66171-h/images/i_fp010.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/66171-h/images/i_fp160.jpg b/old/66171-h/images/i_fp160.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index c9dbf7c..0000000 --- a/old/66171-h/images/i_fp160.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/66171-h/images/i_fp180.jpg b/old/66171-h/images/i_fp180.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4004470..0000000 --- a/old/66171-h/images/i_fp180.jpg +++ /dev/null diff --git a/old/66171-h/images/i_frontis.jpg b/old/66171-h/images/i_frontis.jpg Binary files differdeleted file mode 100644 index 4ea0a2a..0000000 --- a/old/66171-h/images/i_frontis.jpg +++ /dev/null |
